Anglo American Fire Protection Manual-2010 Issue 0

Anglo American Fire Protection Manual †
Standards for Surface and Underground Mines, Plants and

Other Group Operations
FEBRUARY 2010
†
These standards are based on the original Anglo Coal South Africa (ACSA) Fire Protection
Standards (2007) and De Beers Consolidated Mines (DBCM) Limited Fire Protection Guidelines
(2006) with modifications and inputs from other Anglo operations globally to the original document,
particularly from commodities viz., platinum, base, diamond, ferrous, KIO. Time to time additional
procedures or changes will be made to this document and up-to-date version of this document be
consulted with the custodian bbelle@angloamerican.co.za.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction to the Standards 1
Classification of Fires 4
Extinguishing Media 5
GENERAL STANDARDS APPLICABLE TO ALL OPERATIONS
Standard Title
G1 Electrical cables 7
G2 Fire sprinkler systems - manual 9
G3 Fire sprinkler systems - automatic 11
G4 Fire sprinkler systems - automatic (in cable trenches) 13
G5 High velocity water deluge systems 15
G6 Fixed foam fire suppression systems 18
G7 Fixed gaseous fire suppression systems - room flooding 21
G8 Fixed gaseous fire suppression systems - in cabinet 25
G9 Passive versus aspirated detection systems 28
G10 Fire protection requirements for surface vehicles 30
G11 Oxy-acetylene cutting and welding 39
G12 Compressed gas cylinder stores 41
G13 Single storey office buildings 43
G14 Multi-storey office buildings 45
G15 Archives 48
G16 Vehicle workshops on surface 50
G17 Other workshops on surface 52
G18 Critical substations and MCCs on surface 54
G19 Other substations and MCCs on surface 58
G20 Mini substations on surface 62
G21 Transformer installations on surface 63
G22 Main MV switch and transformer yards on surface 65
G23 Emergency and standby generator installations on surface 66
G24 Control rooms on surface 68
G25 IT rooms 70
G26 Plant structures 73
G27 Battery charging bays on surface 76
G28 Hand-held fire extinguishers 77
G29 65 mm Fire hydrants and related equipment 79
G30 Fire fighting water supply and fire pumps 82
G31 25 mm fire hosereels 84
G32 Hydraulic lubrication and power packs 86
G33 Bunding 87
G34 Fire / separating walls 89
G35 Perfect party walls 91
G36 Fire stopping and intumescent coating of cables 92
G37 Bulk flammable liquid storage facilities on surface 94
G38 Storage facilities on surface for flammable liquids or chemicals in 96
containers
G39 Storage of tyres on surface 98
Anglo American Fire Protection Manual-2010 Issue 0

G40 Use of plastic pipes on surface 100
G41 Overland conveyors 101
G42 Elevated conveyors on surface 102
G43 Surface tunnel, bunker and silo conveyors 105
G44 Surface plant conveyors 107
G45 Mine stores and warehouses 108
G46 Storage yards 111
G47 Definition of criticality 112
G48 Fire retardancy and incombustibility 113
G49 Foam trolleys 114
G50 Flotation plants and reagent storage 115
G51 Fire engines 111
G52 Initial attack fire appliances 118
G53 Pumper fire appliances 121
G54 Mobile water-supply fire appliances 124
G55 Fire training and equipment 128
G56 Plant and major equipment shutdown precautions 130
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS APPLICABLE ONLY TO UNDERGROUND MINE
Standard Title
U1 Headgear hoist rooms 131
U2 Stand-alone surface hoist rooms 134
U3 Vertical shafts, stations and surface banks 137
U4 Inclines 139
U5 Underground conveyors 141
U6 Stonedusting 143
U7 Flameproof zones 148
U8 Fixed underground substations 149
U9 Sectional electrical equipment 151
U10 Mobile underground electrical installations 152
U11 Feeder / breakers 153
U12 Use of plastic pipes underground 154
U13 Proto teams 155
U14 Battery charging bays located underground 157
U15 Fixed refuge bays, escape ways & self-rescuers 158
U16 Mobile containerised refuge bays 160
U17 Worked out areas 162
U18 Underground environmental monitoring systems 163
U19 Underground vehicle fire detection and fixed / portable suppression 167
requirements
U20 Underground diesel & oil stores, including oil separation equipment 169
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS APPLICABLE (May Need Revision)

Mine Fires in Australian Underground Coal Mines
B.01 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines - Fire Warning Systems
C.01 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines – Precautions Against Fire

C.02 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines - Plastic Pipes Used Underground
C.05 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines -Firebreaks and Fire Retardation
C.06 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines –General Conduct in Fiery Mines
C.07 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines –Flammable Gas Testing Proficiency Certificates
C.07 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines –Testing for Presence of Flammable Gas
H.08 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines - Refuge Chamber Inspections
I.02 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines - Preferred Diesel Engines and Fuels
A07 Anglo Platinum VOHE Guidelines - Risk Assessment Review of Exposure to Irrespirable
Atmosphere in Conventional Mines
STANDARDS RELATING TO SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Standard Title
IM1 Inspection, maintenance and testing of 65 mm fire hydrant standpipe 171
and hose systems
IM2 25 mm fire hosereels 182
IM3 Hand held portable fire extinguishers 185
IM4 Detection and fire alarms 198
IM5 Gaseous extinguishing systems - CO2 (carbon dioxide) systems 223
IM6 High pressure mist (HP) 233
IM7 Inspection and maintenance of sprinkler systems and other water 237
based system
IM8 Private fire service mains 244
IM9 Fire pumps 248
IM10 Water storage tanks 257
IM11 Water spray fixed systems 261
IM12 Foam water fixed systems 267
IM13 Valves, valve components and trim 276
IM14 Emergency escapes 289
IM15 Fire separation fire walls 299
IM16 Fire and emergency signs (FES) 304
IM17 Flammable and combustible liquids bulk storage/ usage 308
SELF EVALUATION CHECKLISTS
SEC1 65 mm hydrants and related equipment 313

SEC2 Hand held fire extinguishers 315
SEC3 25 mm fire hosereels 316
SEC4 Substations 317
SEC5 Plant structures 319
SEC6 Surface vehicles 321
SEC7 Hydraulic lubrication and power packs 324
SEC8 Underground conveyors 325
SEC9 Underground substations 326
SEC10 Overland conveyors 328
SEC11 Elevated and plant conveyors 329
SEC12 Battery charging bays located underground 330

APPENDIX
Appendix A1 Suggested EMV Suppression System Component Siting Track Dozer D10
DCP
AFFF
Electrical
Appendix B1 Suggested EMV Suppression System Component Siting Grader CAT 14/16
DCP
AFFF
Electrical
Appendix C1 Suggested EMV Suppression System Component Siting Diesel/Electric
Truck DCP
Truck AFFF
Truck Electrical

ABBREVIATIONS
AFFF Aqueous Film Forming Foam

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASIB Automated Sprinkler Inspection Bureau
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials Standards
BS British Standard
CM Continuous Miner
COP Code of Practice
CR Control Room
CSIR Council for Scientific an Industrial Research
DCP Dry Chemical Powder
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung E.V.
ESCF Embankment Supported Coated Fabric
FPA Fire Protection Association (RSA)
FPASA Fire Protection Association of Southern Africa
HDPE High Density Poly-Ethylene
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
LDV Light Duty Vehicles
MCC Motor control Centre
NFPA National Fire Protection Association (USA)
PC Personal Computer
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PVC Poly-Vinyl Chloride
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SANAS South African National Accreditation System
SANS South African National Standards
SCBA Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
uPVC Unplasticised Poly-Vinyl Chloride
VOHE Ventilation and Occupational Hygiene Engineering

Page 1 of 344
INTRODUCTION TO THE STANDARDS
This Anglo American Fire Protection Manual is based on the original Anglo Coal South Africa
(ACSA) Fire Protection Standards (2007) and De Beers Consolidated Mines (DBCM) Limited
Fire Protection Guidelines (2006) with modifications and inputs from other Anglo operations
globally to the original document, particularly from commodities viz., platinum, base,
diamond, ferrous. Time to time additional procedures or changes will be made to this
document and up-to-date version of this document be consulted.
The original coal and diamond fire standard was modified to meet the global nature of Anglo
operations and wide commodities to achieve the goal of true standardisation at all
operations. It was noted that it is often not possible for personnel from one mine to have
ready access to another mine within the Group to enable the free cross pollination of ideas
that would see a solution implemented reliably and confidently at one operation, which has
already proven its worth at another.
Conversely, because of the diversity of the operations, a solution from one mine might not
necessarily be the best option at another, and so such cross pollination of ideas might be
futile in any case. Consultation was made through respective Champions from the Anglo
operations to overcome the challenges.
Some mines may want to implement only the minimum necessary. But at an operation with a
low appetite for risk, and the necessary funds available for more comprehensive protection,
added measures may be specified at the discretion of site or project managers.
With these extremes in mind, these standards have been drawn up to promote uniformity of
fire standards throughout the Anglo operations, without removing all discretion from site
management. To that end they are designed to be sufficiently generic to allow for different
local needs and constraints to be accommodated.
These standards describe the minimum standard that is required in the prevention and
minimisation of fire and related perils. It must be stressed that these are the minimum
standards that are acceptable. Individual circumstances will often require these standards to
be exceeded.
During project planning and execution, or even retrospectively if conditions change, the
correct level of protection must be professionally determined, specified and implemented for
each new project or application.
This may exceed the requirements stated in these standards, but will very seldom require
less than what is stipulated herein. So strict adherence to these standards alone means that
a sound basic effort has been made, but might not be a guarantee that ‘everything
necessary’ has been done!
On the subject of Project Planning, it is most important to note that these are generic
Standards. They are meant to provide a basic list of the requirements necessary for various
typical installations at Group operations. But being generic, they can never fully address the
unique needs of each application.
For this reason, these standards are no substitute for a proper assessment of risk conducted
during the planning phase of each new project, which will specify tailor made solutions
exactly appropriate for each situation. As stated above however, such site specific

Page 2 of 344
requirements must always either equal or exceed, but may never be less than what is
specified in these generic standards.
Failure to conduct an effective risk assessment during project planning can result in:
Over-specifying which is wasteful and unnecessary
Under-specifying for the unique risk profile of a particular application, which…
- can necessitate expensive retrofits later,
- may actually constitute a breach the relevant legislation (e.g. SANS 10400:
The National Building Regulations or country specific regulations),
- or may even deliver a product which is ‘uninsurable’, or which will detract from
the generally good risk profile of the operation or even the Group.
Thus the measures implemented will always have as their objective, the effective
management of fire risk using cost effective measures best suited to the operational
requirements of each individual site. In summary, the objectives are:
To ensure that pre-determined minimum standards are met.
To provide a list of basic requirements for new projects.
To provide a benchmark for operations when preparing for external inspections and
risk assessments.
To ensure that all operations become and remain a ‘fit subject of insurance’.
To ensure that all operations meet at least the minimum legal requirements.
That the Group as a whole is on par with world standards in terms of fire protection.
To assist in the correct selection of new fire protection equipment at new or
refurbished installations.
To assist in disseminating best practices throughout the Group.
To aid cost saving by ensuring that ‘fit-for-purpose’ solutions, rather than state of the
art measures, are specified.
To aid cost saving by curtailing unnecessary repeat research and decision-making.
Site personnel at each operation should not need to “re-invent the wheel” each time
the project is repeated at a new site.
To provide a definitive reference manual of fire protection Standards for use
throughout the Group.
This manual is a dynamic document which will require ongoing input from site personnel who
have knowledge of new technology or applications. Persons who have been able to improve
on existing methods and measures are invited to submit their input for possible inclusion in
this manual. However, no new standards will be included that do not exceed or better the
existing minimum standard prescribed.
The manual is divided into five sections:

Fire Protection Standards – General (“G Standards”). These are standards
common to all operations, including underground and surface mines, plants and
offices.
Fire Protection Standards for Underground Mines only (“U Standards”). These
standards are pertinent only to mines which have underground workings. They must
be read in conjunction with, and in addition to, the “G Standards”.

Page 3 of 344
Fire Protection Standards pertaining to Installation, Service and Maintenance of

fire protection measures required to be provided at AngloCoal operations in
accordance with the “G Standards” and “U Standards” described above. These shall
be known as the “IM Standards”. These standards should be read in addition to the
“G Standards” and / or the “U Standards”. They are not intended for general
distribution, but should be limited to persons who have responsibility for the
installation of new systems and equipment, or the maintenance and servicing of
existing systems and equipment.
Self Evaluation Checklists – Also known as SECs, these checklists are summaries
of selected G and U standards. They are intended for the shop floor and will assist
self evaluation in preparation for assessments / audits.
Appendices containing suggested earth moving vehicle (EMV) suppression system

component siting drawings. These are intended to assist in the specification and
design of onboard fire suppression systems.
This document was jointly compiled and contributions made by the following people:
B. Belle (Custodian) Anglo American

L Menendez Anglo American Chile
CAS Thomson Anglo Coal South Africa
Brian O'Connor Anglo Platinum
D Mynn Anglo Coal Australia
T Harvey Anglo Coal Australia
B Robertson Anglo Coal Australia
M Biffi Anglo Platinum
D Stanton Anglo Platinum
H Barnard KIO
R Vermulan Anglo Base
Charl Klopper Anglo Base (South Africa)
N Roman Anglo American
M Dohm Anglo American
S McComb Anglo Base (Lisheen)
N Kornelius Anglo Business Assurance Services(ABAS)
C. De Clark Mines Rescue (South Africa)
M Hermanus Sustainable Development
J Leandri Global Risk Consultants (GRC)
It is noted that this document is likely to require fairly frequent revision to cope with improved
understanding of the mine fire risks at workplace and associated engineering controls. We
hope however that it will be useful contribution at the moment and a good basis for future
development.
The above team members would be liaising through the Custodian of the fire standards is
responsible for the ongoing maintenance and revision of the fire standards with a view to
ensuring that they remain current and appropriate by best practice world-wide standards.

Page 4 of 344
CLASSIFICATION OF FIRES
Fires are classified according to five general categories. Fires can be combinations of the
five general classifications. The classifications below are according to European and
American standards. (Classification in Australia differs in that Class C is for flammable gases
and Class E is for energised electrical equipment.)
Class A
Class A fires involve ordinary solid combustible materials, e.g. coal, paper, plastics, rubber,
wood and textiles.
Class B
Class B fires involve flammable or combustible liquids (which vaporise to burn) such as
alcohol, benzene, oil, paraffin, petrol, kerosene and common organic solvents. These liquids
can mostly float on water and will thus continue to burn while in contact with air. Water would
not be a suitable extinguishing medium.
Class C
Class C fires can be Class A, B, D or E type fires, occurring in the presence of energized
electrical equipment such as electrical cables, generators, transformers, switchboards and
switchgear, substations, MCCs, etc.
Water is not a suitable extinguishing medium in the initial stages, when the equipment is still
live, due to the risk of electrical shock. Area hydrants are however still required to allow for
foam generation, and to fight the fire later in its developed stages, when the electrical supply
has tripped / been isolated, and the fire has developed to full involvement of the building, to
become a structural rather than an electrical fire.
Specialized water mist extinguishers, or fixed micromist systems, may also be appropriate,
but for reasons of standardisation, should be avoided unless there is a compelling reason to
deviate.
Class D
Class D fires involve combustible metals and include easily oxidised metals. Combustion
temperatures and energy are normally high compared to Class A fires. Chemical reactions
with air, water and other chemicals are generally violent.
Class D1 fires involve non-alkali metals, e.g. aluminium, magnesium.
Class D2 fires involve alkali metals, e.g. sodium, potassium and lithium.
Class E
Class E fires involve flammable gases, e.g. methane, propane, natural gases.
Class F/K
This classification was added for kitchen fires in particular. Cooking oils and fat are
included in this category.

Page 5 of 344
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA
Medium Limitations
Water
Water has better cooling properties than any Water is a conductor of electricity and can
other agent and is therefore best used on be very dangerous if used on Class C fires,
Class A fires. Class A fires can re-ignite if not i.e. fires in the vicinity of live electrical
adequately cooled. Water will also penetrate current. It will also cause Class B fires to
readily to reach deep-seated fires. flare up and spread, and if used on Class D
fires, may cause violent explosions.
Dry powder
Dry powder is generally the best Dry powder has no cooling properties and
extinguishing medium for use on Class B will therefore not prevent re-ignition. For this
fires. Extinguishers containing dry powders reason it is not as effective as foam on
are capable of dealing with burning contained flammable liquid fires which have
flammable liquids, spread over large areas, been burning for a long time. Generally,
more effectively than other extinguishers of powders are messy and some form sticky
comparable size. They are effective too on deposits on surfaces which must be
fires involving free-flowing liquids, e.g. scraped and washed away after the fire.
spillages over vertical surfaces. Since dry These deposits can have a detrimental
powder is a non-conductor of electricity, it is effect on delicate machinery and equipment.
safe to use on Class C fires. (Re-ignition of Class A fires is preventable
by using multi-purpose powder).
Foams
Foam extinguishes Class B fires by forming a Most foams have to form a blanket to
blanket of bubbles on the surface of the extinguish the fire and since it is not
liquid and therefore has a smothering effect possible to cover flowing flammable liquids,
on the fires. Foam extinguishers are best foams are not effective. Foam is water-
suited to dealing with small, contained based and therefore a conductor of
flammable liquid fires or for fires which have electricity. It is dangerous to use on live
been burning for some time, causing the electrical equipment. Foams will also tend to
container to become very hot and increasing break down when coming into contact with
the chances of re-ignition. liquids such as alcohols, and this will
prevent the production of an effective
blanket.
Carbon dioxide
Carbon dioxide extinguishers are suitable for The cooling properties of CO2 gas are
dealing with small Class B fires, whether limited and it therefore provides no
spillages or contained. CO2 gas is a non- protection against re-ignition. Since CO2 is a
conductor of electricity and is therefore one gas, draughty or windy conditions will affect
of the safest mediums to use on live its performance. The effective range of a
electrical equipment. The gas will not CO2 extinguisher is also limited. Direct
contaminate foodstuffs or cause a mess, and impingement of CO2 onto delicate electrical
because it is emitted as a gas, will not cause or electronic equipment could cause
unnecessary damage through impact as in additional damage through cold-shock.
the case of solid material, e.g. dry powder. Under dry conditions, the discharge of CO2
extinguishers generates static electricity
which can be uncomfortable to the user.
Other gases
Apart from carbon dioxide, discussed above, The cooling properties of all suppressant

Page 6 of 344
the only other gases approved for use in gases are limited and therefore provide no
fixed fire suppression systems at group protection against re-ignition. Gases are
operations are Argonite and NAF S125. CO2 therefore not the best choice of suppression
remains the preferred choice of gas except medium for inherently hot fires, such as
on draglines, where the low-lying, enclosed those involving flammable liquids, rubber or
areas justify the additional cost incurred by plastic.
these gases which are not harmful to
persons for short periods of exposure. Refer Gases are also only suitable in areas which
in particular to Standards G10 (Fire are routinely tightly sealed, and so draughty
Protection Requirements for Surface or windy conditions are a contra-indicator
Vehicles) and G7 (Fixed Gaseous Fire for the use of any gas as a suppression
Suppression Systems - Room Flooding), medium.
regarding the correct choice of suppressant
gas. These three gases are all more expensive
to install and maintain than CO2. They offer
no material advantage over CO2, except
that persons can survive exposure of short
duration. Nonetheless, CO2 remains
acceptable in almost all applications. The
only application in AngloCoal which
mandates the use of one of these three
gases, is on draglines.

Page 7 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS - GENERAL
STD G1 - ELECTRICAL CABLES
1. From a fire protection perspective, it is desirable for cables to be of the ‘red stripe’
fire-retardant type, or of the white stripe ‘Lotox’ halogen-free type in confined areas
where there is a gassing risk to persons. However, this cannot be regarded as an
absolute requirement, and must always be subject to electrical engineering and
budgetary considerations.
It must be noted that both types are fire retardant only to a degree, and their use
may therefore reduce fire risk. However, fire risk will not be eliminated
altogether. For this reason, other requirements like fire stopping and intumescent
coating remain necessary even with the use of red or white stripe cables. Refer
to Standard G36.
Red stripe cabling has an outer sheath of flame-retardant PVC, but its core
insulation and bedding are both of conventional PVC.
White stripe cable has core insulation, bedding and outer sheath all of halogen
free PVC. NB: the outer sheath of white stripe cables disintegrates in direct
sunlight. Cables must therefore be kept out of direct sunlight.
Thus it is clear that red stripe cabling offers some fire retardancy, but the toxicity
of fumes given off during combustion remains the same as in the case of
conventional cabling. White stripe cables are less toxic during combustion than
other cable types, but do not offer any material fire retardancy benefits, e.g.
retarding the propagation of fire.
2. There is a strong indication for white stripe cable to be used whenever there is a
gassing risk to persons if it should burn. This will apply in particular in enclosed areas
which are difficult to vacate quickly. It does not necessarily apply in general
underground areas, although these too can be confined, because persons
underground are issued with self contained self rescuers to mitigate their exposure to
gassing.
3. Any blasting cables must be suspended completely clear of any other electrical
cables.
4. All electrical cables are to be suspended not less than 300mm clear of any
combustible material. This requirement may be waived where excessively low seams
make the practice impractical. “Combustible material” in this context shall not include
unmined coal in situ (e.g. in pillars and rib-sides).
5. It is recommended that cables in underground conveyor inclines, surface conveyor

tunnels (e.g. under stockpiles), elevated conveyor structures, and similar, must be
suspended on the opposite side of the excavation to the conveyor, or at least 1 metre
from the conveyor structure. This recommendation may be waived where excessively
low seams make the practice impractical.
6. Wherever cables enter a substation, MCC, control room, transformer bay, generator
room, hydraulics room, compressor room, or similar, the aperture where the cables
breach the wall(s) of such room must be fire stopped, and the cables passing through

Page 8 of 344
the breach must be intumescent coated for a distance of at least 1 metre on either
side of such fire stopping. Painting of cables shall not be applicable where the cables
are made to pass through a ‘sand box’ at the wall. See Standard G36 for details on
intumescent coating of cables and fire stopping of cable penetration apertures.
7. It is recommended that all cable racks be secured vertically ‘on their side’, since
horizontal cable trays allow coal dust to accumulate on top of the cables which form a
platform, adding to the fire risk.
Relevant Standards and Codes of Practice
Standard G36 - Fire stopping and intumescent coating of cables

Page 9 of 344
STD G2 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS – MANUAL
Application
1. In any application where it is desirable to avoid active human participation in fighting

a fire, manual sprinkler systems may be considered. They are not suitable in
sparsely occupied areas, as they require human activation.
2. Manual sprinkler systems are required at all compressed gas cylinder stores.
3. Manual sprinkler systems may also be specified on elevated surface conveyor

structures or in conveyor tunnels under stockpiles, as an alternative to providing 65
mm hydrant points and hoses, or 25 mm fire hosereels.
Requirements
1. Manual sprinkler systems must be dry-pipe systems with an activating valve located
outside the risk area. This activating valve must be no less than 15 metres and no
more than 25 metres from the area at risk, or it may be positioned at a lesser distance
if it is located in such a way as to be adequately protected, so that persons can
operate the valve safely even after the outbreak of fire: for example, around a corner
or behind a wall.
2. There may be only one control valve at which the water supply to the system can be
turned off. If other valves exist, then they must be chained in the open position, or
their handles must be removed to ensure that they cannot be closed.
3. Erect demarcation signage at the activation valve. Suitable wording would be:
“Activation valve for the sprinkler system protecting the (name of location)”.
4. All manual systems must be fitted with ‘dry’ nozzles producing flow and spray
characteristics suitable for the application.
5. Such manually activated sprinkler systems must cover the entire area at risk. In the
case of gas cylinder stores where full and empty cylinders are separated, either
spatially (at least 5m) or structurally (steel plate or brick wall), it is acceptable to
provide sprinklers only on the ‘full’ side.
6. Such systems must be fitted with a supply pipe of minimum diameter 50mm. The
pipes supplying the individual nozzles must be at least 25mm in diameter.
7. Instead of a manual system, the sprinkler system may be further enhanced by

replacing the conventional ‘dry’ sprinkler heads with fusible glass links, which will
‘pop’ when subjected to heat. In such case, the valve contemplated in 1 above must
be removed, and the valve contemplated in 2 above must be secured in the open
position at all times, i.e. the system will become a ‘wet pipe system’. This will not be
regarded as a fully fledged ‘automatic sprinkler system’, but will offer benefits over a
pure manual system.
8. Colour-code sprinkler pipe work and above-ground supply lines red.

Page 10 of 344
9. All above-ground pipe work to be steel.
10. At the end of each sprinkler spur line, provide a flush valve. Each line must be flushed
and tested for a minimum of 3 minutes each month to prevent the build up of sludge
in the system, which could clog the heads. Results are to be logged.
Standard G30 - Fire fighting water supply and fire pumps

Page 11 of 344
STD G3 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS - AUTOMATIC
Application
1. In buildings where persons need to travel more than 45m before reaching fresh air
(e.g. in a large warehouse), or where the size of the structure and / or the fire load
makes manual fire fighting too dangerous, or unlikely to be effective, automatic
sprinkler systems are required in terms of SABS 0400: The National Building
Regulations, due to life safety concerns.
2. Automatic sprinkler systems may also be specified on elevated surface conveyor

structures or in conveyor tunnels under stockpiles, as an alternative to providing 65
mm hydrant points and hoses, or 25 mm fire hosereels.
3. In any application where it is desirable to avoid active human participation in fighting

a fire, automatic sprinkler systems may be considered.
Considerations
Automatically activated fire sprinkler systems only need to conform to ASIB requirements
and the requirements of SABS 0287 if life safety depends on them (e.g. as contemplated in
Application 1 above).
Otherwise, the designer of the automatic sprinkler system should be informed of the purpose
of the sprinklers, which will typically be to protect assets and to guard against business
interruption losses. The only requirement then is that the designer must warrant that his
design is fit for the purpose, i.e. that it will effectively suppress fire, given the envisaged
structural, stored and operational fire load in the area to be protected.
Requirements
1. The system must be fed from the dedicated fire main. Depending on the requirements
as determined by the designer of the system, the water supply in the dedicated fire
main may or may not be adequate. If not, then appropriate arrangements must be
made either to boost pressure and flow in the dedicated fire main, or to provide a
separate, superior source for the sprinkler system.
Even for systems that are not required to be ASIB compliant, the designer must still
ensure that the system is supplied at adequate pressure and flow to ensure effective
suppression of fire in the protected area, having due cognisance of the fire load, and
the foreseeable type of fire. See ‘Considerations’ above.
2. Colour-code all sprinkler pipe work and above-ground supply lines red.
3. All above-ground pipe work to be steel.
4. Automatic sprinkler systems must cover the entire area at risk.
5. The control equipment for the sprinkler system should include butterfly stop valve(s),
non-return valve(s), control valve(s), and an hydraulic alarm, as described in detail in
NFPA 13.

Page 12 of 344
6. At the control location, the system must be fitted with glycerine-filled pressure
gauges, to ensure that the available pressure in the system can be easily monitored.
7. At the position in which the control valves for the automatic fire sprinkler system are
located, a flow operated hydraulic alarm bell must be fitted, which will sound in
response to the flow induced by the activation of one or more sprinkler heads.
9. If an automatic electronic fire detection system is installed at the premises where an

automatic fire sprinkler system is installed, then the water supply to the fire sprinkler
system must be fitted with a flow switch and / or a pressure switch interlinked with the
electronic control panel of such passive or aspirated automatic fire detection system.
This will ensure that discharge of the automatic sprinkler system will simultaneously
trigger the electronic fire detection system which in turn will raise a local alarm, and a
remote alarm at a constantly monitored control room.
SABS 0287 - Automatic sprinkler installations for fire-fighting purposes

NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
ASIB (where life-safety is a consideration)
SABS 0400 TT36 - National Building Regulations

Page 13 of 344
STD G4 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS - AUTOMATIC (IN CABLE TRENCHES)
This standard should be read in conjunction with Standard G3.
Application
Under certain circumstances, automatic sprinkler systems may be specified in cable trenches
and cable basements associated with main or critical surface substations, or in cable tunnels
that lead to a vertical underground shaft, and therefore have the potential to pollute the air
being drawn down that shaft.
Considerations
One way of providing such suppression is to install an automatically activating (fusible glass
link) sprinkler system. The system should be designed by an appropriately qualified person,
(e.g. an ASIB approved sprinkler installer, although full ASIB compliance is not required in
such application, since life safety will not be dependent upon the system) which will be
intended primarily to protect assets and to prevent business interruption losses.
Such installer should be informed that the system will not be critical to life-safety, to guard
against unnecessary over design, whilst still ensuring compliance with all relevant sections of
NFPA 13, SABS 0287, and ASIB. The designed sprinkler density, water pressure, and flow,
must allow for the foreseeable fire load represented by the planned concentration of cables
to be installed in the trenches or basement.
Requirements
1. The system must be fed from the dedicated fire main. Depending on the requirements
as determined by the designer of the system, the water supply in the dedicated fire
main may or may not be adequate to ensure effective suppression of fire in the cable
trenches, having due cognisance of the density and type of cable intended to be
installed therein. If not, then appropriate arrangements must be made either to boost
pressure and flow in the dedicated fire main, or to provide a separate, superior source
for the sprinkler system.
2. The cable trench or basement should be so designed as to drain naturally towards

the positions where the cable trench or basement exits from the substation complex,
so as to prevent the build-up or damming of water under the substation, whether such
water comes from discharge of the sprinkler system, or from natural precipitation.
3. The control equipment for the sprinkler system should include butterfly stop valve(s),
non-return valve(s), control valve(s), and an hydraulic alarm, as described in detail in
NFPA 13.
4. At the control location, the system should be fitted with glycerine-filled pressure
gauges, to ensure that the available pressure in the system may be easily monitored.
5. At the position in which the control valves for the automatic fire sprinkler system are
located, a flow operated hydraulic alarm bell must be fitted provided, which will sound
in response to the flow induced by the activation of one or more sprinkler heads.

Page 14 of 344
6. If an automatic electronic fire detection system is installed at the premises where an

automatic fire sprinkler system is installed, then the water supply to the fire sprinkler
system must be fitted with a flow switch and / or a pressure switch interlinked with the
electronic control panel of such passive or aspirated automatic fire detection system.
This will ensure that discharge of the automatic sprinkler system will simultaneously
trigger the electronic fire detection system which in turn will raise a local alarm, and a
remote alarm at a constantly monitored control room.
8. Colour-code all sprinkler pipe work and aboveground supply lines red.
9. All aboveground pipe work to be steel.

ASIB
Standard G3 - Fire sprinkler systems - automatic

Page 15 of 344
STD G5 - HIGH VELOCITY WATER DELUGE SYSTEMS
Application
High velocity water deluge systems are used for installations or equipment which have a high
fire load and / or high energy level, and which are critical to continued production. Such
systems are always automatically activated.
High velocity water deluge systems are particularly useful where such equipment is located
within areas filled with other densely installed equipment, so that effective spatial or structural
separation of the risk is difficult to achieve. Typical examples are transformers, hydraulic
power packs and large lubrication packs, located in an unseparated position within a large
plant building. Large, critical main transformers, even if well separated, are also often so
protected.
Requirements
High velocity deluge systems should be installed in accordance with the provisions of NFPA
15. They must comply inter alia with the following requirements:
1. Water supply to high velocity deluge systems is to be provided at a flow rate1 of no

less than 1500 litres/minute, and at a minimum open-ended flow pressure of 400
kPa2.
However, note that the system designer / installer will need, in terms of NFPA 15, to
warrant the efficacy of the system to suppress fire in the protected areas, based upon
an assessment of the calorific value constituted by the equipment in these areas, and
the physical conditions prevailing, and may specify a higher required flow1 and
pressure2 to satisfy these requirements. In such case, such higher requirements must
be met.
2. Hydrostatic pressure tests must be conducted prior to sign-off. All spray system pipe
work should be pressure tested to 1.5 times the working pressure (i.e. 1.5 x 400kPa
or the pressure specified by the designer), or 1500 kPa, whichever is the higher, for a
period of 24 hours. These tests should be witnessed by the Project Engineer or a
responsible person deputed by him, who must warrant in writing that the test has
been completed satisfactorily. The date and length of the test, and the pressure to
which the system was subjected, must also be recorded.
3. All piping in the deluge system up to and including 300 mm diameter is to be medium
quality galvanised SABS 62.
4. All piping over 200 mm diameter is to be galvanised and have a wall thickness of at
least 4.5 mm. It should comply with SABS 719.
5. Systems to be supplied via a pipe of minimum diameter 100 mm.
6. Piping of diameter 50 mm and below must have screw thread.
7. All flanges in the system are to comply with SABS 1123 1600/3.

Page 16 of 344
8. Klambon couplings are to be used for grooved end pipe.

9. For the main isolating valves, lever operated butterfly valves are acceptable for pipes
up to 100 mm diameter. Pipes of diameter 300 mm and above to have gear operated
butterfly valves are required.
10. Piping of diameter 65 mm and above is to be welded after fabrication before hot dip
galvanising.
11. Pipe fittings are to comply with the following standards:
- Grooved SABS approved

- Welded BS 1640
- Screwed malleable SABS 509
12. Each system to be fitted with an automatically controlled deluge valve.
13. Each deluge valve must include inter alia, the following:
- The necessary small bore pipe work, including strainers, to enable the control
valve to operate automatically.
- The necessary pressure gauges.
- An hydraulic alarm motor complete with gong.
- A pressure switch for transmitting a signal when the control valve has operated.
- A drain valve and discharge piping leading to “waste”.
- A clearly worded valve instruction chart.
- A manual override device for activating the control valve in an emergency.
14. Deluge control valves for such systems should be installed in a safe and easily
accessible position, between 15m and 25m away from the protected installation, or
around a corner where they can be safely accessed.
15. To guarantee 90 minutes endurance, as is the requirement, the minimum dedicated

reservoir capacity for a high velocity deluge systems alone is 135 000 litres, over and
above the requirement for the fire hydrant system, as contemplated in Standards G29
and G30.
16. Each deluge control valve is to include any pressure-reducing device that may be
necessary in the opinion of the system designer / installer to protect the system if the
available water pressure in the supply exceeds that of the spray system demand.
17. Isolating valves at the deluge control valve must be so arranged as to enable the
deluge valve to be tested without discharging water into the spray system.
18. The selection of the type and size of spray nozzles to be used in the high velocity
deluge system should be made by the designer / installer having due consideration of
all pertinent situational factors, such as the physical character and calorific value of

Page 17 of 344
the items to be protected, the foreseeable draught and/or wind conditions, and any
other relevant factor.
19. Nozzles which are preferred are those which have waterways that are not easily
obstructed by debris, sediment, sand or other impurities in the water.
20. In general, the designer / installer should specify a spray nozzle capable of producing
flow and spray characteristics similar to those of the “BETA” type N spiral nozzles.
21. Spray nozzles are to be placed in any position necessary within the protected zones
to obtain proper coverage of the protected area. For this reason, the system should
be so designed as to apply water both to the top and sides of the equipment which
they protect. The particular nozzle design and the profile of the water spray produced
will be guiding factors in selecting suitable positions for the nozzles.
22. All high velocity water deluge systems are to be fitted with a flush valve and the
system is to be flushed for a minimum of 3 minutes at periods not exceeding 1 month.
Results are to be logged.
NFPA 15 - Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
Relevant sections of SABS 62 - Steel pipes
Relevant sections of SABS 719 - Electric welded low carbon steel pipes for aqueous fluids
(large bore)
Relevant sections of SABS 1123 1600/3 - Pipe flanges
Relevant sections of SABS 509 - Malleable cast-iron pipe fittings
Relevant sections of BS 1640 - Steel Butt-Welding Pipe Fittings for the Petroleum Industry
Standard G29 - 65 mm Fire hydrants and related equipment

Page 18 of 344
STD G6 - FIXED FOAM FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
Application
Foam-based fire suppression systems are adequately used to protect areas which are at risk
to flammable liquid fire. Therefore, they may be installed at reagent storage areas, flammable
liquid stores, hydraulic power packs, lubrication packs and other similar installations.
Requirements
1. The design basis for each fixed foam fire extinguishing system shall follow the criteria
laid down in Clauses 4.3.2 and 4.3.3 of NFPA 16, under the heading “Discharge
criteria and discharge duration”, in order to provide for a quantity of foam solution
adequate to cover the total area to be protected, at a rate of application of 6.5
litres/minute/m² of protected area, sustained for at least 10 minutes.
2. Where the foam suppression system is required to protect more than one area, and
where application in one area may be required without necessarily involving another,
the deluge valves of the foam suppression system shall have a dedicated foam
proportioner. Independent supplies shall be taken to the respective areas to be
protected, at which point the solution would be routed through a distribution pipe
network fitted with self-aspirating foam spray heads specifically designed for the
application of foam.
3. Such heads must be suitably spaced and positioned so as to cover the entire area to
be protected.
4. The nozzles must be of chrome-plated brass.
5. All pipework is to be hot-dip galvanised steel.
6. The foam system deluge valves must be directly fed from a bladder foam tank of
adequate capacity to meet the requirement stated in 1 above.
7. The system shall be so designed and configured as to ensure that the foam
concentrate injection device is activated automatically by, or concurrently with, any
activation of the main water supply control valve supplying the foam generating
system.
8. Where the foam suppression system will be required to protect more than one area,
and where activation in one area may occur without activation necessarily occurring
in the others, the system pressure and flow must be suitably designed to allow it to
vary according to the demand on the system. To this end, a balanced pressure
system must be used. The proportioning system must be a centralised foam unit in
the form of a bladder tank, equipped with fixed orifices in the water and foam-
concentrate lines. Orifices must each be of the correct area ratio in relation to one
another.
9. The bladder tank foam proportioning system shall comprise two parts, namely the
bladder tank and the foam proportioner.

Page 19 of 344
10. The bladder tank must be a pressure vessel containing a reinforced flexible rubber
bag to hold the foam concentrate.
11. The foam proportioner, known as a TP proportioner, shall make use of an orifice to
create pressure drop in the water line. The pressure drop shall be fed to the outside
of the rubber bag located within the bladder tank, thereby applying pressure to the
bag which shall release foam concentrate. This foam concentrate shall be discharged
via a pipe leading to the downstream side of the TP proportioner.
12. The TP proportioning unit shall have four orifices, namely the water inlet, the solution
outlet, the foam concentrate inlet, and the water outlet.
13. The water inlet and solution outlet orifices on the TP proportioning unit must be wafer-
mounted in line in the fire water line.
14. Mounted at right angles to the water inlet and solution outlet orifices of the TP
proportioning unit must be the foam concentrate orifice, fed from the bladder tank,
with an adjustable proportioning unit to regulate the foam concentrate ratio into the
water.
15. The water outlet orifice must be located opposite the foam concentrate orifice to
provide pressure in the bladder tank which will squeeze the rubber bag containing the
foam concentrate.
16. The proportioning unit is to be a mechanical compensator, which shall permit

stabilised pressure drop across the proportioning system.
17. To ensure automatic activation of the foam suppression system, automatic detection
equipment shall be provided. This shall be so configured as to alarm both in the case
of fire, and in the event that failure of detection equipment is detected by the system.
This is intended to result in clear notification to a constantly monitored control
location, not only of fire, but also of abnormal system conditions.
17. All system piping relating to fixed foam fire suppression systems shall be hydraulically
designed for the specific project, in order to ensure relative uniformity of the foam and
water distribution between different parts of the system. This must allow for frictional
loss of head in water supply piping, which is proportional to diameter and length. A
maximum variation of 20% above the specified discharge rate per sprinkler or nozzle
must be permitted. Pipe sizes must be adjusted to compensate, based on detailed
friction-loss calculations. Such calculations must show the relationship between the
water supply and the water demand. A suitably qualified person shall, on behalf of the
designer / installer, certify these calculations to be correct.
18. Where used in a corrosive atmosphere, the detection devices shall be of materials
not subject to corrosion, or adequately protected to resist corrosion.
19. Where automatic detection equipment of the electric type is used, such detection and
equipment and any related auxiliary equipment must be designed specifically for use
in hazardous areas. Certification must be checked before equipment selection is
finalised.
20. The system shall be so designed and arranged as to allow tests and inspections to be
made without discharging the foam solution to the system piping. Without this, there

Page 20 of 344
would be no way of checking the system without affecting the equipment which the
system is designed to protect.
21. Any system designer / installer appointed to design or install a fixed foam fire
suppression system shall be bound to supply on completion of the project:
All piping layout drawings.
Electrical schematics.
Hydraulic calculations.
All literature and instructions provided by the manufacturer of any equipment
and devices installed, as described for the proper operation and maintenance
of such equipment and devices.
A copy of NFPA 25, the standard for the inspection, testing, and maintenance
of water and foam-based fire protection systems.
NFPA 11 - Standard for Low-Expansion Foam

NFPA 16 - Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray
Systems
NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems

Page 21 of 344
STD G7 - FIXED GASEOUS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - ROOM FLOODING
Application
Room-flooding (sometimes called ‘total flooding’) fixed gaseous fire suppression systems are
indicated in applications where there is:
a significant fire load

an obvious ignition source
a need for rapid response to fire at any time, without human intervention
a need to avoid the use of water
an enclosed are of modest size
One of the most common applications is conventional MV substations equipped with oil-filled
switchgear.
Room flooding systems, as opposed to in-cabinet systems as contemplated in Standard G8,

are appropriate where the risk is a complex one which does not lend itself to individual
protection of each item of equipment installed in a room. However, it requires that the room
must be relatively airtight. It is a simpler system than an in-cabinet system, but requires more
gas since the entire room must be filled.
In-cabinet suppression systems and total-flooding suppression systems are not direct
alternatives to each other. They each perform a subtly different function, and for maximum
protection, a total-flooding system should be installed, with in-cabinet systems installed
additionally in the most critical panels in the room.
Selection of suppression medium
The recommendation is that the gas selected should be CO2 because of its ready
availability, proven efficacy, good safety record, environmental friendliness, ease of service
and recharge, the availability of detailed installation and maintenance standards, and more.
However, CO2 (and CO) is heavier than air. For this reason, it can accumulate in low lying
areas which are poorly ventilated. Persons entering these areas can be overcome and may
expire as a result of such gas accumulations. CO2 should therefore not be used aboard
draglines and any enclosed basements.
NAF S125 (Afrox FS 125) and Argonite are also acceptable, but their selection will incur
additional expense, and because they are less common than CO2, they may take longer to
replace after discharge, leaving the area unprotected. This is a particular concern in remote
areas. The onus rests with the client to determine whether the additional expense and
possible replacement / service difficulties are justified.
No gases containing HCFCs are acceptable. Thus FM100 and FM200, NAF S III and Halon
in all its forms, are not recommended.
Aerosol extinguishing agents (FEAG / FEAS) are also not recommended. To eliminate the
possibility of a secondary heat source within a protected area, no system may be installed
whose method of operation generates heat, for example by an exothermic reaction. The
suppression medium / system selected should not discharge any solid residues or parts of
the container upon, during or after discharge.

Page 22 of 344
Products containing HFCs are not specifically excluded on the basis of their HFC content
alone, provided that they meet all other requirements. There is concern however, that HFCs
may be banned for the same environmental reasons as HCFCs. If this occurs, systems
containing HFCs would need to be replaced. It is therefore difficult to understand any
justification for choosing any media which contains an HFC.
Installation requirements
Rooms should be treated independently of each other. However, consider that such systems
are intended to contain fire originating in the protected room, and not fire spreading inwards
from other areas, which is one reason for physical subdivision of the complex by perfect
party walls and fire stopping. The following are the most important requirements which must
be met:
1. All doors belonging to the protected room must be fitted with automatic closing
mechanisms, to ensure that they are kept closed at all times, so that the suppressant
gas will not escape to atmosphere, diluting the concentration in the room, and
rendering the system ineffective.
2. It is important in calculating the required gas volume of the cylinder bank, to include
the volume of the ceiling void, if any. From a fire risk perspective, a reinforced
concrete roof is always preferable.
3. Signage should be erected at every door leading to an area protected by a fixed

suppression system, warning of the presence of such system. Such signage should
also warn that no door should ever be locked whilst persons are inside. All signage
should comply with SABS 0400 TT29, FPA Bulletin 19, NFPA 170 & SABS 1186.
4. This signage should also inform persons that upon entering, the system must be
switched to manual discharge mode by means of a key or switch provided outside, in
close proximity to each door. It is usual to have such key or switch integrated with the
manual call point at such door.
5. Primarily to ensure the safety of people, no system may be installed which cannot be
completely isolated (turned off). It is most important to ensure compliance with this
requirement in the case of systems which have more than one actuation mechanism,
like sealed aerosol (FEAG / FEAS) units.
6. Any electrically operated fan or air-conditioner installed for the purpose of ventilating
or cooling a room protected by a room flooding fire suppression system must be
interlocked with the control panel of the passive fire detection system, so that such
fan or air-conditioner will be caused to trip out, and to cease operating, in response to
any manually or automatically actuated alarm signal received by such panel in
relation to that particular fire zone. Failure to provide such interlock will result in the
suppressant gas being diluted, and not operating as per design. Also, such fan or air
conditioner would continue to ventilate the fire, assisting fire growth and propagation.
7. Ensure that the room is effectively sealed, i.e. that doors are tight fitting, that no doors
have louvres or other openings, and that any other apertures in the roof or walls are
effectively sealed.

Page 23 of 344
8. On the bank of cylinders serving the gaseous suppression system, ensure that at
least two actuators per bank are operated by electric solenoid. All other actuators on
the bank may be pressure activated by the gas released from the electrically
activated cylinders. The reason is to ensure that if one of the two fails, the system will
still discharge by the actuation of the other.
9. The cylinders in the bank must be secured to a supporting wall by means of properly
designed brackets, as described in the relevant section of NFPA 12. Looped chains
etc are not acceptable!
10. Primarily to ensure the safety of people, whether working in the protected area, or
responding to a fire (i.e. fire teams), no cylinder, canister or container for a
suppressant gas or agent may be positioned within a fire zone or in any area where it
could foreseeably be subjected to heat in a fire situation.
For this reason, it would be unsuitable to position such cylinders anywhere within a
substation complex or similar. The cylinder bank should be located externally, where
it must be suitably positioned to protect it from the elements and from possible impact
damage by vehicles.
11. The primary means whereby the fixed gaseous total flooding fire suppression
systems will discharge, will be automatically in response to a “double knock” alarm
received from the appropriate zone of the automatic fire detection monitoring panel.
12. The secondary means whereby a fixed gaseous total flooding fire suppression
system will discharge, will be in response to a manual alarm received from a
dedicated call point (usually a break-glass panel) positioned outside one of the doors
leading to the affected zone.
13. Manual call points (break-glass panels) intended for the manual discharge of a fixed
gaseous fire suppression system, or a zone of such system, shall be colour-coded
red.
14. Where there is any room for doubt as to which zone a discharge break-glass panel
pertains to, such panel must be clearly demarcated to indicate the zone to which it
relates. This might be the case where a multi-zone system has entrances to two or
more of its zones located close to each other, for example leading off a common
central room or foyer.
15. After installation and prior to commissioning, the system must be tested by activation
and full gas discharge, to ensure its operability, efficacy and the integrity of the
sealing arrangements. The degradation rate of the extinguishing gas must be
determined and indicated on the test certificate.
Maintenance requirements
All fixed room flooding suppression systems shall be checked weekly by a mine employee
suitably trained and appointed in writing to perform such work. The results of such
inspections shall be recorded in a logbook to be kept for that purpose.
If during the weekly inspection of such system, the appointed employee becomes aware of a
problem affecting the operation or reliability of the system, it shall be his responsibility to

Page 24 of 344
initiate such steps as are necessary to reinstate the system, and / or to have the necessary
repairs effected by a suitably qualified service provider.
All fixed room flooding suppression systems shall be serviced at least twice annually, as
prescribed in NFPA 12, by an accredited service provider. All elements of all systems must
be physically tested to determine their reliability. Inter alia:
The discharge mechanism on every cylinder must be checked at every inspection.
The contents of at least 20% of all cylinders (i.e. 40% per annum) must be checked at
every inspection.
NFPA 12 - Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 2001 – Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
FPA Bulletin 19
NFPA 170 - Standard for Fire Safety Symbols
SABS 1186 – Symbolic Signs
BS 5839 - Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for system
design, installation, commissioning and maintenance

Page 25 of 344
STD G8 - FIXED GASEOUS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS - IN-CABINET
Application
In-cabinet systems are appropriate where the fire risk is mostly limited to the panels or other
equipment installed, i.e. where there is little other fire loading in the room.
They are also useful where it would be difficult to seal the room effectively, so that the gas
from a room-flooding system would become diluted before it could be effective.
Also, where relatively few panels are installed in a very large room, or in an open area, total
flooding would require too much gas to reach the required concentration, and so might prove
too expensive, and impractical.
In-cabinet systems are beneficial in that the gas is applied directly to the seat of the fire, and
so is likely to extinguish the fire more quickly, limiting the damage to fewer panels.
However, in-cabinet systems are complicated, and their infrastructure is therefore more
expensive, although the smaller quantities of gas make them cheaper to recharge after they
have been activated.
Because the pipe work, nozzles and detectors of in-cabinet systems are located in the
panels, these are often disconnected or damaged by persons working on the panels, so that
the systems may not function reliably when needed.
In-cabinet systems offer protection only against fires originating in the protected panel, and
do not protect against fire originating elsewhere in the room (e.g. on cables or unprotected
panels in the room), or spreading inwards from other parts of the building.
In-cabinet suppression systems and total-flooding suppression systems are not really direct
alternatives to each other. They each perform a subtly different function, and for maximum
protection, a total-flooding system should be installed, with in-cabinet systems additionally
installed in the most critical panels in the room.
Selection of suppression medium
The recommendation is that the gas selected should be CO2 because of its ready
availability, proven efficacy, good safety record, environmental friendliness, ease of service
and recharge, the availability of detailed installation and maintenance standards, and more.
However, CO2 (and CO) is heavier than air. For this reason, it can accumulate in low lying
areas which are poorly ventilated. Persons entering these areas can be overcome and may
expire as a result of such gas accumulations. CO2 should therefore not be used aboard
draglines and any enclosed basements.
NAF S125 (Afrox FS 125) and Argonite are also acceptable, but their selection will incur
additional expense, and because they are less common than CO2, they may take longer to
replace after discharge, leaving the area unprotected. This is a particular concern in remote
areas. The onus rests with the client to determine whether the additional expense and
possible replacement / service difficulties are justified.

Page 26 of 344
No gases containing HCFCs are acceptable. Thus FM100 and FM200, NAF S III and Halon
in all its forms, are not recommended.
Aerosol extinguishing agents (FEAG / FEAS) are also not recommended. To eliminate the
possibility of a secondary heat source within a protected area, no system may be installed
whose method of operation generates heat, for example by an exothermic reaction. The
suppression medium / system selected should not discharge any solid residues or parts of
the container upon, during or after discharge.
Products containing HFCs are not specifically excluded on the basis of their HFC content
alone, provided that they meet all other requirements. There is concern however, that HFCs
may be banned for the same environmental reasons as HCFCs. If this occurs, systems
containing HFCs would need to be replaced. It is therefore difficult to understand any
justification for choosing any media which contains an HFC.
Installation requirements
Consider that such systems are intended to contain fire originating in the panel which they
protect, and not fire spreading inwards from other parts of the structure or of the same room.
This is one reason for physical subdivision of the complex by perfect party walls and fire
stopping, and for keeping unnecessary fire loading and ignition points in the room to a
minimum. However, this is why in-cabinet systems are not appropriate in rooms containing a
complex risk which is not confined to the cabinets, e.g. a substation with significant quantities
of cable in the room housing the electrical panels / cabinets.
The following are some of the most important requirements which such systems must meet:
1. Each in-cabinet suppression system must be capable of automatic activation in

response to a signal received from an in-cabinet detection system in the affected
panel.
2. Some suitable forms of in-cabinet detection are:

An in-cabinet passive point detection system
An aspirated detection system using in-cabinet sample pipes, e.g. VESDA;
ICAM; FireTracer.
Linear wire looped around inside each cabinet / panel.
3. For in-cabinet systems, the automatic discharge and actuation system must be
provided independently of any system installed to detect fire in the general room
space for alarm purposes.
4. Although each panel should have its own detector(s), the gaseous suppression
system installed for each room should discharge simultaneously into all panels in that
room in response to a signal received from any one of the in-cabinet detectors in that
room (but not from the room detection system).
5. The in-cabinet suppression systems should also be capable of manual activation, via
break-glass panel(s) positioned in reasonably close proximity to the panel it serves.
6. Such break-glass panel(s) must be clearly demarcated as to which of the panels they
serve, as there may be several systems installed in one room.

Page 27 of 344
7. Although such systems pose far less risk to people than room flooding systems,
signage should still be erected at every door leading to an in-cabinet gas protected
area warning of the presence of such system, and advising that the door should
never be closed or locked whilst persons are inside.
8. On each bank of cylinders serving a gaseous suppression system, ensure that at
least two actuators per bank are operated by electric solenoid. All other actuators on
the bank may be pressure activated by the gas released from the electrically
activated cylinders. The reason for no less than two of the cylinders to be electrically
actuated is to ensure that if one of the two fails to operate, the system will still
discharge due to actuation of the other. However, note that this will usually not be
appropriate in the case of in-cabinet systems, as each system will typically use only
one cylinder!.
9. The cylinder(s) in each bank must be securely fastened to a supporting wall or similar
by means of properly designed brackets, as described in the relevant section of
NFPA 12. Looped chains etc are not acceptable!
10. Primarily to ensure the safety of people, whether working in the protected area, or
responding to a fire (i.e. fire teams), no cylinder, canister or container for a
suppressant gas or agent may be positioned within a fire zone or in any area where it
could foreseeably be subjected to heat in a fire situation. For this reason, it would be
unsuitable to position such cylinders anywhere within a substation complex or similar.
The cylinder bank should also be protected from possible impact damage by vehicles.
Maintenance requirements
All in-cabinet suppression systems shall be checked weekly by a mine employee suitably
trained and appointed in writing to perform such work. The results of such inspections shall
be recorded in a logbook to be kept for that purpose.
If during the weekly inspection of such system, the appointed employee becomes aware of a
problem affecting the operation or reliability of the system, it shall be his responsibility to
initiate such steps as are necessary to reinstate the system, and / or to have the necessary
repairs effected by a suitably qualified service provider.
All in-cabinet suppression systems shall be serviced at least twice annually, as prescribed in
NFPA 12, by an accredited service provider. All elements of all systems must be physically
tested to determine their reliability. Inter alia, the discharge mechanism on every cylinder
must be checked at every inspection. The contents of at least 20% of all cylinders (i.e. 40%
per annum) must be checked at every inspection.

FPA Bulletin 19
SABS 1186 - Symbolic Signs
NFPA 2001 - Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

Page 28 of 344
STD G9 - PASSIVE VERSUS ASPIRATED FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
Definition
A passive system is one in which the detectors or heads are installed in the zone to
be monitored, and ‘wait’ for smoke or heat to reach them before they are activated.
These are cheap, robust systems with reasonable reliability.
An aspirated system has ‘sniffer’ pipes installed in the critical areas of the area to be
sampled. There are small apertures in the pipe. This pipe is connected to the
sampling unit, where a fan sucks air through the apertures, along the pipe, and into
the processing unit where the system measures for smoke and various
predetermined gases. These systems are thus active, and react faster than passive
systems. However, they are expensive and sensitive to dust and moisture. Their
benefits often do not warrant their extra cost and sensitivity to external influences.
Application
1. Passive fire detection systems are cheaper to install, easier to maintain, and less
susceptible to false alarms in harsh, dusty environments than aspirated fire detection
systems. Passive detection systems will therefore usually be indicated in the vast
majority of applications.
2. Aspirated fire detection systems respond faster to an incipient fire, and may therefore
be indicated in high value applications, where the fastest possible response is
essential, and where the environment is relatively mild, so that it will not affect the
functioning of the sensitive aspirated system.
3. Where passive fire detection systems are installed, each zone should be provided
with at least two detector heads, to ensure firstly that an alarm will be forthcoming
even if one of the heads is out of order, and secondly, so that a mixture of smoke and
heat detection heads may be provided in each zone.
4. Where passive fire detection heads are to be installed in a room / zone, there should
be an approximate 50/50 split between smoke and heat detector heads, since smoke
detectors will alarm most efficiently in some circumstances, and heat detectors will
alarm most efficiently in other circumstances, so that a mixture will provide the best
possible response.
Note however, that in certain applications, smoke detector heads are inappropriate,
such as in a kitchen.
5. The electronic control panel of the detection system should be set up to alarm
automatically in response to any signal received from a detector head which it
monitors.
6. The system should be capable of raising a visual and audible local alarm which
should be relayed automatically to a remote, constantly monitored point, so as to
raise a simultaneous remote alarm and ensure the quickest possible response to the
expected fire.

Page 29 of 344
7. Where the electronic fire alarm control panel relies upon the PLC / SCADA system, it
must interface with such system via two alternative routes, not located within the
same cable trench or on the same cable rack.

FPA Bulletin 19
SABS 0400 TT 31 - National Building Regulations
SABS 0139 : 1981 - Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings - System design,
installation and servicing
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

Page 30 of 344
STD G10 - FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE VEHICLES
Application
1. Early detection of fire is critical in mitigating the effects of fire on mobile mining
equipment. Detection devises are therefore required on all mobile mining equipment.
2. Both fixed and portable suppression systems are essential for safeguarding mobile
equipment and personnel against fire and related hazards.
3. Portable and / or fixed suppression systems are required on all mobile mining
equipment.
LDVs and trucks
1. All LDVs and trucks are to be fitted with at least one 9 kg hand-held DCP fire
extinguisher. On larger vehicles such as haul trucks, the number should be increased
to at least two 9 kg units. These should be securely mounted in brackets and should
be positioned in easily accessible and clearly visible positions.
2. A risk assessment should be conducted to determine the criticality to the business

process of the larger trucks. Where the number of a certain type of truck is limited
and where the loss of such truck could result in significant business interruption, or
where the capital replacement value of such truck is significant, consideration may be
given to installing fixed automatic dry chemical powder and foam suppression
systems on such trucks. See “Requirements” below for details of such fixed
suppression systems.
Requirements
1. All units aboard larger trucks should be dual systems using dry powder followed by
foam application to cool and prevent re-ignition.
2. All systems should include linear wire for early detection purposes. The linear wire
must span the length of the engine compartment and also the first metre of all main
harnesses at the fuse box/panel.
3. All systems to have an additional two manual activation points, one in the cab and
one accessible from the ground.
4. Dry powder and foam must be distributed via a flexible hose system complying to
SAE100R5/R1 specification in red material with ‘FIRE HOSE’ demarcations along the
length.
5. All nozzles should be made of brass with protective blow off caps.
6. All systems should have an audible activation warning.
7. Dry powder systems should be of FORAY powder type (predominantly mono-

ammonium phosphate). The capacity of each tank to be installed should be of the
order of 14 kg, thus able to supply a maximum of six nozzles. On all sub 170t trucks

Page 31 of 344
two of these tanks will suffice. On trucks of 170t to 190t e.g. Caterpillar 789, four to
five tanks may be used as per the installer’s specification.
8. Foam application systems should use Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF)
containers selected to give a two minute discharge. Only one 65 litre tank capable of
supporting a maximum of twelve nozzles is required. Turbochargers must be
protected by foam. Foam application nozzle quantity is two per turbocharger below
250 mm in housing diameter and three if larger.
Dozers, wheel loaders, road scrapers, etc.
1. All dozers, wheel loaders, road scrapers, etc must be fitted with at least one 9 kg
hand-held DCP fire extinguisher. On larger vehicles, the number should be increased
to at least two 9 kg units which must be securely mounted in brackets located in
easily accessible and clearly visible positions on the machine.
2. A risk assessment should be conducted to determine the criticality to the business

process of larger equipment. Where the number of a certain type of machine is
limited, so that the loss of even a single unit of that type could result in significant
business interruption, or where the capital replacement value of such unit is
significant, consideration should be given to installing a fixed automatic dry chemical
powder and foam suppression systems on such equipment. See “Requirements”
below for details of such fixed suppression systems.
Requirements
1. All units aboard larger equipment should be dual systems using dry powder followed
by foam application to cool and prevent re-ignition.
2. All systems should include linear wire for early detection purposes. The linear wire
must span the length of the engine compartment and also the first metre of all main
harnesses at the fuse box/panel.
3. On larger machinery e.g. Caterpillar 994 front end loaders, the system must have an
additional two manual activation points, one in the cab and one accessible from the
ground.
4. Dry powder and foam must be distributed via a flexible hose system complying to
SAE100R5/R1 specification in red material with ‘FIRE HOSE’ demarcations along the
length.
5. All nozzles should be made of brass with protective blow off caps.
6. All systems should have an audible activation warning.
7. Dry powder systems should be of FORAY powder type (predominantly mono-

ammonium phosphate). The amount of powder carried on board should be contained
in tanks no smaller than 9kg, each of which is capable of supplying a maximum of
four nozzles.
8. Foam application systems should use Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF)
containers selected to give a two minute discharge. Only one unit varying in size from
45litres to 106litres depending on the piece of equipment is required. A 45litre

Page 32 of 344
container can support a maximum of 6 nozzles whilst a 206 litre container can
support twelve. Turbochargers must be protected by foam. Foam application nozzle
quantity is two per turbocharger below 250mm in housing diameter and three if larger.
Shovels and drills
1. A minimum of 3 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be provided on each

shovel or drill. Such units should be securely mounted in robust brackets in clearly
visible and easily accessible positions.
2. A fixed dry chemical powder and foam suppression system must be provided in all
high-risk areas such as engine rooms, gearboxes and hydraulics areas. The dual
system uses dry powder followed by foam application to cool and prevent re-ignition.
This should be capable of automatic activation by means of linear wire routed
throughout the abovementioned high-risk areas in which nozzles for the suppression
system are located. It should also be capable of manual discharge by means of an
activation button or plunger located in the driver’s cabin, and by a second activation
button or plunger located at an external position near ground level, usually at the foot
of the ladder way leading to the machine’s deck.
On larger machines, where the system is split between the different risk areas, more
than one plunger will be provided in the driver’s cabin and at the external position,
one for each zone. In such case, the plungers or activation button must be clearly
demarcated so that the appropriate system may be selectively discharged.
3. Where such machine has a separate electrical room, such room must be protected by
means of a fixed gaseous suppression system. Refer to Standards G7 and G8.
Break-glass panel manual activation points for such gaseous suppression system(s)
should be provided next to the door outside the room being protected.
Draglines
Rationale
1. Draglines have extremely high business interruption loss potential. This is because
firstly, they are long lead items which cannot easily or rapidly be replaced if lost to fire
or any other catastrophe. Secondly, there are relatively few draglines at any
operation, and the loss of a dragline therefore represents a direct loss of production
which translates into loss of revenue. Thirdly, draglines represent a fairly dense
concentration of numerous fire risks. Fire arising anywhere on the machine and not
contained in its initial stages is likely to spread uncontrolled throughout the dragline,
resulting in extensive damage or complete destruction which will translate into
significant loss of revenue.
2. The draglines operate in the mining pit where there is no ready access to secondary
fire fighting measures, i.e. large bore hydrants and hoses. There is therefore
complete reliance upon fixed systems on the dragline. Normally, fixed systems do not
cover the entire dragline and neither are they designed to cope with a well-developed
fire. Their modus operandi is to extinguish fire in its initial stages. If they fail to do this,
it is likely that the fire will spread to other parts of the machine and cause extensive
damage or even total destruction. For this reason, it is important that fixed

Page 33 of 344
suppression systems must respond quickly, automatically, and effectively, in the very
early stages of any fire’s development.
3. The fire load (calorific value) represented by a dragline is relatively high, as there is
extensive use of electric cabling and flammable liquids. This means that fire spread
will be rapid and fire intensity will be high.
4. The dragline is built largely of steel. This means that its structural integrity is much
lower than, for example, a conventional building constructed of brick and mortar.
Steel will buckle and fail at temperatures as low as 500°C.
Temperatures well in excess of 1 000° are foreseeab le in a relatively short space of

time given the high fire load as discussed above. Therefore, if any fire occurring is not
addressed early in its development, and is allowed to grow to significant proportions,
structural failure is likely to occur, and could result in collapse and total destruction of
the dragline.
The conclusion is that response to any fire occurring on a dragline needs to be:
Rapid (i.e. early in the development of a fire)
Automatic (i.e. must not depend upon human intervention)
Effective (the suppression medium must be suitable for the risk type, and must
be adequate in size and volume to adequately suppress fire in the area which it
is designed to protect)
Sufficiently extensive (i.e. detection and suppression system must be provided

in each area identified as a high fire risk area. In each such area, the system
must cover all parts of these individual risks effectively).
Requirements
Note that these requirements are specific to a Bucyrus Erie 1570 dragline, but are relevant to
all draglines in the Group.
1. All fire detection systems on draglines, including fire detection systems which also
serve as the automatic actuation system for a fixed fire suppression system, must
report to a main electronic fire system repeater panel.
2. The main electronic fire system repeater panel must be so positioned in the
operator’s cabin of the dragline as to be easily visible from the operator’s chair.
Additionally, the system must be equipped with both a visible (e.g. a flashing light)
and an audible (e.g. a bell or panel buzzer) means of alerting the operator if fire is
detected.
3. A secondary external, audible alarm (e.g. a bell or siren) must be provided, and must
be of such intensity that it is clearly audible anywhere in or on the dragline, and
anywhere within 100 metres of the dragline.
4. Not withstanding the requirements stated in 2 and 3 above, every local control panel
must be equipped with both a visible (e.g. a flashing light) and an audible (e.g. a bell

Page 34 of 344
or siren) means of raising an alarm if fire is detected in that zone. Both visible and
audible means of alarm must be located at the entrance to the protected area.
5. From the main electronic fire system control panel, links must be established to a
remote, constantly monitored control room or to a designated person or other
location, so that the system will simultaneously raise a remote alarm when an alarm
is triggered on the dragline.
6. The following areas of all draglines are identified as high fire risk areas which must be
equipped with a fixed automatic fire detection system. Note that in the following
list, the areas stated are common to all draglines. Depending on the particular
dragline layout, the need for additional zones on the automatic fixed fire detection
system may exist.
Area Detection type
Left propel room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Right propel room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Lubrication room Linear wire & passive heat
Left MV room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Right MV room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Upper control room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Lower control room 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Slip ring box At least 2 passive optical detectors at roof

height in the slip ring compartment
Machine room At least 4 infrared / ultraviolet passives
Compressor room, where one exists 50:50 split: passive heat & passive optical
Compressors, when free-standing in the Passive in-cabinet heat probe, or internal linear
general machine room wire
Diesel or petrol – driven generators Passive heat
Cable void between upper and lower control Linear wire

rooms
Area between the tub and revolving frame At least 4 heat probes equally spaced
(Centre pintle) throughout the area
Swing shaft compartments Heat probe
7. The following areas of all draglines are identified as high fire risk areas which must be
equipped with fixed fire suppression systems. All suppression systems must be
capable of automatic and manual actuation. This shall not apply in the case of propel
rooms which use a manually activated foam system shared with the machine room.
The suppression agent will vary according to area, and the accepted type by area is
indicated below.

Page 35 of 344
Choice of gas. Note that in the case of draglines, fixed gaseous fire suppression
systems may only use Argonite or FM200 (including NAFS 125) as their suppression
agent. If NAFS III or is already installed, it need not be changed, but no new fixed
gaseous fire suppression system should be installed that makes use of this gas.
NAFS III once discharged, must be replaced with one of the named approved gasses.
No other gases or aerosols are to be used on a dragline.
Note that in the following list, the areas stated are common to all draglines.
Depending on the particular dragline layout, the need for suppression in additional
zones may exist.
Area Suppression type
Left propel room Manually activated, fixed nozzle foam suppression system, sharing
a foam-source with a manual foam application system (38mm hose
and nozzle) in the machine room,
OR a dedicated automatic foam system.
Right propel room Manually activated, fixed nozzle foam suppression system, sharing
a foam-source with a manual foam application system (38mm hose
and nozzle) in the machine room,
OR a dedicated automatic foam system.
Lubrication room Fixed automatic combined DCP and foam fire suppression system,
with sequential discharge of DCP then foam.
Compressor and Fixed automatic DCP fire suppression system
Generator rooms
Left MV room Fixed automatic total flooding gaseous fire suppression system
Right MV room Fixed automatic total flooding gaseous fire suppression system
Upper control room Fixed automatic total flooding gaseous fire suppression system
Lower control room Fixed automatic total flooding gaseous fire suppression system
Centre pintle (MV Optional fixed automatic DCP fire suppression system
rings)
Above tub, between Manually activated, fixed nozzle foam suppression system, sharing
rack and rollers a foam-source with a manual foam application system (38mm hose
and nozzle) in the machine room
Swing shaft Dedicated automatic foam system per compartment
compartments
8. With respect to detection and suppression in the Upper and Lower Control Rooms,
the fixed fire system shall be configured such that a trigger in one room
simultaneously triggers the system in the other. In effect, the two rooms must be
configured to behave as one room.
9. In all instances where a fixed automatic fire suppression system is installed, the
system shall be configured to discharge only in response to a “double knock” alarm
received from the associated automatic detection system, as a safeguard against
discharging the suppression medium in response to a false alarm received from any
single detector.

Page 36 of 344
10. In any of the following cases, power must be tripped automatically as below:
Area Description of trip

Upon actuation of the manual foam application Trip all power upstream at the splitter skid
system (38mm hose and nozzle) for the
machine room
Upon receipt of a “double knock” alarm from Trip the power to all fans ventilating the
the machine room machine room
Upon receipt of a “double knock” alarm from Trip all power upstream at the splitter skid
either MV room
Upon receipt of a “double knock” alarm from Trip power in the MV rooms and auxiliary
either Control room transformers
11. In the case of all fixed suppression systems, the designer / installer of the system
must show, as part of the handover documentation provided to the client at the time
of system delivery, all calculations necessary to demonstrate the adequacy of the
volume of suppression medium installed, to suppress fire in that room, having due
cognisance of the volume of the room and the medium concentration required for
effective operation, determined in accordance with the specifications provided by the
manufacturer of the product used in each particular case.
12. Because of its size and complexity, it is not appropriate or suitable to install a fixed
suppression system in the machine room. Nonetheless, given its multitude of
potential ignition sources and its relatively high fire load, it is imperative to provide
some effective means of secondary fire fighting capability in the machine room.
Therefore, a fixed foam tank of minimum size 1 000 litres and foam applicator /
generator, must be provided on the left and right sides of each dragline, near to an
entrance leading into the machine room, so that any fire occurring in the machine
room can be fought simultaneously from two sides. These tanks may operate on the
stored pressure principle, for which purpose an associated nitrogen or similar
cylinder, of adequate capacity, must be provided and maintained at the foam tank.
At each foam tank and applicator, a permanently affixed hose of minimum

diameter 38 mm must be provided, complete with a variable jet foam
applicator nozzle, permanently affixed to the hose.
On each side, the hose(s) provided must be of adequate length to reach all
parts of the machine house, plus 10 m. Providing 2 x 30 m hoses on each
side is likely to suffice.
On each side, at the foam tank, provide clearly worded instructions describing
the use and application of the system.
These same tanks may serve alternately as the foam supply source for the
fixed, manually actuated foam-based fire suppression system installed in the
propel room on that respective side of the dragline. See 7 above.

Page 37 of 344
13. Where a fixed total flooding gaseous fire suppression system is installed, e.g. at the
control rooms and MV rooms, every effort must be made to keep the protected zone
airtight, as fixed total flooding gaseous fire suppression systems rely upon the
principle of oxygen deprivation to asphyxiate the fire.
To this end, cable penetration and other apertures must be sealed, doors must be
fitted with self-closing mechanisms and kept in the closed position at all times,
ventilation louvres and opening windows are not permitted, and any ventilating fan or
air-conditioner must be interlinked with the fire detection system, which must trip
power to such fan or air-conditioner and cause it to cease operating simultaneously
with the discharge of suppressant gas in the protected zone. This shall not apply to
any recirculating fan or air-conditioner such as a split unit air-conditioner.
The tripping requirements as stated in 7 above may satisfy this requirement.
14. Where foam systems are installed, containment is not required, and there is therefore
no requirement for apertures to be sealed or doors to be kept closed.
15. Wherever a fixed fire suppression system is provided, irrespective of the suppression
medium, an activation button or break-glass panel must be provided in close
proximity to the protected area, to allow the system to be discharged manually should
the automatic activation mechanism have failed to respond for whatever reason.
Such activation button or break-glass panel should be:
Clearly demarcated to indicate to which zone it pertains.
Located outside the protected zone. Location of such button or panel within
the protected zone may render it inaccessible once a fire has started, or may
place person’s lives in danger if they attempt to activate it after a fire has
broken out.
16. 9 kg DCP or 5 kg CO2 hand-held fire extinguishers must be provided at the following
positions in the quantities indicated.
All extinguishers should be mounted at a bracket height of 1.2 metres above floor
elevation. Where an extinguisher position is clearly visible, demarcation with the
relevant symbolic signage is adequate. Where an extinguisher is in an obscured
position, it may be necessary to add directional signage to the symbolic sign.
In general, DCP fire extinguishers should be used. However, in areas where sensitive
electronic equipment is installed, for example in control rooms and PLC rooms, CO2
extinguishers are preferable, since the use of DCP on such equipment may damage it
to the extent that it may need to be replaced.
Extinguishers must always be mounted outside the area which they serve, to ensure
that they remain readily accessible even after a fire has broken out.
Location Quantity Type

Left entrance to the machine room 2 DCP
Right entrance to the machine room 2 DCP

Page 38 of 344
Left MV room 1 DCP

Right MV room 1 DCP
Lubrication room 1 DCP
Top control room 1 CO2
Bottom control room (interior entrance) 1 CO2
Bottom control room (outside entrance) 1 CO2
Compressor room, where a compressor room exists 1 DCP
Left propel room (first entrance) 1 DCP
Left propel room (second entrance) 1 DCP
Right propel room (first entrance) 1 DCP
Right propel room (second entrance) 1 DCP
Bottom of ladder leading into the revolving frame 2 DCP
Top of stairway onto top of machine house 2 DCP
Maintenance
Fixed automatic detection and suppression systems
Daily visual inspection by artisan as part of the daily checklist

Monthly inspection by external service provider
Quarterly inspection, service and maintenance by external service provider
Hand-held fire extinguishers
Daily visual inspection by operator as part of daily checklist

Monthly visual inspection by in-house appointee
Annual off-site service including removal and sifting of powder in the case of DCP
extinguishers, conducted by accredited external service provider.
Bulk foam tanks
Daily visual inspection by operator as part of daily checklist

Annual pressure test
Biennial internal inspection of the vessel
Standard G7 - Fixed gaseous fire suppression systems - room flooding

Standard G8 - Fixed gaseous fire suppression systems - in cabinet
Standard G47 - Definition of criticality
Appendix A – Suggested EMV Suppression System Siting Track Dozer D10
Appendix B - Suggested EMV Suppression System Siting Grader CAT 14/16
Appendix C - Suggested EMV Suppression System Siting Diesel Electric Truck

Page 39 of 344
STD G11 - OXY-ACETYLENE CUTTING AND WELDING
Requirements
1. A flashback arrestor must be provided both at the torch and at the cylinder gauges,
both on the oxygen and on the acetylene hoses.
2. Flashback arrestors to be used must be of the newer “in-line” type, and not of the
older “grenade” type.
3. If hoses are to be secured together in pairs, they must not be cable tied or wired
together. Only the approved metal clip is acceptable, since this allows paired hoses to
be ripped apart if a fire occurs on the hoses, thus separating the oxygen from the
acetylene.
4. Only the approved “crimp-on” type clamp is acceptable for securing oxygen or
acetylene hoses to their metal fittings, or for joining hoses. Jubilee clamps, wire, etc.
are all unacceptable.
5. Only the approved ridged hoses are to be used for oxygen and acetylene. The older
smooth type of hoses is no longer to be used.
6. All compressed gas cylinders are to be fitted with guards to protect their valves.
7. All mobile cutting / welding torch trolleys are to be fitted with a DCP fire extinguisher
of minimum capacity 2.5 kg. On fixed stationary cutting / welding torch sets (e.g. in a
workshop), a 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher is to be provided for each cutting /
welding torch set.
8. Whilst cutting / welding operations are in progress, using oxy-acetylene cutting /

welding equipment, the fire extinguisher is to be removed from its bracket and
positioned at a convenient location no further than 5 metres from the position at which
cutting / welding is taking place.
9. Both oxygen and acetylene cylinders must be secured in the upright position by
means of clamps or chains, both when stored, and when in use.
10. A suitable gauge, as is available from the oxy-acetylene cutting / welding torch
equipment manufacturer, is to be provided on both the oxygen and acetylene cylinder
in each cutting / welding torch set. These should be replaced or repaired if defective.
No cutting / welding equipment may be used if the gauges are defective.
11. If oxy-acetylene cutting / welding is to be conducted in an area where there is an

obvious fire risk (for example, where there are quantities of timber or other
combustibles, the area should be wet down for a radius of at least 10 metres around
the intended hot work position, before oxy-acetylene cutting / welding operations
commence. If the operations endure for a protracted period of time, the area should
be watered down again periodically to ensure that for the entire duration of cutting /
welding torch operations, the area remains wet, to reduce the risk of ignition.

Page 40 of 344
12. When hot work is to be performed at any position other than in a workshop, the
operator must be in possession of a valid and current hot work permit, authorised by
the responsible engineer or such competent person as he may appoint to issue such
hot work permits.
13. After use, the valves on the cylinders are to be closed, and the hoses purged. It is
unacceptable simply to close the gas supply to the torch.
14. On all oxy-acetylene cutting equipment, the valves on both compressed gas cylinders
must be fitted with a key or other arrangement, which shall allow the key to be
removed, or the valves to be otherwise secured by the trained person to whom the
equipment has been issued, so as to avoid tampering with the equipment by other
persons. To that end, such key or other measure must be removed and kept by the
person responsible for the equipment when such person is not in attendance at the
said equipment.
15. Whenever hot work has been performed in any location other than in a workshop, a
fire watch must be kept for at least 30 minutes after cessation of the cutting / welding
torch operations.
16. All cutting / welding torch sets are to be inspected on a monthly basis by the
responsible engineer, or such other competent person as such engineer may have
appointed to be responsible for cutting torch equipment in his section. The results of
such inspections shall be logged in a register kept for this purpose.
17. As part of the monthly inspection, the hoses belonging to all cutting / welding torch
sets must be inspected for damage and to ascertain whether they are perished or
remain serviceable. Partially damaged or perished hoses must be cut back to a
sound position and then re-affixed to the equipment. Hoses which are extensively
damaged or perished, should be replaced altogether.

Page 41 of 344
STD G12 - COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDER STORES
Requirements
1. Gas cylinder stores are to be sited no closer than 5 metres from any other building, or
if attached or adjoining a building, the interleading wall must be 2-hour fire rated (e.g.
225 mm - double brick thickness) and must be unbreached.
2. The store should be constructed of incombustible materials such as steel and

concrete. So-called “flame retardant” materials are not incombustible and are not
acceptable as construction materials for a gas cylinder store.
3. All cylinders to be stored upright and chained or otherwise secured in that position.
4. Cylinders must be separated by type. In the case of gases which constitute a danger
if they react together, types must be structurally or spatially separated. Separate
stores, at least 5 metres apart, would constitute spatial separation. Structural
separation could be achieved by building a 225 mm brick wall or erecting a 5 mm
steel plate between types. Such separating wall must extend at least 30 cm higher
than the tallest cylinder so separated. Note that the requirement for spatial or
structural separation by type does not apply if less than 4 cylinders of each type are
stored.
5. Empty cylinders are to be stored separate from full cylinders.
6. Compressed gas cylinder stores must have a roof to protect the cylinders from the
elements. Consistent with Requirement 2 above, roof material must be incombustible,
e.g. IBR sheeting or similar.
7. To prevent unauthorised access, the store must be enclosed and must have lockable
gates.
8. The walls on at least two sides of a compressed gas cylinder store must be of welded
mesh, expanded metal, diamond mesh, or similar, to allow good ventilation of the
store and to dissipate any gas which may leak, so as to obviate a dangerous build-up
of gas in the store.
9. If the total number of stored full compressed gas cylinders, of whatever type, in a
store is greater than 12, or if more than 12 compressed gas cylinders of any one type,
are stored in a compressed gas cylinder store, such store must be provided with
overhead sprinkler protection. Refer to Standard G2 regarding manual sprinkler
systems which are the norm for compressed gas cylinder stores, or to Standard G3
regarding automatic sprinkler systems which would also be acceptable as an
alternative at a compressed gas cylinder store.
10. Provide at least 2 x 9 kg DCP hand-held fire extinguishers outside the compressed
gas cylinder store. These should be positioned between 5 and 15 metres away from
the store, to ensure that they are readily accessible even after the outbreak of fire.
Their position should be clearly demarcated using the appropriate symbolic and
directional signage.

Page 42 of 344
11. Symbolic and informational signage must be posted up to the walls of the store, inter
alia, prohibiting smoking and naked flames, and demarcating the cylinder stores
according to type.
12. Hazardous data sheets are to be provided for all gas types stored.
13. Cylinders to be stored and used in order of receipt.
Standard G2 - Fire sprinkler systems - manual


Page 43 of 344
STD G13 - SINGLE STOREY OFFICE BUILDINGS
Requirements
1. Fire escape routes from all office buildings must adhere to the “45 metre rule” as
prescribed by SABS 0400 - 1990, the National Building Regulations. This dictates
that within 15 metres of travel from any point in the building, a person seeking to
escape must have the option of choosing between two alternative escape routes.
After this point, such person must be able to access fresh air unhindered within a
further 30 metres of travel.
2. Passive point heat and smoke detector heads must be installed in each room of any
single storey office complex having a total floor area of more than 1000m2. Detectors
must be affixed to the roof or ceiling. A choice between smoke and heat detector
heads must be made according to the prescriptions of SABS 0139. Inter alia, this
dictates that heat detectors alone (i.e. no smoke detectors, should be deployed in a
kitchen. At least two heads must be provided per room / zone to ensure that an alarm
will still be raised even if one of the heads is defective. For offices and other areas
where SABS 0139 does not prescribe the detector type, an approximate 50/50 split is
to be adopted between smoke and heat detector heads.
3. Passive point detector heads must report to a centralised electronic fire control panel,
located at a frequently occupied position in the building (e.g. reception) from whence
a local audible and visible alarm will be raised.
4. The abovementioned fire control panel must also be so configured as to raise a

remote alarm at a constantly monitored control room, so that response to fire may be
initiated rapidly whether the fire occurs after hours or during normal occupancy.
5. To make access to fire fighting equipment and escape doors possible under all
circumstances, a clearance area of 1.2 metres x 1.2 metres must be demarcated on
the floor and must be maintained in front of all fire fighting equipment and emergency
escape doors. This will include inter alia mounted fire extinguishers, 25 mm fire
hosereels, 65 mm fire hydrants and fire equipment storage boxes.
6. Provide manual call points (break-glass panels) at strategic positions throughout the
building. Inter alia, break-glass panels must be provided at each main entrance to the
building. These should be connected to the centralised main electronic fire control
panel contemplated in the previous requirements. The purpose of such manual call
points shall be to raise an alarm, if a fire is detected before the automatic fire
detection system has responded, or if the automatic fire detection system it defective.
7. Hand-held fire extinguishers are to be provided and deployed in accordance with the
requirements of Standard G28.
8. Firewalls, where provided, are to have a 60 minute fire rating and must extend up to
roof height, i.e. extend through the ceiling where necessary.
9. All fire doors, if any, must open outwards in the direction of egress and are to be a
minimum of 810 mm wide.

Page 44 of 344
10. Where emergency escape doors are provided which will normally be kept in the
closed / locked position for security reasons, these must be provided with an
internally positioned opening mechanism such as a Redlam bolt or a panic bar which
will allow the door to be opened from the inside unassisted by any person on the
outside of the building. An emergency door may not be locked from the outside and
persons seeking to escape must be able to use the door unhindered and unaided.
Note that it is not acceptable to use a conventional door as an emergency escape
door if the keys are kept by a key holder, on a hook, or in a break-glass panel located
near the door. All emergency escape doors must be suitably demarcated as such
using the approved symbolic and directional signage.
11. Where the escape route to an emergency escape door is circuitous or confusing,
symbolic signage must be erected at each change in direction, to ensure that persons
are able to escape easily, even in difficult conditions.
12. All escape routes must discharge directly to the outside of the building to a safe area
which is adequately lit at night.
13. An emergency evacuation assembly area must be designated in a safe area remote
from the building.
14. Any building of more than 250 m² floor area must be provided with a single 30 metre
fire hosereel for every 500 m² or part thereof of floor area and must be so positioned
as to ensure that the hose will reach any point of the area protected. Refer to
Standard G31 for 25 mm fire hosereel requirements.
15. Single storey office buildings must be so designed and constructed as to ensure
structural fire stability of at least 30 minutes duration, to ensure that persons have
adequate time to evacuate. Structural fire stability of the building must be of no less
than 30 minutes.
SABS 0400 - 1990: part TT16 - National Building Regulations

SABS 0139 - Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings - System design, installation and
servicing
SABS 0177: Part 2 - Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings :
Fire resistance test for building elements
SABS 543 - Fire hose reels
Standard G28 - Hand-held fire extinguishers
Standard G31 - 25 mm fire hosereels

Page 45 of 344
STD G14 - MULTI STOREY OFFICE BUILDINGS
Requirements
1. Fire escape routes from all office buildings must adhere to the “45 metre rule” as
that within 15 metres of travel from any point in the building, a person seeking to
After this point, such person must be able to access fresh air unhindered within a
further 30 metres of travel.
2. Passive point heat and smoke detector heads must be installed in each room of the
office complex, affixed to the roof or ceiling. A choice between smoke and heat
detector heads must be made according to the prescriptions of SABS 0139. Inter alia,
this dictates that heat detectors alone (i.e. no smoke detectors, should be deployed in
a kitchen. At least two heads must be provided per room / zone to ensure that an
alarm will still be raised even if one of the heads is defective. For offices and other
areas where SABS 0139 does not prescribe the detector type, an approximate 50/50
split is to be adopted between smoke and heat detector heads.
3. Passive point detector heads must report to a centralised electronic fire control panel,
located at a frequently occupied position in the building (e.g. reception) from whence
a local audible and visible alarm will be raised.
4. The abovementioned fire control panel must also be so configured as to raise a

remote alarm at a constantly monitored control room, so that response to fire may be
initiated rapidly whether the fire occurs after hours or during normal occupancy.
6. Provide manual call points (break-glass panels) at strategic positions throughout the
building. Inter alia, break-glass panels must be provided at each main entrance to the
building. These should be connected to the centralised main electronic fire control
panel contemplated in the previous requirement. The purpose of such manual call
points shall be to raise an alarm, if a fire is detected before the automatic fire
detection system has responded, or if the automatic fire detection system it defective.
7. Hand-held fire extinguishers are to be provided and deployed in accordance with the
8. Firewalls, where provided, are to have a 60 minute fire rating and must extend up to
roof height, i.e. extend through the ceiling where necessary.
9. All fire doors, if any, must open outwards in the direction of egress and are to be a
minimum of 810 mm wide.

Page 46 of 344
10. Where emergency escape doors are provided which will normally be kept in the
closed / locked position for security reasons, these must be provided with an
internally positioned opening mechanism such as a Redlam bolt or a panic bar which
will allow the door to be opened from the inside unassisted by any person on the
outside of the building. An emergency door may not be locked from the outside and
persons seeking to escape must be able to use the door unhindered and unaided.
Note that it is not acceptable to use a conventional door as an emergency escape
door if the keys are kept by a key holder, on a hook, or in a break-glass panel located
near the door. All emergency escape doors must be suitably demarcated as such
using the approved symbolic and directional signage.
11. Where the escape route to an emergency escape door is circuitous or confusing,
symbolic signage must be erected at each change in direction, to ensure that persons
are able to escape easily, even in difficult conditions.
12. All escape routes must discharge directly to the outside of the building to a safe area
which is adequately lit at night.
13. An emergency evacuation assembly area must be designated in a safe area remote
from the building.
14. Multi-storey office buildings must be so designed and constructed as to ensure

adequate time to evacuate. Structural fire stability of single storey buildings must be
of no less than 30 minutes.
15. Any building of more than 250 m² floor area must be provided with a single 30 metre
fire hosereel for every 500 m² or part thereof of floor area and must be so positioned
as to ensure that the hose will reach any point of the area protected. Refer to
Standard G31 for 25 mm fire hosereel requirements.
16. For office buildings in excess of three storeys in height, a 65 mm fire hydrant point
must be provided on each level. Usually, it would be acceptable to position this in the
centre of each floor, but where the footprint of the building exceeds 1 000 m², one
hydrant must be provided for every 1 000 m² or part thereof on each level. Refer to
Standard G29.
17. Where 65 mm hydrant points are required to be provided in a multi-storey office

building, a fire hose box must be provided on each level, close to one of the hydrant
points on that level. Such fire hose box must contain a minimum of 3 x 65 mm flat lay
fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle. Refer to Standard G29.
18. Where electrical cables are routed vertically between levels, all cable penetration
apertures between floors must be adequately fire stopped with an approved material.
See Standard G36.
19. Where fire stopping has been provided in accordance with the previous requirement,
cables passing through such fire stopping must be intumescent coated for a minimum
distance of 1 metre on either side of the fire stopping, over their entire circumference.
20. Where cables are vertically routed in a service shaft, the abovementioned
requirements for fire stopping and intumescent coating are no longer relevant.
However, in such case, a 2 metre firebreak must be constituted on all cable racks on

Page 47 of 344
every second level. Such firebreak may be achieved by intumescent coating all
cables in the group over their entire circumference with intumescent paint for the full
required distance of 2 vertical metres. Also see Standard G36 in this regard.
SABS 0400 - 1990: part TT16 - National Building Regulations

servicing
SABS 0177: Part 2 - Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings:
SABS 0105 - The use and control of fire-fighting equipment (Formerly, The classification,
use, and maintenance of portable fire extinguishers)

Page 48 of 344
STD G15 - ARCHIVES
Rationale
One of the most disastrous consequences of a fire is the loss of vital records, be they
contracts, plans, specifications, computer tapes or orders to name a few. Records are almost
always combustible and hence there is always a need to protect them protect against fire.
The most effective way of limiting the possibility of loosing records is to make duplicates
which are stored separately. This Standard will however only concern itself with the
protection of documents in archives.
Requirements
1. Archives may be protected by means of room flooding or in-cabinet gaseous fire

suppression systems, but these are not an absolute requirement unless the Archive
has been risk assessed as critical. Refer to Standards G7 and G8 regarding fixed
gaseous fire suppression systems and Standard G47 regarding the definition of
criticality.
2. Where provided, gaseous fire suppression systems must be provided with a means of
turning them to manual actuation mode, and this mode must be selected, whenever
persons are in attendance. When in manual actuation mode, it must be possible to
activate the system by means of one or more break-glass panels provided at suitable
positions outside the archive. At least one such break-glass unit must be provided
outside the main entrance door leading to the archive.
3. A passive point or aspirated automatic fire detection system must be installed in all
archives. Refer to Standard G9 for further details.
4. Where a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed, this should be capable of
automatic actuation (for use when the archive is unoccupied) and this automatic
actuation should be by means of the abovementioned automatic fire detection
system.
5. Access to archives must be controlled, and limited to authorised persons only.
6. Signage must be erected at all archives prohibiting smoking and naked lights.
7. No additional combustibles or flammables should be stored within an archive.
8. At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers should be provided at each

archive, one inside the main entrance door and one outside. At archives where no
fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed, a further 2 x 9 kg DCP fire
extinguishers must be provided inside the archive (total of 4). Such fire extinguishers
must be mounted in easily accessible positions at a height above floor elevation of
1.2 metres. They must be clearly demarcated by means of the relevant symbolic
signage. Refer to Standard G28.
9. All archives shall be constructed of incombustible materials. Incombustible means

“incapable of burning”, like steel, brick or mortar. So-called “flame retardant”, “fire
retardant”, “flame resistant” or “fire resistant” materials do not meet the

Page 49 of 344
incombustibility requirements for a high-risk installation such as an archive. These

merely have a higher ignition temperature, and retard fire spread, but will burn
eventually, and still add to the structural fire load (calorific value) of the building as a
whole. They are therefore not acceptable.
FPA Bulletin 23
Standard G9 - Passive versus aspirated detection systems

Page 50 of 344
STD G16 - VEHICLE WORKSHOPS ON SURFACE
Rationale
Most vehicles can be lost to fire or other catastrophic event without significantly affecting
production. This is because there is good duplicity afforded by the multiple vehicles in
service. However, where a significant number of vehicles are likely to be lost simultaneously,
business interruption could become significant.
One of the most common locations where several vehicles can be lost to fire simultaneously
is in workshops, because here the vehicles are parked close together, and fire spread
between the vehicles is likely to be rapid.
Manual fire fighting in such case has been proven historically to be ineffective given the high
energy levels present (rubber tyres and fuel tanks) and the speed with which vehicles burn
and fire propagates between vehicles. Resultantly, reliance in vehicle workshops, particularly
large ones, upon hand-held fire fighting devices, is not adequate. Moreover, structural sub-
division of the risk is not practicable, since workshops need to be large open areas so that
work can proceed smoothly.
Requirements
1. In vehicle workshops covering a floor area in excess of 250 m², a 30 metre long, 25
mm fire hosereel must be provided for every 500 m² or part thereof of floor area.
These hosereels must be positioned so as to ensure that the hose will reach any
point in the area protected by the hosereel. See Standard G31 regarding 25 mm fire
hosereel requirements.
2. 65 mm fire hydrants are not required inside any workshop. However, there must be
ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants”, i.e. hydrants located outside the
workshop.
It would be usual to provide a hydrant on either side of the workshop, so that a fire
occurring in the workshop can be attacked from two sides. Also, depending on wind
direction, it may not be possible to fight fire from a particular direction on a particular
day. These hydrants should not be positioned within 10 metres of the workshop
structure, so that they will remain accessible even after the outbreak of fire. However,
neither should they be positioned further than 30 metres from the workshop structure.
Pressure flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained in
Standard G29.
3. Either a fire hose box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65
mm nozzle must be provided at each hydrant point contemplated in the preceding
requirement, or there must be ready access on site to a cache of at least 9 x 65 mm
flat lay fire hoses, and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.
4. At least one 50 kg foam trolley must be provided. The trolley will satisfy the need for
advanced primary fire fighting and justifies the omission of a sprinkler or fixed foam
system. Also see Standard G49.

Page 51 of 344
5. Combustible materials are not to be used in the construction of workshops, save that
wooden beams in the roof, and “Marley” tiles shall be permissible.
6. If translucent sheets are set in the cladding of the workshop structure, these should
be positioned in horizontal rows, rather than vertical columns, since fire spreads
vertically most easily, and vertical translucent inserts will assist in the more rapid
propagation of fire.
7. Fire escape routes from all workshops must adhere to the “45 metre rule” as
prescribed by SABS 0400 - 1990, the National Building Regulations.
This dictates that within 15 metres of travel from any point in a building, a person
seeking to escape must have the option of choosing between two alternative escape
routes. After this point, such person must be able to access fresh air unhindered
within a further 30 metres of travel.
9. All emergency escape routes, and doors (where applicable), are to be clearly
demarcated using the correct symbolic and directional signage.
10. Vehicle workshop buildings must be so designed and constructed as to ensure

adequate time to evacuate.
11. Although it is not an absolute requirement that an automatic fire detection and alarm
system be provided in a workshop, some means must be provided for raising an
alarm in cases of fire and other emergency. This may be manually actuated, for
example, a siren.
Alternatively, an electrically powered alarm is acceptable. In such case, break-glass

panels or pushbuttons must be provided in strategic and easily accessible, well
demarcated positions, throughout the workshop. As a minimum, such activation
mechanisms must be provided at all main entrances to a workshop.
12. All rubber-lined equipment in this structure must be demarcated as such, to warn
persons intending to conduct hot work of the increased fire risk, so that they may
know to take additional precautions.
SABS 0400 - 1990: part TT 16 - National Building Regulations


Page 52 of 344
Standard G49 - Foam trolleys

Page 53 of 344
STD G17 - OTHER WORKSHOPS ON SURFACE
Requirements
1. All piped oxygen and acetylene supplies, if any, are to be suitably colour-coded.
2. Supply lines are to be fitted with emergency cut-off valves.
3. Notwithstanding the requirements stated in 5 and 6 below, a 9 kg hand-held DCP fire

extinguisher must be positioned within 5 metres of all positions in which welding and /
or oxy-acetylene cutting / welding is regularly and routinely performed.
4. Translucent welding screens are to be provided around all positions in which arc
welding is regularly and routinely performed, to protect workers in other parts of the
workshop from being exposed to the light emitted from the arc welding operations.
5. 9 kg DCP hand-held fire extinguishers are to be provided throughout the workshop

area at a rate of 1 extinguisher per 400 m² of floor area. These should be mounted at
a height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation and must be identified by means of the
relevant symbolic signage. Also see Standard G28.
6. In areas where sensitive electronic equipment is installed, stored, or regularly worked

on, 5 kg CO2 fire extinguishers may be substituted for the 9 kg DCP fire extinguishers
required in terms of Requirement 5 above. CO2 extinguishers are more suitable for
such risks, since CO2 will not damage such equipment.
7. In other surface workshops covering a floor area in excess of 250 m², a 30 metre
long, 25 mm fire hosereel must be provided for every 500 m² or part thereof of floor
area. These hosereels must be positioned so as to ensure that the hose will reach
any point in the area protected by the hosereel. See Standard G31 regarding 25 mm
fire hosereel requirements.
8. 65 mm fire hydrants are not required inside any workshop. However, there must be
ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants”, i.e. hydrants located outside the
workshop. It would be usual to provide a hydrant on either side of the workshop, so
that a fire occurring in the workshop can be attacked from two sides. Also, depending
on wind direction, it may not be possible to fight fire from a particular direction on a
particular day.
These hydrants should not be positioned within 10 metres of the workshop structure,
so that they will remain accessible even after the outbreak of fire. However, neither
should they be positioned further than 30 metres from the workshop structure.
Pressure flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained in
Standard G29.

Page 54 of 344
10. The construction of workshops shall use limited combustible materials so as to

minimise the fire load. Examples of concessions are wooden beams in the roof and
“Marley” tiles.
11. If translucent sheets are set in the cladding of the workshop structure, these should
be positioned in horizontal rows, rather than vertical columns, since fire spreads
vertically most easily, and vertical translucent inserts will assist in the more rapid
propagation of fire.
12. Fire escape routes from all workshops must adhere to the “45 metre rule” as
prescribed by SABS 0400 - 1990, the National Building Regulations.
This dictates that within 15 metres of travel from any point in a building, a person
seeking to escape must have the option of choosing between two alternative escape
routes. After this point, such person must be able to access fresh air unhindered
within a further 30 metres of travel.
14. All emergency escape routes, and doors (where applicable), are to be clearly
demarcated using the correct symbolic and directional signage.
15. Workshop buildings must be so designed and constructed as to ensure structural fire
stability of at least 30 minutes duration, to ensure that persons have adequate time to
evacuate.
16. Although it is not an absolute requirement that an automatic fire detection and alarm
system be provided in a workshop, some means must be provided for raising an
alarm in cases of fire and other emergency. This may be manually actuated, for
example, a siren. Alternatively, an electrically powered alarm is acceptable. In such
case, break-glass panels or pushbuttons must be provided in strategic and easily
accessible, well demarcated positions, throughout the workshop. As a minimum, such
activation mechanisms must be provided at all main entrances to a workshop.
SABS 0400 - 1990: part TT 16 - National Building Regulations

SABS 543 – Fire hose reels

Page 55 of 344
STD G18 - CRITICAL SUBSTATIONS AND MCCs ON SURFACE
Definition
A surface substation or MCC shall be deemed “critical” if safety of persons depends upon the
power distributed through that substation or MCC, or if power outage at such substation or
MCC has the potential to interrupt operations in an extensive part of the workings and would
result in significant loss of production.
Application
The contents of this Standard shall be binding with respect to new installations built after 1
January 2007. Any necessary deviation from the Standard must be approved before
implementation thereof by the Fire Standards Committee and written dispensation granted.
Regarding existing substations and MCC rooms, all practicable modifications must be made
to bring them as far as possible in line with the requirements of this Standard.
Requirements
1. The substation and / or MCC structure shall be constructed of incombustible

materials. Incombustible means “incapable of burning”, like steel, brick or mortar. So-
called “flame retardant”, “fire retardant”, “flame resistant” or “fire resistant” materials
do not meet the incombustibility requirements for a high-risk installation such as a
substation or MCC. These merely have a higher ignition temperature, and retard fire
spread, but will burn eventually, and still add to the structural fire load (calorific value)
of the building as a whole. They are therefore not acceptable.
The recommended substation structure will have a concrete floor, double brick
thickness brick walls, and a flat reinforced concrete roof. If a pitched roof is required,
then the roof panels must be incombustible (such as corrugated iron or IBR sheeting),
and the roofing beams should be of steel. A fire resistant ceiling should be provided in
such a case. Doors are to be steel set in steel frames, or SABS 2-hour fire rated.
2. Where the various sections of a substation building, for example, the MV room, the
LT room, the PLC room, the cable basement / room, etc., are structurally separated
from each other, separating walls must have a minimum fire resistance of 2-hours. A
225 mm brick wall is deemed to offer such resistance. All separating walls shall be
“perfect party walls”, i.e. they are to reach from true floor elevation all the way up to
roof height, passing through any false floor or ceiling which may exist. See Standard
G35 regarding “perfect party walls”. Any interleading doors set in such separating
walls shall be SABS-rated as having a 2 hour resistance to fire, and shall be self-
closing.
3. Any cable penetration aperture in an outer wall or an interleading wall of a substation

room, irrespective of the voltage in question, shall be fire stopped with an inert
material. See Standard G36 regarding fire stopping.
4. Any electrical or instrumentation cables passing through a fire stopped cable

penetration aperture as contemplated in the previous requirement shall be
intumescent coated for minimum distance of 1 metre on either side of such fire
stopping, using suitable intumescent coating or cables must pass through a ‘sand

Page 56 of 344
box’ located at the wall. Such intumescent coating shall be applied to the entire
circumference of each cable to such thickness as is stipulated by the manufacturer of
the particular intumescent product chosen, as being adequate to provide an SABS
rated fire resistance of at least 2 hours. See Standard G36 regarding intumescent
coating.
5. As far as possible, all power cables used must be of the “red stripe” flame retardant
type. Where possible, all other cables should also be flame retardant. See Standard
G1.
6. No windows should be provided in the interleading walls of a substation, since this

provides an obvious path for fire spread between sections of the substation.
Windows are permissible in the outer walls of all substations, provided that these do
not overlook oil-filled transformers or oil-filled power factor correction equipment
which may be installed alongside the substation.
In substation rooms where a fixed gaseous total flooding automatic fire suppression
system is installed, windows must be closed at all times or must preferably be non-
opening to ensure containment of the suppressant gas after discharge.
7. Where a substation room is ventilated by an electrically operated fan or

airconditioner, such fan or airconditioner must be interlinked with the fire detection
system, and configured to trip out and cease operating if a fire is detected. This
requirement applies whether a gaseous fire suppression system is installed or not.
This requirement is not relevant to fans or split unit airconditioners which only serve
to recirculate air.
8. At least 1 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided for each

substation room. These must be mounted outside or inside the main entrance door to
each substation room at a height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation. This position
should be clearly demarcated using the appropriate symbolic and directional signage.
9. Notwithstanding the immediately preceding requirement, DCP fire extinguishers

should not be deployed at PLC rooms and control rooms, in deference to the
sensitive electronic equipment installed there which would be damaged by the
chemical powder. Instead, 5 kg hand-held CO2 extinguishers are to be deployed in
such positions. Quantity and mounting requirements are the same as for DCP
extinguishers.
10. No additional equipment or materials, particularly if flammable or combustible, are to

be stored in any substation or MCC room. In particular, such rooms may not be used
as offices or stores.
11. A passive point fire detection system must be provided in all critical substations and
MCCs. Each room should be treated as a separate zone on the electronic control
panel to which the detector heads report. In each room, an approximate 50/50 split of
passive smoke and heat detection heads should be installed. See Standard G9 for
details of passive fire detection systems.
12. Coupled to the abovementioned electronic fire control panel must be at least one
manual call point (break-glass panel), to enable an alarm to be raised manually if, for

Page 57 of 344
whatever reason, the automatic detection system has failed to detect fire, or if the fire
is observed before the detection system has had time to trigger.
13. At all new installations, oil-filled switchgear is to be avoided. Only SF6 or vacuum-type
switchgear is to be used. At existing facilities whose remaining life is assessed as
being 5 years or more, consideration should be given to converting to SF6 or vacuum-
type switchgear.
14. In all critical substations where oil-filled switchgear is installed, a fixed total flooding
gaseous fire suppression system MUST be installed in the MV rooms and in all cable
rooms and basements associated with MV rooms.
A fixed total flooding gaseous fire suppression system MAY be installed in LT rooms
and PLCs. The presence of oil filled equipment is a strong indicator for this additional
protection. See Standard G7 for details on fixed total-flooding gaseous fire
suppression systems. Note in particular, the requirements for manual and automatic
actuation.
Where there is no ignition source and / or fire loading in the room other than the
electrical panels, an in-cabinet fixed gaseous fire suppression system may be an
acceptable alternative to room flooding. See Standard G8 for details on fixed in-
cabinet gaseous fire suppression systems. Note in particular, the requirements for
manual and automatic actuation.
15. Whether a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed or not, any ventilation
fans and air-conditioners provided in substation rooms are to be interconnected with
the fire detection system so that these will be tripped out and will cease to operate in
response to any fire detected by the automatic detection system.
This is important in substations which are not protected by gaseous fire

suppression systems, to ensure that fresh air and oxygen are not drawn into
the fire zone which will hasten fire spread and development.
In rooms where a fixed room-flooding gaseous fire suppression system is

installed, air-conditioners and fans must also be tripped out. Otherwise, force-
fans will dilute the suppressant gas concentration in the room, and exhaust
fans will draw the suppressant gas out of the room and exhaust it to
atmosphere, again resulting in dilution. If the concentration of the suppressant
gas in the room is diluted, it will not offer effective suppression as required by
design.
16. Cable trenches passing beneath a substation must be fire stopped wherever cables
pass from one substation room to another. Such fire stopping can be achieved with
‘sand boxes’ at the separating wall. At all fire stoppings, the cables must be
intumescent coated for a distances of 1 metre on either side of such fire stopping. In
this regard, see Requirements 3 and 4 above.
17. See Standard G21 regarding transformer installations associated with substations.
18. If a fire occurring at a substation or transformer installation is not contained within its
developmental stages, it will evolve into a fully involved structural fire and will require
intervention by fire teams using secondary fire fighting measures such as large bore
hydrants, hoses and foam applicators once the power source feeding the installation

Page 58 of 344
has been isolated. Each transformer installation and / or substation complex must be
located within the 90 metre radius of at least 2 x 65 mm hydrant points. Ideally, these
hydrant points will be located on opposite sides of the substation or transformer bank,
so that a fire can be fought from two sides, and access will remain possible
irrespective of wind direction. For requirements pertaining to fire hydrants and
equipment on surface, refer to Standard G29.
19. Either at each hydrant point, provide a fire equipment box containing at least 3 x 65
mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle, or…
at a central easily accessible position on surface, provide a cache of fire fighting

equipment including at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.
Standard G1 - Electrical cables

Standard G21 - Transformer installations on surface
Standard G35 - Perfect party walls

Page 59 of 344
STD G19 - OTHER SUBSTATIONS AND MCCs ON SURFACE
Definition
“Other” substations shall be deemed to mean all surface substations and MCCs not
classified as “critical”, as contemplated in Standard G18.
Application
Regarding existing substations and MCC rooms, all practicable modifications must be made
to bring them as far as possible in line with the requirements of this Standard.
Requirements
1. The substation and / or MCC structure shall be constructed of incombustible

materials. Incombustible means “incapable of burning”, like steel, brick or mortar. So-
called “flame retardant”, “fire retardant”, “flame resistant” or “fire resistant” materials
do not meet the incombustibility requirements for a high-risk installation such as a
substation or MCC. These merely have a higher ignition temperature, and retard fire
spread, but will burn eventually, and still add to the structural fire load (calorific value)
of the building as a whole. They are therefore not acceptable.
The recommended substation structure will have a concrete floor, double brick
thickness brick walls, and a flat reinforced concrete roof. If a pitched roof is required,
then the roof panels must be incombustible (such as corrugated iron or IBR sheeting),
and the roofing beams should be of steel. A fire resistant ceiling should be provided in
such a case. Doors are to be steel set in steel frames, or SABS 2-hour fire rated.
Converted shipping containers and similar are acceptable structures in which “other”
substations and MCCs may be located, provided that the roof and walls of such
containers adhere to the requirement of incombustibility. Therefore, they should have
no insulation material in the walls. This specifically excludes any types of styrene or
urethane. Flooring, which is often made of timber will be acceptable.
2. Where the various sections of a substation building, for example, the MV room, the
LT room, the PLC room, the cable basement / room, etc., are structurally separated
from each other, separating walls must have a minimum fire resistance of 2-hours. A
225 mm brick wall is deemed to offer such resistance. All separating walls shall be
“perfect party walls”, i.e. they are to reach from true floor elevation all the way up to
roof height, passing through any false floor or ceiling which may exist. See Standard
G35 regarding “perfect party walls”. Any interleading doors set in such separating
walls shall be SABS-rated as having a 2 hour resistance to fire, and shall be self-
closing.
3. Any penetration aperture in an outer wall or an interleading wall of a substation room,

irrespective of the voltage in question, shall be fire stopped with an inert material. See
Standard G36 regarding fire stopping.

Page 60 of 344
4. Any electrical or instrumentation cables passing through a fire stopped cable

coating.
5. As far as possible, all power cables used must be of the “red stripe” flame retardant
type. Where possible, all other cables should also be flame retardant. See Standard
G1.
6. No windows should be provided in the interleading walls of a substation, since this

provides an obvious path for fire spread between sections of the substation.
Windows are permissible in the outer walls of all substations, provided that these do
not overlook oil-filled transformers or oil-filled power factor correction equipment
which may be installed alongside the substation.
In substation rooms where a fixed gaseous total flooding automatic fire suppression
system is installed, windows must be closed at all times or must preferably be non-
opening to ensure containment of the suppressant gas after discharge.
7. Where a substation room is ventilated by an electrically operated fan or

airconditioner, such fan or airconditioner must be interlinked with the fire detection
system, and configured to trip out and cease operating if a fire is detected. This
requirement applies whether a gaseous fire suppression system is installed or not.
This requirement is not relevant to fans or split unit airconditioners which only serve
to recirculate air.

substation room. These must be mounted outside or inside the main entrance door to
each substation room at a height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation. This position
should be clearly demarcated using the appropriate symbolic and directional signage.
9. Notwithstanding the immediately preceding requirement, DCP fire extinguishers

should not be deployed at PLC rooms and control rooms, in deference to the
sensitive electronic equipment installed there which would be damaged by the
chemical powder. Instead, 5 kg hand-held CO2 extinguishers are to be deployed in
such positions. Quantity and mounting requirements are the same as for DCP
extinguishers.
10. No additional equipment or materials, particularly if flammable or combustible, are to

be stored in any substation or MCC room. In particular, such rooms may not be used
as offices or stores.
11. A passive point fire detection system may be provided in these “other” substations
and MCCs. Where a substation and / or MCC is remotely located, in an area where
occupancy is rare, a passive point fire detection system becomes an absolute
requirement.

Page 61 of 344
Each room should be treated as a separate zone on the electronic control panel to
which the detector heads report.
12. Coupled to the abovementioned electronic fire control panel, if installed, must be at
least one manual call point (break-glass panel), to enable an alarm to be raised
manually if, for whatever reason, the automatic detection system has failed to detect
fire, or if the fire is observed before the detection system has had time to trigger.
13. At all new installations, oil-filled switchgear is to be avoided. Only SF6 or vacuum-type
switchgear is to be used. At existing facilities whose remaining life is assessed as
being 5 years or more, consideration should be given to converting to SF6 or vacuum-
type switchgear.
14. In all “other” substations where oil-filled switchgear is installed, a fixed total flooding
gaseous fire suppression system shall be installed the MV rooms, and in all cable
rooms and basements associated with MV rooms.
A fixed total flooding gaseous fire suppression system shall be installed in LT rooms
and PLCs. The presence of oil filled equipment is a strong indicator for this additional
protection. See Standard G7 for details on fixed total-flooding gaseous fire
suppression systems. Note in particular, the requirements for manual and automatic
actuation.
Where there is no ignition source and / or fire loading in the room other than the
electrical panels, an in-cabinet fixed gaseous fire suppression system may be an
acceptable alternative to room flooding. See Standard G8 for details on fixed in-
cabinet gaseous fire suppression systems. Note in particular, the requirements for
manual and automatic actuation.
15. Whether a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed or not, any ventilation
fans and air-conditioners provided in substation rooms must be linked with the fire
detection system, so that these fans and air conditioners will be tripped out and will
cease to operate in response to any fire detected by the automatic detection system.


design.
16. Cable trenches passing beneath a substation must be fire stopped wherever cables
pass from one substation room to another. Such fire stopping can be achieved with
‘sand boxes’ at the separating wall. At all fire stoppings, the cables must be
intumescent coated for a distances of 1 metre on either side of such fire stopping. In
this regard, see Requirements 3 and 4 above.
17. See Standard G21 regarding transformer installations associated with substations.

Page 62 of 344
19. Either at each hydrant point, provide a fire equipment box containing at least 3 x 65
mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle, or…
at a central easily accessible position on surface, provide a cache of fire fighting

equipment including at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.

Standard G18 - Critical substations and MCCs on surface
Standard G21 - Transformer installations on surface

Page 63 of 344
STD G20 - MINI SUBSTATIONS ON SURFACE
Requirements
1. Electrical cables must be intumescent coated for at least 1 metre at the entry / exit
points. Alternatively, cables may be buried in a sand-filled trench. Such sand filling to
extend for at least 1 metre and preferably 2 metres.
2. At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers are to be provided at a clearly

demarcated position between 5 and 15 metres from mini substation to make the unit
accessible even after the outbreak of fire.
3. No combustible or flammable materials are to be stored within 5 metres of any mini

substation container. Therefore, for a distance of at least 5 metres around all mini
substation containers, the area is to be kept clear of all undergrowth.
Any related mine-specific COP

Page 64 of 344
STD G21 - TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS ON SURFACE
Application
This standard applies to all transformers located on surface other than those contained in MV
switching yards. See Standard G22 regarding transformers located in MV switching yards.
NB. Transformer separating walls need not be retrofitted in transformer installations built
before 2000.
Requirements
1. Transformers should be located in transformer bays, separate from substations and

other structures. If transformers are located in transformer bays which form part of a
substation or other building, then measures must be taken to completely separate the
transformers structurally from the rest of the building and / or change them to oil free
(dry type) transformers. In the case of the former option, all interleading walls
between individual transformers and between transformers and the rest of the
structure, must reach from floor to roof height. This does not pertain the front (outer)
wall of the transformer bays, which should be welded mesh gates, or similar, to allow
ventilation to reach the transformers. If the transformers are located in a multi-storey
building, then each transformer bay must have a reinforced concrete roof to prevent
fire spread from the transformers into the rest of the structure. Also see Standard G34
regarding separating walls.
NB.: The transformer bays must be adequate not to impair transformer cooling, that
is, they must not de-rate any transformer located therein.
2. In the case of transformers located in transformer bays which are spatially well
separated from the associated substation, transformers must be separated from each
other by means of a 225 mm thick brick wall, buttressed on the free end, built
between each adjoining pair of transformers. Such wall must extend to a height at
least 90 cm higher than the highest point on the highest transformer so separated
(usually the oil conservator).
3. Interleading separating walls as contemplated in the previous requirements, and the

back walls of transformer enclosures should ideally not be breached by any cable
penetration apertures. However, where such walls are breached, penetration must be
fire stopped and the cables intumescent coated for at least 1 metre on either side of
the penetration. See Standard G36 for details of fire stopping and intumescent
coating of cables. So that fire stopping and intumescent coating does not deteriorate
due to moisture, penetration apertures, if any, must be raised at least 30 cm above
ground elevation.
4. Where three or less transformers are grouped together, 1 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire
extinguisher must be provided per transformer in a central position. Where four or
more transformers are grouped together, 4 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers
must be provided in a central position.
The required number of fire extinguishers should be divided between two positions
each located between 5 and 15 metres from the transformer bank, to make them

Page 65 of 344
easily accessible even after the outbreak of fire. Where one or both such positions
are located around a corner out of direct line of site of the transformers, it is
acceptable to reduce the minimum distance to less than 5 metres, if access to the
extinguishers would be safe and possible even after the outbreak of fire.
In these positions, fire extinguishers must be mounted at a height of 1.2 metres

above ground elevation and the positions must be suitably demarcated with the
appropriate symbolic signage.
5. Some means such as lockable gates must be provided across the front of transformer
bays to ensure that access is not readily possible by unauthorised persons.
6. No additional articles of material or equipment may be stored in a transformer bay,

particularly combustible or flammable materials.
7. Each transformer bay must be individually bunded. See Standard G33 regarding the
requirements for bunding.
8. If transformers are installed within a building, then a passive point fire detection
system must be provided in the area in which the transformers are installed.
9. If transformers are installed in a building, then each transformer must be protected by

a fixed foam suppression system. See Standard G6 regarding the requirements for
fixed foam fire suppression systems.
11. At each hydrant point, provide a fire equipment box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat
lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle,
Or, at a central easily accessible position on surface, provide a central cache of fire
fighting equipment including at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 3 x 65 mm
nozzles.
Standard G6 – Fixed foam fire suppression systems

Standard G33 - Bunding
Standard G34 - Fire / separating walls

Page 66 of 344
STD G22 - MAIN MV SWITCH AND TRANSFORMER YARDS ON SURFACE
Application
Regarding existing main MV switch and transformer yards on surface, all practicable
modifications must be made to bring them as far as possible in line with the requirements of
this Standard.
Requirements
1. The yard must be securely fenced with locked gates to prevent unauthorised access.
2. No unnecessary additional combustible or flammable material or equipment shall be

stored in the yards. The yard is to be kept clear of all undergrowth. The yard must be
spatially separated from surrounding risk, including any associated substation
buildings. Therefore, no building should be built within 10 metres of the fence of the
yard.
3. Robust brick separating walls must be constructed between all oil-filled transformers
and MV switches located next to each other, unless these are separated spatially by
a distance of at least 30 metres. Such walls must be buttressed on their free ends to
ensure their strength, and should not be breached in any position. They may be
constructed of 300 mm reinforced concrete or 225 mm wide brick. Each separating
wall must extend to a height at least 90 cm higher than the highest point on the
highest transformer separated by the wall, usually the oil conservator. NB.
Transformer separating walls need not be retrofitted in transformer installations built
before 2000. Also see Standard G34 regarding fire / separating walls.
4. Each transformer is to be individually bunded. See Standard G33 regarding the

requirements for bunding.


Page 67 of 344
STD G23 - EMERGENCY AND STANDBY GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS ON SURFACE
Rationale
It is important to protect emergency and standby generators from any event which could
foreseeably interrupt normal power supply, since they are intended to provide back-up in
exactly those circumstances. Therefore, generator installations must be spatially or
structurally well separated from all other facilities, and must have automatic protection
against fire originating in the generator room.
Requirements
Standby and emergency generator installations on surface should comply with any relevant
Anglo American Co. specifications. Notwithstanding anything contained therein, the following
are the minimum requirements necessary to ensure adequate fire protection in relation to
such generator installations.
1. Ideally, standby and emergency generator installations will be housed

separately in a dedicated structure which is spatially well separated from all
other buildings. In such case, few structural measures are required to provide
preparation of the facility. One requirement is that a 2 metre firebreak must be
provided on all electrical cables entering or leaving the generator room. See Standard
G36 regarding the requirements for intumescent coating of electrical cables.
2. Where emergency and standby generators are to be located in part of a larger

structure which they are to share with other facilities, structural separation of the
generators from all other facilities in the structure is required. The following measures
are necessary to achieve this separation:
All interior, interleading walls of the generator room must be 2-hour fire rated
perfect party walls. See Standard G35 regarding the requirements for perfect
party walls.
To ensure adequate ventilation of the generator room, and to allow heat from
the generator to be dissipated, provide an extraction fan or fans of adequate
capacity to ensure sufficient air changes to achieve the heat dissipation.
These may only be mounted in an exterior wall. Ventilation louvres or ducts of
corresponding size must also be provided in the exterior wall of the generator
room.
If the structure has multiple levels, then the roof of the generator room must
be of reinforced concrete.
The generator room door must have a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours,
and must be self-closing.
The generator room floor, roof, and interior, interleading walls should not be
breached. If an aperture exists, then it must be fire stopped in accordance
with the requirements described in Standard G36.

Page 68 of 344
Any electrical or instrumentation cables passing through a fire stopped cable

penetration aperture shall be intumescent coated for minimum distance of 1
metre on either side of such fire stopping, using suitable intumescent coating
or cables must pass through a ‘sand box’ located at the wall. Such
intumescent coating shall be applied to the entire circumference of each cable
to such thickness as is stipulated by the manufacturer of the particular
intumescent product chosen, as being adequate to provide an SABS rated fire
resistance of at least 2 hours. See Standard G36 regarding intumescent
coating.
3. Provide a minimum of 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers at the generator

room, one outside the main entrance door and one inside the main entrance door.
These should be mounted at a height of 1.2 metres above floor or ground elevation
and should be suitably demarcated with the appropriate symbolic signage. See
Standard G28 for a full description of the requirements pertaining to hand-held fire
extinguishers.
4. No additional materials or equipment may be stored inside a generator facility. In

particular, additional flammables and combustibles are not permitted.
5. Legal requirements are defined in hazardous locations and electrical regulations.


Page 69 of 344
STD G24 - CONTROL ROOMS ON SURFACE
Rationale
Control rooms have significant potential for business interruption losses, since it is from here
that process control is exercised. Particularly with increased automation and growing reliance
on PLC and SCADA control, this issue is of greater concern than ever before. Conversely,
the phasing out of mimic panel control rooms in favour of more modern PC-based process
control, has made speed with which control rooms can be constructed or substituted much
more rapid than was previously the case.
Another consideration with control rooms is that they are usually constantly occupied, so that
any catastrophe affecting the control room should be rapidly detected by the staff in
attendance, who would then be able to initiate fire fighting efforts.
With the newer PC-based process controls, fire loading and ignition risk in a typical modern
control room is relatively low, especially where the control room is housed in a facility which
is separate from substations, MCCs, etc.
Where control rooms are housed in multi-level complexes, shared with substations and
MCCs, the fire risk to the CR is greatly increased by these external ignition sources and fire
loads. In such cases, perfect structural separation of the CR from the rest of the structure
becomes imperative.
Requirements
1. Control rooms may be protected by means of room flooding or in-cabinet gaseous fire
suppression systems, but these are not an absolute requirement. Refer to Standards
G7 and G8 regarding fixed gaseous fire suppression systems.
2. Where provided, gaseous fire suppression systems must be provided with a means of
turning them to manual actuation mode, and this mode must be selected, whenever
persons are in attendance. When in manual actuation mode, it must be possible to
activate the system by means of one or more break-glass panels provided at suitable
positions outside the control room. At least one such break-glass unit must be
provided outside the main entrance door leading to the control room.
3. A passive point or aspirated automatic fire detection system must be installed in all
control rooms. Refer to Standard G9 for further details.
4. Where a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed, this should be capable of
automatic actuation (for use when the control room is unoccupied) and this automatic
actuation should be by means of the abovementioned automatic fire detection
system.
5. Signage must be erected at all control rooms prohibiting smoking and naked lights.
6. No additional combustibles or flammables should be stored within a control room.
7. Under no circumstances must hand-held DCP fire extinguishers be provided inside,

or in close proximity to a control room. Instead, at least 2 x 5 kg hand-held CO2 fire

Page 70 of 344
extinguishers should be provided at each control, one inside the main entrance door
and one outside. At control rooms where no fixed gaseous fire suppression system is
installed, a further 2 x 5 kg CO2 fire extinguishers must be provided inside the control
room (total of 4). Such fire extinguishers must be mounted in easily accessible
positions at a height above floor elevation of 1.2 metres. They must be clearly
demarcated by means of the relevant symbolic signage. Refer to Standard G28.


Page 71 of 344
STD G25 - IT ROOMS
Requirements
All IT rooms are to be provided with the following protection measures:
A1. Access to IT rooms must be strictly controlled, with only authorised personnel
allowed.
A2. Every cable penetration aperture in any outer wall of an IT room, or cable trench
exiting such facility, shall be fire stopped with an inert material. See Standard G36
regarding fire stopping.
A3. Any electrical or instrumentation cables passing through a fire stopped cable
coating.
A4. Under no circumstances must hand-held DCP fire extinguishers be provided inside,
or in close proximity to an IT room. Instead, at least 2 x 5 kg hand-held CO2 fire
extinguishers should be provided at each room, one inside the main entrance door
and one outside. At control rooms where no fixed gaseous fire suppression system is
installed, a further 2 x 5 kg CO2 fire extinguishers must be provided inside the control
room (total of 4). Such fire extinguishers must be mounted in easily accessible
positions at a height above floor elevation of 1.2 metres. They must be clearly
demarcated by means of the relevant symbolic signage. Refer to Standard G28.
A5. No superfluous equipment or materials not actually in use, and particularly if

flammable or combustible, are to be stored in any IT room.
A6. Whether a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed or not, any ventilation
fans and air-conditioners provided in IT rooms are to be interconnected with the fire
detection system, if any, so that these will be tripped out and will cease to operate in
response to any fire detected by the automatic detection system.
This is important in rooms which are not protected by gaseous fire


design.

Page 72 of 344
A7. It is recommended that IT rooms be constructed of incombustible materials.

Incombustible means “incapable of burning”, like steel brick or mortar. So-called
“flame retardant”, “fire retardant”, “flame resistant”, or “fire resistant” materials do not
meet the incombustibility requirements of sensitive installations such as IT rooms.
Such materials merely have a higher ignition temperature, and retard fire spread, but
will burn eventually, and still add to the structural fire load (calorific value) of the
building as a whole. They are therefore not acceptable in this application. This
pertains to the structure and not to floor coverings, furniture, fittings or similar.
A8. Where an IT room is located within a larger structure, it must be structurally

separated from the rest of the structure. Walls must be perfect party walls reaching
from true floor elevation to full roof height, and passing through any false floor or
ceiling which may be installed. Such walls should not be breached in any place. Any
doors set in the walls of an IT room which is located in a greater structure housing
other facilities, shall have a fire resistance rating of 2 hours, and shall be fitted with an
automatic closing mechanism. See Standard G35 regarding the requirements for
perfect party walls.
A9. Where any of the perfect party walls contemplated in the abovementioned paragraph
are breached, possibly to allow for the passage of cables, such apertures must be fire
stopped using an inert material, and any cables passing through the fire stopping
must be intumescent coated over their entire circumference for a distance of at least
1 metre on either side of the fire stopping. See Standard G36 regarding the
requirements for fire stopping and the intumescent coating of cables.
The criticality of IT rooms must be assessed with particular consideration for potential loss of
data and business interruption. Where such facilities are assessed as “critical”, the
following additional requirements shall pertain:
C1. A fixed passive point or aspirated fire detection system must be provided. See
Standard G9 pertaining to such systems.
C2. A fixed total flooding gaseous suppression system must be installed to cover the
entire room or rooms in which the facility is located. This should be capable of manual
actuation by means of break-glass panels and automatic actuation via the automatic
fire detection system contemplated in 1 above. See Standard G7 regarding fixed
gaseous room flooding fire detection systems.
C3. Any under floor cable void, if any, must be treated as a separate zone, both for
detection and suppression purposes.
C4. The fixed automatic room flooding gaseous fire suppression system must be fitted
with a manual override so that the system may be placed in manual actuation mode
when persons are in attendance. Automatic actuation mode should be resumed when
the premises are vacated.
C5. The facility must be tightly sealing with all external doors fitted with automatic closing
mechanisms. The fire extinguishing system must be tested on completion of
installation and a test certificate issued, indicating the deterioration rate of the
extinguishing medium within the confines of the facility.

Page 73 of 344
C6. Windows must be closed at all times or preferably non-opening to ensure

containment of the suppressant gas after discharge.


Page 74 of 344
STD G26 - PLANT STRUCTURES
Requirements
1. 65 mm fire hydrants are to be installed at the rate of one per level in all buildings
exceeding 12 metres in height.
2. In all structures with a footprint exceeding 1000 m², fire hydrants will be installed on
all levels at a rate of one per 1000 m² or part thereof.
3. At each hydrant point in a building, a fire equipment box or cupboard must be

provided, containing no less than 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm
nozzle. Such cupboards must be coloured red and must be suitably demarcated as
such by means of the relevant symbolic and informational signage.
4. A minimum of one hand-held fire extinguisher shall be deployed per 2000 m² of floor
area. This number should be increased where there is excessive fire loading or there
is high risk of ignition. Additional fire extinguishers may also be required where an
area is sub-divided, for example, for security reasons or process purposes, or where
densely installed equipment makes access to extinguishers difficult from certain
positions.
In all normal applications, 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers are to be

deployed.
Where sensitive electronic equipment is installed, 5 kg hand-held CO2

extinguishers should be substituted.
Fire extinguishers are to be mounted at a height of 1.2 metres above the floor
or ground elevation in easily accessible positions, clearly demarcated with the
relevant symbolic signage.
5. Fire escape routes from all plant structures must adhere to the “45 metre rule” as
that within 15 metres of travel from any point in a structure, a person seeking to
After this point, such person must be able to access fresh air unhindered within no
more than a further 30 metres of travel.
6. All escape routes are to be clearly demarcated as such by means of the relevant
symbolic and directional signage, both at the escape doors, and internally, at every
change in direction of an escape route.
7. The following requirement is relevant to open-sided or partially clad plant structures.

For fully enclosed plant structures, this requirement would not be appropriate.
In all plant structures with two or more levels, escape must be possible via at least
two stairwells. These stairwells must comply with the following requirements:
They must be constructed of incombustible materials (i.e. steel; concrete).

Wooden staircases are not acceptable.

Page 75 of 344
Staircases must be at least 1.2 metres wide.
Stairs must have non-slip surfaces.
Stairways must be fitted with handrails.
The stairwells should be located on approximately opposite sides of the

structure.
At the bottom of each stairwell, on ground elevation, there must be an opening

or door permitting free egress from the building.
8. Storage of combustible and flammable materials is to be kept to a bare minimum in

all structures. Only working quantities are allowed. In particular, emergency escape
routes are to be kept clear of flammables and combustibles.
9. In addition to the hydrant points contemplated above, which are intended for
secondary fire fighting purposes, the National Building Regulations, SABS 0400 -
1990, requires that 25 mm fixed fire hosereels must be installed at the rate of one per
500 m² of floor area or part thereof, on each level. Fire hosereels must comply with all
requirements as stated in Standard G31.
10. Fire protection of electrical installations located within the structure, if any, is to be in
accordance with the requirements stated in Standards G7 and G8.
11. Some means must be provided on each level of the structure for raising an audible
alarm in cases of fire and other emergency. Where an automatic fire detection system
is installed, this may be by means of one or more break-glass panels provided on the
levels, coupled to the control panel of such detection system. Actuation of the manual
call points will then trigger an alarm in the system.
At least one manual call point (button or break-glass panel) or manually operated
alarm is required per 1000 m² of floor area per level. These should ideally be
positioned close to escape routes / stairwells / main doors and should be clearly
demarcated.
12. Where electrical or instrumentation cables pass vertically from one level to another,
through a fire rated floor (e.g. reinforced concrete), such cable penetration aperture
must be fire stopped using a suitable inert material. Cables must be intumescent
coated for a distance of at least 1 metre on either side of such fire stopping, over their
entire circumference. See Standard G36 regarding the requirements for fire stopping
and intumescent coating.
Where cables pass vertically between levels through a non-fire rated floor (e.g.
Mentis-type grating), or where cables are routed in a service shaft, a 2 metre high
firebreak must be constituted on the cables as a group on every 2nd level. This may
be achieved by coating the cables with an intumescent paint over their entire
circumference for a distance of at least 2 metres. See Standard G36 regarding the
requirements for intumescent coating. Note that no fire stopping is required in such
case.

Page 76 of 344
SABS 1128, Part 1 - Fire fighting equipment: Components of underground and above-ground
hydrant systems
SABS 0400 – 1990 - National Building Regulations

Page 77 of 344
STD G27 - BATTERY CHARGING BAYS ON SURFACE
Application
This Standard does not apply to Lamp Rooms.
Requirements
1. To prevent build-up of fumes and gases during battery charging, particularly

hydrogen gas, the facility should be open sided, with walls typically constructed of
expanded metal, diamond mesh or welded mesh, or else the facility must be through-
ventilated by means of louvres or other openings on one side with a fan or fans set in
the opposite wall.
2. All shelves on which batteries are charged are to be of wood or must be rubber-lined.
3. Except as is provided in the previous requirement, pertaining to shelves, battery

charging rooms are to be of conventional construction.
4. At least one hand-held fire extinguisher must be provided at the facility. This should
be mounted outside the main entrance door or gate. Either a DCP fire extinguisher or
a CO2 fire extinguisher is suitable. The fire extinguisher should be mounted at a
height of 1.2 metres above floor or ground elevation and should be suitably
demarcated by means of appropriate symbolic and directional signage. See Standard
G28 for further details.
5. Access to battery charging facilities must be restricted to authorised persons only.
6. Signage must be erected prohibiting smoking and naked lights.
7. All parts of battery charging bays must be declared “no smoking zones”. Signage
must be erected prohibiting smoking and naked lights. Work in battery charging bays
must only be permitted under a hot work permit system, which includes a fire watch
being kept until completion of hot work, as contemplated in Standard G11.
Standard G11 - Oxy-acetylene cutting and welding


Page 78 of 344
STD G28 - HAND-HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Requirements
1. A minimum of one hand-held fire extinguisher to be deployed per 200 m2 of floor

area, increasing in density in areas with a high fire load and / or an increased risk of
ignition.
2. Normal deployment is to be 9 kg DCP hand-held fire extinguishers.
3. In offices and areas where there are many female staff members, or disabled
persons, who may find 9kg units difficult to handle, 2 x 4.5kg hand-held DCP units
may be substituted for every 9kg DCP unit. Note that this concession is never
appropriate in an industrial area such as a workshop or plant building, where 9 kg
units are an absolute requirement.
4. In areas where sensitive electronic equipment, foodstuffs, and medicines are present,
5 kg hand-held CO2 fire extinguishers should be substituted in place of the 9kg hand-
held DCP fire extinguishers.
5. Fire extinguishers are to be mounted 1.2 metres above ground or floor level, against
a wall or other suitable support.
6. The relevant symbolic signage indicating the position of each fire extinguisher shall
be posted up. Such signage must comply with SABS 0400 TT29, FPA Bulletin 19,
NFPA 170 & SABS 1186.
7. Directional signage is only necessary if the extinguisher is in an obscured position

(e.g. around a corner). Otherwise the symbolic signage and the extinguisher’s colour
(red) shall serve to indicate its position.
8. An area of 1.2 metres x 1.2 metres shall be demarcated on the floor where fire
extinguishers are mounted, and shall be kept clear of obstructions at all times, to
make access to the fire extinguishers possible whenever required.
9. Monthly inspections must be conducted on all fire extinguishers deployed. Results

must be logged and deviations noted must be rectified within the shortest reasonable
time.
10. Servicing by an accredited external agency is to be performed on each unit once per
year.
11. Pressure testing of the cylinders is to be performed every 3 years.
12. Fire extinguishers located inside plant buildings should ideally be mounted within see-
through “Extinguimate” type extinguisher cabinets, to prevent them from deterioration
due to the harsh environment.
13. Fire extinguishers located externally, and which are exposed to the elements should
ideally be mounted within glass or steel extinguisher cabinets, to protect them from
the elements.

Page 79 of 344
14. Fire extinguishers inside buildings which do not constitute harsh environments, such
as office blocks, workshops, substations, stores and similar, do not require cabinets
and may be hung from a wall bracket.
FPA Bulletin 19
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
SABS 1475 : Part I - The production of reconditioned fire-fighting equipment: Portable and
wheeled (mobile) rechargeable fire extinguishers (Formerly, The production of reconditioned
fire-fighting equipment: Portable rechargeable fire extinguishers)
SABS 0105 : Part I - The use and control of fire-fighting equipment (Formerly, The
classification, use, and maintenance of portable fire extinguishers)

Page 80 of 344
STD G29 – 65 mm FIRE HYDRANTS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
Requirements
1. Area hydrants should be positioned on a 90m x 90m grid. By ‘area hydrants’ is meant
hydrants which are located at ground level and are intended to cover a wide area
such as a plant, a multiple workshop complex, or an office park, where a number of
unattached buildings are located. Area hydrants serve two purposes:
They obviate the need for internal hydrants in some of the smaller buildings,
since reliance may be placed upon the area hydrants alone.
They offer a fall-back fire fighting strategy for use when a fire in a structure has
developed past the point where fire fighting operations can be conducted
internally using internally provided hydrants and hosereels. At this point, fire
fighters will retreat to a safe position outside the building, and will spray water
on the flames using area hydrants. The purpose of this activity might be to
attempt to contain fire to only certain levels of the structure, or to prevent the
fire from spreading to other areas of the plant or other complex.
Note however, that hydrants associated with specific buildings (“structural hydrants”),
may in some instances satisfy the requirement for area hydrants.
2. 65 mm fire hydrants are to be installed at the rate of one per level in all buildings
exceeding 12 metres in height.
3. In all structures with a footprint exceeding 1000 m², fire hydrants will be installed on
all levels at a rate of one per 1000 m² or part thereof.
4. In close proximity to each “structural hydrant” located in a building, a fire hose box or
cupboard must be provided, containing a minimum of 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses
and a single 65 mm nozzle.
5. In the case of “area hydrants”, either a fire hose box containing at least 3 x 65 mm
flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle must be provided in a fire equipment
box at each hydrant point, or there must be ready access in a central position on site
to a cache of at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses, and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.
In either case, the receptacle in which the fire equipment is kept must be colour
coded red and must be suitably demarcated with appropriate symbolic signage.
6. 65 mm fire nozzles, also called branches, shall have a 65 mm male fitting, and an
internal diameter of 16mm. They may be fixed or variable jet, except that where
nozzles are provided primarily for the use of fire teams only, then at least 50% of the
nozzles provided shall be variable jet, to cater for specialist applications.
7. Hydrants in elevated positions, for example in multi-level plant structures or on

conveyor gantries, must be supplied off a steel rising or inclined main of minimum
diameter 100mm which in turn is taken off a steel ring fed fire main at ground
elevation which should be of minimum diameter 300 mm.

Page 81 of 344
Notwithstanding the above, no more than 3 x 65 mm fire hydrants may be taken off
any 100 mm spur line leading off the ring main. If additional hydrants are required,
then the spur line must be increased to 300 mm, in diameter, in which case the
number may increase to five.
8. Single hydrants may be fed off a spur line of minimum diameter 75 mm, provided that
no such 75mm spur line should exceed 300m in length. This requirement shall also
apply to the standpipes of single hydrants.
9. Concerning the minimum diameters specified above, note that at no point on the
supply line may the supply pipe be restricted or reduced to a lesser diameter,
irrespective of for how short a distance. This is based on the principle that the
effective diameter of a pipe is equal to its diameter at the narrowest point in its length.
10. All fire water mains and supply lines right up to the hydrant point must be of steel,
unless they are buried underground, in which case, Class 6 HDPE pipe is acceptable.
11. Colour-code all hydrant points and above ground fire mains red.
12. Irrespective of the aforegoing requirements, all hydrants on the system must be
supplied at a minimum static pressure of 300 kPa. If necessary, increase the
diameter of the pipes to achieve this pressure.
13. Irrespective of the aforegoing, the water supply in the fire mains must be adequate to
ensure a minimum flow rate at each hydrant of 1200 l/min, measured when any three
hydrants on the system are open simultaneously. If necessary, increase the diameter
of the fire mains to achieve this required flow.
14. All “area hydrants” are to be located at least 3 metres away from any structure or
installed equipment, so that they can be accessed even if the fire has already taken
hold on that structure or equipment. This does not apply to “structure hydrants”.
15. Hydrants should be located as close as possible to hard surfaces / roadways, so that
fire engines connecting to them do not sink into the mud that will develop from
prolonged fire fighting.
16. All 65 mm hydrant points, and fire hose boxes, cabinets, cupboards and other
receptacles, must be inspected monthly by persons appointed in writing to perform
this task. Such persons should be suitably trained and the results of the inspections
must be logged. Any deviations noted must be rectified in the shortest possible time,
as befits the importance of all emergency equipment.
17. All 65 mm hydrant points, and fire hose boxes, cabinets, cupboards and other
receptacles, must be inspected annually by an accredited external service provider.
Effective hydrants and equipment are to be replaced or repaired as directed, again in
the shortest possible time.
18. No process / service water may be drawn from a fire main. Fire mains must be
dedicated to fire fighting purposes, from the reservoir to the point of delivery.
19. 65 mm hydrants, hoses and nozzles will not be used for any purpose other than fire
fighting. This requirement does not pertain to area hydrants.

Page 82 of 344
20. The relevant symbolic signage indicating the position of each structural hydrant shall
be posted up. Such signage must comply with SABS 0400 TT29, FPA Bulletin 19,
NFPA 170 & SABS 1186.
21. Directional signage is only necessary if the structural hydrants are in an obscured
position (e.g. around a corner). Otherwise the symbolic signage and the red colour of
the structural signage shall serve as adequate indication of its position. This
requirement does not pertain to area hydrants.

SANS 1128 Part 1 - Fire fighting equipment: Components of underground and above-ground
hydrant systems
SABS 1128: Parts 2 - Fire fighting equipment: Hose couplings, connectors and branch pipe
and nozzle connections
NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (Part WW)
NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
FPA Bulletin 19

Page 83 of 344
STD G30 - FIRE FIGHTING WATER SUPPLY AND FIRE PUMPS
Requirements
1. The capacity of the water supply reservoir, dam or tank which must be always readily
available via the fire water mains which supply inter alia the 65 mm hydrant points
and the 25mm fire hosereels, shall be adequate to sustain fire fighting from 3
hydrants operating simultaneously for 120 minutes, i.e. 3 x 1200 litres per minute x
120 minutes which equates to a minimum reservoir capacity of 432 kl, dedicated to
fire.
To ensure that this supply is dedicated to fire, a separate reservoir should be

provided for the storage of fire fighting water. Alternatively, a process water reservoir
may be shared, but the takeoff for the fire system must be positioned sufficiently
lower in the reservoir to ensure that even when the process water supply runs ‘dry’,
there is at least 432kl of water left in the reservoir, available through the fire mains.
Points from which process / service water is drawn, must be supplied from separate
and independent, and via a separate service water main which is not interconnected
with the fire main.
2. The standard governing fire water supply is SABS 0287 which deals inter alia with fire
pump requirements.
3. Ideally, water for fire fighting purposes will be gravity fed which will remove all need
for fire pumps, and all risk of a lack of fire fighting water as a result of power or pump
failure. However, if this is not possible, then fire pumps must be provided. Most
importantly, the fire pumps should comply with the following requirements:
An electrically driven jockey pump must be provided to maintain pressure

in the fire mains under normal conditions when there is no drain on the
system.
This should turn on automatically in response to any pressure drop in the

system, and should turn off once the required pressure has been attained. A
timing factor should also be built into the PLC of this unit to ensure that it does
not switch on and off repeatedly at short intervals.
An electrically driven main fire pump must be provided to maintain

pressure in the fire mains under demand conditions such as will occur when
there is a drain on the system during fire fighting.
This pump should turn on automatically in response to any pressure drop in

the system with which the jockey pump cannot cope, and should turn off once
the required pressure has been attained and is being maintained. A timing
factor should also be built into the PLC of this unit to ensure that it does not
switch on and off repeatedly at short intervals. This pump needs to be able to
supply 75% of the stated maximum demand of 3600 l/min at 300kPa static
pressure, sustainable for 120 minutes. Also refer to Standard G29.
A diesel driven standby main fire pump must be provided to maintain

pressure in the fire mains under demand conditions if:

Page 84 of 344
- The electrically driven jockey pump conjoined with the electrically driven
main fire pump cannot cope with the demand, and / or…
- There is a power failure, so that the electrically driven jockey pump and
main fire pump cannot run.
This pump should turn on automatically in response to any pressure drop in the
system with which the jockey pump and the electrically driven main fire pump cannot
cope, and should turn off once the required pressure has been attained and is being
maintained. A timing factor should also be built into the PLC of this unit to ensure that
it does not switch on and off repeatedly at short intervals. This pump needs to be able
to supply 75% of the stated maximum demand of 3600 l/min at 300kPa static
pressure, sustainable for 120 minutes.
4. Note (1) that it is acceptable to forego the requirement to provide a main electrically
driven fire pump as contemplated in the second bullet point above, on condition that:
The capacity of the installed diesel driven fire pump is at least 120% of the
stated maximum demand of 3600 l/min at 300 kPa static pressure,
sustainable for 120 minutes, and
Life-safety does not depend upon the fire fighting water supply.
5. Note (2) that it is acceptable to forego the requirement to provide a diesel driven
standby main fire pump as contemplated in the second bullet point above, on
condition that.
The capacity of the installed electrically driven fire pump is at least 120% of
the stated maximum demand of 3600 l/min at 300 kPa static pressure,
sustainable for 120 minutes, and
Life-safety does not depend upon the fire fighting water supply.
Adequate emergency diesel powered generating capacity is installed at the
plant to allow for the running of such pump in addition to all the other functions
for which such emergency supply is required.
NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (Part WW
NFPA 20 - Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
ASIB (compliance is mandatory only where the pumps supply sprinkler systems, upon which
life safety depends)

Page 85 of 344
STD G31 – 25 mm FIRE HOSEREELS
Requirements
1. In all buildings, including inter alia warehouses, plant structures, workshops and
offices complexes, 25 mm hosereels must be installed at the rate of 1 per 500 m² of
building floor area.
2. Each 25 mm fire hosereel must be fed via a steel takeoff line of minimum diameter 32
mm.
3. These 32 mm take-off lines should be fed off a steel fire water main of minimum
diameter 100 mm.
4. The water supply to the 25 mm fire hosereels shall be sourced from the main ring fed
water main. Also see Standard G30.
5. Where a conveyor path is protected by 25mm fire hosereels, the main 100mm supply
line should be positioned alongside the conveyor path, not above it. If possible, it
should also be positioned at least 1m away from the conveyor belt. Refer to
Standards G41, G42 and G43.
6. Fire hose reels should be supplied at a water pressure of no less than 300 kPa static
pressure.
7. Each fire hosereel must be able to deliver a flow of no less than 0.5 litres per second
(30 litres per minute).
8. Where a conveyor path is protected by 25 mm fire hosereels, these must be

positioned no further than 30 metres apart.
9. All fire hosereels in service must be inspected monthly by a member of staff

appointed in writing for that purpose. Such person shall be suitably trained, and shall
log results of his inspections in a book to be kept for that purpose. As befits critical
emergency equipment, all faults noted are to be rectified as soon as practicable.
10. All fire hosereels must be inspected annually by an accredited external service
provider, who, on completion of their inspections, shall provide a detailed report per
hosereel, indicating any faults which may have been found. As befits critical
emergency equipment, all such faults shall be rectified, or the equipment replaced as
soon as practicable.
11. No process water point may be fed off the fire water main. This includes all supply
lines leading to 25 mm fire hosereels.
12. Hosereels and fire fighting water shall not be used for any purpose other than fire
fighting.
13. The hosereels and above ground supply lines should be colour-coded red.

Page 86 of 344
14. All supply lines, from the source to the hosereel must be of steel, unless they are
buried underground, in which case Class 6 HDPE is acceptable.
15. An area of 1.2 metres x 1.2 metres must be demarcated on the floor at all positions in
which 25 mm fire hosereels are mounted. This area must be kept free of obstructions
at all times, to ensure easy access to the fire hosereels in an emergency.
16. The relevant symbolic signage indicating the position of each 25 mm fire hosereel
shall be posted up. Such signage must comply with SABS 0400 TT29, FPA Bulletin
19, NFPA 170 & SABS 1186.
17. Directional signage is only necessary if the 25 mm fire hosereel is in an obscured

position (e.g. around a corner). Otherwise the symbolic signage and the red colour of
the 25 mm fire hosereel shall serve as adequate indication of its position.
18. The minimum acceptable length of hose on a 25 mm fire hosereel is 30 metres.

FPA Bulletin 19
SABS 0105 : Part 2 - The use and control of fire-fighting equipment: Fire hose reels,
hydrants and booster connections (Formerly, The classification, use and control of fire-
fighting equipment: Fire hose reels)
Standard G41 - Overland conveyors
Standard G42 - Elevated conveyors on surface
Standard G43 - Surface tunnel, bunker and silo conveyors

Page 87 of 344
STD G32 - HYDRAULIC LUBRICATION AND POWER PACKS
Requirements
1. All hydraulic power and lubrication packs are to be adequately bunded. NB. No
containment in the form of bunding or drip trays shall be required on heavy machinery
e.g. stackers.
2. Where hydraulic power and lubrication packs, and similar equipment, are located in a
critical area (see Standard G47), and where the flammable liquid content of a single
unit, or of a number of units grouped together, exceeds 300 litres, an automatically
activated high velocity water deluge fire suppression system (see Standard G5) or a
fixed foam automatic fire suppression system (see Standard G6) must be provided at
such unit or group of units.
3. Absorbent mineral, such as mineral granules, must be used for the absorption of any
spillage which may occur in the bunded area. No flammable or combustible material
such as sawdust or wood shavings may be used for this purpose.
4. Such packs should ideally always be positioned within a fire-rated compartment to

separate them from the rest of the process. If not so contained, the minimum
requirement is that they should be positioned at least 5 metres horizontally from any
other equipment or stored material, so as not to affect these if a fire should break out
on the packs.
5. Whenever possible, non-flammable or fire retardant fluids should be used in hydraulic

power and lubrication packs. This is particularly relevant where effective structural
separation in a fire-rated compartment, as contemplated in Requirement 4 above, is
not present.
6. Obvious ignition sources in the immediate vicinity of hydraulic power and lubrication
packs must be avoided. Electrical cables, motors, switchgear and lights, unless
intrinsically safe, should not be located within a bund, unless they are raised, for
example on a plinth, above the level of the bund wall.
7. Provide an excess flow cut-out mechanism on all hydraulic power packs.
8. Provide a thermal cut-out on all hydraulic power packs.

Standard G5 - High velocity water deluge systems
Standard G6 - Fixed foam fire suppression systems

Page 88 of 344
STD G33 - BUNDING
Application
Bunds are to be constructed around oil-filled transformers, oil/diesel stores, hydraulic power
packs, lubrication packs and similar, to prevent burning liquids from flowing and spreading
fire elsewhere, in the event of a fire at these installations.
Requirements
1. Construct bund walls of 225mm wide brick (i.e. double brick thickness), or 300 mm
wide reinforced concrete.
2. Bunds should have an impervious concrete floor for environmental protection

purposes, and should be constructed to form a reservoir that is leak-free and capable
of containing at least 110% of the volume of the retained flammable liquids in the
equipment which is installed within the bund. Note that in calculating such volume,
allowance must be made for the footprint of any plinth or platform upon which items of
equipment like transformers, or stored flammable liquid drums, may be positioned.
Such bund walls should be pinned or otherwise affixed to the underlying concrete
floor, to ensure their robustness and resistance to impact damage. Bunds may be
integrated with fire-rated separating-walls. In fact, such walls, where relevant, may
simultaneously serve as bund walls.
3. Optional provision of drainage
Although it is not necessary to provide any means of draining each bund to the
outside, provision for drainage may be provided by inserting a pipe of minimum
diameter 50mm in the bund wall at the lowest point in the bund, if this is required by
the user. Such drainpipe, if provided, must be fitted with a lockable draincock of equal
diameter, complete with a means of locking it in the closed position under normal
operating conditions.
4. Mandatory U-pipes
In addition to any draincock(s) that may be

set in the bund wall, there shall be provided
at least one inverted u-pipe (also known as a
'gooseneck'), as shown in the sketch. The
inverted u-pipe shall be positioned at such
height in the bund wall as will allow any
water which existed in the bund, or which
enters the bund as a consequence of fire-
fighting efforts, to flow out through the u-
pipe, whilst retaining the flammable liquid within the bund, since it will float on top of
such water.
5. Requirements for optional sumps

Page 89 of 344
In crowded applications, with densely installed equipment, or in high-risk areas, a

sump is an absolute requirement. Usually however, it is an optional additional
measure. When in doubt, a risk assessment should be conducted, as outlined in
Standard G47, to determine the criticality of the installation. The aim is to provide for
each bund to drain by gravity to a remote, central sump, so as to remove the fuel load
from the seat of any fire which may develop on any of the bunded equipment.
Standards for such system, if provided, are:
The sump should be located at least 15 metres from any structure.
The drain pipe leading from the bund(s) to the sump should be of minimum
diameter 50mm, and made of steel or a concrete compound. Since this pipe
may contain flaming oil, it may not be made of any combustible or flammable
material such as plastic.
The drain pipe should slope below the horizontal in the direction of the sump
at a gradient of at least 1:20.
The sump should be constructed to have a volume equal to at least twice the
volume of the largest bund which it serves. (This is relevant where one sump
is provided for a number of related bund areas, such as a bank of individually
bunded transformers). This implies that the sump would be able to
accommodate at least 110% of the flammable liquid contents of the installed
equipment located in any two bunds simultaneously, since this may be
regarded as the worst foreseeable case at such an installation.
The sump should be constructed of non-combustible materials such as brick

and concrete. It should be positioned underground, and its roof should be of
reinforced concrete. In this roof, a manhole not exceeding 1 m² in area may
be provided. This should be fitted with a tightly fitting lid made of a non-
combustible material such as reinforced concrete or steel.
6. Notes on the use of aggregate in bund areas
Aggregate filled bunds do offer better protection than ‘empty’ bunds. However, if an
area is known to be dusty, and if regular maintenance of the aggregate cannot be
guaranteed, it is best to avoid aggregate filling of bunds. The reason for the above is
that unless a proper maintenance programme can be upheld to ensure that the
aggregate filling stays clean, a layer of dust will settle on the surface of the
aggregate, and work its way into the aggregate, ultimately solidifying and reducing
the capacity and effectiveness of the bund. When filling a bund to half its height with
19 mm aggregate, the factor for bund capacity rises from 110% to 250% of the
volume of the retained flammable liquid contained in the equipment installed within
the bund.

Page 90 of 344
STD G34 - FIRE / SEPARATING WALLS
Rationale
Transformers and similar large oil filled equipment must each be located individually in
discrete transformer bays, to prevent fire / explosion on any particular unit from spreading to
neighbouring units, equipment, or structures.
NB. Transformer separating walls need not be retrofitted in transformer installations built
before 2000.
Requirements
In order to constitute such bays, separating walls must be constructed between the units,
and between the units and any equipment or structure located alongside (e.g. a substation).
Walls must comply with the following standards:
1. Walls should be of 225 mm wide brick, or 300 mm reinforced concrete, buttressed on

the free ends, to ensure their robustness.
2. There must be no breach whatsoever in the walls of a transformer bay. If such wall
must be breached, then the resultant aperture must be fire stopped and the cables
passing through the fire stopping must be intumescent coated. Refer to Standard G36
regarding the requirements for fire stopping and intumescent coating of cables.
3. The walls must be at least 90 cm higher than the highest point on either of the items
which the wall is intended to separate. In the case of transformers, this will usually be
the oil conservator located on top of the tallest transformer in the pair. Note however,
that in the case of walls intended to separate transformers from an adjacent structure
like a substation, the two highest points under consideration will be the highest point
on the transformer and the highest point on the adjacent structure which will in all
likelihood be the apex of the pitched roof. The sketch below illustrates this rationale.

Page 91 of 344
At least 90 cm
At least 90cm
At least 90cm
4. When viewed in plan, separating walls must extend at least 90 cm beyond the sides
of the transformers which the walls will separate.

Page 92 of 344
STD G35 - PERFECT PARTY WALLS
Rationale
“Perfect party walls” are internal walls which provide an effective barrier to fire spread. They
would typically be constructed as a division between fire zones, for example between
different rooms in a substation. Areas not so sub-divided cannot be regarded as separate fire
zones. By definition, perfect party walls have a fire resistance of 2 hours.
Requirements
Perfect party walls must comply with the following requirements:
1. Perfect party walls must be constructed of 225 mm wide brick (double brick
thickness). This is deemed to have a fire resistance of 2 hours.
2. The walls should extend from a solid (e.g. concrete) floor, and must reach the full
height of the roof, if the roof is solid, e.g. reinforced concrete. However, if the roof is
not resistant to fire (e.g. corrugated iron or tiles) then the perfect party wall must
extend above the roofline by at least 30 cm, to form a gable.
3. No roof support trusses, whether of steel, timber or other material, may pass through
the perfect party wall. Such trusses, and the roof itself if it is of corrugated iron, tiles,
or similar, must abut the wall on either side.
4. No cable penetration apertures must be allowed to breach a perfect party wall. Where
it is unavoidable for cables to penetrate a perfect party wall, whether above floor
elevation, or via an under floor cable trench, such cable penetration aperture or cable
trench must be effectively fire stopped, and where the cables pass through the fire
stopping, they must be intumescent coated for at least 1 metre on either side of the
fire stopping. See Standard G36 for details of fire stopping and intumescent coating
of cables.
5. Any door set in a perfect party wall must have a fire resistance rating of at least 2
hours, certified by an approved test authority like the SABS or CSIR. Fire doors must
be fitted with an automatic closing mechanism and must be kept closed at all times,
so that fire cannot spread through the doorway, thereby rendering the perfect party
wall ineffective in limiting the extent of fire spread.
6. All doorframes and fittings associated with fire doors must be incombustible and of a
type which will not impair or compromise the fire-rating of the said door.

Page 93 of 344
STD G36 - FIRE STOPPING AND INTUMESCENT COATING OF CABLES
Fire stopping requirements
Where a wall is intended to be a barrier to fire spread, such as in the case of perfect party
walls (Standard G35) or fire / separating walls (Standard G34), it is necessary to fire stop any
breach in such separating wall. Failure to do so removes any benefit that the sub-division
into separate fire zones, might have offered. Fire stopping may be achieved by plastering up
the hole using conventional mortar or mortar made using perlite as a building sand
substitute. Alternatively, an inert material such as “rock wool” or “mineral wool” may be used
to block the hole. This stopping material must then be covered over using an intumescent
coating. Adhere to the specifications laid down by the manufacturer of the intumescent
product to achieve a 2 hour fire rating for the aperture, or the 2 hour fire rating of the wall will
be impaired.
Intumescent coating requirements
Suitable intumescent products are Chemrite, Micon, and Pyrocote.
1. Where cables pass through a fire stopped aperture in a wall which separates fire
zones, any electrical or instrumentation cable passing through such fire stopping
must be intumescent coated on either side of the fire stopping for a linear distance of
at least 1 metre unless it is contained in a sand filled trench (of at least 1 m but
preferably 2 m). Such intumescent coating must be applied to the entire
circumference of each cable to be effective, and must be applied to a suitable
thickness, as specified by the manufacturer of the particular intumescent product
used, as being adequate to ensure a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours. Any
new cables added later, must be similarly intumescent coated.
2. Where electrical and instrumentation cables are routed vertically in a plant structure
or building, these may not always be routed through fire stopped cable penetration
apertures in the interleading floors, in which case, the requirements stated in 1 above
would apply.
Instead, such cables may either be routed in open service shafts, on vertical cable
racks, or through open floors (for example, Mentis-type grating). In such case, where
fire stopping is not appropriate, 2 metre high firebreaks must be provided on all
cables in each group of cables, on every 2nd level. As stated in 1 above, intumescent
coating must be provided over the entire circumference of each cable, and must be
applied to the minimum thickness as stipulated by the manufacturer of the particular
intumescent product used, as being adequate to ensure a fire resistance rating of at
least 2 hours.
3. In certain cases, for example, at containerised substations or at very small

substations which have only one room, it is not essential to fire stop the apertures
where the cables exit the structure and neither is it a requirement that the cables
must be intumescent coated at this position. Instead, it is acceptable to provide a 2
metre firebreak on each single cable or group of cables, as long as such firebreak is
provided within 5 metres of the structure. The rationale is that these firebreaks on the
cables will prevent fire originating elsewhere from spreading into the structure and

Page 94 of 344
conversely will prevent fire originating in the structure from spreading along cable
paths and propagating the fire into other parts of the operation.
Such firebreak may be constituted in one of two ways:
A 2 metre firebreak may be painted onto the cables as contemplated in 2

above. Alternatively,
The cables may simply be buried for a distance of at least 2 metres.
SABS 0400 TT 40 & 41 - National Building Regulations

SABS 0177 : Part 2 – Fire testing of materials, components and elements used in buildings:
BS 476 : Part 8 - Fire tests on building materials and structures
ISO 834 – Fire-resistance tests - Elements of building construction
DIN 4102 Part 9 - Fire behaviour of building materials and elements; seals for cable
penetrations; concepts, requirements and testing
IEC Publication 332 Part 2 - Test on Single Insulated Wire

Page 95 of 344
STD G37 - BULK FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE FACILITIES ON SURFACE
Requirements
1. All bulk flammable liquid storage facilities on surface must be adequately bunded.
Refer to Standard G33 in this regard.
2. Where bulk flammable liquids storage facilities are located in a crowded area, where
spatial separation does not segregate them from other risks, it may be appropriate to
protect them by means of high velocity water deluge systems, or fixed foam fire
suppression systems. See Standards G5 and G6 in this regard. A risk assessment
should be performed to determine the risk level and criticality of the installation in
deciding whether such measure is necessary.
3. The activation valve is to be positioned at a point 1,8 metres above ground level and
suitably demarcated with the relevant symbolic signage.
4. All bulk flammable liquid storage tanks must be earthed. Earthing cables must be
affixed to a dedicated lug on each tank. Earthing cables must be secured to an earth
spike driven at least 1 metre into the surrounding earth, or to an earth mat. Both the
connection between the earthing cable and the tank and between the earthing cable
and the earth spike or mat, must be cleaned down to bright metal on an annual basis
and tightly re-secured. Note that earthing cables may not be affixed to the stands or
other appurtenances belonging to flammable liquid storage tanks, as these may not
make good contact with the tanks themselves.
5. There must be ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants” in serviceable

proximity to the bulk flammable liquid storage facility. It would be usual to provide a
hydrant on either side of the facility, so that a fire occurring at the facility can be
attacked from two sides. Also, depending on wind direction, it may not be possible to
fight fire from a particular direction on a particular day.
These hydrants would typically be used in the generation of foam to fight a flammable
liquid fire.
These hydrants should not be positioned within 10 metres of the bulk flammable
liquid storage facility, so that they will remain accessible even after the outbreak of
fire. However, neither should they be positioned further than 30 metres from the
storage structure. Pressure, flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants
are set out in Standard G29.
7. No electrical switchgear, cables, motors or lights may be positioned within the bund
area surrounding flammable storage tanks, unless these are raised on plinths or
platforms and are located at a height above the height of the bund wall.

Page 96 of 344
8. Symbolic signage visible from all four sides must be provided at the facility,
prohibiting smoking and naked lights.
9. An earthing clamp must be provided at the refuelling point which may be affixed to
any vehicle whilst flammable liquid transfer between the vehicle and the tank is in
progress.
10. A bank of at least 4 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be provided at a

position within 10 and 30 metres of the bulk flammable liquid storage facility. This
position must be suitably demarcated with the relevant symbolic signage, and the fire
extinguishers should be protected from the elements, by means of a roof for example.
11. If the bulk flammable liquid storage facility is located within a building, all electrical
lighting and equipment in the building must be intrinsically safe.

Standard G29 – 65mm Fire hydrants and related equipment

Page 97 of 344
STD G38 - STORAGE FACILITIES ON SURFACE FOR FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS OR

CHEMICALS IN CONTAINERS
Requirements
1. Stores for flammable liquids in containers and for chemicals in containers shall be
housed in separate buildings, either structurally or spatially separated from each
other.
2. Such storage facilities shall be housed in robustly constructed buildings capable of

containing fire and preventing fire from spreading inwards from any outer source.
Construction must be of incombustible materials. Incombustible means “incapable of
burning”, like steel, brick or mortar. So-called “flame retardant”, “fire retardant”, “flame
resistant” or “fire resistant” materials do not meet the incombustibility requirements for
a high risk installation such as this. These merely have a high ignition temperature
and retard fire spread, but will burn eventually and still add to the structural fire load
(calorific value) of the structure. These are therefore “not acceptable”.
The ideal containerised flammable liquid store, or chemical store, will have a concrete
floor, brick walls, and a flat reinforced concrete roof. If a pitched roof is required, then
the roof panels must be incombustible (such as corrugated iron or IBR sheeting), and
the roofing beams should be of steel. No ceiling should be provided. All doors are to
be steel, set in steel frames. Alternatively, doors rated by an approved test authority
such as the SABS or CSIR, as having a fire resistance of at least 2 hours, are
acceptable.
3. Structures housing flammable liquids in containers, or chemicals in containers, must

be provided with a manually operated fire sprinkler system as contemplated in
Standard G2.
4. If the structure has a steel roof, this must be earthed. The structure as a whole must
be bunded. At the entrance, a bund ramp of height equal to the bund wall, may be
provided, to facilitate the transfer of flammable liquid or chemical containers into and
out of the store. Refer to Standard G33 for bunding requirements.
5. No electrical switches, sockets or other equipment are permitted inside a flammable

liquid or chemical storage facility unless these are intrinsically safe.
6. Symbolic signage must be displayed on the main entrance door of all containerised
flammable liquid stores and chemical stores prohibiting smoking and naked lights.
7. Inside the facility, material safety data sheets must be made available which are
pertinent to all substances stored in such facility.
8. Outside the main entrance door to every containerised flammable liquid store and
every chemical store, at least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers shall be
provided, in a position clearly demarcated with the relevant symbolic signage.
9. Particularly where volatile substances are stored, the store must be adequately
ventilated to prevent the build-up of fumes and gases.

Page 98 of 344
10. Where the length of a containerised flammable liquid store or chemical store exceeds
20 metres, or where the floor area exceeds 100 m², an emergency escape door must
be provided at the point furthest from the main entrance door. Such emergency
escape door shall be provided with an internally positioned opening mechanism such
as a Redlam bolt or a panic bar, and such door may not be locked from the outside.
The door shall be suitably demarcated as an emergency escape route with the
appropriate symbolic and directional signage, erected inside the store.


Page 99 of 344
STD G39 - STORAGE OF TYRES ON SURFACE
Requirements
1. Based upon the fire load which they constitute, a maximum of 12 LDV tyres or 8 truck
tyres may be stored in a general workshop area. No earthmoving vehicle tyres may
be stored in such area.
2. All earthmoving vehicle tyres must be stored in a dedicated store as described below,
or on open ground spatially well separated from any structure or facility or obvious
ignition source.
3. Any quantity of LDV or truck tyres which exceeds the quantities specified in 1 above,
must be stored in a dedicated tyre store.
4. If a tyres store does not exist for the storage of earthmoving tyres, and it is necessary
to store earthmoving tyres on open ground as a temporary measure, these must be
laid flat to prevent them falling over and injuring persons. However, horizontal storage
of tyres is incorrect from a fire protection perspective, and therefore no more than two
tyres should be placed in any pile. Moreover, piles must be separated from each
other by at least 5 metres.
5. Earthmoving tyres may only be so stored on open ground in quantities exceeding four
(i.e. two piles of two each) if there is ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area
hydrants” in the area. It would be usual to locate these hydrants on opposite sides of
the area in which earthmoving tyres will be stored. By so doing, a fire occurring on the
stored tyres could be attacked from two sides. Also, depending on wind direction, it
may not be possible to fight fire from a particular direction on a particular day. These
hydrants should be positioned more than 10 metres and less than 30 metres from the
perimeter of the tyre storage area, so that they can still be accessed even after the
outbreak of fire. Pressure, flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are
contained in Standard 29.
6. Proper storage for all tyres is in a dedicated tyre store. Such stores must comply with
the following requirements:
The store must be spatially or structurally well separated from all surrounding
structures, installations and ignition sources.
A manually activated water spray system must be provided over the entire
storage area within the building. Refer to Standard G2 for requirements of
such sprinkler systems.
All tyres must be stored in the upright position in steel tyre racks designed to
be sufficiently robust for the size of tyre which they are intended to support. A
minimum 10 mm spacing is required between the tyres.
At all entrances to the tyre store, symbolic signage must be erected

prohibiting smoking and naked lights.

Page 100 of 344
The tyre store should be of incombustible construction. A good design for a

tyre store is an IBR sheeting roof and walls on steel supports, expanded metal
gates and a concrete floor.
It is not necessary to eliminate electric lights and power points from a tyre
store, but hot work should not be permitted within the tyre store.
At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be provided at the

tyre store. A suitable position would be to mount these outside the main
entrance to the store.
There must be ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants” outside the

tyre store. It would be usual to provide a hydrant on opposite sides of the tyre
store, so that a fire occurring in the tyre store can be attacked from two sides.
Also, depending on wind direction, it may not be possible to fight fire from a
particular direction on a particular day. These hydrants should be positioned
at least 10 metres and not more than 30 metres from the tyre store, so that
they will remain accessible even after the outbreak of fire. Pressure, flow and
other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained in Standard G29.


Page 101 of 344
STD G40 - USE OF PLASTIC PIPES ON SURFACE
Definition
Plastic pipes include all forms of plastic pipe, for example, HDPE, uPVC and PVC.
Requirements
1. Plastic pipes may not be used as part of the fire water main on surface, unless they
are buried. In such case, Class 6 HDPE pipe is recommended. Notwithstanding this
concession, no plastic pipe in excess of 300 mm diameter should be used in the fire
water main system.
2. Plastic pipes may be used on surface, for functions unrelated to fire, at the discretion
of site management, save that the following exclusions apply:
Plastic pipes should not be installed where there is an obvious ignition risk,
such as where hot processes are conducted, or near oil-filled transformers or
switchgear.
Because plastic pipes can ignite and will then assist in the rapid propagation
of fire, plastic pipes should not be installed in multi-level structures with a
large footprint. Therefore, if the footprint of the structure exceeds 1 000 m², or
if the structure exceeds 12 metres in height, plastic pipe should not be
installed in the structure. If this requirement is not adhered to, then the same
requirements regarding fire stopping between levels and intumescent coating,
as applies to electrical cables, must be adopted. Refer to Standard G36 in this
regard.
Again because of the concern that plastic pipes can assist in the propagation
of fire, plastic pipes should not be used to link critical installations. See
Standard G47 regarding the process to be followed in determining criticality.
Where plastic pipes are so used, a firebreak must be provided on the plastic
pipe, similar to that described in relation to electrical cables, in Standard G36.
3. Notwithstanding the above, pipes which are incombustible, e.g. steel pipes and
reinforced concrete pipes, are always preferable from a fire risk perspective. Where
possible, obviate the use of plastic pipes altogether.


Page 102 of 344
STD G41 - OVERLAND CONVEYORS
Definition
An “overland conveyor” is understood to be a surface conveyor which stretches over a

considerable distance, through areas of generally low occupancy, and which is not elevated
significantly above ground elevation. Examples of overland conveyors would be conveyors
linking separate plants, or conveyors feeding a remote stockpile or dump.
Requirements
1. No combustible material must be allowed within 4 metres of an overland conveyor.

Therefore undergrowth must be cleared for a distance of at least 4 metres on either
side of the overland conveyor structure, on a regular basis.
2. At every drive and at every head or tail pulley, a 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher
must be provided in an easily accessible position. See Standard G28 regarding the
requirements for hand-held fire extinguishers.
3. On at least one side of the overland conveyor path, a road must be provided and
maintained in an acceptable state of repair, to allow access by heavy vehicles so that
fire fighting on the conveyor path using mobile fire appliances and / or water bowsers
is possible. 65 mm fire hydrants and 25 mm fire hosereels are not required along
overland conveyor belt paths, since reliance for secondary fire fighting will be upon
mobile fire appliances and fire equipped water bowsers. However, once an overland
conveyor enters a plant area, or any other area where “area hydrants” are required,
an overland conveyor structure is deemed to form part of the plant infrastructure, and
must be protected by the “area hydrants” provided on a 90 x 90 metre grid in such
plant or other area. Refer to Standard G29 in this regard.
4. Particular care must be taken to avoid any accumulation of spillage under the belt
since this can lead to friction and ultimately fire.
5. Where possible, all electrical cables should be of the red stripe (flame retardant) type.
Where this requirement cannot be met, electrical cables must be intumescent coated
for 4 m every 50 m. Such intumescent coating must be applied to the entire
circumference of each cable, to the required thickness as stipulated by the
manufacturer of the product as being adequate to ensure a fire resistance rating of at
least 2 hours. See Standard G36 in this regard.

Standard G36 – Fire stopping and intumescent coating of cables

Page 103 of 344
STD G42 - ELEVATED CONVEYORS ON SURFACE
Definition
An “elevated conveyor” is a conveyor belt path elevated above ground elevation on steel or
other supports. Elevated conveyors are usually constructed to allow material to be conveyed
from a lower elevation to a higher elevation in a different structure. The requirements below
pertain to conveyors which are elevated 7 or more metres above ground elevation. Elevated
conveyors which do not exceed this height, are deemed to be “plant conveyors”, and are
subject instead to the requirements stated in Standard G44.
Rationale
The primary concern with elevated conveyors is that they are generally supported on steel
structures which will buckle and fail early in the development stages of a fire occurring on the
elevated conveyor. This would necessitate the reconstruction not only of the conveyor belt
path, but of the fabricated steelwork support structure. Significant lead time is therefore
anticipated. Because the function of an elevated conveyor is generally to convey material
from a lower level to a higher level, it is often not possible to temporarily substitute other
means of conveyance (like loaders and trucks) as a contingency while the elevated conveyor
belt path is being reconstructed. Resultantly, of all surface conveyor structures, elevated
conveyor belt paths represent the most significant potential business interruption losses, and
are therefore deserving of the highest possible level of fire protection.
Requirements
1. Where an elevated surface conveyor structure has been assessed as “critical” in

terms of the rationale contained in Standard G47, the entire structure must be
protected by means of an automatic fire sprinkler system, as contemplated in
Standard 3.
2. All “other” elevated surface conveyors must be protected by means of 25 mm fire

hosereels provided at 30 metre intervals along the entire elevated conveyor structure.
These must comply with the requirements stated in Standard G31.
3. Alternatively, “other” elevated surface conveyors may be protected by means of 65

mm hydrants provided at 90 metre intervals along the elevated conveyor belt path. In
such case, a fire hose box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 1 x 65
mm nozzle must be provided in a fire hose box or cupboard in close proximity to each
hydrant point. Note that in elevated positions such as this, it is unacceptable to rely
upon a central cache of fire fighting equipment somewhere in the plant. Refer to
Standard G29 in this regard.
4. The 25 mm fire hosereels or 65 mm hydrants must be supplied via a 100 mm steel

pipe which is fed in turn from the main ring fed fire main. Note that any process water
take-off points which may be provided along the elevated conveyor belt path, must be
fed from a separate and independent source to the fire equipment contemplated
above. The fire main and the service water line may not be interconnected and
neither may any fire fighting equipment be used for service water processes or
washing down purposes. Refer to Standard G30 in this regard.

Page 104 of 344
5. Notwithstanding the above requirements in terms of 65 mm hydrants and 25 mm fire

hosereels, where an elevated conveyor discharges into a bin or silo, a 65 mm hydrant
point and fire hose box as described above, must be provided within 5 metres of the
point at which the conveyor discharges. The main reason for this hydrant point and
equipment is in deference to the high fire risk constituted by the combustible product
(coal) contained in the bin or silo. See Standard G29 for the requirements of large
bore fire hydrants and related equipment.
6. A 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided at every electric motor

associated with the elevated conveyor structure. This is because water should not be
used on electric motor fires.
8. In order to reduce the fire load represented by the conveyor structure, combustible
products should be avoided as far as possible in the equipment chosen. Therefore:
Idlers should, where possible, not be rubber-lined.
If drives or return pulleys are to be lagged, the lagging should, where possible,
be ceramic rather than rubber.
9. Except where they are routed into electrical motors or switchgear, all electrical cables
running along conveyor belt paths should be secured a minimum of 500 mm from the
actual belt. Moreover, all cables are to be red stripe flame retardant.
10. Elevated conveyor structures must be constructed of incombustible materials such as

concrete and steel, to minimise the structural fire load. Also, a support and cover
structure which is combustible would assist in accelerating the propagation of fire.
Therefore, wood and other combustibles must not be used in constructing elevated
conveyor belt paths, or their support structures.
11. Where a conveyor belt tips into a silo, special fire protection measures are required to
protect both the belt and the silo. In order to fight a fire occurring in the silo, or on the
belt leading up to the silo, a 65 mm hydrant point must be provided. This should be so
positioned that it is not directly over the silo, or it may be inaccessible if a fire has
broken out in the silo. Thus it would usually be best not to position the hydrant at the
very end of the conveyor gantry, close to the tipping position. Some distance down
the belt would be a more suitable position, providing a greater likelihood that the
hydrant will remain accessible for longer.
At this hydrant point, provide a fire hose box containing at least 2 x 65 mm flat lay fire
hoses and a single 65 mm fire fighting nozzle.
Note: this requirement is relevant, irrespective of whether the belt is protected by

manually operated sprays, automatically activated sprays, 65 mm hydrants and hose
boxes at 90 metre intervals along the conveyor, or 25 mm fire hosereels at 30 metre
intervals along the conveyor
Because of the combustible load to be carried by these belts, the requirements above
pertain even if the belt in use is fire retardant.

Page 105 of 344

Standard G44 - Surface plant conveyors
Standard G47 – Definition of criticality

Page 106 of 344
STD G43 - SURFACE TUNNEL, BUNKER AND SILO CONVEYORS
Definitions
These are surface conveyors located in tunnels, bunkers and other confined areas, such as
under a stockpile.
Rationale
The particular concern with ‘tunnel, bunker and silo conveyors’ is that access to these
conveyors during a fire would be particularly hazardous to personnel, and manual response
to fire is therefore not a feasible option. Moreover, fire affecting such a tunnel conveyor could
easily generate temperatures which could cause a steel or concrete supported excavation to
fail which could see the entire stockpile collapsing into the conveyor tunnel.
Therefore, business interruption loss potential is high, and great danger exists to persons, if
attempts should be made to fight the fire manually.
Therefore, the requirements stated below are based upon the principles that a fire in a
conveyor tunnel would have significant consequences, and such a fire must be addressed by
automatic means to ensure the safety of persons.
Requirements
The requirements for protecting ‘tunnel, bunker, silo and related conveyors’ against fire risk
are as follows:
1. Where a ‘tunnel, bunker, silo and related conveyor’ installation has been assessed as
“critical”, in terms of the requirements in Standard G47, a fixed automatic fire sprinkler
system contemplated in Standard G3, or a high velocity water deluge system, as
contemplated in Standard G5, must be installed over the entire length of the tunnel,
up to the point where the belt structure exits the tunnel, whereafter the belt is
classified as a “surface plant conveyor” (see Standard G44 for the relevant
requirements thereafter).
2. For all other ‘tunnel, bunker, silo and related conveyors’, a manually operated fire
sprinkler system must be provided over the entire belt length, up to the point where
the ‘tunnel, bunker, silo and related conveyors’ becomes a “surface plant conveyor”.
Refer to Standard G2 for the requirements of such manual fire sprinkler system. Note
that all control valves for such system must be clearly demarcated to indicate the
area to which they apply, and such valves must be located in fresh air on surface in a
safe position, so that they may be actuated even after the outbreak of fire on the
tunnel conveyor.
3. A 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided at every electric motor

installed in the conveyor tunnel, whether associated with a conveyor or not. This is
based upon the principle that it is not appropriate to use water on an electric motor
fire, and moreover, electric motor fires can usually be contained without resorting to
secondary measures, such as the sprinkler systems.

Page 107 of 344
Idlers should not be rubber-lined.
Drives or return pulleys are to be lagged, the lagging should be ceramic and
not rubber.
6. Fire load in conveyor tunnels must be kept to a bar minimum. Therefore, combustible
materials should not be used in constructing the tunnel, and storage of flammables or
combustibles within the tunnel should not be permitted.
actual belt. Moreover, all cables to are be red stripe flame retardant.
8. Where a conveyor belt tips into a silo, special fire protection measures are required to
protect both the belt and the silo. In order to fight a fire occurring in the silo, or on the
belt leading up to the silo, a 65 mm hydrant point must be provided. This should be so
positioned that it is not directly over the silo, or it may be inaccessible if a fire has
broken out in the silo. Thus it would usually be best not to position the hydrant at the
very end of the conveyor gantry, close to the tipping position. Some distance down
the belt would be a more suitable position, providing a greater likelihood that the
hydrant will remain accessible for longer.
At this hydrant point, provide a fire hose box containing at least 2 x 65 mm flat lay fire
hoses and a single 65 mm fire fighting nozzle.
Note: this requirement is relevant, irrespective of whether the belt is protected by

manually operated sprays, automatically activated sprays, 65 mm hydrants and hose
boxes at 90 metre intervals along the conveyor, or 25 mm fire hosereels at 30 metre
intervals along the conveyor.

Standard G44 - Surface plant conveyors

Page 108 of 344
STD G44 - SURFACE PLANT CONVEYORS
Definition
A surface plant conveyor is understood to be a conveyor located on surface, in a plant or

other built-up area which is usually of relatively short length, compared to an overland
conveyor, and which is not elevated more than 5 metres above ground elevation.
Requirements
The following requirements pertain to surface plant conveyors:
Idlers should not be rubber-lined.
Drives or return pulleys are to be lagged, the lagging should be ceramic and
not rubber.
actual belt. Moreover, all cables are to be red stripe flame retardant.
3. 1 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided at every conveyor drive

and at each head or return pulley.
4. Reliance for secondary fire fighting shall be on “area hydrants” which must cover all
occupied plant areas which shall include areas in which surface plant conveyors are
installed. See Standard G29 regarding the requirements for, and purpose of, “area
hydrants”.
5. Where a risk assessment has classified a surface plant conveyor as “critical” in terms
of the standards laid down in Standard G47, 65 mm fire hydrants or 25 mm fire
hosereels may be provided along the entire length of a surface plant conveyor. See
Standard G42 for more details.
6. In designing the cladding, if any, of surface plant conveyor structures, cognisance

must be had of the location of the area hydrants protecting such structure. In the case
of an elevated conveyor, where the hosereels or hydrants are located inside the
conveyor structure, cladding is less of an issue.
But in the case of surface plant conveyors, full cladding on both sides of the conveyor
structure will prevent water from “area hydrants” from being sprayed onto the belt to
suppress fire. Therefore, at least one side of the conveyor structure should be open
sided, to allow access with fire fighting equipment.

Standard G42 - Elevated conveyors on surface

Page 109 of 344

Page 110 of 344
STD G45 - MINE STORES AND WAREHOUSES
Definition
These standards pertain to all large covered storage areas, for example, mine stores and
other warehouses. They are not necessarily pertinent to small sectional stores. They also do
not apply to storage yards. Requirements for storage yards are stated in Standard G46.
Requirements
Requirements at large stores and warehouses are as follows:
1. An automated sprinkler system must be installed in any covered storage area if the
sum of the replacement value of the structure and all stored material and equipment
within the structure will at any time exceed US$2.5 million. See Standard G3
regarding the requirements for automated sprinkler systems.
2. Notwithstanding the concession stated in Requirement 1 above, an automated

sprinkler system must be installed in any covered store where stack height exceeds 3
metres above floor elevation. See Standard G3 regarding the requirements for
automated sprinkler systems.
3. Notwithstanding the concession stated in requirement 1 above, an automated

sprinkler system must be installed in any covered store where the distance of travel
from any point within the store, to fresh air, exceeds 45 metres. See Standard G3
regarding the requirements for automated sprinkler systems.
4. 25mm hosereels must be installed in all covered stores and warehouses which have
a footprint in excess of 500 m². They must be installed at the rate of 1 per 500 m² of
building floor area or part thereof, and should be spaced evenly throughout the
structure. Refer to Standard G31 for standards pertaining to 25 mm hosereels.
5. Hand-held fire extinguishers must be installed in all covered stores and warehouses
at the rate of 1 per 200 m² of building floor area or part thereof. These should be
evenly spaced throughout the building. 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers are the
norm, but under certain circumstances, 5 kg CO2 extinguishers should be substituted.
See Standard G28 regarding mounting requirements, colour coding, selection
between DCP and CO2, and other requirements pertaining to the deployment of hand-
held fire extinguishers.
6. 65 mm hydrants must be provided within any mine store or warehouse, the footprint
of which exceeds 1000 m². Hydrants must be provided at the rate of 1 per 1000 m² of
building floor area, or part thereof. See Standard G29 regarding the requirements for
65 mm hydrants.
7. A fire hose box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm
nozzle, must be provided at each of the abovementioned structural hydrant points.
Where the footprint of the mine store or warehouse does not exceed 1000 m², the
requirement for a hose box per structural hydrant may be dispensed with, providing

Page 111 of 344
there is ready access and easily accessible external position within 100 metres of the
structure to a cache of at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.
8. In addition to the structural fire hydrants and fire hose boxes contemplated above,
there must also be ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm externally positioned “area
hydrants”. It would be usual to provide a hydrant on either side of the mine store or
warehouse, so that a fire occurring in the structure which cannot be addressed
satisfactorily with the internal hydrants, can be attacked from a fall-back position
outside the structure, using the area hydrants to attack the fire from two sides. Also,
depending on wind direction, it may not be possible to fight fire from a particular
direction on a particular day.
These “area hydrants” should be positioned further than 10 metres but within 30
metres of the mine store or warehouse structure, so that they will be readily
accessible even after a fire has taken hold of the structure. Pressure, flow and other
requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained in Standard G29.
Note that this requirement for “area hydrants” may in certain circumstances be
satisfied by the requirements stated in Standard G46.
nozzle must be provided at each hydrant point contemplated in the preceding
Note that where the concession stated in Requirement 7 has been utilised, and there
is a cache of hoses maintained outside the structure for use with the internally located
“structural fire hydrants”, this would simultaneously satisfy the requirement for a
cache of hoses and nozzles to be used with the “area hydrants”.
10. Combustible materials should be avoided in the construction of stores and

warehouses, save that wooden beams in the roof, and “Marley” tiles on the floor shall
be permissible. Ceilings are not recommended, and if a ceiling is to be installed in all
or part of a mine store or warehouse, then this may not be a conventional ceiling, but
must be of fire retardant material.
11. If an automated sprinkler system has been installed in the mine store or warehouse in
accordance with Requirement 1 above, then this must be coupled to an alarm system
which will automatically raise an audible and visible alarm on site in response to a
fire. Moreover, this signal must be relayed to a remote point with 24 hour monitoring.
This is particularly important in the case of a store or warehouse which will typically
not be occupied after hours. Such remote alarm will ensure that a fire is timeously
detected and that response is forthcoming in the shortest possible time to extinguish
the fire and limit the extent of damage.
12. Where an automated sprinkler system has not been installed as contemplated in
Requirement 1 above, then a passive point fire detection system must be installed
throughout the mine store’s structure or warehouse. This must be capable of raising a
local and remote alarm, as contemplated in the preceding requirement. Refer to
Standard G9 regarding the requirements for passive fire detection systems.
13. Smoking must not be permitted in any mine stores building or warehouse. Erect the
appropriate symbolic signage at all entrances to such structures to ban smoking and
naked lights.

Page 112 of 344
14. If hot work must be performed in a mine stores structure or warehouse, then all
provisions of Standard G11 must be adhered to, to the letter. In particular, such work
must be conducted at a suitable time as will ensure that the premises are not vacated
(for example at the end of the shift) within 2 hours of the cessation of hot work on the
premises. A fire watch must be kept for the full period of 2 hours.
Standard G3 - Fire sprinkler systems – automatic

Standard G11 – Oxy-acetylene cutting and welding
Standard G46 - Storage yards

Page 113 of 344
STD G46 – STORAGE YARDS
Requirements
1. Provide 65 mm “area hydrants” on a 90 x 90 m grid to cover the entire stores yard and
the buildings located in the yard. These hydrants may satisfy the requirements stated
in G45 Requirement 6 above.
2. No matter how small the yard, provide at least 2 hydrants, one on either side of the
store yard, so that a fire occurring in the yard which cannot be addressed satisfactorily
from one hydrant because of wind direction, may be fought from the alternate hydrant
point.
3. Pressure, flow and other general requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained
in Standard G29.
fixed jet fire fighting nozzle must be provided at each hydrant point contemplated in the
preceding requirement, or there must be ready access on site to a central cache of at
least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses, and 3 x 65 mm nozzles.
5. Flammable liquids in drums and similar containers must be stored within bunds or
drip trays. See Standard G33 for requirements pertaining to bunding, and Standard
G38 for requirements pertaining to storage facilities on surface for flammable liquids or
chemicals in containers.
6. Bulk flammable liquid storage facilities in the yard must comply with the requirements
of Standard G37.
7. Hazardous chemicals in drums and similar containers must be stored according to

Standard G38.
8. Tyres and rubber products in the storage yard must be stored according to the

Standard G37 - Bulk flammable liquid storage facilities on surface
Standard G38 - Storage facilities on surface for flammable liquids or chemicals in containers
Standard G39 - Storage of tyres on surface

Page 114 of 344
STD G47- DEFINITION OF CRITICALITY
Definition
Throughout these standards, measures are frequently prescribed as ‘depending on the

assessed criticality of the installation’. The criticality of an installation is to be determined by a
risk assessment which takes into account the foreseeable combined impact:
on the safety and health of people,
in terms of property damage / loss (asset value),
in terms of business interruption, i.e. loss of revenue due to process interruption,
…if the installation were to be damaged or lost.

Page 115 of 344
STD G48 - FIRE RETARDANCY AND INCOMBUSTIBILITY
Definition
Fire retardant
“Fire retardant” is one of several terms that for all practical purposes within the context of this
document mean roughly the same thing. Other terms in the group are “fire resistant”, “flame
retardant” and “flame resistant”. The following discussion is relevant to all of these terms.
These terms refer to materials which are so composed or treated as to inhibit combustion.
But flame retardant material may still combust if there is an outside heat source acting upon
it. Manufacturers of flame retardant materials often claim that it ‘will not support combustion’,
but if heat from another source, like other burning materials, is applied to it, it will still
combust upon reaching its particular ignition temperature, whereupon it will burn in
conjunction with the external heat source, adding to the energy levels available for release
during the fire. This will hasten structural collapse and propagation of the fire to unaffected
areas, because the fire will ‘burn that much hotter’.
Sometimes, once the external heat source has been removed, the fire retardant material will
cease to burn, but it can happen that if sufficiently high temperatures have been reached
before the external heat source has been removed, the ‘fire retardant’ material will still
continue to burn, despite its supposed ‘flame retardancy’.
From the above, it is obvious that ‘flame retardant’ materials have very limited use, and
actually offer little advantage. An example is styrene which normally ignites at around 200O.
Flame retardant styrene is claimed only to ignite at around 300O. However, when one
considers that structure fires easily reach 1000O quite quickly, then it is obvious that this
difference is just academic.
In reality, the term ‘fire retardant’ is misleading, and project managers would do well to aim
for ‘incombustible” construction materials in almost all cases in Plants and similar. ‘Flame
retardant’ materials may have some use in low risk, low value facilities where life safety is not
an issue, but within AngloCoal, there are not many such applications.
Incombustible
This term refers to a material which under all normal conditions cannot burn. Examples are
brick, concrete, mineral wool, rock wool and perlite. In most cases, project managers will
need to use such materials for walls, support structures and similar.
Note, though, that even ‘incombustible’ materials will lose their structural integrity when
subjected to extreme heat, although they will never actually burn, and will therefore never
contribute to the fire load in a building. For example, steel starts to buckle at a relatively low
500O. Even concrete will decompose under really extreme conditions (e.g. the World Trade
Centre disaster), when the concrete reverted to powder.

Page 116 of 344
STD G49 - FOAM TROLLEYS
Application
At hydraulic power packs, lubrication packs, areas where flammable liquids are involved, and
in other areas where the application of foam offers an effective means of suppression, but
where the size of the risk does not justify a fixed system, a foam trolley can offer a solution.
At such locations, the provision of such trolley would be deemed to satisfy the need for
advanced primary fire protection, and may justify the omission of a high velocity deluge
system, or a fixed foam system.
In multilevel structures, the Viking hoses provided will make it possible to use the foam trolley
to fight fires on the levels immediately above and below, without the necessity of moving the
trolley to those levels.
Requirements
Foam trolleys should meet the following requirements:
1. The unit should be fitted with solid rubber wheels of minimum diameter 400 mm.
2. The tank should be chemically resistant to the foam.
3. The chassis should be corrosion protected and suitable for outdoor use and storage.
4. The minimum tank capacity should be 120 litres.
5. The trolley should be filled with AFFF or equivalent foam.
6. The foam trolley should be fitted with a variable foam inductor capable of 225
litres/minute, with an induction rate of 3%.
7. The trolley should be equipped with at least 2 x 15 metre long, 65 mm diameter,

Viking (or equivalent) fire hoses complete with installation connectors.
8. The trolley must be provided with a foam branch pipe capable of delivering 225
litres/minute.
Systems

Page 117 of 344
STD G50 - FLOTATION PLANTS AND REAGENT STORAGE
Concern
Associated with flotation plants, is the bulk storage of reagent / frother. Being kerosene-
based, fire and environmental concerns exist with this storage.
Requirements
1. The reagent storage yard must be fenced to control access.
2. The reagent storage yard must be declared a non-smoking area. To this end, erect
signage prohibiting smoking and naked lights on all sides of the fence surrounding
the yard, and in particular, at all entrances to the yard.
3. Hot work is permissible in the reagent storage area, provided that all requirements of
Standard G11 are complied with. Note however, that only hot work associated with
installed equipment is permissible. Where equipment can be removed, and the work
performed elsewhere, such hot work should not be conducted within the reagent
storage yard.
4. In order to reduce the structural fire load in the area, combustible materials must not
be used in the construction of the facility. See Standard G48 for an explanation of the
term “incombustible”.
5. Other than the contents of the reagent storage tanks themselves, additional and
unnecessary combustible and / or flammable materials should not be stored in the
reagent storage yard/area.
6. Some form of fixed fire suppression must be installed at the reagent storage tanks,
and should extend to cover all areas in which reagents are handled. Nozzles should
be positioned so as to adequately cover the tanks, i.e. above, under and / or on the
sides of the tanks. Systems which may be considered are:
Automated foam fire suppression systems. See Standard G6 regarding the

requirements for foam suppression systems.
Automated fire sprinkler systems. See Standard G3 regarding the requirements
for automated fire sprinkler systems.
Manually-activated fire sprinkler systems. See Standard G2 regarding the
requirements for manual fire sprinkler systems.
Provided that where manually operated systems are chosen, the location of the
control valves must be sufficiently far removed from the facility, or must be so
protected, as will enable them to be safely operated, even after the outbreak of fire.
7. The yard in which the reagent storage area is located should be so positioned as to
ensure that none of the reagent storage tanks or equipment are within 10 metres of
any other structure or facility. The distance of 10 metres is conditional upon full
compliance with Requirement 8 below.

Page 118 of 344
8. The reagent storage tanks must be individually or globally bunded. Refer to Standard
G33 for bunding requirements. Note in particular, that the 110% rule applies, and the
optional remote sump arrangement described in Standard G33 is strongly
recommended.
9. An earthing clamp must be provided which may be affixed to any vehicle whilst
transfer of reagent between the vehicle and the tanks is in progress.
10. No electrical switchgear, cables, motors, or lights, may be positioned within the bund
area(s) surrounding the tanks, unless these are raised on plinths or platforms and are
located at a height above the height of the bund wall.
11. The capacity of each reagent storage tank must be clearly demarcated on the side of
the tank.
12. At least 1 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided on each side of
the reagent storage building / area. The position of these fire extinguishers must be
clearly demarcated by means of the relevant symbolic signage, and they should be
mounted at a height of 1.2 metres above the floor or ground elevation. Refer to
Standard G28 regarding the requirements for hand-held fire extinguishers.
13. The reagent storage tanks should ideally be protected from the elements, for
example, by means of an IBR sheeting roof, and possibly walls.
14. There must be ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants” within 30 metres
of, but not closer than 10 metres to, the reagent storage yard / area. These should be
located on opposite sides of the facility, so that a fire occurring in the yard may be
fight fire from a particular direction on any given day. These hydrants could typically
also be used to generate foam to fight fire occurring on the reagent tanks. Pressure,
flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are set out in Standard G29.
15. All reagent tanks must be earthed. Earthing cables must be affixed to a dedicated lug
on each tank. Earthing cables must be secured to an earth spike driven at least one
metre into the surrounding earth, or to an earth mat. Both the connection between the
earthing cable and the tank and between the earthing cable and the earth spike or
mat, must be cleaned down to bright metal on an annual basis, and tightly re-
secured. Note that earthing cables may not be affixed to the stands or other
appurtenances belonging to reagent tanks, as these may not make good contact with
the tanks themselves.
NFPA 11 - Standard for Low-Expansion Foam

Systems

Page 119 of 344


Page 120 of 344
STD G51 - FIRE ENGINES
Consideration
One of the primary reasons why fire engines are often found to be inadequate when required
for service, is that they are incorrectly chosen in relation to their intended purpose. There are
many classes of fire engine, but for the purposes of these standards, three classes of fire
engine are considered. These are:
Initial attack fire appliances. As the name implies, initial attack fire appliances are
meant to provide a first response to the outbreak of fire in an area. They would be
suitable for the early stages of a fire in a single storey structure, for bush fires, and for
an initial response to an earthmoving vehicle fire. However, they are unsuitable for
well-developed fires in any structure, and certainly for fires in multi-level structures.
They are also not suitable for sustained fire fighting operations where a
supplementary source of water is unavailable, for example, in an opencast pit. Initial
attack fire appliances have limited pumping capacity, and are therefore also not
suitable for use where it is necessary to boost the water pressure and flow from
another source. This is the function of a pumper appliance (see below). Standard
G52 provides details of the requirements pertaining to initial attack fire appliances.
Pumper fire appliances. Pumper appliances are suitable for response to well-
established fires where high water volumes, possibly in elevated locations, are
required. However, the on-board supply of water is fairly limited on a pumper
appliance and it is therefore unsuitable to operate in areas where an additional water
supply is unavailable, for example, in an opencast pit. Refer to Standard G53 for the
requirements pertaining to pumper appliances.
Mobile water-supply fire appliances. Mobile water supply fire appliances are
designed to be operated in areas where an external supply of water is unavailable, for
example, in an opencast pit. Note however, that by definition, a mobile water-supply
fire appliance is not specifically required to have any pumping capacity. It is therefore
unsuitable to operate alone. It would typically be used in conjunction with a pumper
appliance. Refer to Standard G54 for requirements pertaining to mobile water-supply
fire appliances.
A water bowser, as used in opencast operations for watering roads, etc., is suitable to be
equipped as a mobile water-supply fire appliance. Note however, that where a pumper
appliance is not available on site, or where it would foreseeably take a long time to reach an
area in which the water bowser is operating, consideration should be given to equipping the
water bowser as a hybrid mobile water supply fire appliance cum pumper appliance. In this
regard, consider the requirements stated in Standard G53 and G54.
Standard G52 - Initial attack fire appliances

Standard G53 - Pumper fire appliances
Standard G54 - Mobile water-supply fire appliances

Page 121 of 344
STD G52 - INITIAL ATTACK FIRE APPLIANCES
Requirements
1. Fire Pump
The appliance shall be equipped with a fire pump with a minimum rated capacity of
950 litres/min. (In accordance with NFPA 1901 Chapter 14 - Fire Pump and
Associated Equipment).
2. Water Tank
Initial attack appliances shall be equipped with a water tank that has a minimum
certified capacity of 757 litres.
3. Equipment Storage
A minimum of 0.62 m³ of enclosed weather-resistant compartmentation shall be

provided for the storage of equipment.
4. Hose Storage
Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels shall be provided to accommodate the

following. These areas need not be contiguous.
A minimum hose storage area of 0.283 m³ for 65 mm or larger fire hose
Two areas, each a minimum of 0.1 m³, to accommodate 38-mm or larger pre-
connected fire hose lines
5. Other Main Equipment
The following equipment is required. Such brackets or compartments as are

necessary to mount the equipment shall be provided.
Ground Ladders.
All ground ladders carried on the appliance shall meet the requirements of NFPA
1931.
A 3.7 metre or longer extension-type ground ladder shall be carried on the appliance.
Suction Hose.
A minimum of 6 m of hard suction hose shall be carried. Suction hose shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 1961. Where a hard suction hose is provided, a suction
strainer shall be furnished.
6. Minor Equipment

Page 122 of 344
Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organise and protect the

equipment.
Fire Hose and Nozzles
The following fire hose and nozzles shall be carried on the appliance:
91 m of 65 mm or larger fire hose

122 m of 38 mm, 44 mm fire hose
Two combination spray nozzles, 360 l/min minimum
Miscellaneous Equipment.
The following additional equipment shall be carried on the appliance:
One 2.7 kg pick-head axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance.

One 2 m pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened to the
appliance.
Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the appliance.
Two 9 kg dry chemical portable fire extinguisher mounted in a bracket
fastened to the appliance.
One gated swivel intake connection with pump intake threads on one end and
one or more female connections compatible with the supply hose carried on
the other.
One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981 for each assigned seating position, but
not less than two, mounted in brackets fastened to the appliance or stored in
containers supplied by the SCBA manufacturer.
One spare SCBA cylinder for each SCBA carried, each mounted in a bracket
fastened to the appliance or stored in a specially designed storage space(s).
One first aid kit.
Two combination spanner wrenches mounted in a bracket(s) fastened to the
appliance.
One hydrant wrench mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance.
One double female adapter, sized to fit 65 mm or larger fire hose, mounted in
a bracket fastened to the appliance.
One double male adapter, sized to fit 65 mm or larger fire hose, mounted in a
bracket fastened to the appliance.
One rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket
Two wheel chocks, mounted in readily accessible locations, that meet or
exceed the requirements of SAE J348, Standard for Wheel Chocks, for the
wheel diameter on which the chocks are to be used.
One crowbar [1 m minimum] with brackets.
One pair insulated bolt cutters with 11 mm minimum cut.
One Halligan-type tool with brackets.
One 65 mm hydrant valve (screw-type gate).
Two shovels (one pointed and one scoop).
Two hose straps.
One 38 m length of utility rope having a breaking strength of at least 2268 kg.
Toolbox with hammers, wrenches, screwdrivers, and other assorted tools.
Foam delivery equipment compatible with onboard foam system.
One hose clamp.

Page 123 of 344
NFPA 1901 - Standard for Automotive Fire Apparatus

NFPA 1931 - Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department
Ground Ladders
NFPA 1961 - Standard on Fire Hose
NFPA 1981 - Standard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus for Fire and
Emergency Services
SAE J348 – Wheel chocks

Page 124 of 344
STD G53 - PUMPER FIRE APPLIANCES
Requirements
1. Fire Pump
The appliance shall be equipped with a fire pump that has a minimum rated capacity
of 2850 litres/min. (In accordance with NFPA 1901 Chapter 14 – Fire and Associated
Equipment).
2. Water Tank
The pumper shall be equipped with a water tank(s) that has a minimum certified
capacity (combined, if applicable) of 1136 litres.
A minimum of 1.13 m³ of enclosed weather-resistant compartmentation shall be

provided for the storage of equipment.
4. Hose Storage
Hose bed area(s), compartments, or reels that shall be provided to accommodate the
following. These areas need not be contiguous.
A minimum hose storage area of 0.85 m³ for 65 mm or larger fire hose

Two areas, each a minimum of 0.1 m³, to accommodate 38 mm or larger pre-
connected fire hose lines
5. Other Main Equipment
The following equipment is required. Such brackets or compartments as are

necessary to mount the equipment shall be provided.
Ground Ladders
All ground ladders carried on the appliance shall meet the requirements of NFPA
1931.
At a minimum, the following ladders shall be carried on the appliance:
One straight ladder equipped with roof hooks

One extension ladder
Suction Hose.
A minimum of 6 m of hard suction hose shall be carried. Suction hose shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 1961. Where a hard suction hose is provided, a suction
strainer shall be furnished.

Page 125 of 344
6. Minor Equipment
Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organize and protect the
equipment.
The following fire hose and nozzles shall be carried on the appliance:
244 m of 65 mm fire hose

Miscellaneous Equipment
The following additional equipment shall be carried on the appliance:
One 2.7 kg flathead axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance.

One 2.7 kg pick head axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance.
One 2 m pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened to the
appliance.
One 2.4 m or longer pike pole mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance.
Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the appliance.
Two approved 9 kg dry chemical portable fire extinguishers mounted in a
the other.
One self-contained breathing appliance (SCBA) complying with NFPA 1981
for each assigned seating position, but not less than four, mounted in brackets
fastened to the appliance or stored in containers supplied by the SCBA
manufacturer.
fastened to the appliance or stored in a specially designed storage space.
One first aid kit.
Four combination spanner wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the
appliance.
Two hydrant wrenches mounted in brackets fastened to the appliance.
Two double female adapters, sized to fit 65 mm fire hose, mounted in
brackets fastened to the appliance.
Two double male adapters, sized to fit 65 mm fire hose, mounted in brackets
One rubber mallet, suitable for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a
Two salvage covers, each a minimum size of 3.7 m x 4.3 m.
One fire service claw tool.
One crowbar (1 m minimum) with brackets.
One pair of insulated bolt cutters with 11 mm minimum cut.
One Halligan-type tool with brackets.

Page 126 of 344
One 65 mm hydrant valve (screw-type gate).

One double-gated reducing leader sized to fit hose used in department.
Two shovels (one pointed and one scoop).
Four hose straps.
One 38 m length of utility rope having a breaking strength of at least 2268 kg.
One 3000 W (minimum) portable generator.
Two 500 W portable lights.
Two cord reels with minimum 61 m cord on each with connectors that are
compatible with lights, generator, and smoke ejector.
Toolbox with hammers, wrenches, screwdrivers, and other assorted tools.
Master stream appliance, 3785 l/min minimum.
Foam delivery equipment compatible with onboard foam system.
One hose clamp.

NFPA 1931 - Standard on Design of and Design Verification Tests for Fire Department
Ground Ladders
Emergency Services
SAE J348 - Wheel chocks

Page 127 of 344
STD G54 - MOBILE WATER-SUPPLY FIRE APPLIANCES
Where plant and/or equipment is located or is required to operate in remote areas

where 65 mm fire hydrants are not available, and where the provision of such 65 mm
hydrants is impracticable, there must be ready access instead, to a mobile water
supply fire appliance. Common examples are opencast pits and overland conveyors.
Thus all operations having opencast pits, unprotected overland conveyors, and
similar remote plant and equipment, must provide one or more mobile water supply
fire appliances on site.
Requirements
1. Pump
If the appliance is equipped with either a fire pump, transfer pump, or both, the
pump(s) shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1901 Chapter 14 or Chapter 16
respectively.
2. Water Tank
The mobile water supply appliance shall be equipped with a water tank(s) that meets
the requirements of NFPA 1901 Chapter 17 and that has a minimum certified
capacity (combined, if applicable) of 3800 litres.
A minimum of 0.57 m³ of enclosed weather-resistant compartmentation meeting the

requirements of NFPA 1901 Chapter 13 shall be provided for the storage of
equipment.
4. Hose Storage
A minimum hose storage area of 0.17 m³ for 65 mm fire hose that shall be
provided.
If the appliance is equipped with a fire pump, two areas, each a minimum of
0.1 m³, to accommodate 38 mm or larger pre-connected fire hose lines shall
be provided.
5. Suction Hose
If the appliance is equipped with a pump, a minimum of 6 m of hard suction hose

shall be carried. Suction hose shall meet the requirements of NFPA 1961. Where
hard suction hose is provided, a suction strainer shall be furnished.
6. Minor Equipment
Brackets or compartments shall be furnished so as to organise and protect the

equipment.

Page 128 of 344
The mobile water supply appliance shall be equipped with at least 61 m of 65 mm or

larger fire hose.
If the mobile water supply appliance is equipped with a fire pump, the following shall
be provided:
Miscellaneous Equipment
Mobile water supply fire appliance shall be equipped with at least the following
equipment:
One 2.7 kg flathead or pick head axe mounted in a bracket fastened to the
appliance
One 2 m or longer pike pole or plaster hook mounted in a bracket fastened to
the appliance
Two portable hand lights mounted in brackets fastened to the appliance
Two approved 9 kg dry chemical portable fire extinguishers mounted in a
bracket fastened to the appliance
One SCBA complying with NFPA 1981 but not less than two, mounted in
brackets fastened to the appliance or stored in containers supplied by the
SCBA manufacturer
fastened to the appliance or stored in a specially designed storage space(s)
One first aid kit
Two combination spanner wrenches mounted in a bracket fastened to the
appliance
One hydrant wrench mounted in a bracket fastened to the appliance
One double female adapter, sized to fit 65 mm or larger fire hose, mounted in
a bracket fastened to the appliance
One double male adapter, sized to fit 65 mm or larger fire hose, mounted in a
bracket fastened to the appliance
If the mobile water supply appliance is equipped with a pump, the following
equipment shall additionally be carried on the appliance:
the other end
One rubber mallet, for use on suction hose connections, mounted in a bracket
fastened to the appliance
7. Water bowser in lieu of a mobile water supply fire appliance

Page 129 of 344
Where the provision of a mobile water supply fire appliance is a requirement

(see above), a water bowser may be deemed to satisfy this requirement,
provided that it is suitably equipped. A water bowser would be deemed to be
suitably equipped if equipped as follows:
At least 2 x 65 mm hydrant take-off points must be provided on the

outside of the vehicle, at a height above ground elevation of no more
than 1.5 metres, to make them readily accessible.
Such hydrants must be pressurised by an on-board pump, capable of

delivering a flow of no less than 3 600 litres/minute at a static pressure
of at least 500 kPa. Such measurements shall be taken at the hydrant
points.
A water monitor or cannon must be provided at the highest suitable

position on the water bowser. This must be pressurised by the same
pump contemplated above.
Neither the hydrants nor the monitor may be used for any purpose
except for fire fighting, and must be kept readily available for that
purpose at all times.
A fire equipment receptacle must be kept on the water bowser,

containing at least 4 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 2 x 65 mm fire
fighting nozzles.
The pipe arrangement feeding the water cannon must be so configured

as to be easily switchable between water and foam. This would include
a Venturi arrangement allowing foam concentrate to be put into the
water supply during application, to turn the water cannon into a foam
cannon.
At least 60 litres (3 x 20 litre containers) of foam concentrate must be

kept on the water bowser, within easy access of the position in which
the water/foam cannon is located.
Where a water bowser is so equipped as to double as the “water supply

fire appliance” for an area, in addition to its usual roles at the operation,
gravity fed high speed refilling arrangements must be provided with a 5
minute drive (one-way) of all areas in which the water bowser operates.
This should allow for a refilling rate of no less than 10 000 litres/minute.
Maintenance
Water bowsers doubling as “water supply mobile fire appliances” must be

inspected and maintained according to the following schedule:
Weekly equipment check by supervisor.

Page 130 of 344
Monthly equipment check and discharge test with fire drill by

supervisor, involving operating staff. This should alternate between
hydrant 1, hydrant 2, monitor using foam and monitor using water.
Quarterly engineering maintenance on pump, including greasing of

hydrants.
8. Operators
All water bowser operators are to be trained as fire team members, and must
be able to operate both water and foam equipment on the bowser.

Emergency Services
SAE J348 - Wheel chocks

Page 131 of 344
STD G55 – FIRE TRAINING AND EQUIPMENT
Requirements
1. Surface fire team members must form the core of the fire response effort on site. As
such, they must be adequately trained and equipped to deal with the following fire-
related situations:
Fires where the use of breathing apparatus is necessary. To this end, each
team member must be trained in the use of breathing apparatus, and
moreover, at least 20 breathing apparatus sets must be provided and
maintained on site, and either, for each set, a spare cylinder must be kept. All
recharging of breathing apparatus facilities must be available on site.
Fires where the manual application of fire suppressant foam by means of

hoses and foam generators is necessary. Typically, this would include
flammable liquid fires, such as at bulk diesel storage facilities or transformers.
To this end, adequate quantities of foam concentrate must be kept on site,
and there must be access to foam generator trolleys, whilst any fire tender on
site should be equipped to generate and apply foam by means of a roof
mounted water monitor (cannon).
Fires in elevated structures. This would include tall plant buildings, and
elevated conveyor belt paths.
Fires in confined spaces. This could also include elevated, enclosed conveyor
belt paths, draglines, and some areas in the plant.
Electrical fires, for example, at substations or transformers.
2. Whilst volunteer fire team members need not be trained to the same level of
proficiency in these aspects of fire fighting, as professional fire team members, they
must nonetheless be adequately trained, in the opinion of professional fire training
body such as the FPASA, to conduct and lead initial fire fighting efforts on site until
the arrival of professional fire teams from local municipalities. Cognisance must
therefore be taken of the likely response times of the available professional teams,
allowing for a worst case situation when an emergency so exists in the municipal area
served by such professional teams.
3. Irrespective of the availability of the abovementioned surface fire team, all employees
on site must also be proficient to some degree in the use of the fire fighting
equipment provided on site. Expected minimum proficiency levels of the general
workforce are as follows:
At least 90% of the workforce must be adequately trained in the use of

primary fire fighting equipment, which includes 25 mm fire hosereels and
hand-held fire extinguishers. Such persons must be able to use this
equipment appropriately, and must have knowledge of how to raise a fire
alarm and initiate the evacuation of persons from the affected area. Their
training must also include knowledge of different types of fire and appropriate
response to each type.

Page 132 of 344
At least 50% of the workforce, and this may include the volunteer fire team
discussed above, must be proficient in the use of both primary fire fighting
measures (as described above) and secondary fire fighting measures (65 mm
hydrants and hoses) as provided on site. These persons do not require the
specialist skills required of the volunteer fire team members (see above), but
should be proficient in the use of all primary and secondary fire fighting
measures on site, so that they can assist volunteer and professional fire team
members under their direction.
Standard G51 - Fire engines

Standard G52 - Initial attack fire appliances
Standard G53 - Pumper fire appliances
Standard G54 - Mobile water-supply fire appliances

Page 133 of 344
STD G56 – PLANT AND MAJOR EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN PRECAUTIONS
Requirements
1. Remove the power source from all non essential equipment. Lock out and tag
the equipment.
2. Remove all trash. Ensure that the area or building is free of rags, debris, and
packing material.
3. Ensure that means of egress are clear and unobstructed.
4. Remove all unnecessary flammable and combustible liquids and gases.
5. Where fire protection systems are still operable, these must be inspected
maintained in accordance with these Standards.
6. Test emergency systems and generators, as necessary.
7. Where a dragline or other remote plant is under shutdown, a radio link to a

central control station or responsible person capable of marshaling support
from water bowsers or fire teams.

Page 134 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS - UNDERGROUND MINES
STD U1 - HEADGEAR HOIST ROOMS
Definition
Headgear hoist rooms are hoist rooms located on top of the headgear. Typically, these will
be equipped with Koepe winders, and may occupy one or more levels at the top of the
headgear.
Concern
The main concern of headgear hoist rooms, is that if a fire occurring in such hoist room
reaches sufficient intensity, it can result in impairment of the structural integrity of the
headgear and may even result in conveyances being dropped down the shaft.
Application
Regarding existing hoist rooms, all practicable modifications must be made to bring them as
far as possible in line with the requirements of this Standard
Requirements
1. MV transformers and switchgear should not be located in headgear hoist rooms. If

located in a headgear hoist room, switchgear and transformers installed must be
vacuum-type or SF6 filled, in order to reduce the ignition risk and fire loading in this
critical area.
2. Even if of the vacuum-type or SF6 filled, MV transformers or switchgear installed in

headgear hoist rooms must be separated from each other and from other equipment
in the hoist room by means of effective fire / separating walls. Refer to Standard G34
in this regard. NB. Transformer separating walls need not be retrofitted in transformer
installations built before 2000.
3. All levels of headgear hoist rooms must be protected by a fixed passive point
automatic fire detection system as contemplated in Standard G9.
4. All electrical cables installed are to be of the red stripe flame retardant type.
Notwithstanding this requirement, all cables are to be suspended at least 300 mm
from any combustible materials or equipment. Refer to Standard G1 in this regard.
5. To reduce the fire load in this critical installation to the lowest possible level, only
working quantities of flammable and combustible materials may be retained within the
hoist room. Where it is necessary to store larger quantities in close proximity to the
hoist room, these must be located in a separate and independent flammable
materials store, located at ground elevation, and spatially well separated from the
headgear structure. Refer to Standard G38.
6. Where electric panels and switchgear are located in the general area of a headgear
hoist room, it is recommended that in-cabinet automatic fixed gaseous fire

Page 135 of 344
suppression systems be provided within the panels. See Standard G8 in this regard.
Early warning aspirated detection systems, linear wire or passive point detector
heads are all acceptable means of detecting fire in the cabinets, and automatically
actuating the in-cabinet suppression systems.
7. Any electrical panels located in the general area of a headgear hoist room, must have
any electrical cables entering and leaving the panels intumescent coated for a
distance of at least 1 metre at the point of entry / exit. Such intumescent coating must
be applied to the entire circumference of each cable, to the required thickness as
stipulated by the manufacturer of the product as being adequate to ensure a fire
resistance rating of at least 2 hours. See Standard G36 in this regard.
8. Substations, MCCs and similar should not be located within the headgear at all new
installations. Where a substation or MCC is located within headgear structure, it must
enjoy perfect structural separation from all other areas / zones of the headgear, and
must be treated in the same way as a critical surface substation or MCC. See
Standard G18 in this regard.
9. At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be deployed on each level of

every headgear hoist room. These must be individually mounted, and it is suggested
that the units should be mounted near the entrance or entrances. Adhere to the
requirements stated in Standard G28. Note that this requirement is conditional upon
full compliance with Requirement 10 below.
10. At a central, easily accessible position in every headgear hoist room, provide a
trolley-mounted bulk foam fire extinguisher. Where a headgear hoist room is split over
several levels, it is acceptable to place the foam trolley on the central level, provided
that:
A Viking-type hose of adequate length is provided and
There is free access between the levels over which the headgear hoist room
is spread (for example, a stairwell).
Refer to Standard G49 for the applicable requirements.
11. In headgear hoist rooms, hot work is only permissible if it must be performed in situ to
maintain installed equipment. The requirements as stated in Standard G11 must be
adhered to. Hot work may not be routinely performed in any headgear hoist room,
and no headgear hoist room should serve as a permanent workshop of any sort.
12. Any hydraulic power packs and / or lubrication packs which may be installed within a
headgear hoist room, must adhere to the relevant requirements as stated in Standard
G32. The requirements for bunding as stated in Standard G33, also pertain.
13. Due to the criticality of headgear hoist rooms, as described in the introduction above,
every effort must be made to eliminate ignition sources. For that reason, the
headgear superstructure as a whole must be declared a “no smoking” area, and
signage must be erected prohibiting smoking and naked lights. Refer to Requirement
11 above regarding hot work in underground hoist rooms.

Page 136 of 344
14. In order to reduce the structural fire loading of headgear hoist rooms, the use of
flammable or combustible materials in the construction of hoist rooms is
unacceptable. Refer to Standard G48 in this regard.

Standard G32 - Hydraulic lubrication and power packs
Standard G48 - Fire retardancy and incombustibility

Page 137 of 344
STD U2 - STAND-ALONE SURFACE HOIST ROOMS
Definition
By “stand-alone surface hoist room” is meant the structure housing winders and related
equipment, serving the shaft leading to the underground workings, but which structure is
located at ground elevation in a position spatially well separated from the headgear. This
arrangement would typically be the case where Koepe winders are not installed.
Concern
The concern with stand-alone surface hoist rooms is that energy levels are high, and a fire is
foreseeable. a fire in a hoist room is likely to cause significant damage to property, and to
result in significant business interruption during reconstruction. In an extreme case, a fire
could result in hoist ropes being severed by the heat, dropping conveyances down the shaft.
However, unlike headgear hoist rooms as contemplated in Standard U1, stand-alone surface
hoist rooms eliminate the risk that a hoist room fire could affect the structural integrity of the
headgear itself.
Requirements
1. MV transformers and switchgear should not be positioned within hoist rooms. Where
transformers and switchgear are positioned within the hoist room, they must be of the
vacuum-type or SF6 filled, in order to reduce the ignition risk and fire loading in this
critical area.
2. Even if vacuum-type or of the SF6 filled, any transformers installed in stand-alone

surface hoist rooms must be separated from each other and from other equipment in
the hoist room by means of effective fire / separating walls. Refer to Standard G34 in
this regard. NB. Transformer separating walls need not be retrofitted in transformer
installations built before 2000.
3. The entire hoist room must be protected by a fixed passive point automatic fire
detection system as contemplated in Standard G9.
4. All electrical cables installed to be of the red stripe flame retardant. Notwithstanding
this requirement, all cables are to be suspended at least 300 mm from any
combustible materials or equipment. Refer to Standard G1 in this regard.
5. To reduce the fire load in this critical installation to the lowest possible level, only
working quantities of flammable and combustible materials may be retained within the
hoist room. Additional quantities of flammable and combustible materials must be
stored in a dedicated flammable materials store, spatially well separated from the
stand-alone headgear hoist room. Refer to Standard G38 in this regard.
6. Where electric panels and switchgear are located in the general space of a stand-
alone surface hoist room, consider providing in-cabinet automatic fixed gaseous fire
suppression systems within the panels. See Standard G8 in this regard. The decision
as to whether to provide such systems should be based upon the outcome of a risk
assessment conducted on the panels within the context of the hoist room, to
determine their criticality in accordance with the standards laid down in G47.

Page 138 of 344
Particular cognisance must be had of the proximity of these panels to other

equipment, and whether the panels are MV or LT. Early warning aspirated detection
systems, linear wire or passive point detector heads are all acceptable means of
detecting fire in the cabinets, and automatically actuating the in-cabinet suppression
systems.
7. All electrical cables entering or leaving any electrical panels which may be located in
the general space of a stand-alone surface hoist room, must be intumescent coated
for a distance of at least 1 metre at the point of entry / exit into the panels. Such
intumescent coating must be applied to the entire circumference of each cable, to the
required thickness as stipulated by the manufacturer of the product as being
adequate to ensure a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours. See Standard G36 in
this regard.
8. Substations and MCCs should not be located within a stand-alone surface hoist room
and neither should they be located adjacent to such structure. Instead, they must be
spatially separated from the structure.
At existing installations, where substations or MCCs are located within or adjacent to

a stand-alone surface headgear structure, they must enjoy perfect structural
separation from the hoist room. All requirements pertaining to critical surface
substations and MCCs, shall apply. See Standard G18 in this regard.
9. At least 4 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be deployed in the stand-

alone surface hoist room. These may be individually mounted, or they may be
mounted in pairs, but a single bank of 4 or more is not acceptable. It is suggested that
some units should be mounted near the entrance or entrances. Adhere to the
requirements stated in Standard G28. Note that the adequacy of this requirement is
conditional upon full compliance with all other related requirements, and especially
those stated in 10, 11 and 12 below.
10. At a central, easily accessible position in the stand-alone surface hoist room, provide
a trolley-mounted bulk foam fire extinguisher. Refer to Standard G49 for the
applicable requirements. Note that the adequacy of this requirement is conditional
upon full compliance with all other related requirements, and especially those stated
in 9, 11 and 12.
11. 65 mm fire hydrants are not required inside a stand-alone surface hoist room.
However, There must be ready access to at least 2 x 65 mm “area hydrants”, i.e.
hydrants located outside the hoist room. It would be usual to provide a hydrant on
either side of the hoist room structure, so that a fire occurring in the structure can be
fight fire from a particular direction on a given day.
These hydrants should be positioned between 10 and 30 metres from the structure,
so that they will remain accessible event after the outbreak of fire.
Note that the adequacy of this requirement is conditional upon full compliance with all
other related requirements, and especially those stated in 9, 10 and 12. Pressure,
flow and other requirements pertaining to fire hydrants are contained in Standard
G29.

Page 139 of 344
flat lay fire hoses, and 3 x 65 mm nozzles. Note that the adequacy of this requirement
is conditional upon full compliance with all other related requirements, and especially
those stated in 9, 10 and 11 above.
13. No workshops, particularly workshops in which hot work is routinely performed, like
boilermaking workshops, are to be located within any stand-alone surface hoist room.
Obviously, when hot work must be performed in situ in the hoist room, to maintain
installed equipment, this is permissible as long as the requirements as stated in
Standard G11 are adhered to. However, hot work may not be routinely performed in a
stand-alone surface hoist room.
14. Any hydraulic power packs and / or lubrication packs which may be installed within a
stand-alone surface hoist room, must adhere to the relevant requirements as stated
in Standard G32. The requirements for bunding as stated in Standard G33, also
pertain.
15. Due to the criticality of stand-alone surface hoist rooms, every effort must be made to
eliminate ignition sources. For that reason, these structures must be declared “no
smoking” areas, and signage must be erected prohibiting smoking and naked lights at
all entrances leading to the stand-alone surface hoist rooms. Refer to Requirement
13 above regarding hot work in stand-alone surface hoist rooms.
16. Due to the criticality of stand-alone surface hoist rooms, fire load must be kept to the
barest minimum. Resultantly, structural fire loading must be reduced as far as
possible, by avoiding combustible and flammable materials in the construction. Refer
to Standard G48 in this regard.

Standard G32 - Hydraulic lubrication and power packs

Page 140 of 344
STD U3 - VERTICAL SHAFTS, STATIONS AND SURFACE BANKS
Requirements
1. Water sprays are required at the collar of every shaft. These must cover the entire
shaft area, and heads must be so located and positioned that the entire excavation
will be effectively wet when the sprays are activated. Pipes, valves and other
appurtenances are to be colour coded red. All pipes used must be steel. The sprays
are to be manually activated by means of a clearly demarcated valve located
between 15 and 25 m from the shaft, to make it accessible even in an emergency
situation.
The shaft spray system must discharge water at the rate of 1 litre/second/m² of the
cross-sectional shaft footprint.
2. Each underground shaft station is to be established as an underground

environmental condition monitoring location, reporting to a constantly monitored
control room on surface. Refer to Standard U18 for the relevant requirements.
3. On the shaft bank and on every underground shaft station, provide a 65 mm fire
hydrant point. Refer to Standard G29 regarding pressure and flow requirements. At
each hydrant, provide a fire hose box or cabinet containing at least 4 x 65 mm flat lay
fire hoses, a Y-branch, and two 65 mm nozzles. Hydrant points must be located no
closer than 10 metres and no further than 30 metres from the shaft, in the case of the
surface bank. In the case of the underground stations, hydrants must be within 30
metres of the shaft. Hydrant positions are to be demarcated with the appropriate
symbolic and directional signage.
4. One or more 25 mm fire hosereels may also be installed on the shaft bank and the
underground stations, but these do not remove the strict requirement for hydrants as
stated in 3 above.
5. Timber and other combustibles must not be used when equipping an underground
shaft.
6. At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be provided on each shaft

station and on the surface bank, in a prominent and easily accessible position,
demarcated by the relevant symbolic signage. Refer to Standard G28 with regard to
hand-held fire extinguishers.
7. At the surface bank, where electrical cables enter the shaft, measures must be taken
to prevent fire spread along the cables from entering the shaft. This is of particular
concern where the shaft is an intake airway. The following measures are acceptable
means whereby this can be achieved:
All cables leading to the shaft can be completely buried for a distance of at
least 2 metres at some position within 10 metres of the edge of the shaft.
Alternatively, where cables are located in a cable duct or cable trench, an

automatically activating fire sprinkler system can be installed in the trench for
a linear distance of at least 10 metres. Refer to Standard G4 in this regard.

Page 141 of 344
Standard G4 - Fire sprinkler systems - automatic (in cable trenches)

Standard U18 - Underground environmental monitoring systems

Page 142 of 344
STD U4 - INCLINES
Definition
By “incline” is meant an incline roadway or excavation linking the underground workings with
surface. Inclines may typically serve as a route for services such as electrical power and
water, they may have one or more conveyor belt paths running in them, and may serve as an
accessway to the workings for persons on foot and / or vehicles (roadway).
Requirements
1. Irrespective of what other function an incline may serve, an incline in which one or
more conveyor belt paths is installed, shall be subject to the requirements stated in
Standard U5, Underground Conveyors.
2. In an incline in which the requirements stated in 1 above do not apply, but where
rubber-tyred vehicles travel, 65 mm fire hydrants must be provided at 90 metre
intervals. A fire equipment box should be provided at every 3rd hydrant (i.e. at
intervals of 270 metres) containing 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm
nozzle.
3. In inclines where no conveyor belt is installed and where no vehicles travel, there is
no requirement for water-based fire fighting capability.
4. Electrical cables installed should be of the red stripe flame retardant type or of the
white stripe “Lotox” type.
5. Having due regard for the direction of the ventilating current, and allowing for possible
reversals in the direction of ventilation, such as may occur during a power outage, or
as a result of an underground fire, underground environmental monitoring stations
should be established to effectively detect fire in every incline.
6. Hot work must only be performed in inclines subject to the provisions of Standard
G11.
7. Combustible materials such as timber should not be used for support or other
purposes in an incline in which vehicles operate and / or in which one or more
conveyor belt paths are installed.
8. Electrical substations and mini substations should not be installed within an incline
excavation if such excavation houses one or more installed conveyor belt paths. In
such case, the substation must be located at the top of the incline, at the bottom of
the incline, or in a side excavation taken off the main incline excavation.
9. Electrical cables and switchgear must be located on the opposite side of the incline to
the conveyor belt. Where the conveyor belt is positioned in the centre of the
excavation, the cables and switchgear must be installed against the sidewall as far as
possible from the conveyor belt path, and in any event, no closer than 1 metre from
the conveyor belt path. The conveyor structure should not be used as a cable rack.

Page 143 of 344

Standard U5 - Underground conveyors

Page 144 of 344
STD U5 - UNDERGROUND CONVEYORS
Requirements
1. Only flame retardant and non toxic conveyor belt to be used.
2. In order to reduce the fire load represented by the conveyor belt path, no rubber-lined
conveyor idlers should be used. Where drive and other pulleys are lagged, the
lagging must be ceramic, and not rubber.
3. Electrical switchgear must not be mounted within 1 metre of trunk or sectional

conveyor belt path, except in cases where the switchgear is directly related to the
conveyor.
4. At every “belt risk area” (see below), provide a 65 mm hydrant and a fire hose box
containing at least 2 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 1 x 65 mm fire fighting nozzle.
5. In addition to the hydrants and hose boxes contemplated in 4 above, provide a

hydrant at intervals not exceeding 90 metres in new workings or 100 metres in old
workings where retrofitting of hydrants is necessary, along all underground conveyor
belt paths. Save that where the hydrant contemplated in 4 above coincides with the
spacing requirement of this requirement 5, then the hydrants provided in terms of 4
above, shall be deemed to satisfy, in that instance, the requirement for a particular
hydrant, expressed in this requirement 5.
6. At every second hydrant point contemplated in 5 above, and in any case, at intervals
not exceeding 200 metres, provide a fire hose box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat
lay fire hoses, and 1 x 65 mm fire fighting nozzle. Where a hose box as contemplated
in 4 above, falls within the spacing requirements of this requirement 6, it shall be
acceptable to rely upon the hose box as contemplated in 4 above, provided that the
number of hoses kept in such box is increased from 2 to at least 3.
7. Alternatively, the requirements expressed in 6 above may be satisfied by providing a

fire equipment receptacle on every underground vehicle operating on the mine
excluding section-based vehicles like shuttle cars and continuous miners. Such fire
equipment receptacle must contain a minimum of 2 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses and 1
x 65 mm fire fighting nozzle.
Moreover, this exemption shall be applicable only if a site specific risk assessment, to
be repeated at annual intervals, has shown that:
i) The number of vehicles in the underground workings is typically sufficient to

ensure that this arrangement will result in hoses and nozzles being as readily
available as would be the case if requirement 6 above were implemented, and
ii) …it can be shown that the extent of the workings of the particular mine are of
such extent as would make the implementation of requirement of 6 above
impracticable and unduly costly.
8. Where a decision has been taken to provide fire fighting hoses and nozzles on
vehicles as contemplated in 7 above, any pre start checklist for such vehicles must

Page 145 of 344
make provision for the inspection of the condition and completeness of the fire
equipment.
9. No fire equipment box or receptacle may be locked or in any other way be made
inaccessible to the general workforce, so that fire fighting equipment is readily
available to any person discovering a fire. Save that this requirement shall not apply
in the case of the fire equipment receptacles to be carried on vehicles. In such case,
the receptacle may be locked, provided that the key is kept together with the key of
the vehicle, in the possession of the allocated driver.
10. At least 1 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguisher must be provided at every conveyor
drive. This is primarily for use in case of a fire on a drive motor or gearbox, for which
water is unsuitable.
11. All conveyors are to be fitted with belt slip detection devices.
12. At strategic positions, as determined by the VOHE Department, environmental

monitoring stations as contemplated in Standard U18, must be set up, and monitored
from surface, with a view to detecting products of combustion, and / or flammable
gas, in the air, with a view to the early detection of fire. Refer to Standard U18 in this
regard.
13. Sectional conveyors are to be located only in the out-by in return ventilation, except in
cases where the VOHE Department has determined, for good reason, that a different
location is acceptable.

Page 146 of 344
STD U6 – STONEDUSTING
In terms of the ‘Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory Code of Practice for the
Prevention of Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in Collieries’, Annexure 2,
Section 3 (DME16/3/2/1-A1), every mine shall have in place a Code of Practice
relevant to Stonedusting. This shall be more detailed and mine-specific than the
generic requirements stated below. The COP shall not offer less protection than that
stated below, unless compelling reasons exist which indicate that such lesser
measures would be adequate and where applicable, the relevant DME exemption
must be sought.
Bagged stone dust barriers
Application
In order to effectively control the potential for coal dust explosions, stone dust barriers are
required outbye of each working section, and elsewhere as may be determined by the VOHE
department. The use of bagged stone dust barriers is an alternative to water barriers, and is
the preferred option for AngloCoal operations.
Requirements
1. Four stone dust sub-barriers must be maintained in the outbye of each working section
– See Requirement 8 below.
2. Each plastic bag must contain either 5 kg for low seams or 6 kg for high seams of dry
stone dust complying with the specifications specified previously.
3. The quality, hook and ring as well as the rupture characteristics of the plastic bags
used in bagged stone dust barriers must comply with the specifications of the products
tested at the GP Badenhorst research facility. Documentary evidence as to the source
and quality at each batch of bags purchased must be kept at the mine.
4. The COP(s) in use at the operation must detail how the bags are to be closed so as to
exude water when bags are installed in barriers underground.
5. The COP(s) in use at the operation must clearly specify how the bags are to be
suspended below the roadway roof. The system must ensure that the vertical distance
between suspended bags and the roof, and the horizontal distance between bags and
between the outer bags and sidewalls, are to be maintained at all times.
6. The horizontal distance between the hooks of the bags on a plane must be not less
than 0.4 m and not greater than 1.0 m when measured across the roadway width. The
actual distances are determined by the total mass of stone dust that needs to be
incorporated into a barrier which is itself determined by the roadway dimensions.
7. To cover a range of working heights, the following requirements apply:
for roads in the height range of less than 3,0 m, each row must have a single
level of bags suspended below the roof;

Page 147 of 344
for roads in the height range 3,0 m to 3,5 m, each row must have a single level
of bags suspended not more than 0,5 m below the roof;
for roads in the height range 3,5 m to 4,5 m, each row must have two levels of
bags suspended at approximately 3,0 m and 4,0 m above floor level;
for roads in the height range of more than 4,5 m but less than 6,0m, each row
must have three levels of bags suspended at approximately 3,0 m, 4,0 m and
5,0 m above floor level;
the distance between the bags and the side of the pillar must not be nearer
than 0,5m and not further than 1,0m, the distance measured along the road
between rows of bags within the barrier must be not less than 1,5 m and not
greater than 3,0m;
If MA is the mass of stone dust based on cross-sectional area and MV is the

mass based on volume, then MA must be at least 100 kg per square meter of
cross-section area and MV must be at least 1 kg of stone dust per cubic meter
of roadway volume; and (h) the total mass of stone dust to be used in a barrier
must be based on the greater of MA and MV.
8. In terms of layout, a full-bagged stone dust barrier must consist of four sub-barriers
installed over a minimum distance of 100 meters of continuous roadway. Three
complete sub-barriers must be in position at all times, while the fourth sub-barrier may
be in the process of being moved ahead as the section advances.
9. The following distances must be maintained:
the first sub-barrier, closest to the last road, must not be installed closer than 60m
and not further than 120m from the last through road;
the fourth sub-barrier, furthest from the last through road, must be installed not
more than 120 meters from the first sub-barrier;
the two intermediate sub-barriers must be equidistant between the first and fourth
sub-barriers;
the presence of splits must be ignored in determining distances; and
the maximum distance between sub-barriers must not exceed 30 meters.
10. In terms of the siting of bagged stone dust barriers, a barrier must be provided:
In every conveyor belt road in a production section.
Every single entry must be protected with a barrier, as for conveyor belt roads.
Return airways must be protected either by high level of incombustible matter

(80%) for the first 1000m out bye of the face, or by a barrier.

Page 148 of 344
Stonedusting of pillars and rib sides
Application
In order to control the potential for coal dust explosions by the effective inertisation of coal
dust, stone dusting of pillars and rib sides is required. Inertisation of coal dust by the use of
water is also an acceptable alternative, but the preferred method in AngloCoal is the
application of stone dust.
Requirements
1. The following requirements pertain to the degree of inertisation required in terms of

Section 8 of the ‘Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory Code of Practice for the
Prevention of Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in Collieries’ (DME16/3/2/1-
A1).
Inbye of the face area: intake airways must be maintained at a minimum

percentage by mass of incombustible matter content of 80%.
Outbye the face area: intake airways must be maintained at a minimum of 65%
incombustible matter content. Workshops, sub-stations, battery charging stations
and other similar places where work is done or equipment is maintained, situated in
intake air must nevertheless be maintained at a minimum of 80% incombustible
matter content.
In return airways, a minimum percentage by mass of incombustible matter content

of 80% must be maintained up to a minimum distance of 1000 m from the face.
Beyond this distance, a minimum percentage by mass of incombustible matter
content of 65% must be maintained. Where barriers are installed, the incombustible
matter content by mass, outbye the face area and outbye of the barriers must be
maintained at not less than 65%.
All accessible roads within 250m radius from areas in the process of being sealed
off, must contain a minimum percentage by mass of incombustible matter content
of 80%, unless the area has been sealed off with explosion proof seals, or other
seals as determined by a risk assessment.
In conveyor roads a minimum percentage by mass of incombustible matter content

of 80% must be maintained up to a minimum distance of 180m from the face.
Beyond this distance, a minimum percentage by mass of incombustible content of
65% is permissible. The installation of stone dust/water barriers is mandatory.
Before any area is sealed off, the roof, sides and floor, as far as reasonably
practicable, must be stone dusted to ensure a minimum percentage by mass of
incombustible matter content of 80%.
2. The following requirements pertain to the minimum quality requirements for stone
dust, as stated in Section 8 of the ‘Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory Code
of Practice for the Prevention of Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in
Collieries’ (DME16/3/2/1-A1).

Page 149 of 344
Stone dust must preferably be pulverized limestone or dolomite and light in colour;
Stone dust must contain not less than 95% by mass of incombustible matter, and
have a density similar or equal to that of pulverised limestone;
Stone dust must contain not more than 5% by mass of free silica, or any other toxic
substance in concentrations detrimental to health;
Stone dust must be of such fineness that, when dry, 100% will pass through a
sieve of 600 micrometers aperture, and at least 50% (by mass) will pass through a
sieve of 75 micrometers aperture;
Stone dust must not cake, and must readily disperse into the air, unless it is directly
wetted by water;
Should any other incombustible dust be used, compliance with the ability to stop
flame propagation of a coal dust explosion must be tested and approved for use at
a SANAS accredited institution.
3. The following requirements pertain to the extent of stone dust application required in
terms of Section 8 of the ‘Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory Code of
Practice for the Prevention of Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in Collieries’
(DME16/3/2/1-A1).
Stone dust must be applied to within 10m of all working faces, unless such workings
are:
inaccessible,
unsafe to enter, or
extend to the face from and including the last through road, in which the coal dust
has been washed from the roof and sides and the floor is too wet to propagate an
explosion.
4. The following requirements pertain to the frequency of stone dust application

required in terms of Section 8 of the ‘Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory
Code of Practice for the Prevention of Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in
Collieries’ (DME16/3/2/1-A1).
In face areas, stone dust must be applied, and re-applied, as often as is

necessary, to maintain the incombustible matter content by mass at a minimum of
80%. The frequency rate of application must not be less than once in every four
production shifts, unless a risk assessment, which includes rates of deposition of
float coal, or other sampling indicates otherwise. This also applies to roads within
the face area including roads carrying return air.
In pillar extraction operations, stone dust must be applied on a retreat basis at the
same frequency rate as for face areas.
In total extraction operations, stone dust must be injected regularly into the mined
areas before the occurrence of the initial goaf, so as to inert the dust cloud that
will be raised when it occurs.

Page 150 of 344
In return airways of both longwall and shortwall mining operations, stone dust
must be introduced into the return airways during coal winning.
Guideline for the Compilation of a Mandatory Code of Practice for the Prevention of
Flammable Gas and Coal Dust Explosions in Collieries (DME16/3/2/1-A1).
The mine-specific COP

Page 151 of 344
STD U7 - FLAMEPROOF ZONES
Definition
“Flameproof equipment” is equipment for which a certificate has been issued, declaring it to
be “flameproof”.
Requirements
1. No non-flameproof equipment may be taken into a flameproof zone, or may operate in

a flameproof zone unless an exemption has been obtained. Such equipment must be
left beyond the signs indicating the start of the flameproof zone.
Any related mine-specific COP

Page 152 of 344
STD U8 - FIXED UNDERGROUND SUBSTATIONS
Definition
By “fixed underground substation” is meant an electrical substation located in the

underground workings and typically enclosed by walls to form a substation room or rooms
similar to a surface substation. “Fixed underground substations” will typically be permanent
installations intended to last the life of the mine.
Requirements
1. No oil-filled switchgear or transformers are acceptable in the underground workings.

All such equipment must be of the dry type, i.e. vacuum-type or SF6 filled.
2. The environmental conditions in every fixed underground substation must be

monitored as described in Standard U18. The VOHE Department will determine the
type and location of the detection heads required. Such system must be monitored
continuously from a surface control room.
3. All electrical cables installed underground are to be of the red stripe flame retardant
type. In all new underground applications, white stripe “Lotox” type cable must be
used.
4. No additional material or equipment, and especially no flammable or combustible

materials, may be retained within a fixed underground substation or a transformer
bay.
5. Wherever electrical cables enter or leave a transformer bay or substation room,

associated with a fixed underground substation, such cable penetration aperture must
be fire stopped, and the cables must be intumescent coated for at least 1 metre on
either side of the fire stopping unless they are covered in a sand filled trench (of at
least 1 m but preferably 2 m). Such intumescent coating must be applied to the entire
circumference of each cable, to the required thickness as stipulated by the
manufacturer of the product selected, as being adequate to ensure a fire resistance
rating of at least 2 hours. See Standard G36 in this regard.

substation room. These may be mounted either inside or the main entrance door
leading to each room, at a height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation. The
extinguishers should be clearly demarcated using the appropriate symbolic and
directional signage. Note however, that where all equipment is located within a single
room at a fixed underground substation, then a minimum of 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP
fire extinguishers shall be deployed.
7. Notwithstanding the requirement above for DCP fire extinguishers to be deployed at

fixed underground substations, where a separate and independent PLC room exists,
a 5 kg hand-held CO2 fire extinguisher shall be substituted for each 9 kg hand-held
DCP fire extinguisher required to be deployed at such PLC room, in deference to the
sensitive electronic equipment installed here which would be damaged by the
chemical powder. Mounting requirements for CO2 extinguishers are the same as for
DCP fire extinguishers.

Page 153 of 344
8. The fixed underground substations must always be located in a return airway, or must
be ventilated to a return airway. Arrangements must be provided which can be
activated from a place of safety outside the substation, to open any vents or similar,
necessary to ensure that the smoke and fumes of combustion are effectively routed
directly into the return air system.
9. Infrared thermographic, or other hot spot scanning, must be conducted on all MV

equipment installed in the underground workings, at intervals specified in the relevant
electrical standard, according to a methodology described in that standard.
10. All MV rooms must be kept locked to prevent unauthorised access. Where
practicable, LT rooms, MCCs and PLC rooms should also be kept locked. Keys must
be kept by a competent person, e.g. an electrician.
11. Whether a fixed gaseous fire suppression system is installed in the fixed underground
substation or not, any ventilation fans and air-conditioners provided in substation
rooms are to be interconnected with the fire detection system so that these will be
tripped out and will cease to operate in response to any fire detected by the automatic
detection system.


design.
12. Any cable trenches interconnecting a substation room with another, or a substation
room with a transformer bay, must be fire stopped wherever cables pass from one
substation to another. At all fire stoppings, the cables must be intumescent coated for
a distance of one meter on either side of such fire stopping unless it is contained in a
sand filled trench of at least 1 m but preferably 2 m. In this regard, refer to Standard
G36.


Page 154 of 344
STD U9 - SECTIONAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Identification
A mobile transformer and switch bank forms part of the standard equipment in the coal
cutting / welding section. This is mobile equipment which moves forward as the section
advances. The position in which such equipment is located is therefore a temporary
installation which must nonetheless comply with the following requirements.
Requirements
1. All equipment to be flameproof.
2. The transformer(s) and all switchgear must be of the dry type (vacuum-type or SF6
filled) to remove the inherent fire load of oil-filled electrical equipment.
3. Cable suspension will understandably be temporary, but must be adequate to ensure

that the risk of cables being damaged by mining vehicles and resulting in an unwanted
ignition source, is minimised.
4. There must be ready access to two caches of 6 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire

extinguishers in the section. These must be mounted at a height of 1.2 metres above
floor level to protect them from damage and to make them more easily visible. They
should be demarcated using the appropriate symbolic signage.
5. Lock-out provision must be provided on all electrical switches and sockets on the
mobile switch bank.
Any related mine specific COP

Page 155 of 344
STD U10 - MOBILE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Identification
By “secondary underground electrical installation” is meant any underground electrical

installation other than an enclosed fixed underground substation, and mobile sectional
equipment.
Requirements
1. Mobile electrical installations underground must be located in roadways where the

risk of vehicular impact is minimised.
2. At least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be provided at every mobile

electrical installation underground. Where there is access from two sides to such
installation, a fire extinguisher should be placed on each side. Fire extinguishers
should be mounted at a height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation and must be
suitably demarcated with the relevant symbolic signage.
3. MV and LT panels must be kept locked at all times, or must be otherwise secured.
The keys should be held by a suitably qualified person, for example, an electrician.
4. All electrical equipment must be of the dry type (i.e. vacuum-type or SF6 filled).
5. Other than coal in situ, no combustibles or flammables are to be permitted within 5

metres of a mobile underground electrical installation.

Page 156 of 344
STD U11 – FEEDER / BREAKERS
1. Because feeder/breakers are moved forward constantly as the section advances,

cable suspension is constantly changing. Cable suspension must be such that cables
are not damaged by machinery moving in the area, since this poses a common source
of ignition.
2. There must be access to a 65 mm hydrant point and a fully equipped fire hose box
close within 30 m of every feeder/breaker. In this regard, refer also to Standard U5
pertaining to underground conveyors.
Standard U5 - Underground conveyors

Page 157 of 344
U12 - USE OF PLASTIC PIPES UNDERGROUND
Rationale
The use of all types of plastic piping underground is to be discouraged for four reasons:
All plastic piping is flammable to a lesser or greater degree. Therefore, its use
underground inevitably leads to increased fire loading in the workings.
During combustion, all plastic pipes emit noxious fumes which pollute the
ambient air, posing a health and safety risk to persons in the area.
Plastic pipes constitute an obvious path by which fire may be propagated from
one area to another.
If plastic pipes are used for water, and the water supply routed through the
plastic pipes is used inter alia for fire fighting purposes (via hydrants and / or
hosereels), the risk exists that if the plastic pipes were damaged in a fire, this
could interrupt supply to the hydrants and hosereels and render these
measures ineffective at the very time that they are needed most. Since plastic
pipes will foreseeably fail much sooner than steel pipes in a fire situation,
plastic pipes are undesirable when used to supply hydrants and hosereels.
Requirements
1. No new purchases to be made of uPVC and HDPE piping for use in underground
workings.
2. All existing HDPE piping greater than 50 mm in diameter must be replaced with steel
piping. Where HDPE pipe is already installed underground, and its diameter does not
exceed 50 mm, it may be left in situ, although it is not ideal, providing that the
following requirement is met. Small diameter HDPE pipes may only remain if they are
suspended individually (i.e. not clustered) 300 mm apart.
3. Where pre-existing uPVC and small diameter HDPE piping remains in use, a
firebreak in the pipeline must be constituted by installing a length of steel pipe every
10th pipe length. Note that such firebreak may not be constituted by intumescent
coating or cladding a plastic pipe.
4. Pre-existing uPVC and small diameter HDPE piping which remains in service
underground, must be suspended on the opposite side of the excavation to electric
cables routed in the same excavation. Where this is not possible, a distance of at
least 1 metre must be maintained between the nearest plastic pipe and the
suspended cables.

Page 158 of 344
STD U13 - PROTO TEAMS
One or more proto teams must be maintained and equipped in respect of each mine which
has underground operations.
Requirements
1. Proto Team Organisation

Every Proto Team shall be under the command of a competent person (Team
Captain). Provision must also be made for a similarly competent deputy who will be
on hand to assume responsibility for the team should the Team Captain be absent or
incapacitated. It shall be the duty of the Team Captain to ensure that all breathing
apparatus is both maintained in good and proper working order and is continuously
available.
Every mine site must have access to at least ten trained Proto Team members within
a reasonable time of being called out.
2. Training
A Proto team shall only be deemed to be competent once all members have
undergone the relevant training as outlined in the Minerals Act and Regulations. This
includes, but is not limited to, exercises with breathing and other mine rescue
apparatus, the reading of mine plans and the detection of poisonous and flammable
gases.
3. Apparatus
All mines must have access to well maintained sets of portable breathing apparatus.
At least two sets per team should be available at any one time. Such equipment must
have sufficient capacity to sustain the wearer for two hours in an irrespirable
environment.
The breathing apparatus must be housed in a dedicated store marked, ‘Rescue

Room’. This store must be used exclusively for rescue equipment.
Where a mine is not in possession of the above equipment, the Manager must be
able to produce evidence that the mine has secured the rights to access such
equipment from neighboring mines or some other nearby location.
4. Apparatus for the testing of gases

As close as possible to the access to underground workings, there shall be
maintained for the Proto Team:
Two or more portable electric lamps capable of at least four hours of

operation with out recharging or any other form of maintenance.
Two or more devices for the testing of toxic gases and the deficiency of
oxygen.
One oxygen reviving apparatus

Page 159 of 344
5. Proto trailers
One or more trailers shall be maintained on surface for the use of the proto teams
when actively engaged on underground fires. Trailers should be positioned close to
the shaft in a position where they can easily be coupled to a vehicle in an emergency.
They should not be kept in a locked yard or building.
Such trailers shall be equipped with adequate quantities of the following equipment,
as determined by the proto manager responsible for the relevant operation. A list of
such equipment, complete with required quantities, shall be taped on each proto
trailer.
1. 65 mm flat lay fire hoses

2. 38 mm flat lay fire hoses
3. Y-branches, manifolds and other fittings for 65 mm hoses
4. Y-branches, manifolds and other fittings for 38 mm hoses
5. Bow saws
6. Hack saws
7. Stilson wrenches
8. 4 lb hammers
9. Stretchers
10. Blankets
11. First aid equipment
12 Ventilation curtaining and accessories
13. 65 mm variable spray fire fighting nozzles
14. Spray pipes
15. Spray pipe adaptors
16. Pliers
17. Wire

Page 160 of 344
STD U14 - BATTERY CHARGING BAYS LOCATED UNDERGROUND
Requirements
1. The location and orientation of battery charging bays are comprehensively dealt with in
SANS 1654.
2. Provide at least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers for each battery charger
installed. Of these, at least one must be located at each entranceway leading to the
battery charging bay. Refer to Standard G28 for the mounting requirements pertaining
to fire extinguishers.
3. A clearly worded procedure must be posted up, detailing the steps to be taken during
battery charging.
4. All relevant Material Safety Data Sheets must be posted up in a conspicuous position.
5. In terms of underground environmental condition monitoring, detector heads, reporting

to a constantly monitored control room on surface, must be provided in positions
indicated by the VOHE Department, to monitor for air velocity and smoke on the intake
side.
6. No flammable or combustible materials not directly associated with the battery

charging process may be stored within a battery charging bay.
SANS 1654 – DC Powered (battery operated) machines for use in hazardous locations in
mines.
Any related mine specific COP

Page 161 of 344
STD U15 - FIXED REFUGE BAYS, ESCAPE WAYS & SELF-RESCUERS
Requirements
1. All persons proceeding underground must be issued with an approved self-contained

self-rescuer with a minimum endurance of 35 minutes.
2. From all working sections, a lifeline with directional cones must be provided leading to
the refuge bay serving the section, to lead persons to safety even in zero visibility
conditions.
3. In addition to the lifeline and directional cones, symbolic signage must be provided at
every change in direction in the escape route leading from each section to the refuge
bay serving that section. The distance between such signage should in any case not
exceed 300 metres, even if there is no change in direction.
4. A refuge bay must be provided within 1000 metres, or 750m if so prescribed by the
mine standard, of every working section. Moreover, a refuge bay must be available
within 1000 metres (or 750m) of any location in which persons are required to work.
Cognisance must be taken of persons working in back areas.
5. Where, for whatever reason, it is not possible to comply with the 1000 metre
requirement described in Requirement 4 above, persons working in the affected area
must be issued with additional standard self-contained self-rescuers, or long-life self-
contained self-rescuers. All units so issued must be approved by the inspectorate, and
such allowance is only permissible if a dispensation has been granted by the
inspectorate.
6. The size of each refuge bay shall be calculated to allow 1.8 m² per person working in
the area if possible. In no case shall a factor less than 0.5 m² per person be used.
7. Where at all possible, fixed refuge bays should be cut into a solid pillar, so that only the
front wall is vulnerable. The length of built wall should be minimised as far as possible,
since this is more vulnerable to damage in an emergency that walls cut into the solid
pillar.
8. Refuge bays must be provided within the maximum distance which persons have been
determined to be able to travel within the duration of the self-contained self-rescuers
with which they are issued upon proceeding underground. A risk assessment must be
conducted in terms of the relevant legislation, to determine such distance.
Such risk assessment must take cognisance of the physical capacity of all persons
regularly employed in the area served by the refuge bay in question, and the physical
characteristics of the route through which such persons will be required to travel. In
any case, the distance of travel to the refuge bay must not exceed 1000m from any
place where persons are required to work.
9. Refuge bays must be equipped as follows:
An adequate supply of clean potable water must be provided.

Page 162 of 344
All construction materials used in the refuge chamber and all equipment
installed must be incombustible.
Not positioned between an intake airway and a return airway such that there
could be leakage of fumes through the chamber. The refuge chamber may
however be positioned wholly in either intake or return airways.
As far as possible, permanent refuge chambers must be cut into solid coal
with a single entry and bricked off with two stopings equipped with steel man
doors.
An air supply must be provided which is independent of the ambient air.
Provided that the chosen measure can be shown to be adequate, an
alternative supply of respirable air, other than e.g. air drawn through a surface
borehole, may be utilised (e.g. a bank of oxygen candles).
A chemical toilet.
A double airlock door arrangement that provides an effective seal.
A means to communicate effectively and reliably with surface, e.g. a
telecommunications link.
An up-to-date list of telephone numbers must be posted up, where the
communications link to surface is a telephone.
The refuge bay must be clearly demarcated with suitable symbolic and
informational signage to ensure that it is visible from all directions and from all
possible access ways leading to it.
An effective audible and visual signalling system must be provided to indicate
the position of the refuge bay.
An adequate supply of first aid equipment, including blankets and stretchers.
Quantities will depend upon the number of persons served by the refuge
chamber.
Refuge bays must be named according to the underground area that they
serve. The name will be posted up using reflective signs on the inside and
outside of the chamber with a similar number on the borehole enclosure on
surface.
The refuge chambers must be indicated on the mine ventilation and rescue
plans and will be numbered corresponding to the refuge chambers.
Notices must be posted up on which are legibly printed in English and another
appropriate language, simple directions setting forth the approved procedures
for the immediate treatment of cases of gassing, heat stroke, heat exhaustion,
drowning and electric shock.
Adequate illumination.
Underground environmental monitoring detection heads of types deemed
suitable for this application by the VOHE Department, must be provided in the
refuge chamber, and must report to the surface control room.
Where any of the above requirements are dependent upon electrical power,
except lighting, an uninterruptible power supply must be provided.
Regulation 24.20.2.1
Regulation 24.20.2.2
Regulation 24.1.1
Regulation 24.1.2
Regulation 24.6

Page 163 of 344
STD U16 - MOBILE CONTAINERISED REFUGE BAYS
Requirements
Mobile refuge bays must comply with the relevant requirements for refuge bays as stated in
Standard U15. The following requirements pertain in particular to mobile refuge bays:
1. Since the mobile / containerised refuge bay will have steel walls, it is not intended to
protect persons inside if the area in which the chamber is located is itself involved in
the fire. Therefore, containerised refuge chambers must be carefully located to
ensure ambient temperatures in the immediate vicinity are unlikely to rise to
unbearable levels, or the refuge container will not sustain life.
2. All mobile refuge chambers must be fitted with some form of oxygen generator,
unless a permanent supply of fresh air can be provided, as for a fixed refuge
chamber.
3. All mobile refuge chambers must be fitted with some form of carbon dioxide scrubber,
unless a permanent supply of fresh air can be provided, as for a fixed refuge
chamber.
4. Every mobile containerised refuge chamber must be equipped with a refrigeration unit
of adequate capacity to maintain temperatures which can sustain human life, given
the maximum number of persons permitted to take refuge in such mobile chamber,
and the highest foreseeable ambient temperature in the area in which the mobile
chamber is to be located.
5. Each mobile containerised refuge chamber must be provided with an AC / DC

inverter / charger or other power back-up system, capable of maintaining power
supply to all equipment in the mobile refuge chamber, other than the lighting system.
6. The position in which any mobile containerised refuge chamber is positioned, must be
surveyed in and accurately demarcated on the relevant survey plans, on the same
day that the mobile container is so positioned. This is vital to ensure that it is possible
to drill an emergency borehole from surface accurately in order to evacuate persons
taking refuge in such a mobile container during an emergency. Furthermore,
cognisance must be taken of surface structures to ensure that the Rescue brigade
drill rig will have access to the correct site.
7. Where a mobile containerised refuge chamber is used in a longwall section, it must

be mounted on the Pantech, to ensure that it moves along with the section and is
always readily available.
8. Whilst all equipment listed in Standard U15, Requirement No 3, remain relevant in the
case of mobile containerised refuge chambers, particular attention is drawn to the
requirement for a double airlock door, a feature which most containerised refuge
chambers available at the time of writing, do not provide. Since most mobile refuge
chambers will rely upon an oxygen generator and a carbon dioxide scrubber
arrangement to maintain a respirable atmosphere within the chamber, it is vital that
repeated opening of the door does not permit contaminated air to enter the refuge
chamber, since it is not foreseeable that these devices could cope with this added

Page 164 of 344
demand and the atmosphere within the refuge chamber could otherwise become
unsuitable to sustain life, rendering the refuge chamber useless.
Standard U15 - Fixed refuge bays, escape ways & self-rescuers

Any mine – specific COP

Page 165 of 344
STD U17 - WORKED OUT AREAS
Sealing off of worked-out areas
It is desirable to seal off worked out areas where possible. This limits the extent of the
workings over which supervision must be exercised, and reduces the potential area in which
a fire can start which could affect the current workings.
Worked out areas must be sealed off according to a method laid down in a COP specific to
the particular mine, and compiled in accordance with the guidelines prescribed by the DME.

Page 166 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS - UNDERGROUND
STD U18 - UNDERGROUND ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Introduction
Continuous on–line monitoring systems will facilitate the establishment and maintenance of a
safe environment underground if well installed, maintained and monitored.
Such a system will give early warning of a fire, spontaneous combustion heating, abnormal
methane or carbon monoxide gas concentrations and a failure or weakening of the air flow.
Prompt action can then be taken to deal safely with the abnormal situation provided controls
are in force.
It is the policy of Anglo Coal that all collieries must be equipped with environmental
monitoring systems. The following guidelines will assist in selecting an appropriate
environmental monitoring system. In all instances attention is drawn to the requirements of
the Mines and Works Act and Regulations which are minimum requirements.
Monitoring Strategy
The Mine Manager assisted by the consulting Mechanical and Electrical Engineer and the
Environmental Engineering Department should determine an appropriate monitoring strategy
for each mine.
The following should be taken in to account:
All collieries are to be equipped with a mine wide fire detection system. The siting of
the monitors is detailed in Requirement 1.
Collieries in which spontaneous combustion is a problem should in addition to the fire

detection system install CO detectors as outlined in Requirement 2.
Mines where methane is encountered must consider an environmental monitoring

system as outlined in Requirement 3.
Requirements
1. Fire detection only
The following monitors should be installed:
a. Becon or CO detectors on the downstream side of the conveyor drive and

drive switch-gear with additional units at intervals of 1 000m along the belt.
b. Becon or CO detectors at 1 000m intervals along intake airways from other

shafts or adits (Not equipped with conveyors).
c. CO detectors in the main return airways: Fire detectors may also be

considered for workshops, battery charging bays, refuelling stations or
strategic sub-stations with oil filled equipment.

Page 167 of 344
d. Bottom of upcast shafts
2. Mines with spontaneous combustion heatings
The product of spontaneous combustion is monitored by means of CO gas detectors.

Mines, in which spontaneous combustion occurs, must in addition to the monitors
installed for fire detection, install CO detectors in:
a. the return air of sections
b. the return air of a district
c. bleeder roads of longwalls, shortwalls and pillar extraction sections.
3. Mines with methane occurrences
Mines in which methane is encountered, and where the Manager considers it

appropriate, must install a full environmental monitoring system. Such a system
should in addition to the detectors required for fire and spontaneous combustion,
consist of:
a. methane detectors sited

i. in the return air from a section – as close as practical to the last through road
ii. in the bleeder roads of longwalls, shortwalls and pillar extraction panels
iii. in the return air of mechanised longwall or shortwall faces – as close as
possible to the tailgate
b. air velocity monitors sited

i. in the return air from a section – as close as practical to the last through road
ii. in the face of a mechanised longwall or shortwall
iii. at strategic positions in the mine ventilation circuits as decided on by the
Manager in consultation with the Environmental Officer.
The monitoring of air velocity at strategic positions will indicate the status of the air
distribution in the mine on a continuous basis. The velocity monitors will give early
warning of a weakening in airflow or a ventilation failure. It will also indicate a
weakening trend in airflow and action can therefore be taken timeously and before a
gas accumulation develops.
4. Barometric Pressure
The measurement of barometric pressure is an integral part of an environmental

monitoring system. The system computer must be programmed to give an alarm
in the control room when a fall in barometric pressure exceeds 150 Pa over a period
of one hour or when an abnormally low pressure is measured.

Page 168 of 344
5. Main Fans
Main fans should be monitored to give warning of a fan failure by a fail to safe
system. Underground power feeders shall be interlocked with the fan operation. Other
main fan functions may also be included.
6. Lightning Protection
In areas where there is a high lightning ground flash density, suitable lighting
protection must be fitted to ensure the effective operations of the monitoring system.
7. Control Room
It is recommended that the surface signal and processing system be

incorporated in to a computerised system. Information will be presented in
the form of overviews, graphs and diagrammatic ventilation plans on a colour
visual display screen. It must also be equipped with a printer.
A facility must be provided to give alarms for each monitoring point taking into
account gas concentrations and duration of peaks that may be caused by
diesels and blasting. Unwanted alarms can thereby be eliminated.
The control room must be manned 24 hours a day. Where this is not possible
an automatic dial-out facility or other arrangements to be made.
The operator in the control room plays an important part in the effective
operations of the system. He therefore requires thorough training in the
operation of the system. He must be fully conversant with the alarm
diagnostics and call-out procedures in the event of an alarm.
Instructions on the action to be taken by the control operator in the event of an

alarm must be displayed in the control room.
The monitoring points must be shown clearly on a rescue plan kept in the
control room, plan to updated quarterly as well as on the installation and
removal of all monitoring points.
8. Maintenance
The maintenance of an environmental monitoring system is of vital

importance. Confidence in the system will be lost if the system is not
maintained and kept in a fully operational condition. Any component failure
should be attended to without delay.
The section engineer or other appointed person should be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the environmental monitoring equipment.
The environmental officer must specify his requirements and bring to the
attention of the responsible section engineer or person any problems
regarding the installation or maintenance of the equipment in writing.

Page 169 of 344
Where large systems are in use, the appointment of a technician or electrician

should be considered.
Environmental monitoring systems must be inspected at least once in two

months or more frequently, if required. The inspection shall include:
cleaning of monitors
testing of response of monitors

replacing malfunctioning monitors
record system in which installation, cleaning, testing and replacement

dates are recorded must be kept by the person responsible for the
maintenance of the system.
The system must be inspected and checked from the control room on a
regular basis by the Electrical Foreman or other person responsible for the
maintenance of the system.
Environmental monitoring systems must be provided with battery back-up

power which must switch on automatically in the event of a power failure.
Back-up power must be provided for at least one hour. A check on the
operations of the back-up power supply must be included in the two monthly
check.
The telemetry cable should preferably have a distinctive colour for easy
recognition, i.e. a canary yellow colour is being used at present.

Page 170 of 344
STD U19 - UNDERGROUND VEHICLE FIRE DETECTION AND FIXED / PORTABLE

SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS
Continuous Miners
Each continuous miner operating underground shall be fitted with:
1. A continuous monitoring system capable of raising an alarm when a pre-determined

concentration of methane is detected in the atmosphere in which the machine is
operating, and capable of cutting out the machine when a predetermined higher
concentration of methane is detected. The level will be described in the best practice
document of each mine.
2. The airflow across the cutting heads shall be appropriate in relation to the position of
the continuous methane monitor on the machine so that the methane detector
samples air returning from the cutting heads.
3. Continuous miners shall be equipped with a means of constantly monitoring the water
supply pressure and flow rate to the machine and of automatically raising an alarm if
the pressure drops below a predetermined level. Such system shall also cause the
machine to cut out if the pressure drops below a lower predetermined level.
4. Each operating continuous miner shall have readily available, a hose of minimum
diameter 25 mm and minimum length 15 metres, connected to the high pressure
water supply to the machine which may be used inter alia for manual fire fighting in
the area in which the CM is operating.
5. All continuous miners must have a valid, current, flameproof certificate before being
permitted to operate.
Sectional vehicles
By “sectional vehicle” is meant a vehicle which operates in an underground mining section,

but is confined to that particular section, and does not move around freely throughout the
underground workings, and does not travel to surface under its own power on a regular
basis.
1. Such vehicles shall not be required to carry on-board fixed automatic detection and
suppression systems, or on-board hand-held fire extinguishers, on condition that:
The requirement as stated above for a 25 mm hose on the CM operating in

the relevant section has been met.
A 65 mm hydrant point is provided at a central position in the section in which

the machine operates. Such hydrant must discharge water of minimum
pressure 300 kPa and minimum flow 1200 litres/minute, sustainable for 120
minutes.
At the hydrant point contemplated in the previous bullet point, at least 3 x 65

mm flat lay fires hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle, must be kept close to the
hydrant point.

Page 171 of 344
In one or more central and easily accessible position within the relevant
section, a minimum of 6 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers must be
kept.
2. All sectional vehicles must have a valid, current, flameproof certificate before being
permitted to operate.
Other underground vehicles
The following requirements pertain to all vehicles which operate primarily underground, but
which may move freely throughout all areas of the underground workings, whether within the
flameproof zones in each section or not, and which may travel periodically to surface.
1. Depending on the size of the vehicle, one or two 9 kg hand-held DCP fire
extinguishers shall be securely mounted in easily accessible positions on the vehicle.
2. Such vehicles are to be fitted with fixed dry chemical powder fire extinguishing
systems covering all risk areas of the machine such as the engine, gearbox and
hydraulics areas. The system should be capable of automatic discharge in response
to a signal received via linear wire routed throughout the abovementioned risk areas
in which the nozzles are located, or manually by means of activation buttons or
plungers to be provided at least at the driver’s cabin in the case of smaller machines
or at the driver’s cabin and at one other external position in the case of larger
machines. Such buttons or plungers are to be colour-coded red, and if necessary,
demarcated.
All discharge nozzles on fixed on-board fire suppression systems are to be fitted with
caps to prevent the clogging of such nozzles. The inspection of such anti-clog caps is
to be included in the pre-use checklists applicable to each machine.

Page 172 of 344
STD U20 - UNDERGROUND DIESEL & OIL STORES, INCLUDING OIL SEPARATION
EQUIPMENT
Requirements
1. Diesel and oil stores must be bunded. Aggregate filling of bunds is inappropriate in
the underground environment. See Standard G33 regarding bund requirements.
2. No electric motor, cable, light or switch may be positioned within the bund of an
underground diesel or oil store unless such equipment is intrinsically safe, or unless it
is raised on a platform or plinth and is resultantly located at a height higher than the
top of the bund wall.
3. Where diesel or oil is stored in a bulk tank (i.e. not in drums or containers), such bulk
container must be effectively earthed.
4. Where the intention of the facility is to transfer any flammable liquid between a bulk
tank and a rubber-tyred vehicle, an earthing clamp must be provided, and a
procedure must be enforced which requires the driver of such vehicle to affix the
earthing clamp to his vehicle during any such transfer of flammable liquid between his
vehicle and the bulk tank in question.
5. Bulk flammable liquid tanks in the underground workings must be totally enclosed in a
cubby excavated for that express purpose. The front of the cubby must be sealed off
with a 225 mm brick wall, in which is set a tightly fitting steel door which must be kept
closed under all normal circumstances.
6. All cable and pipe apertures in wall(s) of the bulk flammable liquid store must be fire
stopped with a suitable inert material of similar fire resistance to the wall itself (i.e. 2
hours). Refer to Standard G36 regarding requirements for fire stopping.
7. Cables passing through fire stoppings as contemplated in the preceding requirement

must be intumescent coated over their entire circumference for a distance of at least
1 metre on either side of such fire stopping. Refer to Standard G36 for the
requirements pertaining to intumescent coating.
8. At a distance of between 10 and 30 metres from every underground diesel or oil

store, there must be ready access to a 65 mm hydrant point. In close proximity to the
abovementioned hydrant, a hose box should be provided containing at least 2 x 65
mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm fire nozzle. Also see Standard G29
regarding the requirements for large bore fire hydrants and equipment.
9. Provide at least 4 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers at all underground diesel

and oil stores. Two should be located inside the enclosure within which the tank(s)
are located, and the remaining two outside the structure. One should be positioned
upwind and the other downwind of the facility, so that there will still be access to a fire
extinguisher even if the ventilating current changes direction such as may occur in a
fire situation. These extinguishers should be positioned between 5 and 15 metres
from the diesel or oil store.

Page 173 of 344
10. Post signage on the outer wall of the enclosure within which the tank(s) are located,
prohibiting smoking and naked lights. These must be clearly visible to persons
entering the enclosure via the entrance door or doors provided.
11. The criticality of the diesel or oil store must be evaluated in terms of the criteria set
down in Standard G47. If the installation is assessed as critical, additional protection
should be provided. This may be in one of the following forms:
A manually activated fire sprinkler system, discharging over the tanks. Refer to
Standard G2 for the requirements pertaining to such systems.
An automatically activated fire sprinkler system, discharging over the tanks.

Refer to Standard G3 for the requirements pertaining to such systems.
A high velocity water deluge system, discharging over the tanks. Refer to
Standard G5 for the requirements pertaining to such systems.
A foam fixed fire suppression system, discharging over the tanks. Refer to
standard G6 for the requirements pertaining to such systems.
12. Where an installation has been assessed as critical, and where a manual or
automatic fire sprinkler system has been installed over the storage tanks, a flush
valve must be fitted to the end of each pipe on which sprinkler heads are mounted.
The system must be tested and flushed for at least 3 minutes once in every 30 days.
The results of such test must be logged, and signed off by the responsible mine
overseer. Where deviation is noted, such mine overseer shall initiate the necessary
action to ensure that the deviation is rectified in the shortest possible time.
13. Oil separation equipment may be globally bunded but must be bunded separately
from the diesel and / or oil store.
14. All feed and supply lines must be able to inhibit fire spread either by means of
inverted u-tubes or non-return valves.
15. All lines are to be drained when not in use.
16. All diesel, oil stores and oil separation equipment must be located in areas which are
ventilated to a return airways or a return air pass.
17. The volume of each oil or diesel tank must be clearly demarcated on the tank itself.
Relevant Guidelines and Codes of Practice
Reg. 10.25.7, Minerals Act


Page 174 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS – INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE
STD IM1 – INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE AND TESTING OF 65 mm FIRE HYDRANT

STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS
This standard must be read in addition to Standards G29, G30 and G31.
1. STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS
1.1 General
This Standard provides the minimum requirements for the routine inspection, testing,
and maintenance of standpipe and hose systems. Table 1 must be used to determine
the minimum required frequencies for inspection, testing, and maintenance.
Valves and Connections. Valves and fire department connections must be

inspected, tested, and maintained in accordance with NFPA 25.
Impairments. Where the inspection, testing, and maintenance of standpipe

and hose systems results or involves a system that is out of service, the
procedures outlined in NFPA 25 must be followed.
Table 1 - Summary of Standpipe and Hose System Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance
Item Activity Frequency

Control valves Inspection Weekly/monthly
Pressure regulating devices Inspection Quarterly
Piping Inspection Quarterly
Hose connections Inspection Quarterly
Cabinet Inspection Annually
Hose Inspection Annually
Hose storage device Inspection Annually
Alarm device Test Quarterly
Hose nozzle Test Annually
Hose storage device Test Annually
Hose Test 5 years/3 years
Pressure control valve Test 5 years
Pressure reducing valve Test 5 years
Hydrostatic test Test 5 years
Flow test Test 5 years
Main drain test Test Annually
Hose connections Maintenance Annually
Valves (all types) Maintenance Annually/as needed
1.2 Inspection
Components of standpipe and hose systems must be visually inspected

quarterly or as specified in Table 1.
Table 2 must be used for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of all
classes of standpipe and hose systems.

Page 175 of 344
Checkpoints and corrective actions outlined in Table 2 must be followed to

determine that components are free of corrosion, foreign material, physical
damage, tampering, or other conditions that adversely affect system
operation.
Table 2 - Standpipe and Hose Systems
Component / Checkpoint Corrective Action

Hose connections
Cap missing Replace
Fire hose connection damaged Repair
Valve handles missing Replace
Cap gaskets missing or deteriorated Replace
Valve leaking Close or repair
Visible obstructions Remove
Restricting device missing Replace
Manual, semi-automatic, or dry Lubricate or repair
standpipe - valve does not operate
smoothly
Piping
Damaged piping Repair
Control valves damaged Repair or replace
Missing or damaged pipe support device Repair or replace
Damaged supervisory devices Repair or replace
Hose
Inspect Remove and inspect the hose, including gaskets,
and re-rack or re-reel at intervals in accordance
with NFPA 1962, Standard for the Care, Use, and
Service Testing of Fire Hose including Couplings
and Nozzles
Mildew, cuts, abrasions, and Replace with listed, lined, jacketed hose
deterioration evident
Coupling damaged Replace or repair
Gaskets missing or deteriorated Replace
Incompatible threads on coupling Replace or provide thread adaptor
Hose not connected to hose rack nipple Connect
or valve
Hose test outdated Retest or replace in accordance with NFPA 1962,
Standard for the Care, Use and Service Testing
of Fire Hose Including Couplings and Nozzles
Hose Nozzle
Hose nozzle missing Replace with listed nozzle
Gasket missing or deteriorated Replace
Obstructions Remove
Nozzle does not operate smoothly Repair or replace
Hose Storage Device
Difficult to operate Repair or replace
Damaged Repair or replace
Obstruction Remove
Hose improperly racked or rolled Remove

Page 176 of 344
Table 2 - Standpipe and Hose Systems (Continued)
Component / Checkpoint Corrective Action

Nozzle clip in place and nozzle correctly Replace if necessary
contained?
If enclosed in cabinet, will hose rack Repair or remove any obstructions
swing out at least 90 degrees?
Cabinet
Check overall condition for corroded or Repair or replace parts; replace entire cabinet if
damaged parts necessary
Difficult to open Repair
Cabinet door will not open fully Repair or move obstructions
Door glazing cracked or broken Replace
If cabinet is break-glass type, is lock Repair or replace
functioning properly?
Glass-break device missing or not Replace or attach
attached
Not properly identified as containing fire Provide identification
equipment
Visible obstructions Remove
All valves, hose, nozzles, fire Remove any material not related
extinguisher, etc., easily accessible
1.3 Testing
The tests must be conducted by a qualified person. Where water damage is a

possibility, an air test must be conducted on the system at 1700 kPa prior to
introducing water to the system.
1.4 Flow tests
A flow test must be conducted every 5 years at the hydraulically most remote
hose connection of each zone of an automatic standpipe system to verify the
water supply still provides the design pressure at the required flow.
Where a flow test of the hydraulically most remote outlet(s) is not practical, the
supervisor having jurisdiction must be consulted for the appropriate location
for the test.
All systems must be flow tested and pressure tested at the requirements in
effect at the time of the installation.
The actual test method(s) and performance criteria must be discussed in

advance with the supervisor having jurisdiction.
Standpipes, sprinkler connections to standpipes, or hose stations equipped

with pressure reducing valves or pressure regulating valves must have these
valves inspected, tested, and maintained in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 25.
A main drain test must be performed on all standpipe systems with automatic
water supplies in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 25.

Page 177 of 344
The test must be performed at the low point drain for each standpipe or the
main drain test connection where the supply main enters the building (when
provided).
Pressure gauges must be provided for the test and must be maintained.
1.5 Alarm devices
Where provided, water flow alarm and supervisory devices must be tested on
a quarterly basis.
1.6 Maintenance
Maintenance and repairs must be in accordance with Table 1 and Table 2.
Hose Connections. After each use, all hose connected to sprinkler systems must be
cleaned, drained, and thoroughly dried before being placed in service. Hose that has
been exposed to hazardous materials must be disposed of in an approved manner or
must be decontaminated by a method approved for the contaminant and by the hose
manufacturer’s recommendation. Equipment that does not pass the inspection or the
testing requirements must be repaired and tested again or replaced.
2. ROUTINE WATER SUPPLY TESTING
2.1 Introduction
A water pressure and flow test must be conducted at intervals not exceeding 90 days
on all fire water distribution systems to determine the rate of flow and pressure
available for fire-fighting purposes.
2.2 Procedure
Tests must be conducted during a period of expected normal demand. The procedure
must consist of discharging water at a measured rate of flow from the system at a
given location and observing the corresponding pressure drop in the mains.
All new systems must be tested prior to the occupancy of the building or area which
they serve. Any installing contractor must provide an appropriate test certificate.
3. ACCEPTANCE OF NEW SYSTEMS
3.1 Flushing of piping
All piping in the system must be flushed with a sufficient volume of water in order to
remove any construction debris and trash accumulated in the piping prior to the
completion of the system and prior to the installation of the fire department
connection.
3.2 Hydrostatic tests
Installers of all new systems must have their system(s) hydrostatically tested in
accordance with SABS 1128 - Part 2 and SABS 0287, and must provide at their cost,

Page 178 of 344
upon handover of the system, a test certificate of compliance issued by a suitably

qualified test authority.
The hydrostatic test pressure must be measured at the lowest elevation point
of the individual system or zone being tested. The piping system must show
no leakage.
During the hydrostatic test, the pressure gauge at the extremities of the piping
must be observed and the pressure recorded.
Additives, corrosive chemicals such as sodium silicate or derivatives of

sodium silicate, brine, or other chemicals must not be used while
hydrostatically testing systems or for stopping leaks.
3.3 Flow tests
The water supply must be tested to verify compliance with the design.
This test must be conducted by flowing water from the hydraulically most remote and
high hose connection (hydrant).
3.3.1 Pressure-Regulating Devices
Each pressure-regulating device must be tested to verify that the installation is

correct, that the device is operating properly, and that the inlet and outlet pressures at
the device are in accordance with the design.
Static and residual inlet pressure and static and residual outlet pressure and flow
must be recorded on the contractor’s test certificate.
3.3.2 Main Drain Flow Test
The main drain valve must be opened and must remain open until the system
pressure stabilises. The static and residual pressure must be recorded on the
contractor’s test certificate.
Testing must be conducted while the pumps are operating.
3.4 Alarm and supervision tests
Any alarm or detector (supervisory device) associated with the fire fighting water
supply must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72.
3.5 Instructions
The installing contractor must provide the owner with:
All literature and instructions provided by the manufacturer of any device or

equipment installed as part of the work, describing the proper operation and
maintenance of such equipment or device.
A copy of NFPA 25, the Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance
of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems

Page 179 of 344
4. HYDRANT TEST UNDER SIMULATED FIRE CONDITIONS
4.1 Frequency
A hydrant test under simulated fire conditions must be conducted at intervals not
exceeding 12 months, in every building or area served by the fire water system.
4.2 Test method
After the location where the test is to be conducted has been determined, a
representative group of test hydrants are selected in the vicinity. Once selected, due
consideration is given to potential interference with traffic flow patterns, damage to
surroundings (e.g. roadways, sidewalks, landscapes, vehicles, and pedestrians), and
potential flooding problems both local and remote from the test site.
One hydrant, designated the residual hydrant, is chosen to be the hydrant where the
normal static pressure will be observed with the other hydrants in the group closed,
and where the residual pressure will be observed with the other hydrants flowing.
This hydrant is chosen so it will be located between the hydrant to be flowed and the
large mains that constitute the immediate sources of water supply in the area.
Figure 1
In the figure above, test layouts are indicated showing the residual hydrant
(designated ‘R’) and hydrants to be flowed (designated ‘F’). The number of hydrants
used in any test depends upon the number of hydrants which will foreseeably be
used in combating a fire in the particular area, save that in no case are more than 3
hydrants required to be tested simultaneously.
To obtain satisfactory test results of theoretical calculation of expected flows or rated

capacities, sufficient discharge should be achieved to cause a drop in pressure at the
residual hydrant of at least 25 percent, or to flow the total demand necessary for the
system demand or fire-fighting purposes.

Page 180 of 344
It is preferable to flow water past the residual hydrant.
4.3 Equipment
The equipment necessary for field work consists of a single Bourdon pressure
gauge, a number of Pitot tubes and a special hydrant cap tapped with a hole
into which a short length of brass pipe is fitted. This pipe is provided with a T
connection for the gauge and a cock at the end for relieving air pressure.
Pressure gauges are to be calibrated every 12 months, or more frequently,
depending on use.
When more than one hydrant is flowed, it can be desirable and necessary to
use portable radios to facilitate communications.
It is preferred to use an “Underwriter’s Playpipe”, or some other form of stream

straightener with a known coefficient of discharge when testing hydrants, due
to the more streamlined flow and more accurate Pitot reading which may be
thus achieved.
4.4 Test procedure
In a typical test, the gauge is attached to one of the 65 mm outlets of the residual
hydrant using the special cap, the cock on the gauge piping is opened, and the
hydrant valve is opened full. As soon as the air is exhausted from the barrel, the cock
is closed. A reading (static pressure) is taken when the needle comes to rest.
At a given signal each of the other hydrants is opened in succession, with discharge
taking place directly from the open hydrant butts. Hydrants should be opened one at
a time. With all hydrants flowing, water should be allowed to flow for a sufficient time
to clear all debris and foreign substances from the stream(s).
At that time, a signal is given to the people at the hydrants to read the Pitot pressure
of the streams simultaneously while the residual pressure is being read. The final
magnitude of the pressure drop can be controlled by the number of hydrants used
and the number of outlets opened on each.
After the readings have been taken, hydrants should be shut down slowly, one at a
time, to prevent undue surges in the system.
4.5 Pitot readings
When measuring discharge from open hydrant butts, 65 mm outlets rather

than pumper outlets should be used.
In practically all cases, the 65 mm outlets are filled across the entire cross
section during flow. When measuring the Pitot pressure of a stream of
practically uniform velocity, the orifice in the Pitot tube is held downstream
approximately one-half the diameter of the hydrant outlet or nozzle opening,
and in the centre of the stream. The centreline of the orifice should be at right
angles to the plane of the face of the hydrant outlet. The air chamber on the
Pitot tube should be kept elevated. Pitot readings of less than 70 kPa and
more than 200 kPa should be avoided, if possible. Opening additional hydrant
outlets will aid in controlling the Pitot reading.

Page 181 of 344
With dry barrel hydrants, the hydrant valve should be wide open. The hydrant
valve for the flowing outlet should be wide open. This opening gives a more
streamlined flow and a more accurate Pitot reading.
Figure 2
4.6 Determination of discharge without a Pitot
If a Pitot tube is not available for use to measure the hydrant discharge, a 3.5 or 4.0
bar gauge tapped into a hydrant cap can be used.
The hydrant cap with gauge attached is placed on one outlet, and the flow is allowed
to take place through the other outlet at the same elevation.
The readings obtained from a gauge so located, and the readings obtained from a
gauge on a Pitot tube held in the stream, are approximately the same.
4.7 System corrections
Flow test results show the strength of the distribution system and do not necessarily
indicate the degree of adequacy of the entire water works system. Consider a system
supplied by pumps at one location and having no elevated storage. If the pressure at
the pump station drops during the test, it is an indication that the distribution system is
capable of delivering more than the pumps can deliver at their normal operating
pressure.
It is necessary to use a value for the drop in pressure for the test that is equal to the
actual drop obtained in the field during the test, minus the drop in discharge pressure
at the pumping station.
If sufficient pumping capacity is available at the station and the discharge pressure
could be maintained by operating additional pumps, the water system as a whole

Page 182 of 344
could deliver the computed quantity. If, however, additional pumping units are not
available, the distribution system would be capable of delivering the computed
quantity, but the water system as a whole would be limited by the pumping capacity.
The portion of the pressure drop for which a correction can be made for tests on
systems with storage is generally estimated upon the basis of a study of all the tests
made and the pressure drops observed on the recording gauge at the station for
each. The corrections can vary from very substantial portions of the observed
pressure drops for tests near the pumping station, to zero for tests remote from the
station. It is preferable to flow water past the residual hydrant.
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
5.1 Large bore / 65 mm Hydrants
Hydrants must be of the standpipe type, with heads at a height of

approximately 1 m above floor or ground level.
Hydrants must have an outlet diameter of 65 mm.
Hydrant couplings must be of a type compatible with those in use throughout

the mine, which must in turn be of a type compatible with those in use by the
nearest public authority fire service.
Standpipes must be protected against physical impact damage by sturdy

guard rails if they are in danger of impact.
Hydrant reticulation must be fitted with strategically placed stop valves which
facilitate isolation of damaged sections of the installation without interruption
to the remaining reticulation.
Hydrant lugs must be lightly oiled every four weeks.
Rubber washers must be replaced every 12 months or sooner if found to be

deteriorating.
5.2 Fire hoses and nozzles
Nozzle sizes must never exceed 16mm diameter. Where pressure and/or flow
is relatively poor 13 mm nozzles may be used to produce an effective jet.
Hand-controlled (variable jet) branches (nozzles) are preferable to open (fixed

jet) branches, as they allow a jet or spray to be readily produced as required,
or flow can be shut completely if required. (The recommended variable
jet/spray unit is the AWG No 1 branch).
Fire hoses must always be stored correctly made up with the female fitting on
the inside of the roll.
Each fire hose must have water passed through it at least once every year
and must then be thoroughly dried before being re-made up.

Page 183 of 344
Hose coupling lugs must be oiled after water has been passed through the
hose.
5.3 Hydrant water supplies
The water supply for the hydrant system, as stated below, is over and above all water
supply requirements, where applicable, for any:
fire sprinkler system which may be installed at the premises
domestic / drinking water supply requirement at the premises
service water requirement on site.
Moreover, supply to meet domestic and service water requirements must be provided
separately and independently of the supply for fire fighting purposes.
Regarding water supply to the hydrant system,
Water supplies to hydrants must be installed in compliance with existing

legislation, and any Municipal bye-laws which may apply.
As a general rule the requirements of the National Building Regulations must

be regarded as a minimum standard. Based on these Regulations the
minimum flow and accompanying pressure for hydrants is 20 litres per second
(1200 litres/minute) per unit at an open-ended flow pressure of not less than
300 kPa for a minimum duration of four hours. These requirements must be
met by each hydrant unit in a system with 3 units operating simultaneously.
5.5 Testing
A fire team member, fire officer, fire marshal, or other appointed person must
carry out daily visual checks on lugs, washers, hand wheels, open and shut
valve indicators and water pressures (where a gauge is provided).
The minimum frequency for hydrant testing under simulated fire conditions is
once in every 12 months, and following any structural maintenance or
alterations to system(s).
The water level must be checked daily in all supply dams, tanks or reservoirs.
Electric Pumps
a) The pump should start automatically in response to a pressure drop in the

system.
b) The pump should also be capable of starting by means of a manual start
button.
c) The current in amperes must be recorded whilst the motor is running.
d) The pump must be run for 10 minutes.
Diesel Pumps

Page 184 of 344
a) Ensure that the temperature of the pump house or area where the pump is
located is above 10°C.
b) Check oil level in the engine sump.
c) Check water level in the engine closed circuit cooling system.
d) Check batteries by means of a hydrometer or low voltage tester to ensure that
each cell is charged and that electrolyte is at correct level.
e) Check that the battery charger is working correctly.
f) Check that the engine fuel tank is full and that there is a reserve supply
sufficient to run the engine on full load for 6 hours.
g) The pump should start automatically in response to a pressure drop in the
system.
h) The pump should also be capable of starting by means of a manual start
button.
i) Run the pump for at least 30 minutes and record the running hour total shown
on the hour meter after the test.
j) Replenish the fuel used during the test.
l) The engine must be serviced in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.

SABS 1128 – Part 2 - Fire fighting equipment: Hose couplings, connectors and branch pipe
and nozzle connections
NFPA 72 – National Alarm Code
NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water Based Fire
Protection Systems
NFPA 1962 – Standard for the Care, Use and Service Testing of Fire Hose including
Coupling and Nozzles

Page 185 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS - INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE
STD IM2 – 25 mm FIRE HOSEREELS
This standard must be read in addition to Standard G31.
1. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Hosereel stop valves must be sealed with lead or plastic seals and reserved
solely for fire fighting purposes.
The internal diameter of the service pipe feeding a hosereel system must be a
minimum of:
o 32 mm if it serves 1 to 3 hosereels.
o 38 mm if it serves 4 or 5 hosereels.
o 50 mm if it serves more than 5 hosereels.
Service feeder pipes for hosereels may be connected to a hydrant main, or

upstream from the main stop valve of a sprinkler system.
All piping and fittings used in a hosereel system must be capable of

withstanding a pressure of up to 2 500 kPa.
Every hosereel system must be fitted with one or more pressure gauges
reading up to 2 500 kPa. One must be situated at the hosereel furthest from
the incoming water supply.
Hosereels must contain not less than 30 m of 25 mm reinforced plastic or

rubber hose, complete with adjustable jet / spray shut off nozzle.
The following is a typical hosereel system layout, illustrating the application of the
above requirements.
Figure 1

Page 186 of 344
2. HOSEREEL INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
2.1 Monthly inspection
The following aspects must be checked during the inspection:
a) whether the hosereel is due for reconditioning;

b) whether the base is firmly fixed to the wall;
c) whether the nozzle-cock operates easily and is unblocked;
d) whether the reel rotates freely on its spindle;
e) whether the hose runs freely through the hose run-out guide;
f) whether all connections are serviceable;
g) whether the hose is in a good condition;
h) whether the hosereel needs reconditioning, and
i) whether the water supply to the hose is correct.
2.2 Monthly inspection records
Keep a record (initialled by the responsible person) of each inspection, showing:
a) The date on which the inspection was performed;

b) The extent of any site repairs;
c) A means of identifying any hosereel that was found to require reconditioning,
and
d) Whether all necessary reconditioning was carried out.
2.3 Annual maintenance
Annual maintenance must include either reconditioning (see 2.3.1) or on-site

maintenance (see 2.3.2), as appropriate.
2.3.1 Reconditioning
Carry out reconditioning in accordance with SABS 1475: Part I once every 3 years or
more frequently when circumstances so require.
2.3.2 On-site maintenance
In years where reconditioning is not required, carry out on-site maintenance annually
in accordance with the following guidelines:
a) Remove and check the nozzle-cock for blockage, then refit the nozzle-cock.
b) Hosereels must be fully extended once a year. Note that more frequent
extension causes damage to the hosereel spindle and glands. Completely
unwind the hose from the reel. During the unwinding operation, check:
Whether the reel rotates freely on its spindle. If necessary, lubricate the
spindle or replace the spindle and / or spindle bush.
The hose condition

Page 187 of 344
Whether the coverage and overlap of adjacent hosereels is adequate to

protect all areas.
Whether the hose runs out freely through the hose run-out guide. If
necessary, lubricate or replace the run-out guide.
c) Open the discharge nozzle-cock and, using water, purge all air from the reel
and hose. Close the nozzle-cock, increase the water pressure to 2 000 kPa
and, while the hose is under pressure, check
The waterway for leaks. If necessary, adjust or renew glands / seals.
All hose connections for leaks. Rectify where necessary.
The discharge nozzle-cock for leaks. Adjust or replace if necessary.
d) Check the entire hose-reel assembly for corrosion. Repair or replace as

necessary.
e) Ensure that the hosereel base is firmly affixed to the wall.
f) Rewind the hose neatly but without undue tension on the reel. Place the
discharge nozzle-cock in its stowage bracket.
g) Sign the maintenance label or sign and attach a new maintenance label.
SABS 1475: Part 1 - The production of reconditioned fire-fighting equipment: Portable and

Page 188 of 344
STD IM3 - HAND HELD PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Distribution
The number (density) and distribution of fire extinguishers is dependent on various

practical considerations, but always the nature of the risk to be protected (called the
‘occupancy’), and the floor area.
The provision of portable fire extinguishers is regulated by:

SABS 0400 (The application of the National Building Regulations) and
SABS 0105 (Classification, use & control of fire-fighting equipment)
The following are examples for some of the more common occupancy types.
Table 1 - Examples of Quantities, Rating & Distribution of Portable Fire

Extinguishers in various occupancy classes
Classification of Number of portable Water Foam CO2 DCP

Occupancies fire extinguishers 9l 9l 4.5 9 4.5 9
relative to floor area kg kg kg kg
High Risk Commercial
High/Moderate Risk 1/100 m² X X X
Industrial
High Risk Storage
Place of instruction X X X X X X
Shops
Wholesale 1/200 m²
Moderate Risk X X
Commercial
Low Risk Industrial
Offices
Outdoor sport
Low Risk Commercial 1/400 ² X X X X
Parking
Garage
In Anglocoal, the ‘Wholesaler’ classification would apply to Mine Stores and Mine
Offices, and ‘High Risk Commercial would apply to all plant areas, for example.
1.2 Siting
Extinguishers should be correctly sited to expedite their use during an emergency.

Whenever inspecting extinguishers, their location should always be re-evaluated to
ensure that each location is appropriate and offers the greatest coverage and ease of
use possible, given the conditions and arrangement of the area in which each

Page 189 of 344
extinguisher is deployed. The points below are guidelines only, and it may be
necessary to deviate from them in certain situations:
Extinguishers should not normally be more than 46 m apart.
To ensure ready access, distribute units evenly over the entire floor area.
Extinguishers should be conspicuously sited in main escape ways and near

exits.
To obviate the likelihood of an extinguisher creating an obstruction, it should

be positioned in a well-marked recess in a wall.
Extinguishers should be mounted on brackets fitted to walls or columns with

their carrying handles 1.2 m, and never more than 1.5 m, above floor level.
Extinguishers must never be left standing on the floor where they may be
obscured or knocked over. However, if the situation warrants a small shelf for
the extinguisher then the base of the unit should not be less than 0.75 m from
the floor.
Extinguishers must be easily accessible and conspicuously marked. Mounting

extinguishers against a background of alternating red and white diagonal
stripes will considerably improve their visibility from a distance. SABS
Standard 1186 gives guidance on suitable Symbolic Safety Signs.
Extinguishers located outdoors should be in cabinets with their operating

instructions facing outwards. The appliances should be positioned so they
may easily be removed.
Fire extinguishers should preferably be located as part of “fire equipment

points” comprising hosereels, fire alarm activation points etc, so that anyone
sounding an alarm also has immediate access to other fire equipment.
Special risk areas such as flammable liquid magazines, dip tanks, transformer
rooms, spray booths etc. should have extinguishers near at hand but not too
close to the risk where they could become involved in the fire themselves, or
be impossible to reach. Position units in cases such as this, more than 15 m
from the risk, but not more than 25 m away, or around a corner.
Fire extinguishers should not be located within confined spaces.
Low temperatures are liable to affect the operation of most extinguishers and
for this reason they should not be sited in areas where the temperature is
likely to drop below 4°C. If water extinguishers ar e exposed to severe weather
conditions then suitable antifreeze should be considered (consult the
manufacturers).
1.8 The high-level red and white diagonal stripes with the symbolic sign below should be
easily seen from a distance. Demarcated lines on the floor indicate that nothing may
be placed on the floor below the extinguisher.
1.9 High temperatures could lead to the rupturing of stored pressure type, vaporising
liquid and carbon dioxide extinguishers. The foam compound in foam extinguishers

Page 190 of 344
could deteriorate in hot areas and if temperatures are likely to exceed 43°C it is
advisable to consult the extinguisher suppliers or manufacturers.
1.10 Corrosive atmospheres could reduce the life expectancy of the extinguisher body and
it is therefore important that inspections are carried out at most frequent intervals than
is normally recommended.
1.11 Vibration also constitutes a siting problem in that dry powder may become compacted
in areas such as hammer mills, and when mounted on vehicles. Under such
conditions it is essential that the extinguisher is securely bracketed and frequently
inspected.
1.3 Maintenance
It is important that extinguishers be maintained in accordance with SABS 1475.

Service intervals are as reflected in Table 2 below.
Table 2 – Fire Extinguisher Service Intervals
Cartridge or Minor Major Pressure test

Extinguisher Container stored- service service container
type material pressure every … every … every …
type years years years
Mild steel Cartridge NA 1 3
Water Mild steel Cartridge NA 1 5
Stored
Stainless steel 1 5 5
pressure
Cartridge 1 1
Mild steel NA
Stored
Foam Mild steel pressure NA 1 5
Stored
pressure
Stored
CO2 - 1 5 5
pressure
Stored
Mild steel 1 5 5
pressure
Mild steel
Cartridge NA 1 3
Dry powder
Stored
Aluminium pressure 1 5 5
Stored
pressure
More frequent maintenance is required for extinguishers that are mounted on vehicles
or that are subject to vibration, because the powder is more likely to become
compacted.

Page 191 of 344
Fire extinguishers may only be filled, recharged, reconditioned, repaired or inspected

by an SABS 1475 mark permit holder.
2. DETAILED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For convenience, the following checklists are organised into two parts. The first,
Table 3, is arranged by mechanical parts (components and containers) common to
most fire extinguishers. The second, Table 4, is arranged by extinguishing material
and expelling means and involves a description of the problems peculiar to each
agent.
2.1 Recordkeeping
In addition to the required tag or label, a permanent file record should be kept for
each fire extinguisher. This file record should include the following information, as
applicable:
a) The maintenance date and the name of person or agency performing the
maintenance
b) The date when last recharged and the name of person or agency performing
the recharge
c) The hydrostatic retest date and the name of person or agency performing the
hydrostatic test
d) Description of dents remaining after passing a hydrostatic test
e) The date of the 6-year maintenance for stored-pressure dry chemical.
Nothing in this Standard must be construed as a restriction on new technologies or

alternative arrangements, provided that the level of protection as herein described is
not lowered and is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.” It is recognised that
an electronic bar coding system is often acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction
in lieu of a tag or label for maintenance recordkeeping. Under special circumstances
or when local requirements are in effect, additional information can be desirable or
required.
2.2 Labels should be printed in black with a white background.
2.3 "Verification of Service” (Maintenance of Recharging) Collar
A number of areas have regulations requiring an internal marking of an extinguisher,

which is used to verify if the extinguisher was depressurised, and if the valve was
removed, and if a complete maintenance was performed.
The “Verification of Service” collar design also requires that the valve be removed
before the collar can be attached to the extinguisher. The collar provides the
authorities having jurisdiction with a more convenient visual proof that the
extinguisher was disassembled and that maintenance was performed. This standard
does not specifically require a “Verification of Service” collar when a hydrostatic test
is performed on a fire extinguisher cylinder.
All extinguishers are to have the valve removed for hydrotesting and are to be
subsequently recharged before they are returned to service. To be valid, the date on

Page 192 of 344
the “Verification of Service” collar should always be the same or more recent than the
date on the hydrotest label.
Table 3 - Mechanical Parts Maintenance Checklist
Shell Corrective Action

1. Hydrostatic test date or date of 1. Retest if needed
manufacture†
2. Corrosion† 2. Conduct hydrostatic test and refinish
or discard
3. Mechanical damage (denting or 3. Conduct hydrostatic test and refinish
abrasion)† or discard
4. Paint condition 4. Refinish
5. Presence of repairs (welding, 5. Discard or consult manufacturer
soldering, brazing, etc.)
6. Damaged threads (corroded, 6. Discard or consult manufacturer
cross-threaded or worn)
7. Broken hangar attachment, 7. Discard or consult manufacturer
carrying handle lug
8. Sealing surface damage (nicks or 8. Clean, repair and leak test or discard
corrosion)†
Nameplate Corrective Action
1. Illegible wording 1. Clean or replace
2. Corrosion or loose plate 2. Inspect shell under plate (see shell
check points) and re-attach plate
Nozzle or horn Corrective Action
1. Deformed, damaged or cracked 1. Replace
2. Blocked openings 2. Clean
3. Damaged, (corroded, cross- 3. Replace
threaded or worn
4. Aged (brittle) 4. Replace
Hose Assembly Corrective Action
1. Damaged (cut, cracked or worn) 1. Replace
2. Damaged couplings or swivel joint 2. Replace
(cracked or corroded)
3. Damaged threads (corroded, 3. Replace
4. Inner tube cut at couplings 4. Repair or replace
5. Electrically non-conductive 5. Replace
between couplings (CO2 hose only)
6. Hose obstruction 6. Remove obstruction or replace
Valve Locking Device Corrective Action
1. Damaged (bent, corroded, or 1. Repair and lubricate, or replace
binding)
2. Missing 2. Replace.
Gauge or Pressure- Indicating Device Corrective Action
1. Immovable, jammed or missing 1. Depressurise and replace gauge
pointer (pressure test)†
2. Missing, deformed, or broken 2. Depressurise and replace gauge
crystal†
3. Illegible or faded dial† 3. Depressurise and replace gauge
4. Corrosion† 4. Depressurise and check calibration,
clean and refinished, or replace gauge

Page 193 of 344
5. Dented case or crystal retainer† 5. Depressurise and check calibration, or

replace gauge
6. Immovable or corroded pressure- 6. Replace head assembly,
indicating stem (non-gauge type)† depressurise, and replace shell or
complete extinguisher
Shell or cylinder valve Corrective Action
1. Corroded, damaged or jammed 1. Depressurise, check freedom of
lever, handle, spring, stem, or movement, and repair or replace
fastener joint†
2. Damaged outlet threads (corroded, 2. Depressurise and replace
cross-threaded or worn)†
Nozzle Shut-Off Valve Corrective Action
1. Corroded, damaged, jammed, or 1. Repair and lubricate, or replace
binding lever, spring, stem, or
fastener joint
2. Plugged, deformed or corroded 2. Clean or replace
nozzle tip, or discharge passage
Puncture Mechanism Corrective Action
1. Damaged, jammed, or binding 1. Replace
puncture lever, stem, or fastener
joint
2. Dull or damaged cutting or 2. Replace
puncture pin
Gas Cartridge Corrective Action
1. Corrosion 1. Replace cartridge
2. Damaged seal disk (injured, cut or 2. Replace cartridge
corroded)
3. Damaged threads (corroded, 3. Replace cartridge
4. Illegible weight markings 4. Replace cartridge
Gas Cylinders Corrective Action
1. Hydrostatic test date or date of 1. Retest if needed
manufacture
2. Corrosion 2. Conduct hydrostatic test and refinish,
or discard
3. Paint condition 3. Refinish
4. Presence of repairs (welding, 4. Discard or consult manufacturer
soldering, brazing, etc.)
5. Damaged threads (corroded, 5. Discard or consult manufacturer
Wheel Cap or Fill Cap Corrective Action
1. Corroded, cracked, or broken 1. Replace
3. Sealing surface damage (nicked, 3. Clean, repair and leak test, or replace
deformed, or corroded)
4. Blocked vent hole or slot 4. Clean
Non-Rechargeable Shell Corrective Action
1. Corrosion† 1. Discard shell
2. Damaged seal disk (injured, cut or 2. Discard shell
corroded)†
3. Damaged threads (corroded, 3. Discard shell
4. Illegible weight markings† 4. Discard shell
Carriage and Wheels Corrective Action

Page 194 of 344
1. Corroded, bent or broken carriage 1. Repair or replace

2. Damaged wheel (buckled or 2. Clean, repair and lubricate, or replace
broken spoke, bent rim or axle,
loose tyre, low pressure, jammed
bearing)
Carrying Handle Corrective Action
1. Broken handle lug 1. Discard valve or shell, or consult
manufacturer
2. Broken handle 2. Replace
3. Corroded, jammed or worn 3. Clean or replace
fastener joint
Seals or Tamper Indicator Corrective Action
1. Broken or missing 1. Check under agent and expelling
means (Table A-4-4.2(b) for specific
action)
Hand Pump Corrective Action
1. Corroded, jammed or damaged 1. Repair and lubricate, or replace.
pump
2. Improper adjustment of packing nut 2. Adjust
Inner Cage, Chamber Stopple, Acid Corrective Action
Container, or Tube
1. Corroded, damaged, bent, cracked 1. Replace
or distorted
Pressurising Valve Corrective Action
1. Leaking seals, 1. Depressurise and replace valve or
core
Gasket “O” Ring and Seals Corrective Action
1. Damaged (cut, cracked, or worn)† 1. Replace and lubricate
2. Missing† 2. Replace and lubricate
3. Aged or weathered (compression 3. Replace and lubricate
set, brittle, cracked)†
Brackets Corrective Action
1. Corroded, worn or bent 1. Repair and refinish or replace
2. Loose or binding fit 2. Adjust it or replace
3. Worn, loose, corroded, or missing 3. Tighten or replace
screw or bolt
4. Worn bumper webbing, or 4. Replace
grommet
Gas Tube and Siphon or Pickup Tube Corrective Action
1. Corroded, dented, cracked or 1. Replace
broken
2. Blocked tube or openings in tube 2. Clean or replace
Safety Relief Device Corrective Action
1. Corroded or damaged† 1. Depressurise and replace or consult
manufacturer
2. Broken, operated, or plugged† 2. Depressurise and replace or repair
Pressure Regulators Corrective Action
1. External condition 1.
a) Damage a) Replace regulator
b) Corrosion b) Clean regulator or replace3
2. Pressure relief (corroded, plugged, 2. Disconnect regulator from pressure
dented, leaking, broken, or source, replace pressure relief
missing)
3. Protective bonnet relief hole (tape 3. Check regulator in accordance with
missing or seal wire broken or manufacturer’s regulator test
missing) procedures
4. Adjust screw (lock pin missing) 4. Check regulator in accordance with

Page 195 of 344
manufacturer’s regulator test

procedures
5. Gauges 5.
a) Immovable, jammed, or a) Disconnected regulator from
missing pointer pressure source, replace
b) Missing or broken crystal gauge
c) Illegible or faded dial b) Replace crystal
d) Corrosion c) Replace gauge
e) Dented case or crystal d) Check calibration, clean and
retainer refinish, or replace gauge
e) Check calibration or replace
gauge
6. Regulator Hose 6.
a) Cut, cracked, abraded, or a) Conduct hydrostatic test or
deformed exterior replace hose
b) Corroded or cracked b) Replace hose
coupling c) Replace hose
c) Corroded, cross-threaded,
or worn coupling
† For disposable-type extinguishers, those items indicated with a dagger cannot be
inspected and serviced. If the corrective action requires the depressurisation of the
extinguisher, disposable halogenated agent fire extinguishers shall not be depressurised but
returned to the manufacturer or service agency for proper disposal and reclaiming of the
extinguishing agent.
Table 4 - Agent and Expelling Means Maintenance Checklist
Foam Corrective Action

1. Recharging date due 1. Empty, clean, and recharge
2. Improper fill levels in inner 2. Empty, clean, and recharge
container and shell
3. Agent condition (check for 3. Empty, clean, and recharge
sediment)
Self-Expelling
Carbon Dioxide Corrective Action
1. Improper weight 1. Recharge to proper weight
2. Broken or missing tamper indicator 2. Leak test and weigh, recharge or
replace indicator
Mechanical Pump
Water and Antifreeze Corrective Action
1. Improper fill level 1. Refill
2. Defective pump 2. Clean, repair, and lubricate, or replace
Dry Powder Corrective Action
1. Improper fill level 1. Refill
2. Agent condition (contamination or 2. Discard and replace
caking)
3. Missing scoop 3. Replace
Gas Cartridge or Cylinder
Dry Chemical and Dry Powder Types Corrective Action
1. Improper weight or charge level 1. Refill to correct weight
2. Agent condition (contamination, 2. Empty and refill
caking, or wrong
3. For cartridge 3. a) Replace cartridge
b) Replace cartridge
c) Examine seal disc, replace
indicators

Page 196 of 344
4. Punctured seal disc 4. a) Replace cylinders

b) Leak test. Replace indicator.
5. Improper weight 5. a) Leak test. If normal, leak test
and repair indicator. If low,
replace cylinder
b) Measure pressure, leak test,
replace indicator
6. Broken or missing tamper indicator
7. For gas cylinder with gauge
8. Low pressure
10. For gas cylinder without gauge
11. Low pressure (attach gauge and
measure pressure)
Stored Pressure
Dry Chemical and Dry Powder Types Corrective Action
1. Refillable 1.
a) Improper extinguisher a) Refill to correct weight
weight b) Repressurise and leak test
b) Improper gauge pressure c) Leak test and replace
c) Broken or missing tamper indicator
indicator
2. Disposable shell with pressure 2.
indicator a) Replace shell
a) Punctured seal disc b) Depressurise, replace shell
b) Low pressure c) Check pressure, check seal
c) Broken or missing tamper disc, replace indicator
indicator
3. Disposable shell without pressure 3.
indicator a) Replace shell
a) Punctured seal disc b) Depressurise, replace shell
b) Low weight c) Check seal disc, replace
c) Broken or missing tamper indicator
indicator
4. Non-rechargeable extinguisher 4.
with pressure indicator a) Depressurise and discard
a) Low pressure extinguisher
b) Broken or missing tamper b) Leak test, check pressure,
indicator replace indicator
Wet Chemical Type Corrective Action
1. Improper fill level (by weight or 1. Empty and recharge with new solution
observation) to correct weight fill line
2. Improper gauge pressure 2. Repressurise and leak test
3. Broken or missing tamper indicator 3. Leak test, replace indicator line
Water, Antifreeze and Loaded Stream Corrective Action
1. Improper fill level (by weight or 1. Refill to correct level
observation)
2. Agent condition if antifreeze or 2. Empty and refill
loaded stream. Improper charge
(check recharge record or weigh)
3. Improper gauge pressure 3. Repressurise and leak test
4. Broken or missing tamper indicator 4. Leak test, replace indicator
AFFF and FFFP Liquid Charge Corrective Action
1. Improper fill level (by weight or 1. Empty and recharge with new solution
observation)
2. Agent condition (presence of 2. Empty and recharge with new solution

Page 197 of 344
precipitate or other foreign matter)

3. Improper gauge pressure (broken 3. Repressurise and leak test
or missing tamper indicator)
4. Leak test, replace indicator
3. GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES FOR RECHARGING
a) Make sure all pressure is vented from fire extinguisher before attempting to
remove valve body or fill closure.
WARNING: Do not depend on pressure indicating devices to tell if container is under

pressure because they could malfunction.
b) Use proper recharge materials when refilling a fire extinguisher. Mixing of

some extinguishing agents could cause a chemical reaction resulting in a
dangerous pressure build-up in the container.
c) The weight of agent as specified on the nameplate is critical. Overfilling could

render the fire extinguisher dangerous or ineffective.
d) All sealing components should be cleaned and properly lubricated to prevent

leakage after recharge.
e) Check pressure-indicating device to ascertain that it is reading properly.
f) Most manufacturers recommend the use of dry nitrogen as an expellant gas

for stored-pressure fire extinguishers. Limiting charging pressure regulator
setting to (172 kPa) above service pressure prevents gauge damage and loss
of calibration.
WARNING: Never connect the fire extinguisher to be charged directly to the high-
pressure source. Connecting directly to the high-pressure source could cause the
container to rupture, resulting in injury. Never leave a fire extinguisher connected to
the regulator of a high-pressure source for an extended period of time. A defective
regulator could cause the container to rupture due to excess pressure
g) Use the manufacturer’s recommended charging adaptor to prevent damage to

valve and its components.
h) When recharging separate expellant source fire extinguishers, make sure

filled enclosure is in place and tightened down. Replace all safety devices
prior to installing replacement cartridges.
i) Use only gas cartridges recommended by the manufacturer. Cartridge

features such as pressure relief, puncturing capabilities, fill density, and
thread compatibility are designed and approved to specific functional
requirements.
j) Use proper safety seals, as other types, such as meter seals, could possibly
fail to break at the prescribed requirements.

Page 198 of 344
k) Regulators utilised on wheeled fire extinguishers are factory pinned at the

operating pressure and should not be field adjusted.
3.1 Some manufacturers require that their fire extinguishers be returned to the factory for
recharging.
3.2 To determine the gross weight, the entire fire extinguisher should be weighed empty.
The weight of the specified recharge agent should be added to this amount.
3.3 Leak test
The leak test required for stored-pressure and self-expelling types should be
sufficiently sensitive to ensure that the fire extinguisher will remain operable for at
least 1 year. Any tamper indicators or seals need to be replaced after recharging.
3.4 Recharge agents
On properties where fire extinguishers are maintained by the occupant, a supply of

recharging agents should be kept on hand.
The intent of this provision is to maintain the efficiency of each fire extinguisher as
produced by the manufacturer and as labelled by one or more of the fire testing
laboratories. For example, the extinguishing agent and the additives used in the
various types of dry chemical fire extinguishers vary in chemical composition and in
particle size and, thus, in flow characteristics. Each fire extinguisher is designed to
secure maximum efficiency with the particular formulation used. Changing the agent
from that specified on the fire extinguisher nameplate could affect flow rates, nozzle
discharge characteristics, and the quantity of available agent (as influenced by
density), and would void the label of the testing laboratory.
Certain recharging materials deteriorate with age, exposure to excessive

temperature, and exposure to moisture. Storage of recharge agents for long periods
of time should be avoided.
Dry powder used for combustible metal fires (Class D) should not become damp as
the powder will not be free flowing. In addition, when dry powder contains sufficient
moisture, a hazardous reaction could result when applied to a metal fire.
3.5 Mixing multipurpose dry chemicals with alkaline based dry chemicals could result in a
chemical reaction capable of developing sufficient pressures to rupture a fire
extinguisher. Substituting a different formulation for the one originally employed could
cause malfunctioning of the fire extinguisher or result in substandard performance.
3.6 Removal of moisture
Moisture within a non-water-type fire extinguisher creates a serious corrosion hazard

to the fire extinguisher shell and also indicates what is probably an inoperative fire
extinguisher. Moisture could possibly enter at the following times:

Page 199 of 344
a) After a hydrostatic test

b) When recharging is being performed
c) When the valve has been removed from the cylinder
d) When using compressed air and a moisture trap for pressurising non-water
types it is extremely important to remove any water or moisture from any fire
extinguisher before recharging. Excess moisture in a dry chemical fire
extinguisher will cause the agent to cake and lump and become unusable. It
also will cause corrosion to the fire extinguisher shell and valve. In carbon
dioxide fire extinguishers, excess moisture will cause extremely corrosive
acids to form when combined with the extinguishing agent. These acids can
corrode the fire extinguisher shell and valve.
3.7 Dry ice converters
In general, carbon dioxide obtained by converting dry ice to liquid will not be
satisfactory unless it is properly processed to remove excess water and oil. If dry ice
converters are used, the following required steps should be taken.
a) Moisture-absorbent cartridges containing silica gel or activated alumina of

adequate capacity should be employed. These cartridges need to be
periodically reactivated by heating at 300°F (149°C ) for 2 hours in an open-
vented condition in order to keep them in an absorbent condition. At
temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the cartridges act a s a filter; above 32°F
(0°C), they absorb moisture directly. Various tellt ale compositions are
available that, by means of colour, indicate the degree of absorbtivity still
available in the gel.
b) An extra operation is required to minimise the water within the converter. This
operation consists of blowing off a short burst of liquid carbon dioxide from the
bottom of the converter in order to blow off free water. This operation can only
be performed above 32°F (0°C). With the converter c ontents colder than 32°F
(0°C), blowing off is ineffectual.
c) The preferred source of carbon dioxide for recharging fire extinguishers is

from a low pressure [300 psi at 0°F (2068 kPa at -1 7.8°C)] supply, supplied
either directly or via dry cylinders used as an intermediary means.
3.8 Pressure gauges
If it becomes necessary to replace a pressure gauge on a fire extinguisher, in addition

to knowing the charging pressure, it is important to know the type of extinguishing
agent for which the gauge is suitable, as well as the valve body with which the gauge
is compatible. This information could be available in the form of markings on the dial
face. Where the marking is provided, the extinguishing agent is indicated by
references such as “Use Dry Chemicals Only,” while the valve body compatibility is
indicated as follows.
a) Gauges intended for use with aluminium or plastic valve bodies are marked
with a line above the gauge manufacturer’s code letter.
b) Gauges intended for use with brass or plastic valve bodies are marked with a
line below the manufacturer’s code letter.

Page 200 of 344
c) Universal gauges that can be used with aluminium, brass, or plastic valve
bodies are marked with lines above and below the manufacturer’s code letter
or by the absence of any line above or below the manufacturer’s code letter.
Using the proper replacement gauge as to pressure range, extinguishing
agent, and valve body compatibility is recommended to avoid or to reduce
gauge-related problems.
3.9 Typical specification of equipment capable of producing dry air
The compressor/dryer module must be a fully enclosed, factory-assembled, and

factory tested package of a vertical design (compressor above motor). It must
incorporate the compressor driver, purification system, controls, interconnecting
piping, and wiring. The scope of supply must include the following:
a) Compressor. The compressor block must be multistage, air-cooled, oil-

lubricated, and rated for continuous duty at 34,475 kPa with a charging rate of
[________ cfm]. The crankcase must be fully enclosed with oversized ball
bearings on each end. The connecting rods must utilize needle bearings on
both ends. Pistons must be aluminum or cast iron and must incorporate piston
rings on all stages. Cylinders must be of cast iron. Relief valves and
individually mounted intercoolers must be utilised after each stage of
compression. The aftercooler must be designed to deliver final air at a
temperature not to exceed -6.67°C above ambient. Th e compressor flywheel
must incorporate a high-velocity cooling fan for maximum heat dissipation. An
automatic condensate drain system must be supplied as standard equipment
on all systems.
b) Dryer System. The system must be of a multi-chamber arrangement, each

constructed of aluminium alloy with a tensile strength of 572,285 kPa and
designed for 34,475 kPa working pressure with a 4 to 1 safety factor. The first
chamber must be a mechanical separator to eliminate oil and water.
Subsequent chambers must utilise replacement cartridges to further remove
moisture and oil vapour. The dryer system must process [______ cf] before
cartridge replacement. The air delivered must have a -51.1°C dew point or
lower.

SABS 0400 – National Building Regulations
SABS 0105 - The use and control of fire-fighting equipment (Formerly, The classification,
use, and maintenance of portable fire extinguishers)
SABS 1186 - Symbolic safety signs Part 1: Standard signs and general requirements
SABS 1475 - Part I - The production of reconditioned fire-fighting equipment: Portable and

Page 201 of 344
STD IM4 - DETECTION AND FIRE ALARMS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
The minimum requirements for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the fire
alarm systems are described in this Standard.
1.1.1 Inspection, testing, and maintenance programs must satisfy the requirements of
these Standards, must conform to the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations,
and must verify correct operation of the fire alarm system.
1.1.2 System defects and malfunctions must be corrected. If a defect or malfunction is not
corrected at the conclusion of system inspection, testing, or maintenance, the system
owner or the owner’s designated representative must be informed of the impairment
in writing within 24 hours.
1.1.3 Nothing in this Standard must be intended to prevent the use of alternate test
methods or testing devices. Such methods or devices must provide the same level of
effectiveness, and safety, and must meet the intent of the requirements of this
standard.
1.1.4 The requirements of this standard must apply to both new and existing systems.
1.2 The owner or the owner’s designated representative must be responsible for
inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system and alterations or additions to this
system. The delegation of responsibility must be in writing, with a copy of such
delegation provided to any jurisdiction upon request.
1.2.1 Inspection, testing, or maintenance must be permitted to be done by a person or

organisation other than the owner if conducted under a written contract.
1.2.2 Service personnel must be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and
maintenance of fire alarm systems.
1.3 Notification
1.3.1 Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signals, and all building occupants, must be notified of the
testing to prevent unnecessary response. At the conclusion of testing, those
previously notified (and others, as necessary) must be notified that testing has been
concluded.
1.3.2 The owner or the owner’s designated representative and service personnel must
coordinate system testing to prevent interruption of critical building systems or
equipment.

Page 202 of 344
1.4 Prior to system maintenance or testing, the system certificate and the information
regarding the system and system alterations, including specifications, wiring
diagrams, and floor plans, must be provided by the owner or a designated
representative to the service personnel upon request.
1.5 Releasing systems
Requirements pertinent to testing the fire alarm systems initiating fire suppression
system releasing functions must be covered by the following points:
1.5.1 Testing personnel must be qualified and experienced in the specific arrangement and
operation of a suppression system(s) and a releasing function(s) and cognisant of the
hazards associated with inadvertent system discharge.
1.5.2 Occupant notification must be required whenever a fire alarm system configured for
releasing service is being serviced or tested.
1.5.3 Discharge testing of suppression systems is not required by this Standard.

Suppression systems must be secured from inadvertent actuation, including
disconnection of releasing solenoids or electric actuators, closing of valves, other
actions, or combinations thereof, for the specific system, for the duration of the fire
alarm system testing.
1.5.4 Testing must include verification that the releasing circuits and components energised
or actuated by the fire alarm system are electrically supervised and operate as
intended on alarm.
1.5.5 Suppression systems and releasing components must be returned to their functional
operating condition upon completion of system testing.
1.6 System testing
1.6.1 Initial Acceptance Testing
All new systems must be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements
of this standard.
1.6.2 Reacceptance Testing
1.6.2.1 Reacceptance testing must be performed after any of the following:
1) Added or deleted system components

2) Any modification, repair, or adjustment to system hardware or wiring
3) Any change to site-specific software.
All components, circuits, systems operations, or site-specific software

functions known to be affected by the change or identified by a means that
indicates the system operational changes must be 100 percent tested. In
addition, 10 percent of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the
change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, also must be tested, and correct
system operation must be verified. A revised record of completion must be
prepared to reflect any changes.

Page 203 of 344
1.6.2.2 Changes to all control units connected or controlled by the system executive
software must require a 10 percent functional test of the system, including a
test of at least one device on each input and output circuit to verify critical
system functions such as notification appliances, control functions, and off-
premises reporting.
2. TEST METHODS
2.1 Central stations
At the request of the authority having jurisdiction or approved inspection authority, the
installation must be inspected for complete information regarding the system,
including specifications, wiring diagrams, and floor plans that have been submitted for
approval prior to installation of equipment and wiring.
2.2 Fire alarm systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with fire
alarm systems and accessory equipment must be tested according to the following
table.
Table 1 – Fire Alarm Device Testing
Device Method
Batteries – General Prior to conducting any battery testing, the person conducting
Tests the test shall ensure that all system software stored in volatile
memory is protected from loss.
a) Visual Inspection Batteries shall be inspected for corrosion or leakage. Tightness
of connections shall be checked and ensured. If necessary,
battery terminals or connections shall be cleaned and coated.
Electrolyte level in lead – acid batteries shall be visually
inspected.
b) Battery Batteries shall be replaced in accordance with the
Replacement recommendations of the alarm equipment manufacturer or when
the recharged battery voltage or current fall below the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Charger Test Operation of battery charger shall be checked in accordance
with charger test for the specific type of battery.
d) Discharge Test With the battery charger disconnected, the batteries shall be
load tested following the manufacturer’s recommendations. The
voltage level shall not fall below the levels specified.
Exception: An artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load
connected to the battery shall be permitted to be used in
conducting this test.
e) Load Voltage With the battery charger disconnected, the terminal voltage shall
Test be measured while supplying the maximum load required by its
application.
The voltage level shall not fall below the levels specified for the
specific type of battery. If the voltage falls below the level
specified, corrective action shall be taken and the batteries shall
be retested.
Exception: An artificial load equal to the full fire alarm load
connected to the battery shall be permitted to be used in
conducting this test.
Battery Tests (Specific Types)
a) Primary Battery The maximum load for a primary battery shall not be more than
Load Voltage 2 amperes per cell. An individual (1.5 volt) cell shall be replaced

Page 204 of 344
Device Method
Test when a load of 1 ohm reduces the voltage below 1 volt. A 6 volt
assembly shall be replaced when a test load of 4 ohms reduces
the voltage below 4 volts.
b) Lead Acid Type

1. Charger test With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger,
the voltage across the batteries shall be measured with a
voltmeter. The voltage shall be 2.30 volts per cell ±0.02 volts at
25°C or as specified by the equipment.
2. Load Voltage Under load, the battery shall not fall below 2.05 volts per cell
Test
3. Specific Gravity
The specific gravity of the liquid in the pilot cell or all of the cells
shall be required. The specific gravity shall be within the range
specified by the manufacturer. Although the specified specific
gravity varies from manufacturer to manufacturer, a range of
1.205 - 1.220 is typical for regular lead-acid batteries, while
1.240 - 1.200 is typical for high performance batteries. A
hydrometer that shows only a pass or fail condition of the battery
and does not indicate the specific gravity shall not be used,
because such a reading does not give a true indication of the
battery condition.
c) Nickel Cadmium Type
1. Charger Test With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger,
an ampere motor shall be placed in series with the battery under
charge. The charging current shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations for the type of battery used. In
the absence of specific information, 1/30 to 1/25 of the battery
rating shall be used.
2. Load Voltage Under load, the float voltage for the entire battery shall be 1.42
Test volts per cell, nominal. If possible, cells shall be measured
individually.
d) Sealed Lead-
Acid Type
1. Charger Test With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger,
the voltage across the batteries shall be measured with a
voltmeter. The voltage shall be 2.30 volts per cell ±0.02 volts at
25°C or as specified by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Load Voltage Under load, the battery shall perform in accordance with the
Test battery manufacturer’s specifications.
Public Reporting In addition to the tests and inspection required above, the
System Tests following requirements shall apply.
Manual tests of the power supply for public reporting circuits
shall be made and recorded at least once during each 24-hour
period. Such tests shall include the following:
a) Current strength of each circuit. Changes in current of
any circuit exceeding 10 percent shall be investigated
immediately.
b) Voltage across terminals of each circuit inside of
terminals of protective devices. Changes in voltage of
any circuit exceeding 10 percent shall be investigated
immediately.
c) Voltage between ground and circuits. If this test shows a
reading in excess of 50 percent of that shown in the test
specified in b), the trouble shall be immediately located
and cleared. Readings in excess of 25 percent shall be
given early attention. These readings shall be taken with
a calibrated voltmeter of not more than 100 ohms

Page 205 of 344
Device Method
resistance per volt. Systems in which each circuit is
supplied by an independent current source require tests
between ground and each side of each circuit. Common
current source systems require voltage tests between
ground and each terminal of each battery and other
current source.
d) Ground current reading shall be permitted in lieu of c). If
this method of testing is used, all grounds showing a
current reading in excess of 5 percent of the supplied
line current shall be given immediate attention.
e) Voltage across terminals of common battery, on
switchboard side of fuses.
f) Voltage between common battery terminals and ground.
Abnormal ground readings shall be investigated
immediately.
Tests specified in c) and f) shall apply only to those systems
using a common battery. If more than one common battery is
used, each common battery shall be tested.
Lightning protection equipment shall be inspected and
maintained per the manufacturer’s specifications.
Additional inspections shall be required after any lightning
strikes.
Equipment located in moderate to severe areas outlined in
NFPA 780. Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems, Appendix H, shall be inspected semi-annually and
after any lighting strikes.
Control Unit Trouble Signals
a) Audible and Operation of panel trouble signals shall be verified as well as
Visual ring back feature for systems using a trouble-silencing switch
that requires resetting.
b) Disconnect If control unit has disconnect or isolating switches, performance
switches of intended function of each switch shall be verified and receipt
of trouble signal when a supervised function is disconnected
shall also be verified.
c) Ground Fault If the system has a ground detection feature, the occurrence of
Monitoring ground-fault indication shall be verified whenever any installation
Circuit conductor is grounded.
d) Transmission of An initiating device shall be actuated and receipt of alarm signal
Signals to Off- at the off-premises location shall be verified.
Premises
Location
A trouble condition shall be created and receipt of a trouble
signal at the off-premises location shall be verified.
A supervisory device shall be actuated and receipt of a
supervisory signal at the off-premises location shall be verified.
If a transmission carrier is capable of operation under a single or
multiple fault condition, an initiating device shall be activated
during such fault condition and receipt of a trouble signal at the
off-premises location shall be verified, in addition to the alarm
signal.
Remote Annunciators The correct operation and identification of annunciators shall be
verified. If provided, the correct operation of annunciator under a
fault condition shall be verified.
Conductors Metallic
a) Stray voltage All installation conductors shall be tested with a voltmeter to
verify that there are no stray (unwanted) voltage between
installation conductors or between installation conductors and

Page 206 of 344
Device Method
ground. Unless a different threshold is specified in the system
installed equipment manufacturer’s specifications, the maximum
allowable stray voltage shall not exceed 1 volt addt.
b) Ground All installation conductors other than those intentionally and
Faults permanently grounded shall be tested for isolation from ground
per the installed equipment manufacturer’s specifications.
c) Short Circuit All installation conductors other than those intentionally
Faults connected together shall be tested for conductor-to-conductor
isolation per the installed equipment manufacturer’s
specifications. These same circuits also shall be tested
conductor-to-ground.
d) Loop With each initiating and indicating circuit installation conductor
Resistance pair short-circuited at the far end, the resistance of each circuit
shall be measured and recorded. It shall be verified that the loop
resistance does not exceed the installed equipment
manufacturer’s specified limits.
Conductors Non- Each initiating device, notification appliance, and signalling line
metallic circuit shall be tested to confirm that the installation conductors
are monitored for integrity in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 72E, National Fire Alarm Code.
a) Circuit The fibre optic transmission line shall be tested in accordance
Integrity with the manufacturer’s instruction by the use of an optical
power meter or by an optical time domain reflectometer used to
measure the relative power loss of the line. This relative figure
for each
b) Fibre Optics The fibre optic transmission line shall be tested in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions by the use of an optical
power meter or by an optical time domain reflectometer used to
measure the relative power loss of the line. This relative figure
for each fibre optic line shall be recorded in the fire alarm control
panel. If the power level drops 2 percent or more from the value
recorded during the initial acceptance test, the transmission line,
section thereof, or connectors shall be repaired or replaced by a
qualified technician to bring the line back into compliance with
the accepted transmission level per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Supervision Introduction of a fault in any supervised circuit shall result in a
trouble indication at the control unit. One connection shall be
opened at not less than 10 percent of the initiating device,
notification appliance, and signalling line circuit.
Each initiating device, notification appliance, and signalling line
circuit shall be tested for correct indication at the control unit. All
circuits shall perform as indicated in NFPA 72E. National Fire
Alarm Code.
Initiating Devices
a) Electromechanical
Releasing Device
1. Non-restorable-type Correct operation shall be verified by removal of the fusible link
link and operation of the associated device. Any moving parts shall
be lubricated as necessary.
2. Restorable-type link Correct operation shall be verified by removal of the fusible link
and operation of the associated device. Any moving parts shall
be lubricated as necessary.
b) Fire Extinguishing The switch shall be mechanically or electrically operated and
System(s) or receipt of signal by the control panel shall be verified.
Suppression
System(s) Alarm

Page 207 of 344
Device Method
Switch
c) Fire-Gas and Other Fire-gas detectors and other fire detectors shall be tested as
Detectors prescribed by the manufacturer and as necessary for the
application.
d) Heat Detectors
1. Fixed Temperature, Heat test shall be performed with a heat source per the
Rate of Rise, Rate manufacturer’s recommendations for response within 1 minute.
of Compensation, A test method shall be used that is recommended by the
Restorable Line, manufacturer or other method shall be used that will not damage
Spot Type the non-restorable fixed-temperature element of a combination
(excluding rate of rise fixed-temperature element.
Pneumatic Tube
Type)
2. Fixed Temperature, Heat test shall not be performed. Functionality shall be tested
Non-restorable Line mechanically and electrically. Loop resistance shall be
Type measured and recorded. Changes from acceptance test shall be
investigated.
3. Fixed-Temperature, After 15 years from initial installation, all devices shall be
Non-Restorable replaced or two detectors per 100 shall be laboratory tested.
Spot-type The two detectors shall be replaced with new devices. If a failure
occurs on any of the detectors removed, additional detectors
shall be removed and tested to determine either a general
problem involving faulty detectors or a localised problem
involving one or two defective detectors.
If detectors are tested instead of replaced, tests shall be
repeated at intervals of 5 years.
4. Non-restorable Heat tests shall not be performed. Functionality shall be tested
(General) mechanically and electrically.
5. Restorable Line Heat tests shall be performed (where test chambers are in
Type. Pneumatic circuit) or a test with pressure pump shall be conducted.
Tube Only
6. Fire Alarm Boxes Manual fire alarm boxes shall be operated per the
manufacturer’s instructions. Key-operated pre-signal and
general alarm manual fire alarm boxes shall both be tested.
7. Radiant Energy Flame detectors and spark ember detectors shall be tested in
Fire Detectors accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to determine
that each detector is operative.
Flame detector and spark ember detector sensitivity shall be
determined using any of the following:
a) Calibrated rest method
b) Manufacturer’s calibrated sensitivity test instrument
c) Listed control unit arranged for the purpose
d) Other approved calibrated sensitivity test method that is
directly proportional to the input signal from a fire,
consistent with the detector listing or approval.
If designed to be field adjustable, detectors found to be outside
of the approved range of sensitivity shall be replaced or adjusted
to bring them into the approved range.
Flame detector and spark ember detector sensitivity shall not be
determined using a light source that administers an unmeasured
quantity of radiation at an undefined distance from the detector.
g) Smoke Detectors
1. System detectors The detectors shall be tested in place to ensure smoke entry
into the sensing chamber and an alarm response. Testing with
smoke or listed aerosol approved by the manufacturer shall be
permitted as acceptable test methods. Other methods approved

Page 208 of 344
Device Method
by the manufacturer that ensure smoke entry into the sensing
chamber shall be permitted.
Any of the following tests shall be performed to ensure that each
smoke detector is within its listed and marked sensitivity range:
a) Calibrated test method
b) Manufacturer’s calibrated sensitivity test instrument
c) Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose
d) Smoke detector control unit arrangement whereby the
detector causes a signal at the control unit when its
sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity range
e) Other calibrated sensitivity test method approved by the
authority having jurisdiction
2. Single Station The detectors shall be tested in place to ensure smoke entry
Detectors into the sensing chamber and an alarm response. Testing with
smoke or listed aerosol approved by the manufacturer shall be
permitted as acceptable test methods. Other methods approved
by the manufacturer that ensure smoke entry into the sensing
chamber shall be permitted.
3. Air Sampling Per manufacturer’s recommended test methods, detector alarm
response shall be verified through the end sampling port on
each pipe run; airflow through all other ports shall be verified as
well.
4. Duct Type Air duct detectors shall be tested or inspected to ensure that the
device will sample the air stream. The test shall be made in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Projected Beam The detector shall be tested by introducing smoke, other
Type aerosol, or an optical filler into the beam path.
6. Smoke Detector Both portions of the detector shall be operated independently as
with built-in thermal described for the respective devices.
element
7. Smoke Detectors It shall be verified that the control capability shall remain
with Control Output operable even if all of the
Functions
h) Initiating Devices,
Supervisory
1. Control Valve Valve shall be operated and signal receipt shall be verified to be
Switch within the first two revolutions of the hand wheel or within one
fifth of the travel distance, or per the manufacturer’s
specifications.
2. High or Low Air Switch shall be operated. Receipt of signal obtained where the
Pressure Switch required pressure is increased or decreased a maximum 10 psi
(70 kPa) from the required pressure level shall be verified.
3. Room Temperature Switch shall be operated. Receipt of signal to indicate the
Switch decreases in room temperature to 40°F (44°C) and it s
restoration to above 40°F (44°C) shall be verified.
4. Water Level Switch Switch shall be operated. Receipt of signal indicating the water
level raised or lowere4d 3 in. (76.2mm) from the required level
within a pressure tank, or 12 in (305 mm) from the required level
of a non-pressure tank, shall be verified, as shall its restoral to
required level.
5. Water Temperature Switch shall be operated. Receipt of signal to indicate the
Switch decrease in water temperature to 40°F (4.4°C and it s restoration
to above 40°F (4.4°C) shall be verified.
Mechanical, Water shall be flowed through an inspector’s test connection
Electrosonic, or indicating the flow of water equal to that from a single sprinkler
Pressure-Type of the smallest orifice size installed in the system for wet-pipe

Page 209 of 344
Device Method
Water Flow Device systems, or an alarm test bypass connection for dry-pipe, pre-
action, or deluge systems in accordance with NFPA 25,
Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-
Based Fire Protection Systems.
Alarm Notification
Appliances
a) Audible Sound pressure level shall be measured with sound level motor
meeting ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Motors,
Type 2 requirements. Levels throughout protected area shall be
measured and recorded.
b) Audible Textural Sound pressure level shall be measured with sound level motor
Notification meeting ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Motors,
Appliances Type 2 requirements. Levels throughout protected area shall be
(Speakers and other measured and recorded.
Appliances to
Convey Voice
Messages)
Audible information shall be verified to be distinguishable and
understandable.
c) Visible Test shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Device locations shall be verified to be per
approved layout and it shall be confirmed that no floor plan
changes affect the approved layout.
Special Hazard
Equipment
a) Abort Switch (IRI Abort switch shall be operated. Correct sequence and operation
Type) shall be verified.
b) Abort Switch Abort switch shall be operated. Development of correct matrix
(Recycle Type) with each sensor operated shall be verified.
c) Abort Switch Abort switch shall be operated. Correct sequence and operation
(Special Type) in accordance with authority having jurisdiction shall be verified.
Sequencing on as built drawings or in owner’s manual shall be
observed.
d) Cross Zone One sensor or detector on each zone shall be operated.
Detection Circuit Occurrence of correct sequence with operation of first zone and
then with operation of second zone shall be verified.
e) Matrix-Type Circuit All sensors in system shall be operated. Development of correct
matrix with each sensor operated shall be verified.
f) Release Solenoid Solenoid shall be used with equal current requirements.
Circuit Operation of solenoid shall be verified.
g) Squibb Release AGI flashbulb or other test light approved by the manufacturer
Circuit shall be used. Operation of flashbulb or light shall be verified.
h) Verified, Sequential, Required sensors at a minimum of four locations in circuit shall
or Counting Zone be operated. Correct sequence with both the first and second
Circuit detector in alarm shall be verified.
i) All above Devices or Supervision of circuits shall be verified by creating an open
Circuits or circuit.
Combinations
Thereof
Supervising Station Fire
Alarm Systems -
Transmission
Equipment
a) All Equipment Test shall be performed on all system functions and features in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions for
correct operation in conformance with the applicable sections of
Chapter 5.

Page 210 of 344
Device Method
Initiating device shall be actuated. Receipt of the correct
initiating device at the supervising station with 90 seconds shall
be verified. Upon completion of the test, the system shall be
restored to its functional operating condition.
If test jacks are used, the first and last tests shall be made
without the use of the test jack.
b) Digital Alarm Connection of the DACT to two separate means of transmission
Communicator shall be ensured.
Transmitter (DACT)
Exception: DACTs that are connected to a telephone line
(number) that is also supervised for adverse conditions by a
derived local channel.
DACT shall be tested for line seizure capability by initiating a
signal while using the primary line for a telephone call. Receipt
of the correct signal at the supervising station shall be verified.
Completion of the transmission attempt within 90 seconds from
going off-hook to on-hook shall be verified.
The primary line from the DACT shall be disconnected.
Indication of the DACT trouble signal at the premises shall be
verified as well as transmission to the supervising station within
4 minutes of detection of the fault.
The secondary means of transmission from the DACT shall be
disconnected. Indication of the DACT trouble signal at the
premises shall be verified as well as transmission to the
supervising station within 4 minutes of detection of the fault.
The DACT shall be caused to transmit a signal to the DACR
while a fault in the primary telephone number is simulated.
Utilisation of the secondary telephone number by the DACT to
complete the transmission to the DACR shall be verified.
c) Digital Alarm Radio The primary telephone line shall be disconnected. Transmission
Transmitter (DART) of a trouble signal to the supervising station by the DART within
4 minutes shall be verified.
d) McCulloh Initiating device shall be actuated. Production of not less than
Transmitter three complete rounds of not less than three signal impulses
each by the McCulloh transmitter shall be verified.
If end-to-end continuity is present and with a balanced circuit,
each of the following four transmission channel fault conditions
shall be caused in turn, and receipt of correct signals at the
supervising station shall be verified:
a) Open
b) Ground
c) Wire-to-wire short
d) Open and ground
If end-to-end metallic continuity is not present and with a
properly balanced circuit, each of the following three
transmission channel fault conditions shall be caused in turn and
receipt of correct signals at the supervising station shall be
verified.
a) Open
b) Ground
c) Wire-to-wire short
e) Radio Alarm A fault between elements of the transmitting equipment shall be
Transmitter (RAT) caused. Indication of the fault at the protected premises shall be
verified or it shall be verified that a trouble signal is transmitted
to the supervising station.
Supervising Station Fire

Page 211 of 344
Device Method
Alarm Systems -
Receiving Equipment
a) All Equipment Tests shall be performed on all system functions and features in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions for
correct operation in conformance with the applicable sections of
Chapter 5 of NFPA 72E National Fire Alarm Code.
Initiating device shall be actuated. Receipt of the correct
initiating device signal at the supervising station within 90
seconds shall be verified upon completion of the test, the
system shall be restored to its functional operating condition.
If test jacks are used, the first and last tests shall be made
without the use of the test jack.
b) Digital Alarm Each telephone line (number) shall be disconnected in turn from
Communicator the DACR and audible and visual annunciation of a trouble
Receiver (DACR) signal in the supervising station shall be verified.
A signal shall be caused to be transmitted on each individual
incoming DACR line at least once every 24 hours. Receipt of
these signals shall be verified.
c) Digital Alarm Radio The following conditions of all DARRs on all subsidiary and
Receiver (DARR) repeater station receiving equipment shall be caused. Receipt at
the supervising station of correct signals breach of the following
conditions shall be verified:
a) AC power failure of the radio equipment
b) Receiver malfunction
c) Antenna and interconnecting cable failure
d) Indication of automatic switchover of the DARR
e) Data transmission line failure between the DARR and the
supervising or subsidiary station
d) McCulloh Systems The current on each circuit at each supervising and subsidiary
station under the following conditions shall be tested and
recorded:
a) During functional operation
b) On each side of the circuit with the receiving equipment
conditioned for an open circuit
A single break or ground condition shall be caused on each
transmission channel. If such a fault prevents the functioning of
the circuit, receipt of a trouble signal shall be verified.
Each of the following conditions at each of the supervising or
subsidiary stations and all repeater station radio transmitting and
receiving equipment shall be caused; receipt of correct signals
at the supervising station shall be verified.
a) RF transmitter in use (radiating)
b) AC power failure supplying the radio equipment
c) RF receiver malfunction
d) Indication of automatic switchover
e) Radio Alarm Each of the following conditions at each of the supervising or
Supervising Station subsidiary stations and all repeater station radio transmitting and
Receiver (RASSR) receiving equipment shall be caused, receipt of correct signals
and Radio Alarm at the supervising station shall be verified:
Repeater Station
Receiver (RARSR)
f) Private Microwave Each of the following conditions at each of the supervising or
Radio Systems subsidiary stations and all repeater station radio transmitting and
receiving equipment shall be caused; receipt of correct signals
at the supervising station shall be verified:
a) RF transmitter in use (radiating)

Page 212 of 344
Device Method
b) AC power failure supplying the radio equipment
c) RF receiver malfunction
d) Indication of automatic switchover
Emergency
Communications
Equipment
a) Amplifier / Tone Correct switching and operation of backup equipment shall be
Generators verified
b) Call-in Signal Function shall be operated and receipt of correct visual and
Service audible signals at control panel shall be verified
c) Off – hook Indicator Phone set shall be installed or phone shall be removed from
(Ring Down) hook and receipt of signal at control panel shall be verified.
d) Phone Jacks Phone jack shall be visually inspected and communications path
through jack shall be initiated.
e) Phone Set Each phone set shall be activated and correct operation shall be
verified.
f) System System shall be operated with a minimum of any five handsets
Performance simultaneously. Voice quality and clarity shall be verified.
Interface Equipment Interface equipment connections shall be tested by operating or
simulating the equipment being supervised. Signals required to
be transmitted shall be verified at the control panel. Test
frequency for interface equipment shall be the same as the
frequency required by the applicable NFPA standard(s) for the
equipment being supervised.
Guards Tour Equipment The device shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications.
Special Procedures
a) Alarm Verification Time delay and alarm response for smoke detector circuits
identified as having alarm verification shall be verified.
b) Multiplex Systems Communications between sending and receiving units under
both primary and secondary power shall be verified.
Communications between sending and receiving units under
open circuit trouble conditions shall be verified.
Communications between sending and receiving units in all
directions where multiple communications pathways are
provided shall be verified.
If redundant central equipment is provided, switchover and all
required functions and operations of secondary equipment shall
be verified.
All system functions and features shall be verified in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
Low – Power Radio The following procedures describe the additional acceptance
(Wireless Systems) and reacceptance test methods to verify wireless protection
system operation:
a) The manufacturer’s manual and the as built drawings
provided by the system supplier shall be used to verify
correct operation after the initial testing phase has been
performed by the supplier or by the supplier’s designated
representative.
b) Starting from the functional condition, the system shall be
initialised in accordance with the manufacturer’s manual. A
test shall be conducted to verify the alternative path, or
paths, by turning off or disconnecting the primary wireless
repeater. The alternative communications path shall exist
between the wireless control panel and peripheral devices
used to establish initiation, indicating, control and

Page 213 of 344
Device Method
annunciation. The system shall be tested for both alarm
and trouble conditions.
c) Batteries for all components in the system shall be
checked monthly. If the control panel checks all batteries
and all components daily, the system shall not require
monthly testing of the batteries.

Page 214 of 344
3. INSPECTION AND TESTING FREQUENCY
3.1 Visual inspection
Visual inspection must be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 2 or

more often if required by the authority having jurisdiction. The visual inspection must
be made to ensure that there are no changes that affect equipment performance.
Exception No. 1: Devices or equipment that is inaccessible for safety

considerations (for example, continuous process operations,
energised electrical equipment, radiation, and excessive
height) must be inspected during scheduled shutdowns if
approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Extended
intervals must not exceed 18 months.
Exception No. 2: If automatic inspection is performed at a frequency of not less

than weekly by a remotely monitored fire alarm control unit
specifically listed for such application, the visual inspection
frequency must be permitted to be annual. The requirements of
Table 2 must apply.
Table 2 – Visual Inspection Frequencies
Component Initial / Re- Monthly Quarterl Semi- Annually

acceptance y annually
1. Control Equipment:
Fire Alarm Systems
Monitored for Alarm,
Supervisory, Trouble
Signals
Fuses x - - - x
Interfaced Equipment x - - - x
Lamps and LEDs x - - - x
Primary (Main) Power Supply x - - - x
Control Equipment: Fire
Alarm Systems Unmonitored
for Alarm, Supervisory,
Trouble Signals
a) Fuses x (weekly) - - - -
b) Interfaced Equipment x (weekly) - - - -
c) Lamps and LEDs x (weekly) - - - -
d) Primary (Main) Power x (weekly) - - - -
Supply
2. Batteries -
a) Lead-Acid x x - - -
b) Nickel-Cadmium x - - x -
c) Primary (Dry Cell) x x - - -
d) Sealed Lead-Acid x - - x -
3. Transient x - - x -
Suppressors
4. Control Unit Trouble x (weekly) - - x -
Signals
Fibre Optic Cable x - - - x
Connections

Page 215 of 344

Emergency Voice/Alarm x - - x -
Communications Equipment
Remote Annunciators x - - x -
5. Initiating devices
a) Air sampling x - - x -
b) Duct detectors x - - x -
c) Electromechanical x - - x e
releasing devices
d) Fire Extinguishing x - - x -
System(s) or
Suppression System(s)
Switches
e) Fire Alarm Boxes x - - x -
f) Heat Detectors x - - x -
g) Radiant Energy Fire x - x - -
Detectors
h) Smoke Detectors x - - x -
i) Supervisory Signal x - x - -
Devices
j) Water flow Devices x - x - -
6. Guard’s Tour x - - x -
Equipment
7. Interface Equipment x - - x -
8. Alarm Notification x - - x -
Appliances -
Supervised
9. Supervising Station
Fire Alarm Systems -
Transmitters
a) DACT x - - x -
b) DART x - - x -
c) McCulloh x - - x -
d) RAT x - - x -
10. Special Procedures x - - x -
11. Supervising Station
Fire Alarm Systems -
Receivers
a) DACR* x x - - -
b) DARR* x - - x -
c) McCulloh Systems* x - - x -
d) Two-Way RF Multiplex* x - - x -
e) RASSR* x - - x -
f) RARS* x - - x -
g) Private Microwave* x - - x -
*Reports of automatic signal receipt shall be verified daily
3.2 Testing
Testing must be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 2 or more often
if required by the authority having jurisdiction. If automatic testing is performed at
least weekly by a remotely monitored fire alarm control unit specifically listed for the
application, the manual testing frequency must be permitted to be extended to
annual. Table 3 must then apply.

Page 216 of 344
Exception: Devices or equipment that are inaccessible for safety considerations

(for example, continuous process operations, energised electrical
equipment, radiation, and excessive height) must be tested during
scheduled shutdowns if approved by the authority having jurisdiction
but must not be tested more than every 18 months.
Table 3 – Testing Frequencies

1. Control Equipment -
Building Systems
connected to
Supervising Station
a) Functions x - - - x
b) Fuses x - - - x
c) Interfaced Equipment x - - - x
d) Lamps and LEDs x - - - x
e) Primary (Main) Power x - - - x
Supply
f) Transporters x - - - x
2. Control Equipment -
Building Systems Not
Connected to a
Supervising Station
a) Functions x - x - -
b) Fuses x - x - -
c) Interfaced Equipment x - x - -
d) Lamps and LEDs x - x - -
e) Primary (Main) Power x - x - -
Supply
f) Transporters x - x - -
3. Engine-driven x x - - -
Generator - Central
Station Facilities and
Fire Alarm Systems
4. Engine-Driven x - - - -
Generator - Public Fire
Alarm Reporting
Systems
5. Batteries - Central
Station Facilities
a) Lead-Acid Type - - - - -
1. Charger Test x - - - x
(Replace battery as
needed)
2. Discharge Test (30 x - - - x
minutes)
3. Lead Voltage Test x x - - -
4. Specific Gravity x - - x -
b) Nickel-Cadmium Type - - - - -
1. Charger Test x - x - -
(Replace battery as
needed)
2. Charger Test (30 x - - - x

Page 217 of 344

minutes)
3. Lead Voltage Test x - - - x
c) Sealed Lead-Acid Type x x - - -
1. Charger Test - x x - -
(Replace battery as
needed)
2. Discharge Test (30 x x - - -
minutes)
3. Lead Voltage Test x x - - -
6. Batteries - Fire Alarm
Systems
a) Lead-Acid Type - - - - -
(Replace battery as
needed)
2. Discharge Test (30 x - - x x
minutes)
3. Load Voltage Test x - - - x
b) Nickel-Cadmium Type - - - - -
(Replace battery as
needed)
minutes)
3. Load Voltage Test x - - x -
c) Primary Type (Dry Cell) - - - - -
1. Load Voltage Test x x - - -
d) Sealed Lead-Acid Type - - - - -
(Replace battery every 4
years)
minutes)
3. Load Voltage Test x - - x -
Batteries - Public Fire x (daily) - - - -
Alarm Reporting Systems
Voltage tests in accordance
with Table 2
Lead-Acid Type - - - - -
1. Charge Test (Replace x - - - x
battery as needed)
2. Discharge Test (2 x - x - -
hours)
3. Load Voltage Test x - x - -
a) Nickel-Cadmium Type - - - - -
(Replace battery as
needed)
hours)
b) Sealed Lead-Acid Type - - - - -

Page 218 of 344

(Replace battery as
needed)
hours)
4. Fibre-Optic Cable x - - - x
Power
5. Control Unit Trouble x - - - x
Signals
6. Conductors - Metallic x - - - -
7. Conductors - Non- x - - - -
metallic
8. Emergency Voice/Alarm x - - - x
Communications
Equipment
Retransmission Equipment x - - - -
(The requirements of 3.4 shall
apply)
9. Remote Annunciators x - - - x
10. Initiating Devices - - - - -
a) Duct Detectors x - - - x
b) Electromechanical x - - - x
Releasing Device
c) Fire Extinguishing x - - - x
System(s) or
Suppression System(s)
Switches
d) Fire-Gas and Other x - - - x
Detectors
e) Heat Detectors (The x - - - x
requirements of 3.2.3
shall apply)
f) Fire Alarm Boxes x - - - x
g) Radiant Energy Fire x - - x -
Detectors
h) All Smoke Detectors - x - - - x
Functional
i) Smoke Detectors - - - - - -
Sensitivity (The
requirements of 3.2.1
shall apply)
j) Supervisory Signal x - x - -
Devices (except valve
tamper switches)
k) Water-flow Devices x - - x -
l) Valve Tamper Switches x - - x -
11. Guard’s Tour Equipment x - - - x
12. Interface Equipment x - - - x
13. Special Hazard x - - - x
Equipment
14. Alarm Notification - - - - -
Appliances
a) Audible Devices x - - - x
b) Audible Textual x - - - x
Notification Appliances

Page 219 of 344

c) Visible Devices x - - - x
15. Off-Premises x - - - x
Transmission
Equipment
16. Supervising Station Fire - - - - -
Alarm Systems -
Transmitters
a) DACT x - - - x
b) DART x - - - x
c) McCulloh x - - - x
d) RAT x - - - X
17. Special Procedures x - - - x
18. Supervising Station Fire - - - - -
Alarm Systems -
Receivers
a) DACR x x - - -
b) DARR x x - - -
c) McCulloh Systems x x - - -
d) Two-Way RF Multiplex x x - - -
e) RASSR x x - - -
f) RARSR x x - - -
g) Private Microwave x x - - -
3.2.1 Detector sensitivity must be checked within 1 year after installation and every
alternate year thereafter. After the second required calibration test, if sensitivity tests
indicate that the detector has remained within its listed and marked sensitivity range
(or 4 percent obscuration light grey smoke, if not marked), the length of time between
calibration tests must be permitted to be extended to a maximum of 5 years. If the
frequency is extended, records of detector-caused nuisance alarms and subsequent
trends of these alarms must be maintained. In zones or in areas where nuisance
alarms show any increase over the previous year, calibration tests must be
performed. To ensure that each smoke detector is within its listed and marked
sensitivity range, it must be tested using any of the following methods:
1) Calibrated test method

2) Manufacturer’s calibrated sensitivity test instrument
3) Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose
4) Smoke detector/control unit arrangement whereby the detector causes a
signal at the control unit where its sensitivity is outside its listed sensitivity
range
5) Other calibrated sensitivity test methods approved by the authority having
jurisdiction.
Detectors found to have a sensitivity outside the listed and marked sensitivity range
must be cleaned and recalibrated or be replaced.
Exception No. 1: Detectors listed as field adjustable must be permitted to be

either adjusted within the listed and marked sensitivity range
and cleaned and recalibrated, or they must be replaced.
The detector sensitivity must not be tested or measured using any device that
administers an unmeasured concentration of smoke or other aerosol into the
detector.

Page 220 of 344
3.2.2 Test frequency of interfaced equipment must be the same as specified by the
applicable NFPA standards for the equipment being supervised.
3.2.3 For restorable fixed-temperature, spot-type heat detectors, two or more detectors
must be tested on each initiating circuit annually. Different detectors must be tested
each year, with records kept by the building owner specifying which detectors have
been tested. Within 5 years, each detector must have been tested.
3.2.4 For testing addressable and analog-described devices, which are affixed to either a
single, moulded assembly or a twist-lock type affixed to a base, testing must be
conducted using the signalling style circuits (Styles 0.5 through 7 of NFPA 72E
National Fire Alarm Code). Analog-type detectors must be tested with the same
criteria.
3.2.5 Test of all circuits extending from the central station must be made at intervals of not
more than 24 hours.
3.3 Public fire reporting systems
3.3.1 Emergency power sources other than batteries must be operated to supply the
system for a continuous period of 1 hour at least weekly. This test must require
simulated failure of the normal power source.
3.3.2 Testing facilities must be installed at the communications center and each subsidiary
communications center, if used.
Exception: If satisfactory to the authority having jurisdiction, those facilities for

systems leased from a non-municipal organisation that might be
located elsewhere.
4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 Fire alarm system equipment must be maintained in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The frequency of maintenance must depend on the type
of equipment and the local ambient conditions.
4.2 The frequency of cleaning must depend on the type of equipment and the local
ambient conditions.
4.3 All apparatus requiring rewinding or resetting to maintain normal operation must be
rewound or reset as promptly as possible after each test and alarm. All test signals
received must be recorded to indicate date, time, and type.
4.4 The retransmission means must be tested at intervals of not more than 12 hours. The
retransmission signal and the time and date of the retransmission must be recorded
in the central station.
Exception: If the retransmission means is the public switched telephone network,

it must be permitted to be tested weekly to confirm its operation to
each public fire service communications center.

Page 221 of 344
5. RECORDS
5.1 Permanent records
After successful completion of acceptance tests approved by the authority having

jurisdiction, a set of reproducible as-built installation drawings, operation and
maintenance manuals, and a written sequence of operation must be provided to the
building owner or the owner’s designated representative. The owner must be
responsible for maintaining these records for the life of the system for examination by
any authority having jurisdiction. Paper or electronic media must be permitted.
5.2 Maintenance, inspection and testing records
5.2.1 Records must be retained until the next test and for 1 year thereafter.
5.2.2 A permanent record of all inspections, testing, and maintenance must be provided
that includes the following information regarding tests and all the applicable
information requested in a - o below.
a) Date
b) Test frequency
c) Name of property
d) Address
e) Name of person performing inspection, maintenance, tests, or combination
thereof, and affiliation, business address, and telephone number
f) Name, address, and representative of approving agency(ies)
g) Designation of the detector(s) tested, for example, “Tests performed in
accordance with Section __________.”
h) Functional test of detectors
i) Functional test of required sequence of operations
j) Check of all smoke detectors
k) Loop resistance for all fixed-temperature, line -type heat detectors
l) Other tests as required by equipment manufacturers
m) Other tests as required by the authority having jurisdiction
n) Signatures of tester and approved authority representative
o) Disposition of problems identified during test (for example, owner notified,
problem corrected/successfully retested, device abandoned in place)
5.2.3 For supervising station fire alarm systems, records pertaining to signals received at
the supervising station that result from maintenance, inspection, and testing, must be
maintained for not less than 12 months. Upon request, a hard copy record must be
provided to the authority having jurisdiction. Paper or electronic media must be
permitted.
5.2.4 If the operation of a device, circuit, control panel function, or special hazard system
interface is simulated, it must be noted on the certificate that the operation was
simulated, and the certificate must indicate by whom it was simulated.

Page 222 of 344

Page 223 of 344
6. WHERE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS ARE REQUIRED
6.1 All premises must have an effective means of giving warning in case of fire.
6.2 The type of alarm and method of operation (automatic and/or manual) will depend
upon the degree of risk in the building. In certain cases a fire alarm system capable of
both automatic and manual operation is a legal requirement, e.g. in occupied areas of
any buildings over 30 m in height or if there is a storey or floor area exceeding 5 000
m2. (Refer to National Building Regulations - TT31) (B4).
6.3 In operations of high and medium fire risk or where the site is extensive in size or the
buildings have upper storeys, an alarm system is required.
6.4 A public address system may be used to supplement the fire alarm providing an
alternate power source, independent of the main electricity supply, is available.
6.5 In each case the fire alarm must be clearly audible throughout the premises. It is
provided to protect and the sound emitted must not be mistaken for any other sound
than that of a fire alarm.
6.6 An exercise must be undertaken in terms of which employees must report any area
where the fire alarm cannot be clearly heard. Where excessive machinery noise
exists, the audible alarm system must be coupled to a visual system, e.g. flashing
lights or illuminated signs.
7. GENERAL DESIGN
7.1 Initiating alarm points must be provided in all parts of the building. No person should
walk more than 30 m in order to reach an alarm.
7.2 Initiating alarm points must be of the same type throughout. Initiating alarm points
must be sited at all exit points, including staircases, and indicated by conspicuous
signs.
7.3 Initiating points must be conspicuous and mounted 1.5 m above floor level and have
clear operating instructions.
7.4 All fire alarm systems must be fully monitored and DC battery operated, generally
12V or 24V. Many installations fitted with step-down transformers are mains operated
with battery back-up.
7.5 The system design should be in accordance with SABS 0139, NFPA 72E or BS 5839.

Page 224 of 344
8. INSTALLATION
8.1 The system must be installed and designed by a specialist manufacturer and be
commissioned by him with appropriate certificates giving adequate guarantees. He
should be a member of the FDIA (Fire Detection Industry Association).
9. CONTROL AND INDICATION
9.1 All manual break-glass and automatic points must signal back to a central
annunciator panel and be zoned to monitor the areas involved commensurate with
the risk and the building design. In small systems these may be wired together.
Specific guidance must be obtained from the SABS 0139, NFPA 72E and BS5839
standards.
10. ROLE OF CONSULTANTS
The evaluation of the need for, and design of fire detection systems is a specialist
function and must always be referred to a specialist consultant. There are a large
number of suppliers of such systems and a great variety of equipment, but the range
of suitable and reliable suppliers and equipment is very limited and the advice of
specialist consultants is essential for the right selection.
11. MAINTENANCE AND TESTING
The system must be regularly inspected and serviced by the installing engineers, as
per Table 2 and 3 described earlier, including functional testing of all circuits, and an
annual overhaul of all equipment. The user must inspect the system controls and
indicators, the alarms, including the fire brigade connection, by simulating a fire
condition on one of the detectors. A programmed sequence of testing must be
arranged so that a different detector zone is used each time. Thus, over a period of
time all detectors can be checked.
12. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
12.1 Detectors
Detectors are designed to react to one or more of the following characteristics of fire.
Heat
Smoke
Flames
Detectors are capable of being reset and are also fitted with a small indicator light
which goes on to indicate which detector was operated.
12.1.1 Heat Detectors
There are two types. Fixed temperature detectors only activate when a
predetermined temperature is reached, whereas rate of rise detectors response to

Page 225 of 344
abnormally rapid temperature increases. These also incorporate an upper fixed

temperature limit. Heat detectors can be operated in the following ways:-
Fusible alloys
The melting of an alloy at a predetermined temperature completes an
electrical circuit to operate the alarm. Normal operating temperatures vary
between 55°C and 180°C.
Expansion of metals, gases or liquids

Metals – The expansion due to heat of metal rods, strips, coils or bows in a
specific direction completes an electrical circuit and raises the alarm.
Gases – Pneumatic detectors cause the expansion of air in a chamber to
distend a flexible diaphragm, completing a circuit and raising the alarm.
Liquids – Comprises a copper tube filled with a fluid and fitted with a metal
bellows on each end. The movement of the bellows due to the expansion of
the fluid in the tube completes the circuit.
Electrical effect (Two main types are used)

The line detector utilises the effect of heat on heat-sensitive electrical
insulation which melts causing contact between two conductors to alarm. The
thermo-couple type activates when a temperature difference between a
shielded and unexposed thermocouple produces a voltage difference.
12.1.2 Smoke Detectors
Ionisation type
These have a chamber or two chambers incorporating a radioactive source
and a positive and negative electrode. Air within the chamber is irradiated and
ionised creating positive or negative ions depending on whether electrons are
gained or lost. These then move either to the positive or negative electrodes
to become neutralised. This movement reduces the resistance of the air
causing a small current to flow in the circuit. When smoke particles enter the
chamber charged ions attach themselves to the particles. The charged
particles move more slowly enabling them to meet charged particles or ions of
opposite polarity and become neutralised. A reduction in the current flowing in
the chamber occurs initiating an alarm.
Optical Type
These detectors have a light source and photo-electric cell in a light proof
housing which allows free ingress of smoke. They operate on the light scatter
principle where light is deflected by the smoke particles which enter the
chamber onto the photocell and/or the light obscuration principle where smoke
entering the chamber obscures the light beamed onto the photocell. This
change in light configuration is sensed, causing the detector to actuate.
12.1.3 Flame Detectors
In addition to visible light, flames also emit infra-red and ultra-violet radiation which is
detectable.
Infra-red type – An infra-red (IR) sensitive photocell, filter, amplifier, integrator

and timer are used to detect IR radiation and will raise the alarm when the
radiation detected is in the 4Hz to 15 Hz frequency range. This range is

Page 226 of 344
characteristic of the flicker of a flame. A scanning type which will rotate and
monitor through 360° in the horizontal plane is als o available. Radiation is
reflected by the scanner onto an IR detecting photocell to trigger an alarm.
Ultra-violet detectors use either an ultra-violet (UV) sensitive photocell or a UV
sensitive gas-filled tube in conjunction with an amplifier to detect UV radiation
from flames.
12.1.4 Other Detectors
Linear smoke/heat detector (Beam detector) A light beam is focused directly or

indirectly via a reflecting mirror onto a photocell. The turbulent effect caused when
smoke or heat waves cross the beam is detected by the photocell and the alarm is
raised.
12.1.5 Air Sampling Type
Sampling tubes connected to an ionisation chamber terminate with the enclosed

protected area. Air from the compartment being monitored is passed through an
ionisation chamber by sampling tubes and a motor driven fan. Combustion products
are monitored and an alarm is raised if these reach a predetermined level.
12.2 Wiring
The wiring transmits signals from the detectors to the annunciator panel and to the
audible alarms. It should be protected from accidental damage and the installation
thereof should be of the highest quality to facilitate signal transfer. The wiring should
be in metal conduit and be kept away from lifts and unprotected stair shafts and
openings to reduce the possibility of damage by fire.
Note: When evacuation and voice communication systems are interconnected to the
detection system all wiring should be of the fire resistant type.
12.3 Control / indicating equipment
The control unit acts as a terminal for the detector and internal and external alarm
circuits. It houses the test facilities, alarm silence button, fire or fault signalling and
power supply monitoring equipment. The size of the control unit will depend on the
complexity of the detection installation and the total number of zones of which it is
comprised. Each zone has a series of detectors off a loop of wiring enabling easy
location of a fire within a zoned compartment, usually restricted to about 2 000 m2 or
less. An indicator panel, together with a plan of the premises with zone identification
should be provided at the main entrance of the building where it will be seen by fire
brigade or other personnel responding to an alarm.
12.4 Alarms
Alarms, which should be of the highest quality, include sirens, hooters, bells and
electronic audible devices. A rough guide on minimum recommended sound
intensities is:
12.4.1 General Alarm

Page 227 of 344
65 dBA or 5 dBA more than any background noise likely to last more than 30
seconds.

NFPA 72 - National Alarm Code
SABS 0400 – TT31 (B4) – National Building Regulations
servicing (WITHDRAWN)

Page 228 of 344
STD IM5 - GASEOUS EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS - CO2 (CARBON DIOXIDE) SYSTEMS
This standard must be read in addition to Standards G7 and G8.
1. INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND INSTRUCTION
1.1 Inspection
At least every 7 days, an inspection must be conducted to assess the system’s

operational condition.
1.2 Hose testing
All system hose, including those used as flexible connectors, must be tested at
17,240 kPa for high-pressure systems, and at 6205 kPa for low-pressure systems.
Hose must be tested as follows:
1) The hose must be removed from any attachment.

2) Hose for hand lines must be checked for electrical continuity between
couplings.
3) The hose assembly must then be placed in a protective enclosure designed to
permit visual observation of the test.
4) The hose must be completely filled with water before testing.
5) Pressure must then be applied at a rate of pressure rise to reach the test
pressure within 1 minute. The test pressure must be maintained for 1 full
minute. Observations must then be made to note any distortion or leakage.
6) If the test pressure has not dropped and if the couplings have not moved, the
pressure must be released. The hose assembly must then be considered to
have passed the hydrostatic test if no permanent distortion has taken place.
7) Hose assembly passing the test must be completely dried internally. If heat is
used for drying, the temperature must not exceed 66°C (150°F).
8) Hose assemblies failing this test must be marked and destroyed. They must
be replaced with new assemblies.
9) Hose assemblies passing this test must be suitably marked with the date of
the test on the hose.
1.2.1 All system hose including those used as flexible connectors must be tested every 5
years.
1.2.2 Maintenance
A manufacturer’s test and maintenance procedure must be provided to the owner for
testing and maintenance of the system. This procedure must provide for the initial
testing of the equipment as well as for periodic test inspection and maintenance of
the system.
1.2.3 The following must be verified by competent personnel at least annually using
available documentation.
1) Check and test the carbon dioxide system for proper operation

Page 229 of 344
2) Check that there have been no changes to the size, type, and configuration of
the hazard and system
1.2.4.1 The goal of this maintenance and testing must be not only to ensure that the system
is in full operating condition, but must indicate the probable continuance of that
condition until the next inspection.
1.2.4.2 Suitable discharge tests must be made when any maintenance indicates their
advisability. Prior to testing, proper safety procedures must be reviewed.
1.2.5 A maintenance report with recommendations must be filed with the owner.
1.2.6 Between the regular service contract maintenance or tests, the system must be
inspected visually or otherwise by approved or competent personnel who follow an
approved schedule.
1.2.7 At least semi-annually, all high-pressure cylinders must be weighed and the date of
the last hydrostatic test noted. If, at any time, a container shows a loss in net content
of more than 10 percent, it must be refilled or replaced.
1.2.8 At least weekly, the liquid level gauges of low-pressure containers must be observed.
If at any time a container shows a loss of more than 10 percent, it must be refilled,
unless the minimum gas requirements are still provided.
1.2.9 These systems must be kept in full operating condition at all times. Use, impairment,
and restoration of this protection must be reported promptly to the authority having
jurisdiction. Any troubles or impairments must be corrected at once by competent
personnel.
1.2.10 Instruction
Persons who inspect, test, maintain, or operate carbon dioxide fire-extinguishing

systems must be thoroughly trained in the functions they perform.
2. AGENTS USED
Carbon dioxide (CO2) is a colourless, odourless, inert gas which extinguishes a fire by
reducing the concentrations of the oxygen in the air, or the gaseous phase of the fuel
in the air, to a point where combustion ceases (suffocation).
3. APPLICABLE INSTALLATION STANDARDS
3.1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code 12 Standard on Carbon

Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.
The discharge of carbon dioxide in fire-extinguishing concentration creates

serious hazards to personnel, such as suffocation and reduced visibility during
and after the discharge period. Suitable safeguards must be provided to
ensure prompt evacuation, to prevent entry into such atmospheres, and to
provide means for prompt rescue of any trapped personnel. Therefore it is
recommended that the following be provided:

Page 230 of 344
1) Personnel training.
2) Pre-discharge alarms must be provided.
3) All persons that can at any time enter a space protected by carbon
dioxide must be warned of the hazards involved, given an alarm signal,
and provided with safe evacuation procedures.
4) The pre – discharge, warning signal must provide a time delay of
sufficient duration to allow for evacuation under worst-case conditions.
5) Dry runs must be made to determine the minimum time needed for
persons to evacuate the hazard area, allowing time to identify the
warning signal.
Appropriate warning signs should be provided and must be affixed in a

conspicuous location.
1. Typical sign in every protected space
WARNING
CARBON DIOXIDE GAS
WHEN ALARM OPERATES VACATE IMMEDIATELY
2. Typical sign at every entrance to protected space
WARNING
CARBON DIOXIDE GAS
WHEN ALARM OPERATES DO NOT ENTER UNTIL VENTILATED
3. Typical sign in every nearby space where carbon dioxide can

accumulate to hazardous levels
CAUTION:
CARBON DIOXIDE DISCHARGE INTO A NEARBY SPACE
CAN COLLECT HERE. WHEN ALARM OPERATES
VACATE IMMEDIATELY
4. Typical sign outside each entrance to carbon dioxide storage rooms
CAUTION:
CARBON DIOXIDE GAS
VENTILATE THE AREA BEFORE ENTERING. A HIGH CARBON
DIOXIDE GAS CONCENTRATION CAN OCCUR IN THIS AREA AND
CAN CAUSE SUFFOCATION
5. Appropriate warning signs must be placed at every location where

manual operation of the system can occur. A typical sign at each
manual actuation station is as follows:
WARNING
ACTUATION OF THIS DEVICE WILL CAUSE CARBON
DIOXIDE TO DISCHARGE. BEFORE ACTUATING, BE
SURE PERSONNEL ARE CLEAR OF THE AREA

Page 231 of 344
6. Certain steps and safeguards should be implemented and are

necessary to prevent injury or death to personnel when carbon dioxide
discharges and should include the following provisions:
1) Necessary additional or emergency lighting, or both, and

directional signs to ensure quick, safe evacuation.
2) Alarms within such areas that will operate immediately upon

activation of the system on detection of the fire, with the
discharge of the carbon dioxide delayed for sufficient time to
evacuate the area before discharge begins.
3) Only outward swinging, self-closing doors at exits from

hazardous areas, and, where such doors are latched, provision
of panic hardware.
4) Continuous alarms at entrances to such areas until the

atmosphere has been restored to normal.
5) Warning and instruction signs at entrances to and inside such

areas.
6) Prompt discovery and rescue of persons rendered unconscious

in such areas (This can be accomplished by having such areas
searched by trained personnel equipped with proper breathing
equipment immediately after carbon dioxide discharge stops.
Those persons rendered unconscious by carbon dioxide can be
restored without permanent injury by artificial respiration, if
removed quickly from the hazardous atmosphere. Self-
contained breathing equipment and personnel trained in its
use, and in rescue practices including artificial respiration,
should be readily available.)
7) Instruction and drills of all personnel within or in the vicinity of

such areas, including maintenance or construction people who
can be brought into the area, to ensure their correct action
when carbon dioxide protective equipment operates.
8) Means for prompt ventilation of such areas after a system has

activated and the condition returns to normal.
9) It is recommended that self-contained breathing apparatus be

provided for rescue purposes.
The installation company should also refer to the NFPA 72, National Fire
Alarm Code, chapter on visual signalling for guidance for installation of
referenced visual alarms. The “public mode” for visual appliance operation
should be used.
The installation company / contractor must ensure that plans are drawn up to indicate
scale and/or be suitably dimensioned. Ensure that the plans contain sufficient detail
to enable the authority having jurisdiction to evaluate the hazard or hazards and to
evaluate the effectiveness of the system.

Page 232 of 344
The details on plan must include the following:
1) Materials involved in the protected hazards

2) Location of the hazards
3) Enclosure or limits and isolation of the hazards
4) Surrounding area that could affect the protected hazards
5) Fire walls and all enclosures, walls, ceilings, and floor voids.
The detail on the system must include the following:
1) Information and calculations on the amount of carbon dioxide

2) Location and flow rate of each nozzle including equivalent orifice area
3) Location, size, and equivalent lengths of pipe, fittings, and hose
4) Location and size of the carbon dioxide storage facility
Details of pipe size reduction method (reducing couplings or bushings) and

orientation of tees must be clearly indicated. Information must be submitted pertaining
to the location and function of the detection devices, operating devices, auxiliary
equipment, and electrical circuitry. Sufficient information must be indicated to properly
identify the apparatus and devices used. Any special features must be adequately
explained.
If the field conditions have changed from approved plans, the change must be
submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for approval.
When such changes from approved plans are made, corrected “as-installed” plans
must be supplied to the owner and the authority having jurisdiction.
As the owner you should maintain an instruction and maintenance manual that
includes a full sequence of the operation, and a full set of system drawings and
calculations.
The completed system must be inspected and tested by qualified personnel to meet
the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Only listed or approved equipment
and devices must be used in the system. To determine that the system has been
properly installed and will function as specified, the following must be performed:
1) A thorough visual inspection of the installed system and hazard area. The
piping, operational equipment and discharge nozzles should be inspected for
proper size and location. The locations of alarms and manual emergency
releases should be confirmed. The configuration of the hazard should be
compared to the original hazard specification. The hazard must be inspected
closely for un - closable openings (which were noted i.e. doors ventilation/ air-
conditioning system openings) and sources of agent loss that could have
been overlooked in the original specification.
2) A check of labelling of devices for proper designations and instructions.

Nameplate data on the storage containers must be compared to
specifications.
3) Non destructive operational tests on all devices necessary for proper

functioning of the system, including detection and actuation devices.

Page 233 of 344
4) A full discharge test must be performed on all systems.
In addition manufacturer’s maintenance procedure should be guided by the outline as

described in NFPA 12 Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems 2000
Edition. (This standard contains minimum requirements for carbon dioxide fire
extinguishing systems. It includes only the necessary essentials to make the standard
workable in the hands of those skilled in this field.)
To prevent accidental or deliberate discharge, a “lock-out” must be provided when

persons not familiar with the systems and their operation are present in a protected
space. Local application systems must be locked out when persons are present in
locations where discharge of the system will endanger them, and they will be unable
to proceed to a safe location within the time-delay period for the system. When
protection is to be maintained during the lock-out period, a person(s) must be
assigned as a “fire watch” with suitable portable or semi - portable fire-fighting
equipment or means to restore protection. The fire watch must have a communication
link to a constantly monitored location. Authorities responsible for continuity of fire
protection must be notified of lock-out and subsequent restoration of the system.
3.2. Manufacturer’s maintenance procedure should be guided by the following

outline:
(a) System
Check overall physical appearance

Disarm system prior to test
(b) Hazard
Size
Configuration
Openings which cannot be closed
Fuels
Other aspects that could impact effectiveness of the extinguishing systems
(c) Supervised circuits
Exercise all functions

Check all electrical or pneumatic supervisory circuits for proper operation
(d) Control panel
Exercise all functions

Check supervision, if applicable, of each circuit (including releasing devices)
as recommended by the manufacturer
e) Power supply
Check routing, circuit breakers, fuses, disconnects
(f) Emergency power

Page 234 of 344
Check battery condition

Check charger operation; check fuse
Check automatic changeover
Check maintenance of generator (if one exists)
(g) Detectors
Test each detector using heat or smoke or manufacturer’s approved test

device (See IM4 and NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code.)
Electric type
Clean and adjust smoke detector and check sensitivity

Check wiring condition
(h) Time delay
Exercise functions
Check time limit
Check that the timer will complete its cycle even though wiring between it and
the detector circuit is interrupted
(i) Alarms
Test for operation (audible and visual)

Check to see that warning signs are properly displayed
(j) Selector (directional) valves
Exercise functions
Reset properly
(k) Release devices
Check for complete closure of dampers

Check doors; check for any doors blocked open
(l) Equipment shutdown
Test shutdown function

Check adequacy (all necessary equipment included)
(m) Manual releases
Mechanical type
Check pull, force, and length of pull required

Operate and adjust all devices
Check tightness of connectors
Check condition of conduit
Check condition and operation of corner pulleys

Page 235 of 344
Electric type
Test manual release
Check that covers are in place
Check pneumatic releases
Check accessibility during fire
Separate main and reserve manual pulls that require only one operation, to
obtain discharge of either main or reserve supply of gas
Clearly mark and identify all manual releases
(n) Piping
Check security; check that piping is adequately supported

Check condition; check for any corrosion
(o) Nozzles
Check orientation and orifice size; make sure it is unchanged from original
design
Check cleanliness
Check security
Check seals where needed
(p) Containers
Check physical condition; check for any sign of corrosion

Check the contents for weight by acceptable methods for each cylinder or low
pressure tank (If the contents are more than 10 percent below the normal
capacity, refilling is required. Proper operation of the liquid level gauge should
be verified.)
Check that cylinders are securely held in position
Check hydrostatic test date
Check cylinder connectors for integrity and condition
Check weights and cables of mechanical release system
Release devices; check for proper arrangement and security
Check explosive release devices; check replacement date and check
condition
(q) Test
Perform recommended discharge tests when there is any question about the
adequacy of the system
Perform recommended full discharge test when cylinder hydrostatic test is
required
(r) Return all parts of system to full service
(s) Give Certificate of Inspection to owner
3.3 Testing and maintenance

Page 236 of 344
As is the case with all fire control installations, gaseous systems require regular
inspection and maintenance. Only personnel who have received thorough training
should perform these tasks as accidental discharge may occur.
3.4 Acceptance test
Prior to commissioning, the system needs to be tested to show that it has been
correctly installed and is functional. Tests should include: pressure testing of system,
a visual examination to ensure system is complete as per specification including
signs, notices and instruction manuals a discharge test, where practical, to confirm
coverage of risk where local application is being used and to check agent
concentrations where total flooding systems are concerned. The future users of the
system should be present during these tests.
3.5 Regular inspections
It is recommended that regular inspections such as those listed in the table below be
carried out.
Table 1 – Inspection Frequency
Intervals
Test Weekly Monthly 6- Annually
monthly
Thorough inspection and test for proper x
operation to ensure system is fully
operational
Visual checks to be carried out between x
annual tests following an acceptable
checklist or schedule
The mass of all high pressure cylinders x
to be taken and date of last hydrostatic
pressure test noted
Readings from low pressure CO2 x
containers. Liquid level gauges to be
noted. Replace / refill if 10% of content
has been noted
A discharge test should be carried out where regular tests show this is necessary.
Cylinders require hydrostatic pressure testing at regular intervals as required by the
Occupational Health & Safety Act Vessels under Pressure Regulation.
An inspection report showing results of all tests and recommendations should be kept on the
premises.
3.5.1 An inspection is a “quick check” to give reasonable assurance that the extinguishing
system is fully charged and operable is done by seeing that the system is in place,
that it has not been activated or tampered with, and that there is no obvious physical
damage or condition to prevent operation. As a minimum, the inspection should
determine the following:
1) High-pressure cylinders are in place and properly secured.
2) (For low-pressure storage unit, that pressure gauge shows normal pressure,
that tank shutoff valve is open, and that pilot pressure supply valve is open.
Liquid level gauge should be observed. If at any time a container shows a loss

Page 237 of 344
of more than 10 percent, it should be refilled, unless the minimum gas

requirements are still provided.
3) Carbon dioxide storage is connected to discharge piping and actuators.
4) All manual actuators are in place and tamper seals are intact.
5) Nozzles are connected, properly aligned, and free from obstructions and
foreign matter.
6) Detectors are in place and free from foreign matter and obstructions.
7) System control panel is connected and showing “normal-ready” condition.



Page 238 of 344
STD IM6 - HIGH PRESSURE MIST (HP)
1. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER OR OCCUPANT
1.1 The responsibility for properly maintaining a water mist fire protection system must be
the obligation of the property owner. By means of periodic inspection, tests, and
maintenance, in accordance with the standard and manufacturers’ requirements this
equipment must be shown to be either in good operating condition and that defects or
impairments exist.
1.2 Inspection, testing, and maintenance activities must be implemented in accordance

with procedures meeting or exceeding those established in this document and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. These tasks must be performed by
personnel who have developed competence through training and experience.
1.3 The owner or occupant must notify the authority having jurisdiction, the fire
department (if required), and the alarm receiving facility before shutting down a
system or its supply. The notification must include the purpose for the shutdown, the
system or component involved, and the estimated time needed. The authority having
jurisdiction, the fire department, and the alarm receiving facility must be notified when
the system, supply, or component is returned to service.
1.4 The owner or occupant must promptly correct or repair deficiencies, damaged parts,
or impairments found while performing the inspection, test, and maintenance
requirements of this standard. Corrections and repairs must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel or a qualified contractor.
1.5 The owner or occupant must give special attention to factors that might alter the
requirements for a continued approved installation. Such factors must include, but
must not be limited to, the following:
1) Occupancy changes
2) Process or material changes
3) Structural revisions such as relocated walls, added horizontal or vertical
obstructions, or ventilation changes
4) Removal of heating systems in spaces with piping subject to freezing
1.6 Where changes in the occupancy, hazard, water supply, storage arrangement,
structural modification, or other condition that affects the installation criteria of the
system are identified, the owner or occupant must promptly take steps to evaluate the
adequacy of the installed system to protect the hazard in question, such as contacting
a qualified contractor, consultant, or engineer.
Where the evaluation reveals a deficiency, the owner must notify the insurance
underwriter, the authority having jurisdiction, and the local fire department.
1.7 Where a water mist system is returned to service following an impairment, it must be
verified that it is working properly.

Page 239 of 344
2. INSPECTION AND TESTING
All components and systems must be inspected and tested to verify that they function
as intended. The frequency of inspections and tests must be in accordance with
Tables 1 and 2 or as specified in the manufacturer’s listing, whichever is more
frequent. Following tests of components or portions of water mist systems that require
valves to be opened or closed, the system must be returned to service, with
verification that all valves are restored to their normal operating position. Plugs or
caps for auxiliary drains or test valves must be replaced.
2.1 Test results must be compared with those of the original acceptance test and with the
previous test results.
2.2 Inspection and testing requirements for each component are provided in Tables 1 and
2.
Table 1 - Inspection Frequencies

Water tank (unsupervised) Check water level Weekly
Air receiver (unsupervised) Check air pressure Weekly
Dedicated air compressor Check air pressure Weekly
(unsupervised
Water tank (supervised) Check water level Monthly
Air receiver (supervised) Check air pressure Monthly
Dedicated air compressor Check air pressure Monthly
(supervised)
Air pressure cylinders Check pressure and indicator Monthly
(unsupervised) disk
System operating components, Inspect Monthly
including control valves
(locked/unsupervised)
Air pressure cylinders (supervised) Check pressure and indicator Quarterly
disk
System operating components, Inspect Quarterly
including control valves
Water flow alarm and supervisory Inspect Quarterly
devices
Initiating devices and detectors Inspect Semi-annually
Batteries, control panel, interface Inspect Semi-annually
equipment
System strainers and filters Inspect Annually
Control equipment, fibre optic cable Inspect Annually
connections
Piping, fittings, hangers, nozzles, Inspect Annually
flexible tubing
Table 2 – Testing Frequencies

Pumps Operation test (no flow) Weekly
Compressor (dedicated) Start Monthly
Control equipment (functions, fuses, Test Quarterly
interfaces, primary power, remote

Page 240 of 344

alarm) (unsupervised)
System main drain Drain test Quarterly
Remote alarm annunciation Test Annually
Pumps Function test (full flow) Annually
Batteries Test Semi-annually
Pressure relief valve Manually operate Semi-annually
Control equipment (functions, fuses, Test Annually
interfaces, primary power, remote
alarm) (supervised)
Water level switch Test Annually
Detectors (other than single use of Test Annually
self-testing)
Release mechanisms (manual and Test Annually
automatic)
Control unit/programmable logic Test Annually
control
Section valve Function test Annually
Water Analysis of contents Annually
Pressure cylinders (normally at Pressurise cylinder Annually
atmospheric pressure) (discharge if possible)
System Flow test Annually
Pressure cylinders Hydrostatic test 5 - 12 years
Automatic nozzles Test (random sample) 20 years
2.3 Specialized equipment required for testing must be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications.
2.4 High pressure cylinders used in water mist systems must not be recharged without a
hydrostatic test (and remarking) if more than 5 years have elapsed from the date of
the last test. Cylinders that have been in continuous service without discharging must
be permitted to be retained in service for a maximum of 12 years, after which they
must be discharged and retested before being returned to service.
2.5 Maintenance
2.5.1 Maintenance must be performed to keep the system equipment operable or to make
repairs. As-built system installation drawings, original acceptance test records, and
device manufacturer’s maintenance bulletins must be retained to assist in the proper
care of the system and its components.
2.5.2 Preventive maintenance includes, but is not limited to, lubricating control valve stems,
adjusting packing glands on valves and pumps, bleeding moisture and condensation
from air compressors and air lines, and cleaning strainers. Scheduled maintenance
must be performed as outlined in Table 3.
Table 3 – Maintenance Frequencies

Water tank Drain and refill Annually
System Flushing Annually
Strainers and filters Clean or replace as required After system
operation

Page 241 of 344
2.5.3 Corrective maintenance includes, but is not limited to, replacing loaded, corroded, or
painted nozzles, replacing missing or loose pipe hangers, cleaning clogged fire
pumps, replacing valve seats and gaskets, and restoring heat in areas subject to
freezing temperatures where water-filled piping is installed.
2.5.4 Emergency maintenance includes, but is not limited to, repairs due to piping failures
caused by freezing or impact damage, repairs to broken water mains, and replacing
frozen or fused nozzles, defective electric power, or alarm and detection system
wiring.
2.5.5 Specific maintenance activities, where applicable to the type of water mist system,
must be performed in accordance with the schedules in Table 3.
2.5.6 Replacement components must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

specifications and the original system design. Spare components must be accessible
and must be stored in a manner to prevent damage or contamination.
2.5.7 After each system operation, a representative sample of operated water mist nozzles
in the activated zone must be inspected.
2.5.8 The representative sample should include 10 percent of the water mist nozzles in the
activated zone. If contamination of filters or strainers is found on inspection, it is
recommended that all nozzles within the activated zone also be inspected.
2.5.9 After each system operation due to fire, the system filters and strainers must be
cleaned or replaced.
2.5.10 Training
All persons who might be expected to inspect, test, maintain, or operate water mist
systems must be trained thoroughly in the functions they are expected to perform.
Refresher training must be provided as recommended by the manufacturer or by the
authority having jurisdiction.

Page 242 of 344
STD IM7 – INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE OF SPRINKLER SYSTEMS & OTHER

WATER BASED SYSTEMS
1. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER OR OCCUPANT
1.1 The owner or occupant must provide ready accessibility to components of water-
based fire protection systems that require inspection, testing, or maintenance.
1.2 The responsibility for properly maintaining a water-based fire protection system must
be that of the owner of the property.
By means of periodic inspections, tests, and maintenance, the equipment

must be shown to be in good operating condition, or any defects or
impairments must be revealed.
Inspection, testing, and maintenance must be implemented in accordance

with procedures meeting or exceeding those established in this document and
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
These tasks must be performed by personnel who have developed

competence through training and experience.
1.3 The owner or occupant must notify the authority having jurisdiction, the fire
department, if required, and the alarm-receiving facility before testing or shutting
down a system or its supply.
The notification must include the purpose for the shutdown, the system or
component involved, and the estimated time of shutdown.
The supervisor having jurisdiction, the fire department, and the alarm-
receiving facility must be notified when the system, supply, or component is
returned to service.
The owner or occupant must promptly correct or repair deficiencies, damaged

parts, or impairments found while performing the inspection, test, and
maintenance requirements of this standard.
Corrections and repairs must be performed by qualified maintenance

personnel or a qualified contractor.
The building owner or occupant must not make changes in the occupancy, the
use or process, or the materials used or stored in the building without
evaluation of the fire protection systems for their capability to protect the new
occupancy, use, or materials.
Where changes in the occupancy, hazard, water supply, storage commodity,

storage arrangement, building modification, or other condition that affects the
installation criteria of the system are identified, the owner or occupant must
promptly take steps, such as contacting a qualified contractor, consultant, or
engineer, to evaluate the adequacy of the installed system in order to protect
the building or hazard in question.

Page 243 of 344
Where the evaluation reveals a deficiency causing a threat to life or

property, the owner must make appropriate corrections. All
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction must be followed.
Where a water-based fire protection system is returned to service following an

impairment, the system must be verified to be working properly.
2. RECORDS
2.1 Records of inspections, tests, and maintenance of the system and its components
must be made available to the supervisor having jurisdiction upon request.
2.2 Records must indicate the procedure performed (e.g. inspection, test, or
maintenance), the organisation that performed the work, the results, and the date.
2.3 Records must be maintained by the owner.
2.4 Original records must be retained for the life of the system.
2.5 Subsequent records must be retained for a period of 1 year after the next inspection,
test, or maintenance required by the standard.
3. SUMMARY OF INSPECTION, TESTING & MAINTENANCE
This Standard provides the minimum requirements for the routine inspection, testing,
and maintenance of sprinkler systems. Table 1 must be used to determine the
minimum required frequencies for inspection, testing, and maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Sprinkler System Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance

Gauges (dry, pre-action, and deluge Inspection Weekly/monthly
systems)
Alarm devices Inspection Quarterly
Gauges (wet pipe systems) Inspection Monthly
Hydraulic nameplate Inspection Quarterly
Buildings Inspection Annually (prior to freezing
weather)
Hanger/seismic bracing Inspection Annually
Pipe and fittings Inspection Annually
Sprinklers Inspection Annually
Spare sprinklers Inspection Annually
Fire department connections Inspection Quarterly
Valves (all types) Inspection
Alarm devices Test Quarterly/semi-annually
Main drain Test Annually
Anti-freeze solution Test Annually
Gauges Test 5 years
Sprinklers - extra-high temperature Test 5 years
Sprinklers - fast response Test At 20 years and every 10
years thereafter

Page 244 of 344

Sprinklers Test At 50 years and every 10
years thereafter
Valves (all types) Maintenance Annually or as needed
Obstruction investigation Maintenance 5 years or as needed
Low point drains (dry pipe system) Maintenance Annually prior to freezing and
as needed
3.1 Inspection
Sprinklers must be inspected from the floor level annually.
Sprinklers must not show signs of leakage, must be free of corrosion, foreign
materials, paint, and physical damage; and must be installed in the proper orientation
(e.g. upright, pendent, or sidewall).
Any sprinkler must be replaced that has signs of leakage; is painted, corroded,
damaged, or loaded; or in the improper orientation.
Glass bulb sprinklers must be replaced if the bulbs have emptied.
Sprinklers installed in concealed spaces such as above suspended ceilings must not
require inspection.
Sprinklers installed in areas that are inaccessible for safety considerations due to
process operations must be inspected during each scheduled shutdown.
Unacceptable obstructions to spray patterns must be corrected.
The supply of spare sprinklers must be inspected annually for the following:
1) The proper number and type of sprinklers
2) A sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler
3.2 Pipe and fittings
Sprinkler pipe and fittings must be inspected annually from the floor level.
Pipe and fittings must be in good condition and free of mechanical damage,
leakage, corrosion, and misalignment.
Sprinkler piping must not be subjected to external loads by materials either

resting on the pipe or hung from the pipe.
Pipe and fittings installed in concealed spaces such as above suspended

ceilings must not require inspection.
Pipe installed in areas that are inaccessible for safety considerations due to
3.3. Hangers and seismic braces

Page 245 of 344
Sprinkler pipe hangers and seismic braces must be inspected annually from
the floor level.
Hangers and seismic braces must not be damaged or loose.
Hangers and seismic braces that are damaged or loose must be replaced or
refastened.
Hangers and seismic braces installed in concealed spaces such as above

suspended ceilings must not require inspection.
Hangers installed in areas that are inaccessible for safety considerations due
to process operations must be inspected during each scheduled shutdown.
3.4 Gauges
Gauges on wet pipe sprinkler systems must be inspected monthly to ensure

that they are in good condition and that normal water supply pressure is being
maintained.
Gauges on dry, pre-action, and deluge systems must be inspected weekly to

ensure that normal air and water pressures are being maintained.
Where air pressure supervision is connected to a constantly attended location,

gauges must be inspected monthly.
3.5 Alarm devices
Alarm devices must be inspected quarterly to verify that they are free of
physical damage.
3.6 Hydraulic nameplate
The hydraulic nameplate for hydraulically designed systems must be

inspected quarterly to verify that it is attached securely to the sprinkler riser
and is legible.
3.7 Hose connections
Hose connections and hose must be inspected in accordance with the

requirements of IM1.
3.8 Testing
3.8.1 Sprinklers
Where sprinklers are subjected to harsh environments, including corrosive

atmospheres and corrosive water supplies, on a 5 -year basis, sprinklers must
either be replaced or representative sprinkler samples must be tested.

Page 246 of 344
Where historical data indicates, longer intervals between testing must be

permitted.
A representative sample of sprinklers for testing must consist of a minimum of

not less than 4 sprinklers or 1 percent of the number of sprinklers per
individual sprinkler sample, whichever is greater.
Where one sprinkler within a representative sample fails to meet the test
requirement, all sprinklers represented by that sample must be replaced.
Manufacturers must be permitted to make modifications to their own sprinklers

in the field with listed devices that restore the original performance as
intended by the listing, where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
3.8.2 Gauges
Gauges must be replaced every 5 years or tested every 5 years by comparison with a
calibrated gauge. Gauges not accurate to within 3 percent of the full scale must be
recalibrated or replaced.
3.8.3 Alarm Devices
Water-flow devices including, but not limited to, mechanical water motor
gongs and pressure switch type must be tested quarterly.
Vane-type water flow devices must be tested semi-annually.
Testing the water-flow alarms on wet pipe systems must be accomplished by

opening the inspector’s test connection.
Where freezing weather conditions or other circumstances prohibit use of the

inspector’s test connection, the bypass connection must be permitted to be
used.
Fire pumps must not be turned off during testing unless all impairment
procedures contained in IM11 are followed.
Testing the water-flow alarm on dry pipe, pre-action, or deluge systems must
be accomplished by using the bypass connection.
3.9 Maintenance
3.9.1 Sprinklers
Replacement sprinklers must have the proper characteristics for the

application intended. These must include the following:
(1) Style
(2) Orifice size and K-factor
(3) Temperature rating
(4) Coating, if any
(5) Deflector type (e.g. upright, pendent, sidewall)
(6) Design requirements

Page 247 of 344
A supply of spare sprinklers (never fewer than six) must be maintained on the
premises so that any sprinklers that have operated or been damaged in any
way can be promptly replaced.
The sprinklers must correspond to the types and temperature ratings of the
sprinklers in the property.
The sprinklers must be kept in a cabinet located where the temperature in

which they are subjected will at no time exceed 38°C (100°F).
The stock of spare sprinklers must include all types and ratings installed and
must be as follows:
(1) For protected facilities having under 300 sprinklers — no fewer than 6
sprinklers
(2) For protected facilities having 300 to 1000 sprinklers — no fewer than
12 sprinklers
(3) For protected facilities having over 1000 sprinklers — no fewer than 24
sprinklers
A special sprinkler wrench must be provided and kept in the cabinet to be

used in the removal and installation of sprinklers. One sprinkler wrench must
be provided for each type of sprinkler installed.
Sprinklers protecting spray coating areas must be protected against overspray

residue.
Sprinklers subject to overspray accumulations must be protected using plastic

bags having a maximum thickness of 0.076 mm (0.003 in.) or must be
protected with small paper bags.
Coverings must be replaced when deposits or residue accumulate.
Sprinklers must not be altered in any respect or have any type of

ornamentation, paint, or coatings applied after shipment from the place of
manufacture.
3.10 Installation and Acceptance Testing
Where maintenance or repair requires the replacement of sprinkler system

components affecting more than 20 sprinklers, those components must be
installed and tested in accordance with NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation
of Sprinkler Systems.
4. SAFETY
Inspection, testing, and maintenance activities must be conducted in a safe manner.
4.1 Confined spaces. Legally required precautions must be taken prior to entering
confined spaces such as tanks, valve pits, or trenches.

Page 248 of 344
4.2 Fall protection. Legally required equipment must be worn or used to prevent injury
from falls to personnel.
4.3 Special hazards. Precautions must be taken to address any special hazards, such
as protection against drowning where working on the top of a filled embankment or a
supported, rubberized fabric tank, or over open water or other liquids.
5. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
5.1 Legally required equipment must be used where working in an environment with
hazardous materials present.
5.2 The owner must advise anyone performing inspection, testing, and maintenance on
any system under the scope of this document, with regard to hazardous materials
stored on the premises.
6. ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Legally required precautions must be taken when testing or maintaining electric

controllers for motor-driven fire pumps.
7. CORRECTIVE ACTION
Manufacturers must be permitted to make modifications to their own listed product in

the field with listed devices that restore the original performance as intended by the
listing, where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

Standard G4 - Fire sprinkler systems - automatic (in cable trenches)

Page 249 of 344
STD IM8 - PRIVATE FIRE SERVICE MAINS
1. General
This Standard provides the minimum requirements for the routine inspection,
testing, and maintenance of private fire service mains and their
appurtenances. Table 1 must be used to determine the minimum required
frequencies for inspection, testing, and maintenance.
Table 1 – Summary of Private Fire Service Main Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance

Hose houses Inspection Quarterly
Hydrants (dry barrel and wall Inspection Annually and after each
operation
Monitor nozzles Inspection Semi-annually
Hydrants (wet barrel) Inspection Annually and after
Mainline strainers Inspection Annually and after
Piping (exposed) Inspection Annually
Piping (underground) Inspection
Monitor nozzles Test Flow annually (range and
operation)
Hydrants Test Flow annually
Piping (exposed & underground) Flow test 5 years
Mainline strainers Maintenance Annually and after each
operation
Hose houses Maintenance Annually
Hydrants Maintenance Annually
Monitor nozzles Maintenance Annually
The above functions must be permitted to be carried out simultaneously.
2. Valves and connections
Valves and fire department connections must be inspected, tested, and

maintained in accordance with NFPA 25.
3. Fire hose
Fire hose must be maintained in accordance with NFPA 1962, Standard for
the Care, Use, and Service Testing of Fire Hose Including Couplings and
Nozzles.
4. Notification to supervisory service
To avoid false alarms where a supervisory service is provided, the alarm

receiving facilities must always be notified by the owner or designated
representative as follows:

Page 250 of 344
1) Before conducting any test or procedure that could result in the

activation of an alarm
2) After such tests or procedures are concluded
5. Exposed piping
Exposed piping must be inspected annually.

Piping must be inspected, and the necessary corrective action must be taken
as shown in Table 2.
Table 2 - Exposed Piping
Condition Corrective Action

Leaks Repair
Physical damage Repair or replace
Corrosion Clean or replace and coat with corrosion
protection
Restraint methods Repair or replace
Piping installed in areas that are inaccessible for safety considerations due to
6. Underground Piping
Generally, underground piping cannot be inspected on a routine basis. However, flow

testing can reveal the condition of underground piping.
7. Mainline strainers
Mainline strainers must be inspected and cleaned after each system flow exceeding
that of a nominal 50 mm orifice and must be removed and inspected annually for
failing, damage, and corroded parts with the necessary corrective action taken as
shown in Table 3.
Table 3 - Mainline Strainers

Plugging or fouling Clean
Corrosion Replace or repair
8. Dry Barrel and Wall Hydrants
Dry barrel and wall hydrants shall be inspected annually and after each operation with
the necessary corrective action taken as shown in Table 4.
Table 4 - Dry Barrel and Wall Hydrants

Inaccessible Make accessible
Barrel contains water or ice (presence of Repair and drain; for high groundwater it could
water or ice could indicate a faulty drain, a be necessary to plug the drain and pump out

Page 251 of 344

leaky hydrant valve, or high ground water the barrel after each use
table)
Improper drainage from barrel Repair drain
Leaks in outlets or at top of hydrant Repair or replace gaskets, packing, or parts as
necessary
Cracks in hydrant barrel Repair or replace
Tightness of outlets Lubricate if necessary; tighten if necessary
Worn nozzle threads Repair or replace
Worn hydrant operating nut Repair or replace
Availability of operating wrench Make sure wrench is available
9. Wet barrel hydrants
Wet barrel hydrants must be inspected annually and after each operation the
necessary corrective action as shown in Table 5 must be taken.
Table 5 - Wet Barrel Hydrants

Leaks in outlets or at top of hydrant Repair or replace gaskets, packing, or parts as
necessary
Cracks in hydrant barrel Repair or replace
Tightness of outlets Lubricate if necessary; tighten if necessary
Worn nozzle threads Repair or replace
Worn hydrant operating nut Repair or replace
Availability of operating wrench Make sure wrench is available
10. Monitor nozzles
Monitor nozzles must be inspected semiannually with the necessary corrective action
taken as shown in Table 6 below.
Table 6 - Monitor Nozzles

Leakage Repair
Corrosion Clean or replace, and lubricate or protect as
necessary
11. Hose houses
Hose houses must be inspected quarterly with the necessary corrective action taken
as shown in Table 7.
Table 7 - Hose Houses


Page 252 of 344
Missing equipment Replace equipment
12. Testing
Underground and Exposed Piping Flow Tests. Underground and exposed piping
must be flow tested to determine the internal condition of the piping at minimum 5-
year intervals.
Flow tests must be made at flows representative of those expected during a

fire for the purpose of comparing the friction loss characteristics of the pipe
with those expected for the particular type of pipe involved, with d ue
consideration given to the age of the pipe and to the results of previous flow
tests.
Any flow test results that indicate deterioration of available water flow and
pressure must be investigated to the complete satisfaction of the authority
having jurisdiction to ensure that the required flow and pressure are available
for fire protection.
Where underground piping supplies individual fire sprinkler, standpipe, water

spray, or foam - water sprinkler systems and there are no means to conduct
full flow tests, tests generating the maximum available flows must be
permitted.
13. Maintenance
General
All equipment must be maintained in proper working condition, consistent with

the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Mainline strainers must be cleaned annually and after each operation.
Records must be maintained.

Protection Systems

Page 253 of 344
STD IM9 - FIRE PUMPS
1. FIRE PUMPS
1.1 General
testing, and maintenance of fire pump assemblies. Table 1 must be used to
determine the minimum required frequencies for inspection, testing, and
maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Fire Pump Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

Pump house, heating Inspection Weekly
ventilating louvres
Fire pump system Inspection Weekly
Pump operation
No-flow condition Test Weekly
Flow condition Test Annually
Hydraulic Maintenance Annually
Mechanical transmission Maintenance Annually
Electrical system Maintenance Varies
Controller, various Maintenance Varies
components
Motor Maintenance Annually
Diesel engine system, various Maintenance Varies
components

Auxiliary Equipment. The pump assembly auxiliary equipment must include

the following:
1) Pump accessories as follows:

a) Pump shaft coupling
b) Automatic air release valve
c) Pressure gauges
d) Circulation relief valve (not used in conjunction with diesel
engine drive with heat exchanger)
2) Pump test device(s)
3) Pump relief valve and piping (where maximum pump discharge

pressure exceeds the rating of the system components or the driver is
of variable speed)
4) Alarm sensors and indicators

Page 254 of 344
5) Right-angle gear sets (for engine-driven vertical shaft turbine pumps)
6) Pressure maintenance (jockey) pump and accessories
Water Supply to Pump Suction. The suction supply for the fire pump
must provide the required flow at a gauge pressure of zero (0) bar [zero
(0) psi] or higher at the pump suction flange to meet the system demand.
Energy Source. The energy sources for the pump driver must supply the
necessary brake horsepower of the driver so that the pump meets system
demand.
Driver. The pump driver must not overload beyond its rating (including any
service factor allowance) when delivering the necessary brake
horsepower.
Controller. Automatic and manual controllers for applying the energy

source to the driver must be capable of providing this operation for the
type of pump used.
Impairments. The procedures outlined in NFPA 25 must be followed

where an impairment to protection occurs.
Notification to Supervisory Service. To avoid false alarms where a

supervisory service is provided, the alarm receiving facility always must be
notified by the owner or designated representative as follows:
1) Before conducting any test or procedure that could result in the

2) After such tests or procedures are concluded
1.2 Inspection
The purpose of inspection must be to verify that the pump assembly appears to be in
operating condition and is free from physical damage.
The pertinent visual observations specified in the following checklists must be

performed weekly:
1) Pump house conditions:
a) Heat is adequate, not less than 4.4°C (40°F) (21 °C (70°F) for
pump room with diesel pumps without engine heaters).
b) Ventilating louvers are free to operate.
2) Pump system conditions:
a) Pump suction and discharge and bypass valves are fully open.
b) Piping is free of leaks.
c) Suction line pressure gauge reading is normal.

Page 255 of 344
d) System line pressure gauge reading is normal.

e) Suction reservoir is full.
f) Wet pit suction screens are unobstructed and in place.
3) Electrical system conditions:
a) Controller pilot light (power on) is illuminated.

b) Transfer switch normal pilot light is illuminated.
c) Isolating switch is closed — standby (emergency) source.
d) Reverse phase alarm pilot light is off or normal phase rotation
pilot light is on.
e) Oil level in vertical motor sight glass is normal.
4) Diesel engine system conditions:
a) Fuel tank is two -thirds full.

b) Controller selector switch is in auto position.
c) Batteries’ voltage readings are normal.
d) Batteries’ charging current readings are normal.
e) Batteries’ pilot lights are on or battery failure pilot lights are off.
f) All alarm pilot lights are off.
g) Engine running time meter is reading.
h) Oil level in right angle gear drive is normal.
i) Crankcase oil level is normal.
j) Cooling water level is normal.
k) Electrolyte level in batteries is normal.
l) Battery terminals are free from corrosion.
m) Water-jacket heater is operating.
5) Steam system conditions: Steam pressure gauge reading is normal.
1.3 Testing
1.3.1 Weekly Test
A weekly test of fire pump assemblies must be conducted without flowing water.
This test must be conducted by starting the pump automatically.
The electric pump must run a minimum of 10 minutes.
The diesel pump must run a minimum of 30 minutes.
A valve installed to open as a safety feature must be permitted to discharge

water.
The automatic weekly test timer must be permitted to be substituted for the
starting procedure.
Qualified operating personnel must be in attendance during the weekly pump

operation.

Page 256 of 344
The pertinent visual observations or adjustments specified in the following

checklists must be conducted while the pump is running:
1) Pump system procedure:
(a) Record the system suction and discharge pressure gauge

readings
(b) Check the pump packing glands for slight discharge
(c) Adjust gland nuts if necessary
(d) Check for unusual noise or vibration
(e) Check packing boxes, bearings, or pump casing for
overheating
(f) Record the pump starting pressure
2) Electrical system procedure:
(a) Observe the time for motor to accelerate to full speed

(b) Record the time controller is on first step (for reduced voltage
or reduced current starting)
(c) Record the time pump runs after starting (for automatic stop
controllers)
3) Diesel engine system procedure:
(a) Observe the time for engine to crank

(b) Observe the time for engine to reach running speed
(c) Observe the engine oil pressure gauge, speed indicator, water,
and oil temperature indicators periodically while engine is
running
(d) Record any abnormalities
(e) Check the heat exchanger for cooling water flow
4) Steam system procedure:
(a) Record the steam pressure gauge reading

(b) Observe the time for turbine to reach running speed
1.3.2 Annual Tests
An annual test of each pump assembly must be conducted under minimum,

rated, and peak flows of the fire pump by controlling the quantity of water
discharged through approved test devices.
If available suction supplies do not allow flowing of 150 percent of the rated
pump capacity, the fire pump must be permitted to operate at maximum
allowable discharge.
This test must be conducted as described below:
Use of the Pump Discharge Via the Hose Streams. Pump suction and
discharge pressures and the flow measurements of each hose stream must
determine the total pump output. Care must be taken to prevent water

Page 257 of 344
damage by verifying there is adequate drainage for the high-pressure water

discharge from hoses.
Use of the Pump Discharge Via the Bypass Flow meter to Drain or
Suction the Reservoir. Pump suction and discharge pressures and the flow
meter measurements must determine the total pump output.
Use of the Pump Discharge Via the Bypass Flow meter to Pump Suction
(Closed-Loop Metering). Pump suction and discharge pressures and the
flow meter measurements must determine the total pump output.
The pertinent visual observations, measurements, and adjustments specified

in the following checklists must be conducted annually while the pump is
running and flowing water under the specified output condition:
1) At no-flow condition (churn):
(a) Check the circulation relief valve for operation to discharge

water
(b) Check the pressure relief valve (if installed) for proper
operation
(c) Continue the test for ½ hour
2) At each flow condition:
(a) Record the electric motor voltage and current (all lines)
(b) Record the pump speed in rpm
(c) Record the simultaneous (approximately) readings of pump
suction and discharge pressures and pump discharge flow
For installations having a pressure relief valve, the operation of the relief valve
must be closely observed during each flow condition to determine if the pump
discharge pressure exceeds the normal operating pressure of the system
components.
The pressure relief valve must also be observed during each flow condition to
determine if the pressure relief valve closes at the proper pressure.
A pressure relief valve that is open during a flow condition will affect test
results.
The pressure relief valve must be closed during flow conditions if necessary to
achieve minimum rated characteristics for the pump and reset to normal
position at the conclusion of the pump test.
For installations having an automatic transfer switch, the following test must
be performed to ensure that the overcurrent protective devices (i.e., fuses or
circuit breakers) do not open:
(1) Simulate a power failure condition while the pump is operating at peak
load

Page 258 of 344
(2) Verify that the transfer switch transfers power to the alternate power
source
(3) Verify that the pump continues to perform at peak load
(4) Remove the power failure condition and verify that after a time delay,
the pump is reconnected to the normal power source
Alarm conditions must be simulated by activating alarm circuits at alarm

sensor locations, and all such local or remote alarm indicating devices (visual
and audible) must be observed for operation.
Safety procedures must be followed while working near electric motor-driven

fire pumps.
After the water-flow portions of the annual test or fire protection system
activations, the suction screens must be inspected and cleared of any debris
or obstructions.
1.3.3 Other Tests
Engine generator sets supplying emergency or standby power to fire pump

assemblies must be tested routinely in accordance with NFPA 110, Standard
for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
Automatic transfer switches must be tested routinely and exercised in

accordance with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems.
Tests of appropriate environmental pump room space conditions (e.g.,

heating, ventilation, illumination) must be made to ensure proper manual or
automatic operation of the associated equipment.
Parallel and angular alignment of the pump and driver must be checked
during the annual test. Any misalignment must be corrected.
1.3.4 Test Results and Evaluation
The interpretation of the test results must be the basis of determination of

performance of the pump assembly.
Qualified individuals must make interpretation of the test results.
Theoretical factors for correction to the rated speed must not be applied
where determining the compliance of the pump per the test.
Increasing the engine speed beyond the rated speed of the pump at rated
condition is not an acceptable method for meeting the rated pump
performance.
The fire pump assembly must be considered acceptable if either of the
following conditions is shown during the test:
(1) The test matches the initial unadjusted field acceptance test curve.
(2) The fire pump matches the performance characteristics as indicated

on the pump nameplate.

Page 259 of 344
Degradation in excess of 5 percent of the pressure of the initial unadjusted

acceptance test curve or nameplate must require an investigation to reveal
the cause of degraded performance.
Current and voltage readings whose product does not exceed the product of
the rated voltage and rated full-load current multiplied by the permitted motor
service factor must be considered acceptable. Voltage readings at the motor
within 5 percent below or 10 percent above the rated (i.e. nameplate) voltage
must be considered acceptable.
1.3.5 Reports
Any abnormality observed during inspection or testing must be reported

promptly to the person responsible for correcting the abnormality.
Test results must be recorded and retained for comparison.
All time delay intervals associated with the pump’s starting, stopping, and
energy source transfer must be recorded.
1.3.6 Maintenance
A preventive maintenance program must be established on all components of

the pump assembly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Records must be maintained on all work performed on the pump, driver,
controller, and auxiliary equipment.
In the absence of manufacturer’s recommendations for preventive
maintenance, Table 2 must be used for alternative requirements.
Table 2 - Summary of Fire Pump Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
Complete as Visual Check Change Clean Test Frequency

Applicable Inspection
A. Pump System
1. Lubricate pump x Annually
bearings
2. Check pump shaft x Annually
end play
3. Check accuracy of x x Annually
pressure gauges
and sensors
4. Check pump x Annually
coupling alignment
5. Wet pit suction x x After each
screens pump
operation
B. Mechanical
Transmission
1. Lubricate coupling x Annually
2. Lubricate right- x Annually
angle gear drive
C. Electrical System
1. Exercise isolating x Monthly
switch and circuit
breaker
2. Trip circuit breaker x Annually
(if mechanism
provided)

Page 260 of 344

3. Operate manual x Semi-
starting means annually
(electrical)
4. Inspect and x x Annually
operate
emergency manual
starting means
(without power)
5. Tighten electrical x Annually
connections as
necessary
6. Lubricate x Annually
mechanical
moving parts
(excluding starters
and relays)
7. Calibrate pressure x Annually
switch settings
8. Grease motor x Annually
bearings
D. Diesel Engine
System
1. Fuel
a) Tank level x x Weekly
b) Tank float switch x Weekly
c) Solenoid valve x Weekly
operation
d) Strainer, filter, or x Quarterly
dirt leg, or
combination
thereof
e) Water and foreign x Annually
material in tank
f) Water in system X x Weekly
h) Flexible hoses and x Weekly
connectors
i) Tank vents and x x Annually
overflow piping
unobstructed
j) Piping x Annually
2. Lubrication System
a) Oil level x x Weekly
b) Oil change x 50 hours or
annually
c) Oil filter(s) x 50 hours or
annually
d) Lube oil heater x Weekly
e) Crankcase x x x Quarterly
breather
3. Cooling System
a) Level x x Weekly
b) Antifreeze x Semi-
protection level annually
c) Antifreeze x Annually
d) Adequate cooling x Weekly

Page 261 of 344

water to heat
exchanger
e) Rod out heat x Annually
exchanger
f) Water pump(s) x Weekly
g) Condition of x x Weekly
flexible hoses and
connection
h) Jacket water x Weekly
heater
i) Inspect duct work, x x x Annually
clean louvres
(combustion air)
j) Water strainer x Quarterly
4. Exhaust System
a) Leakage x x Weekly
b) Drain condensate x Weekly
trap
c) Insulation and fire x Quarterly
hazards
d) Excessive back x Quarterly
pressure
e) Exhaust system x Annually
hangers &
supports
f) Flexible exhaust x Semi-
section annually
5. Battery System
a) Electrolyte level x Weekly
b) Terminals clean x x Quarterly
and tight
c) Remove corrosion, x x Monthly
case exterior clean
and dry
d) Specific gravity or x Monthly
state of charge
e) Charger and x Monthly
change rate
f) Equalise charge x Monthly
6. Electrical System
a) General inspection x Weekly
b) Tighten control x Annually
and power wiring
connections
c) Wire chafing x x Quarterly
where subject to
movement
d) Operation of safe x x Semi-
ties and alarms annually
e) Boxes, panels, & X Semi-
cabinets annually
f) Circuit breakers or x x Monthly
fuses
g) Circuit breakers or x Biennially
fuses

Page 262 of 344
The preventive maintenance program must be initiated immediately after the

pump assembly has passed acceptance tests.

Protection Systems
NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

Page 263 of 344
STD IM10 - WATER STORAGE TANKS
1. General
testing, and maintenance of water storage tanks. Table 1 must be used to
maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Water Storage Tank Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

Condition of water in tank Inspection Monthly/Quarterly*
Water temperature Inspection Daily/weekly*
Heating system Inspection Daily/weekly*
Water - level Inspection Monthly/quarterly
Air pressure Inspection Monthly/quarterly
Tank - exterior Inspection Quarterly
Support structure Inspection Quarterly
Catwalks and ladders Inspection Quarterly
Surrounding area Inspection Quarterly
Hoops and grillage Inspection Annually
Painted/coated surfaces Inspection Annually
Expansion joints Inspection Annually
Interior Inspection 5 years/3 years
Check valves Inspection 5 years
Temperature alarms Test Monthly*
High temperature limit switches Test Monthly*
Water level alarms Test Semi-annually
Level indicators Test 5 years
Pressure gauges Test 5 years
Water level Maintenance
Drain silt Maintenance Semi-annually
Control valves Maintenance Annually
Embankment-supported coated Maintenance
fabric (ESCF)
Check valves Maintenance
*Cold weather/heating season only

Impairments. The procedures outlined in NFPA 25 must be followed where

an impairment to protection occurs.
Notification to Supervisory Service. To avoid false alarms where a

supervisory service is provided, the alarm receiving facility always must be
notified by the owner or designated representative as follows:
(1) Before conducting any test or procedure that could result in the

Page 264 of 344
(2) After such tests or procedures are concluded.

2. Inspection frequency
Tanks equipped with supervised water level alarms that are connected to a
constantly attended location must be inspected quarterly.
Tanks not equipped with supervised water level alarms connected to a

constantly attended location must be inspected monthly.
3. Water temperature
The temperature of water tanks must not be less than 4°C (40°F).
The temperature of water in tanks with low temperature alarms connected to a

constantly attended location must be inspected and recorded weekly during
the heating season.
The temperature of water in tanks without low temperature alarms connected

to a constantly attended location must be inspected and recorded daily during
the heating season.
4. Exterior inspection
The exterior of the tank, supporting structure, vents, foundation, and catwalks
or ladders, where provided, must be inspected quarterly for signs of obvious
damage or weakening.
The area surrounding the tank and supporting structure, where provided, must
be inspected quarterly to ensure that the following conditions are met:
(1) The area is free of combustible storage, trash, debris, brush, or

material that could present a fire exposure hazard.
(2) The area is free of the accumulation of material on or near parts that
could result in accelerated corrosion or rot.
(3) The tank and support are free of ice build-up.
(4) The exterior sides and top of embankments supporting coated fabric
tanks are free of erosion.
Expansion joints, where provided, must be inspected annually for leaks and
cracks.
The hoops and grillage of wooden tanks must be inspected annually.
Exterior painted, coated, or insulated surfaces of the tank and supporting

structure, where provided, must be inspected annually for signs of
degradation.
5. Interior inspection
The interior of steel tanks without corrosion protection must be inspected

every 3 years.

Page 265 of 344
The interior of all other types of tanks must be inspected every 5 years.
Where interior inspection is made by means of underwater evaluation, silt

must first be removed from the tank floor.
The tank interior must be inspected for signs of pitting, corrosion, spalling, rot,
other forms of deterioration, waste materials and debris, aquatic growth, and
local or general failure of interior coating.
Steel tanks exhibiting signs of interior pitting, corrosion, or failure of coating

must be tested.
The anti-vortex plate must be inspected for deterioration or blockage.
6. Testing
Level indicators must be tested every 5 years for accuracy and freedom of
movement.
High and low water level alarms must be tested semi-annually.
Pressure gauges must be tested every 5 years with a calibrated gauge in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Gauges not accurate to
within 3 percent of the scale of the gauge being tested must be recalibrated or
replaced.
Where a drained interior inspection of a steel tank is conducted the following

tests must be conducted:
(1) Evaluation of tank coatings must be made in accordance with the

adhesion test of ASTM D 3359, Standard Test Methods for Measuring
Adhesion by Tape Test, generally referred to as the “cross-hatch test.”
(2) Dry film thickness measurements must be taken at random locations to
determine the overall coating thickness.
(3) Non-destructive ultrasonic readings must be taken to evaluate the wall
thickness where there is evidence of pitting or corrosion.
(4) Interior surfaces must be spot wet-sponge tested to detect pinholes,
cracks, or other compromises in the coating. Special attention must be
given to sharp edges such as ladder rungs, nuts, and bolts.
(5) Tank bottoms must be tested for metal loss and/or rust on the
underside by use of ultrasonic testing where there is evidence of pitting
or corrosion. Removal, visual inspection, and replacement of random
floor coupons must be an acceptable alternative to ultrasonic testing.
(6) Tanks with flat bottoms must be vacuum-box tested at bottom seams
in accordance with test procedures found in NFPA 22, Standard for
Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection.
7. Maintenance
Voids discovered beneath the floors of tanks must be filled by pumping in

grout or accessing the sand and replenishing.
The tank must be maintained full or at the designed water level.

Page 266 of 344
The hatch covers in the roofs and the door at the top of the frost-proof casing
must always be kept securely fastened with substantial catches as a
protection against freezing and windstorm damage.
No waste materials, such as boards, paint cans, trim, or loose material, must
be left in the tank or on the surface of the tank.
The exposed surfaces of embankment-supported coated fabric (ESCF) tanks
must be cleaned and painted every 2 years or in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Silt must be removed during interior inspections or more frequently as needed
to avoid accumulation to the level of the tank outlet.
The maintenance of ESCF tanks must be completed in accordance with this
section and the tank manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Records
Records of all inspections, tests and maintenance must be maintained.

Page 267 of 344
STD IM11 - WATER SPRAY FIXED SYSTEMS
1. General
testing, and maintenance of water spray protection from fixed nozzle systems
only. Table 1 must be used to determine the minimum required frequencies
for inspection, testing, and maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Water Spray Fixed System Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance

Backflow preventer Inspection
Check valves Inspection
Control valves Inspection Weekly (sealed)
Control valves Inspection Monthly (locked, supervised)
Deluge valve Inspection
Detection systems Inspection
Detector check valves Inspection
Drainage Inspection Quarterly
Electric motor Inspection
Engine drive Inspection
Fire pump Inspection
Fittings Inspection Quarterly
Fittings (rubber-gasketed) Inspection Quarterly
Gravity tanks Inspection
Hangers Inspection Quarterly
Heat (deluge valve house) Inspection Daily/weekly
Nozzles Inspection Monthly
Pipe Inspection Quarterly
Pressure tank Inspection
Steam driver Inspection
Strainers Inspection Manufacturer’s instruction
Suction tanks Inspection
Supports Inspection Quarterly
Water supply piping Inspection
UHSWSS - detectors Inspection Monthly
UHSWSS - controllers Inspection Each shift
UHSWSS - valves Inspection Each shift
Backflow preventer Operational test
Check valves Operational test
Control valves Operational test Quarterly
Deluge valve Operational test
Detection systems Operational test
Detection check valve Operational test
Electric motor Operational test
Engine drive Operational test
Fire pump Operational test
Flushing Operational test Annually
Gravity tanks Operational test
Main drain test Operational test Quarterly

Page 268 of 344

Manual release Operational test Annually
Nozzles Operational test Annually
Pressure tank Operational test
Stearn driver Operational test
Strainers Operational test Annually
Suction tanks Operational test
Water-flow alarm Operational test Quarterly
Water spray system test Operational test Annually
Water supply flow test Operational test
UHSWSS Operational test Annually
Backflow preventer Maintenance
Check valves Maintenance
Deluge valve Maintenance
Detection systems Maintenance
Detector check valve Maintenance
Electric motor Maintenance
Engine drive Maintenance
Fire pump Maintenance
Gravity tanks Maintenance
Pressure tank Maintenance
Stearn driver Maintenance
Strainers Maintenance Annually
Strainers (baskets/screen) Maintenance 5 years
Sunction tanks Maintenance
Water spray system Maintenance Annually
This Standard does not cover water spray protection from portable nozzles,
sprinkler systems, monitor nozzles, or other means of application.
NFPA 15, Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, must
be consulted to determine the requirements for design and installation,
including acceptance testing.

Impairments. The procedures outlined in NFPA 25 and this section must be

followed where an impairment to protection occurs.
When a water spray fixed system or any portion thereof is out of service for
any reason, notice must be given to facility management, the local fire
department, the on-site fire brigade, and other authorities having jurisdiction,
as applicable.
A sign must be posted at each fire department connection or system control

valve indicating which portion of the system is out of service

Page 269 of 344
2. Inspection and maintenance procedures
The components described in this section must be inspected and maintained at the
frequency specified in Table 1 and in accordance with this standard and the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Items in areas that are inaccessible for safety considerations due to factors such as
continuous process operations and energized electrical equipment must be inspected
during each scheduled shutdown but not more than every 18 months.
Other maintenance intervals must be permitted depending on the results of the visual
inspection and operating tests.
Deluge valve enclosures must be inspected in accordance with the provisions of

NFPA 25.
Nozzle discharge patterns and direction must be checked during the annual test.
Nozzle strainers must be removed, inspected, and cleaned during the flushing
procedure for the mainline strainer.
Mainline strainers must be removed and inspected every 5 years for damaged and
corroded parts.
Deluge valves must be inspected, tested, and maintained in accordance with NFPA
25.
Automatic detection equipment must be inspected, tested, and maintained in

accordance with NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, to ensure that the detectors are
in place, securely fastened, and protected from corrosion, weather, and mechanical
damage and that the communication wiring, control panels, or pneumatic tubing
system is functional.
System piping, fittings, hangers, and supports must be inspected and maintained to
ensure continuity of water delivery to the spray nozzles at full water flow and design
pressure.
System piping and fittings must be inspected for the following:
1) Mechanical damage (e.g. broken piping or cracked fittings)

2) External conditions (e.g. missing or damaged paint or coatings, rust, and
corrosion)
3) Misalignment or trapped sections
4) Low point drains (automatic or manual)
5) Location of rubber-gasketed fittings
Hangers and supports must be inspected for the following and repaired as necessary:
1) Condition (e.g., missing or damaged paint or coating, rust, and corrosion)

2) Secure attachment to structural supports and piping
3) Damaged or missing hangers

Page 270 of 344
Water spray nozzles must be inspected and maintained to ensure that they
are in place, continue to be aimed or pointed in the direction intended in the
system design, and are free from external loading and corrosion.
Where caps or plugs are required, the inspection must confirm they are in
place and free to operate as intended.
Misaligned water spray nozzles must be adjusted (aimed) by visual means,

and the discharge patterns must be checked at the next scheduled flow test.
Individual water spray nozzle strainers must be removed, cleaned, and

inspected after each operation or flow test.
All strainers must be inspected and cleaned in accordance with the

Damaged or corroded parts must be replaced or repaired.
Drainage. The area beneath and surrounding a water spray fixed system
must be inspected visually on a quarterly basis to ensure that drainage
facilities, such as trap sumps and drainage trenches, are not blocked and
retention embankments or dikes are in good repair.
Fire Pumps. NFPA 25 must be followed for inspection and maintenance

requirements.
Water Tanks (Gravity, Pressure, or Suction Tanks, or Reservoirs). Standard

IM10 must be followed for inspection and maintenance requirements.
3. Operational tests
Frequency of system tests must be in accordance with Table 1.
Water spray fixed systems must be serviced in accordance with this standard
and with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Operational Test Performance. Operational tests must be conducted to

ensure that the water spray fixed systems respond as designed, both
automatically and manually.
Under test conditions, the heat detection systems, where exposed to a heat
test source, must operate within 40 seconds.
Under test conditions, the flammable gas detection system, where exposed to
a standard test gas concentration, must operate within 20 seconds.
These response times must be recorded.
The water discharge patterns from all of the spray nozzles must be observed
to ensure that patterns are not impeded by plugged nozzles and to ensure
that nozzles are correctly positioned and that obstructions do not prevent
discharge patterns from wetting surfaces to be protected.

Page 271 of 344
Where obstructions occur, the piping and nozzles must be cleaned and the
system retested.
Pressure readings must be recorded at the hydraulically most remote nozzle

to ensure the water flow has not been impeded by partially closed valves or by
plugged strainers or piping.
A second pressure reading must be recorded at the deluge valve to ensure

the water supply is adequate.
Readings must be compared to the hydraulic design pressures to ensure the

original system design requirements are met and the water supply is adequate
to meet the design requirements.
Where the hydraulically most remote nozzle is inaccessible, nozzles must be

permitted to be checked visually without taking a pressure reading on the
most remote nozzle.
Where the reading taken at the riser indicates that the water supply has
deteriorated, a gauge must be placed on the hydraulically most remote nozzle
and the results compared with the required design pressure.
The maximum number of systems expected to operate in case of fire must be

tested simultaneously to check the adequacy of the water supply.
Manual actuation devices must be operated annually.
Return to Service. After the full flow test, the water spray system must be
maintained and returned to service in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Main drain tests must be conducted at the main riser to determine whether
there has been any change in the condition of the water supply piping and
controlling valves.
Static and residual water pressures must be recorded respectively before,

during, and after the operation of the fully opened drain valve.
Readings must be compared with those made at the time of the original
acceptance tests or with those made at the time of the last test to determine
whether there has been any deterioration of the water supply.
To prevent freezing and corrosion, all low point drains in aboveground piping
must be opened, the pipe drained, and the valves closed and plugs replaced.
Where weep holes are provided in lieu of low point drains, they must be
inspected to ensure they are clear and unobstructed.
4. Ultra high speed water spray system operational tests
A full operational test, including measurements of response time, must be

conducted at intervals not exceeding 1 year.

Page 272 of 344
Systems out of service must be tested before being placed back in service.
All detectors must be tested and inspected monthly for physical damage and
accumulation of deposits on the lenses of optical detectors.
Controllers must be inspected for faults at the start of each working shift.
Valves on the water supply line must be inspected at the start of each working
shift to verify they are open.
Valves secured in the open position with a locking device or monitored by a

signalling device that will sound a trouble signal at the deluge system control
panel or other central location must not require inspection.
The response time must be verified during the operational test.
The response time must be in accordance with the requirements of the

system but not more than 100 milliseconds.
Recordkeeping and reporting procedures will be followed.
Standard IM10 – Water storage tanks

NFPA 15 - Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
Protection Systems

Page 273 of 344
STD IM12 - FOAM WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1. General
testing, and maintenance of foam-water systems. Table 1 must be used to
maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Foam-Water Sprinkler System Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance
System/Component Activity Frequency

Discharge device location Inspection Annually
(sprinkler)
Discharge device location Inspection Monthly
(spray nozzle)
Discharge device position Inspection Annually
(sprinkler)
Discharge device position Inspection Monthly
(spray nozzle
Foam concentrate strainer(s) Inspection Quarterly
Drainage in system area Inspection Quarterly
Proportioning system(s) - all Inspection Monthly
Pipe corrosion Inspection Quarterly
Pipe damage Inspection Quarterly
Fittings corrosion Inspection Quarterly
Fittings damage Inspection Quarterly
Hangers/supports Inspection Quarterly
Water supply tank(s) Inspection
Fire pump(s) Inspection
Water supply piping Inspection
Control valve(s) Inspection Weekly/monthly
Deluge/preaction valve(s) Inspection
Detection system Inspection IM4
Discharge device
Discharge device position Test Annually
Discharge device obstruction Test Annually
Foam concentrate strainer(s) Test Annually
Proportioning system(s) - all Test Annually
Complete foam-water Test Annually
system(s)
Foam-water solution Test Annually
Manual actuation device(s) Test Annually
Backflow preventer(s) Test Annually
Fire pump(s) Test NFPA 25
Water supply piping Test Annually
Control valve(s) Test NFPA 25
Strainer(s) - mainline Test NFPA 25
Deluge/preaction valve(s) Test NFPA 25
Detection system Test IM4
Backflow preventer(s) Test NFPA 25
Water supply tank(s) Test NFPA 25

Page 274 of 344

Water supply flow test Test NFPA 25
Foam concentrate pump Maintenance Monthly
operation
Foam concentrate strainer(s) Maintenance Quarterly
Foam concentrate samples Maintenance Annually
Proportioning system(s)
standard pressure type
Ball drip (automatic type) drain Maintenance 5 years
valves
Foam concentrate tank: drain Maintenance 10 years
and flush
Corrosion and hydrostatic test Maintenance 10 years
Bladder tank type
Sight glass Maintenance 10 years
Foam concentrate tank: Maintenance 10 years
hydrostatic test
Line type
Foam concentrate tank: Maintenance 10 years
corrosion and pickup pipes
Foam concentrate tank: drain Maintenance 10 years
and flush
Standard balanced pressure
type
Foam concentrate pump(s) Maintenance 5 years
Balancing valve diaphragm Maintenance 5 years
Foam concentrate tank Maintenance 10 years
In-line balanced pressure type
Foam concentrate pump(s) Maintenance 5 years
Balancing valve diaphragm Maintenance 5 years
Foam concentrate tank Maintenance 10 years
Pressure vacuum vents Maintenance 5 years
Water supply tank(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Fire pump(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Water supply Maintenance Annually
Backflow preventer(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Detector check valve(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Check valve(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Control valve(s) Maintenance NFPA 25
Deluge/preaction valves Maintenance NFPA 25
Strainer(s) - mainline Maintenance NFPA 25
Detection system Maintenance IM4
Fire pumps, water storage tanks, and valves common to other types of water-
based fire protection systems must be inspected, tested, and maintained as
specified in Table 1.
2. Foam water systems
This section must apply to foam-water systems as specified in NFPA 16,

Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam - Water Spray
Systems.
This section must not include systems detailed in NFPA 11, Standard for Low-
Expansion Foam.

Page 275 of 344
3. Foam water systems (expansion foam)
If during routine inspection and testing it is determined that the foam-water

system has been altered or changed (e.g., equipment replaced, relocated, or
foam concentrate replaced), it must be determined whether the design intent
has been altered and whether the system operates properly.
The inspection must verify that all components, including foam concentrate
discharge devices and proportioning equipment, are installed in accordance
with their listing.
4. Proportioning system
The proportioning system must be permitted to be any of the following types:
(1) Standard pressure proportioner

(2) Bladder tank proportioner
(3) Line proportioner (venturi pickup)
(4) Standard balanced pressure proportioner
(5) In-line balanced pressure proportioner
(6) Orifice plate, either direct or indirect
(7) Other approved proportioning method
5. Notification to Supervisory Service.
To avoid false alarms where a supervisory service is provided, the alarm receiving
facility must be notified by the owner or designated representative as follows:
(1) Before conducting any test or procedure that could result in the
(2) After such tests or procedures are concluded
6. Inspection
Systems must be inspected in accordance with the frequency specified in

Table 1.
Deluge Valves. Deluge valves must be inspected in accordance with the

provisions of NFPA 25.
Automatic Detection Equipment. Automatic detection equipment must be

inspected, tested, and maintained in accordance with IM4, to ensure that the
detectors are in place, securely fastened, and protected from corrosion,
weather, and mechanical damage and that the communication wiring, control
panels, or pneumatic tubing system is functional.
System Piping and Fittings. System piping and fittings must be inspected for
the following:
(1) Mechanical damage (e.g., broken piping or cracked fittings)

Page 276 of 344
(2) External conditions (e.g., missing or damaged paint or coatings, rust,

and corrosion)
(3) Misalignment or trapped sections
(4) Low point drains (automatic or manual)
(5) Location and condition of rubber-gasketed fittings
Hangers and Supports. Hangers and supports must be inspected for the
following and repaired as necessary:
(1) Condition (e.g. missing or damaged paint or coating, rust, and

corrosion)
(2) Secure attachment to structural supports and piping
(3) Damaged or missing hangers
7. Foam water discharge devices
Foam-water discharge devices must be inspected visually and maintained to

ensure that they are in place, continue to be aimed or pointed in the direction
intended in the system design, and are free from external loading and
corrosion.
Where caps or plugs are required, the inspection must confirm they are in
place and free to operate as intended.
Misaligned discharge devices must be adjusted (aimed) by visual means, and

the discharge patterns must be checked at the next scheduled flow test.
Discharge devices are listed or approved for particular foam concentrates.

Inspection must verify that unlisted combinations of discharge devices and
foam concentrate have not been substituted.
8. Water supply
The dependability of the water supply must be ensured by regular inspection

and maintenance, whether furnished by a municipal source, on-site storage
tanks, a fire pump, or private underground piping systems.
Water supply piping must be maintained free of internal obstructions.
9. Strainers
Mainline and individual discharge device strainers (basket or screen) must be

inspected in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 25.
Foam concentrate strainers must be inspected visually to ensure the blow-

down valve is closed and plugged.
Baskets or screens must be removed and inspected after each operation or

flow test.
10. Drainage

Page 277 of 344
The area beneath and surrounding a foam-water spray system must be

inspected to ensure that drainage facilities, such as trap sumps and drainage
trenches, are not blocked and retention embankments or dikes are in good
repair.
11. Proportioning systems
The components of the various proportioning systems described must be

inspected in accordance with the frequency specified in Table 1.1.
Valves specified to be checked must be permitted to be open or closed,

depending on specific functions within each foam-water system.
The position (open or closed) of valves must be verified in accordance with

specified operating conditions.
Inspection of the concentrate tank must include verification that the quantity of
foam concentrate satisfies the requirements of the original design.
Additional inspection requirements must be performed as detailed for the

proportioning systems.
11.1 Standard Pressure Proportioner
This is a pressure vessel. The pressure must be removed before the

inspection to prevent injury. The inspection must verify the following:
(1) Ball drip valves (automatic drains) are free and opened.
(2) External corrosion on foam concentrate storage tanks is not present.
11.2 Bladder Tank Proportioner
This is a pressure vessel. The pressure must be removed before the

inspection to prevent injury. The inspection must include the following:
(1) Water control valves to foam concentrate tank

(2) A check for external corrosion on foam concentrate storage tanks
(3) A check for the presence of foam in the water surrounding the bladder
(annual)
11.3 Line Proportioner
The inspection must include the following:
(1) Strainers
(2) Verification that pressure vacuum vent is operating freely
(3) A check for external corrosion on foam concentrate storage tanks
11.4 Standard Balanced Pressure Proportioner

Page 278 of 344
(1) Strainers
(3) Verification that gauges are in good operating condition
(4) Verification that sensing line valves are open
(5) Verification that power is available to foam liquid pump
11.5 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioner
(1) Strainers
(3) Verification that gauges are in good working condition
(4) Verification that sensing line valves at pump unit and individual
proportioner stations are open
11.6 Orifice Plate Proportioner
(1) Strainers
(3) Verification that gauges are in good working condition
12. Foam Concentrate Samples
Samples must be submitted in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommended sampling procedures.
13. Operational tests
Frequency of system tests must be in accordance with Table 1.1.
Owner’s Representative. The owner’s representative, the supervisor having

jurisdiction, and the fire department or fire brigade must be notified that testing
is to be conducted so they have the opportunity to observe the testing of the
foam-water systems.
Test Preparation. Precautions must be taken to prevent damage to property

during the test.
13.1 Operational Test Performance
Operational tests must be conducted to ensure that the foam-water system(s)

responds as designed, both automatically and manually.
The test procedures must simulate anticipated emergency events so the

response of the foam-water system(s) can be evaluated.

Page 279 of 344
Where discharge from the system discharge devices would create a

hazardous condition or conflict with local requirements, an approved alternate
method to achieve full flow conditions must be permitted.
Response Time. Under test conditions, the automatic fire detection systems,
when exposed to a test source, must operate within the requirements of NFPA
72, National Fire Alarm Code, for the type of detector provided and the
response time must be recorded.
Discharge Time. The time lapse between operation of detection systems and
water delivery time to the protected area must be recorded for open discharge
devices.
13.2 Discharge Patterns
The discharge patterns from all of the open spray devices must be observed
to ensure that patterns are not impeded by plugged discharge devices and to
ensure that discharge devices are correctly positioned and that obstructions
do not prevent discharge patterns from covering surfaces to be protected.
Where obstructions occur, the piping and discharge devices must be cleaned
and the system retested.
Discharge devices must be permitted to be of different orifice sizes and types.
13.3 Pressure Readings
Pressure readings must be recorded at the highest, most remote discharge

device.
A second pressure reading must be recorded at the main control valve.
Readings must be compared to the hydraulic design pressures to ensure the

original system design requirements are met.
13.4 Multiple Systems
The maximum number of systems expected to operate in case of fire must be

tested simultaneously to check the adequacy of the water supply and
concentrate pump.
13.5 Manual Actuation Devices.
Manual actuation devices must be tested annually.
13.6 Concentration Testing
During the full flow foam test, a foam sample must be taken.
This sample must be checked by refractometric or other methods to verify

concentration of the solution.

Page 280 of 344
Concentration must be within 10 percent of the acceptance test results but in

no case more than 10 percent below minimum design standards.
Return to Service. After the full flow test, the foam-water system must be
returned to service and the foam concentrate tank must be replenished to
design level.
14. Maintenance
Maintenance of foam-water systems must be in accordance with the

requirements of those Standards covering the specific component parts.
Maintenance of specific foam components must be as discussed in previous

pages.
15. Proportioners
15.1 Standard Pressure Proportioner
a) The ball drip (automatic type) drain valves must be disassembled, cleaned,
and reassembled.
b) The foam liquid storage tank must be drained of foam liquid and flushed.
(Foam liquid must be permitted to be salvaged and reused.)
c) The foam liquid tank must be inspected for internal and external corrosion and
hydrostatically tested to the specified working pressure.
15.2 Bladder Tank Proportioner
a) Sight glass, where provided, must be removed and cleaned.

b) The foam concentrate tank must be hydrostatically tested to the specified
working pressure.
15.3 Line Proportioner
a) The foam concentrate tank must be inspected for internal corrosion. Pickup
pipes inside the tank must be inspected for corrosion, separation, or plugging.
b) The foam concentrate tank must be drained and flushed. (Foam concentrate
must be permitted to be salvaged and reused.)
15.4 Standard Balanced Pressure Proportioner & In line Pressure Proportioner
a) The foam concentrate pump must be operated. Foam concentrate must be

circulated back to the tank.
b) Foam pumps, drive train, and drivers must be serviced in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and frequency, but not at intervals of more than 5
years.
c) The diaphragm balancing valve must be flushed through the diaphragm
section with water or foam concentrate until fluid appears clear or new.
d) The foam concentrate tank must be inspected internally for corrosion and
sediment. Excessive sediment must require draining and flushing of the tank.

Page 281 of 344
15.5 Pressure Vacuum Vents
The procedures must be performed on pressure vacuum vents every 5 years.
a) The vent must be removed from the expansion dome. While the vent is
removed, it must be ensured that the opening is not blocked and that dirt or
other foreign objects do not enter the tank.
b) The vest bonnet must be removed. The vacuum valve and pressure valve
must be lifted out.
c) The vent body must be flushed internally and the vacuum valve and the
pressure valve must be washed thoroughly. It must be ensured that the
screen is not clogged, and the use of any hard, pointed objects to clear the
screen must be avoided.
d) If the liquid has become excessively gummy or solidified, the vent body and
parts must be soaked in hot soapy water.
e) The vent body must be turned upside down and drained thoroughly. Parts
must be dried by placing them in a warm and dry area or by using an air hose.
f) Parts must be sprayed with a light Teflon® coating, and the vent must be
reassembled. The use of any type of oil for lubrication purposes must be
avoided, as oil is harmful to the foam liquid.
g) The vent bonnet must be replaced, and the vent must be turned upside down
slowly a few times to ensure proper freedom of the movable parts.
h) The vent must be attached to the liquid storage tank expansion dome.

NFPA 16 - Standard for the Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam – Water Spray
Systems
Protection Systems

Page 282 of 344
STD IM13 - VALVES, VALVE COMPONENTS AND TRIM
1. General
testing, and maintenance of valves, valve components, and trim. Table 1 must
be used to determine the minimum required frequencies for inspection,
testing, and maintenance.
Table 1 - Summary of Valves, Valve Components, Trim Inspection, &

Maintenance

Control valves
Sealed Inspection Weekly
Locked Inspection Monthly
Tamper switches Inspection Monthly
Alarm valves
Exterior Inspection Monthly
Interior Inspection 5 years
Strainers, filters, orifices Inspection 5 years
Check valves
Interior Inspection 5 years
Preaction/Deluge valves
Enclosure (during cold Inspection Daily/weekly
weather)
Interior Inspection Annually/5 years
Dry Pipe Valves/Quick-
Opening Devices
Enclosure (during cold Inspection Daily/weekly
weather)
Interior Inspection Annually
Pressure Reducing and
Relief Valves
Sprinkler systems Inspection Quarterly
Hose connections Inspection Quarterly
Hose racks Inspection Quarterly
Fire pumps
Casing relief valves Inspection Weekly
Pressure relief valves Inspection Weekly
Backflow Prevention
Assemblies
Reduced pressure Inspection Weekly/monthly
Reduced pressure detectors Inspection Weekly/monthly
Fire Department Connections Inspection Quarterly
Main Drains Test Annually/quarterly
Water-flow Alarms Test Quarterly
Control valves
Position Test Annually

Page 283 of 344

Operation Test Annually
Supervisory Test Semi-annually
Preaction/Deluge Valves
Priming water Test Quarterly
Low air pressure alarms Test Quarterly
Full flow Test Annually
Dry Pipe Valves/Quick-
Opening Devices
Priming water Test Quarterly
Low air pressure alarm Test Quarterly
Quick-opening devices Test Quarterly
Trip test Test Annually
Full flow trip test Test 3 years
Pressure Reducing and
Relief Valves
Sprinkler systems Test 5 years
Circulation relief Test Annually
Pressure relief valves Test Annually
Hose connections Test 5 years
Hose racks Test 5 years
Backflow Prevention Test Annually
Assemblies
Preaction/Deluge Valves Maintenance Annually
Dry Pipe Valves/Quick- Maintenance Annually
Opening Devices
1.2 PROVISIONS
The owner must have manufacturer’s literature available to provide specific

instructions for inspecting, testing, and maintaining the valves and associated
equipment.
All pertinent personnel, departments, authorities having jurisdiction, or

agencies must be notified that testing or maintenance of the valve and
associated alarms is to be conducted.
All system valves must be protected from physical damage and must be
accessible.
Before opening a test or drain valve, it must be verified that adequate

provisions have been made for drainage.
The general appearance and condition of all valves must be observed and
noted, and it must be verified that all valves are in the appropriate open or
closed position.
Main Drain Test. A main drain test must be conducted annually at each
water-based fire protection system riser to determine whether there has been
a change in the condition of the water supply piping and control valves.
Systems where the sole water supply is through a backflow preventer and / or
pressure reducing valves, the main drain test of at least one system
downstream of the device must be conducted on a quarterly basis.

Page 284 of 344
Water-Flow Alarm. All water-flow alarms must be tested quarterly in

Gauges must be inspected monthly to verify that they are in good condition
and that normal pressure is being maintained.
Where other sections of this standard have different frequency requirements

for specific gauges, those requirements must be used.
Gauges must be replaced every 5 years or tested every 5 years by

comparison with a calibrated gauge.
Gauges not accurate to within 3 percent of the full scale must be recalibrated
or replaced.
Records must be maintained.
2. Control valves in water-based fire protection systems
Each control valve must be identified and have a sign indicating the system or
portion of the system it controls.
When a normally open valve is closed, the procedures established in NFPA

25 must be followed.
When the valve is returned to service, a drain test (either main or sectional
drain, as appropriate) must be conducted to determine that the valve is open.
Each normally open valve must be secured by means of a seal or a lock or

must be electrically supervised in accordance with the applicable NFPA
standards.
Normally closed valves must be secured by means of a seal or must be

electrically supervised in accordance with the applicable NFPA standard.
Sealing or electrical supervision must not be required for hose valves.
2.1 Inspection
All valves must be inspected weekly.
Valves secured with locks or supervised in accordance with applicable NFPA

standards must be permitted to be inspected monthly.
After any alterations or repairs, an inspection must be made by the owner to

ensure that the system is in service and all valves are in the normal position
and properly sealed, locked, or electrically supervised.
The valve inspection must verify that the valves are in the following condition:
(1) In the normal open or closed position

Page 285 of 344
(2) Properly sealed, locked, or supervised

(3) Accessible
(4) Provided with appropriate wrenches
(5) Free from external leaks
(6) Provided with appropriate identification
2.2 Testing
Each control valve must be operated annually through its full range and
returned to its normal position.
Post indicator valves must be opened until spring or torsion is felt in the rod,
indicating that the rod has not become detached from the valve.
This test must be conducted every time the valve is closed.
Post indicator and outside screw and yoke valves must be backed a one-
quarter turn from the fully open position to prevent jamming.
A main drain test must be conducted annually at each system riser and any
time the valve is closed at each system riser or feed main after the control
valve has been closed to determine whether there has been a change in the
condition of the water supply piping and control valves.
2.3 Supervisory Switches
Valve supervisory switches must be tested semiannually.
A distinctive signal must indicate movement from the valve’s normal position
during either the first two revolutions of a hand wheel or when the stem of the
valve has moved one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
The signal must not be restored at any valve position except the normal
position.
2.4 Maintenance
The operating stems of outside screw and yoke valves must be lubricated
annually.
The valve then must be completely closed and reopened to test its operation
and distribute the lubricant.
3. System valves
3.1 Inspection of Alarm Valves
Alarm valves must be externally inspected monthly and must verify the
following:
(1) The gauges indicate normal supply water pressure is being

maintained.
(2) The valve is free of physical damage.

Page 286 of 344
(3) All valves are in the appropriate open or closed position.

(4) The retarding chamber or alarm drains are not leaking.
Alarm valves and their associated strainers, filters, and restriction orifices
must be inspected internally every 5 years unless tests indicate a greater
frequency is necessary.
3.2 Maintenance
Internal components must be cleaned/repaired as necessary in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The system must be returned to service in accordance with the

3.3 Check Valves
Inspection.
Valves must be inspected internally every 5 years to verify that all
components operate correctly, move freely, and are in good condition.
Maintenance.
Internal components must be cleaned, repaired, or replaced as necessary in
3.4 Pre-action Valves and Deluge Valves
Inspection.
Valve enclosure heating equipment for pre-action and deluge valves subject
to freezing must be inspected daily during cold weather for its ability to
maintain a minimum temperature of at least 4°C (40° F).
Valve enclosures equipped with low temperature alarms must be inspected

weekly.
Low temperature alarms, if installed in valve enclosures, must be inspected

annually at the beginning of the heating season.
Gauges must be inspected weekly.
The gauge on the supply side of the pre-action or deluge valve must indicate
that the normal supply water pressure is being maintained.
The gauge monitoring the pre-action system supervisory air pressure, if

provided, must be inspected monthly to verify that it indicates that normal
pressure is being maintained.
The gauge monitoring the detection system pressure, if provided, must be

tested monthly to verify that it indicates that normal pressure is being
maintained.
The pre-action or deluge valve must be externally inspected monthly to verify

the following:

Page 287 of 344
(1) The valve is free from physical damage.

(2) All trim valves are in the appropriate open or closed position.
(3) The valve seat is not leaking.
(4) Electrical components are in service.
The interior of the pre-action or deluge valve and the condition of detection
devices must be inspected annually when the trip test is conducted.
Internal inspection of valves that can be reset without removal of a faceplate

must be permitted to be conducted every 5 years.
Strainers, filters, restricted orifices, and diaphragm chambers must be

inspected internally every 5 years unless tests indicate a greater frequency is
necessary.
3.5 Testing
The priming water level in supervised pre-action systems must be tested

quarterly for compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Each deluge or pre - action valve must be trip tested annually at full flow in
warm weather and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Protection must be provided for any devices or equipment subject to damage
by system discharge during tests.
Where the nature of the protected property is such that water cannot be
discharged for test purposes, the trip test must be conducted in a manner that
does not necessitate discharge in the protected area.
Where the nature of the protected property is such that water cannot be
discharged unless protected equipment is shut down (e.g. energized electrical
equipment), a full flow system test must be conducted at the next scheduled
shutdown. In all cases, the test frequency must not exceed 3 years.
Pre-action or deluge valves protecting freezers must be trip tested in a

manner that does not introduce moisture into the piping in the freezer.
The water discharge patterns from all open sprinklers or spray nozzles must
be observed to ensure that patterns are not impeded by plugging and to
ensure that they are correctly positioned and that obstructions do not prevent
discharge patterns from wetting surfaces to be protected.
Where obstructions occur, the piping and sprinklers or nozzles must be

cleaned and the system retested.
3.6 Pressure Readings
Pressure readings must be recorded at the hydraulically most remote nozzle

or sprinkler.
A second pressure reading must be recorded at the deluge valve.

Page 288 of 344
These readings must be compared to the hydraulic design pressures to

ensure the original system design requirements are met by the water supply.
Where the hydraulically most remote nozzle or sprinkler is inaccessible,

nozzles or sprinklers in other than foam-water systems must be permitted to
be checked visually without taking a pressure reading on the most remote
nozzle or sprinkler.
Where the reading taken at the riser indicates that the water supply has
deteriorated, a gauge must be placed on the hydraulically most remote nozzle
or sprinkler and the results compared with the required design pressure.
Multiple Systems. The maximum number of systems expected to operate in

case of fire must be tested simultaneously to check the adequacy of the water
supply.
Manual Operation. Manual actuation devices must be operated annually.
Return to Service. After the full flow test, the system must be returned to
service in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Grease or other sealing materials must not be applied to the seating surfaces
of pre-action or deluge valves.
Records indicating the date the pre-action or deluge valve was last tripped
and the tripping time as well as the individual and organization conducting the
test must be maintained at a location or in a manner readily available for
review by the authority having jurisdiction.
Low air pressure alarms, if provided, must be tested quarterly in accordance

Low temperature alarms, if installed in valve enclosures, must be tested

Automatic air pressure maintenance devices, if provided, must be tested

yearly at the time of the annual pre-action or deluge valve trip test, in
3.7 Maintenance
Leaks causing drops in supervisory pressure sufficient to sound warning

alarms and electrical malfunctions causing alarms to sound must be located
and repaired.
During the annual trip test, the interior of the pre-action or deluge valve must
be cleaned thoroughly and the parts replaced or repaired as necessary.
Interior cleaning and parts replacement or repair must be permitted every 5

years for valves that can be reset without removal of a faceplate.
Low points in pre-action or deluge systems must be drained after each

operation and before the onset of freezing weather conditions.

Page 289 of 344
Additional maintenance as required by the manufacturer’s instructions must

be provided.
4. Dry Pipe Valves / Quick-Opening Devices
4.1 Inspection
Valve enclosure heating equipment must be inspected daily during cold

weather for its ability to maintain a minimum temperature of at least 4°C
(40°F).
Valve enclosures equipped with low temperature alarms must be inspected

weekly.
Low temperature alarms, if installed in valve enclosures, must be inspected

Gauges must be inspected weekly.
a) The gauge on the supply side of the dry pipe valve must indicate that
the normal supply water pressure is being maintained.
b) The gauge on the system side of the dry pipe valve must indicate that
the proper ratio of air or nitrogen pressure to water supply pressure is
being maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
c) The gauge on the quick-opening device, if provided, must indicate the

same pressure as the gauge on the system side of the dry pipe valve.
Systems equipped with low air or nitrogen pressure alarms must be inspected
monthly.
The dry pipe valve must be externally inspected monthly to verify the
following:
(1) The valve is free of physical damage.

(2) All trim valves are in the appropriate open or closed position.
(3) The intermediate chamber is not leaking.
The interior of the dry pipe valve must be inspected annually when the trip test
is conducted.
Strainers, filters, and restricted orifices must be inspected internally every 5

years unless tests indicate a greater frequency is necessary.
4.2 Testing
The priming water level must be tested quarterly.
Each dry pipe valve must be trip tested annually during warm weather.

Page 290 of 344
Dry pipe valves protecting freezers must be trip tested in a manner that does
not introduce moisture into the piping in the freezers.
Every 3 years and whenever the system is altered, the dry pipe valve must be
trip tested with the control valve fully open and the quick-opening device, if
provided, in service.
During those years when full flow testing is not required, each dry pipe valve
must be trip tested with the control valve partially open.
Grease or other sealing materials must not be applied to the seating surfaces
of dry pipe valves.
Quick-opening devices, if provided, must be tested quarterly.
A tag or card that shows the date on which the dry pipe valve was last tripped
and the name of the person and organization conducting the test must be
attached to the valve.
Separate records of initial air and water pressure, tripping air pressure, and
dry pipe valve operating conditions must be maintained on the premises for
comparison with previous test results.
Records of tripping time must be maintained for full flow trip tests.
Low air pressure alarms, if provided, must be tested quarterly in accordance

Low temperature alarms, if installed in valve enclosures, must be tested

Automatic air pressure maintenance devices, if provided, must be tested

annually during the dry pipe valve trip test in accordance with the
4.3 Maintenance
Leaks resulting in air pressure losses greater than 70 kPa per week must be
located and repaired.
During the annual trip test, the interior of the dry pipe valve must be cleaned
thoroughly and parts replaced or repaired as necessary.
Low points in dry pipe sprinkler systems must be drained after each operation
and before the onset of freezing weather conditions.
4.4 Pressure reducing valves and relief valves
All valves must be inspected quarterly to verify that the valves are in the
following condition:
(1) In the open position

Page 291 of 344
(2) Not leaking

(3) Maintaining downstream pressures in accordance with the design
criteria
(4) In good condition, with hand-wheels installed and unbroken.
A full flow test must be conducted on each valve at 5-year intervals and must
be compared to previous test results.
Adjustments must be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.
A partial flow test adequate to move the valve from its seat must be conducted
annually.
4.5 Hose Connection Pressure Reducing Valves
All valves must be inspected quarterly to verify the following:
(1) The hand-wheel is not broken or missing.

(2) The outlet hose threads are not damaged.
(3) No leaks are present.
(4) The reducer and the cap are not missing.
A full flow test must be conducted on each valve at 5-year intervals and must
be compared to previous test results.

instructions.
annually.
4.6 Hose Rack Assembly Pressure Reducing Valves
All valves must be inspected quarterly to verify the following:
(1) The hand-wheel is not missing or broken.

(2) No leaks are present.
A full flow test must be conducted on each valve at 5-year intervals and
compared to previous test results.

instructions.
annually.
4.7 Hose Valves
Hose valves must be inspected quarterly.
All deficiencies must be corrected.

Page 292 of 344
Hose valves must be inspected to ensure that hose caps are in place and not
damaged.
Hose threads must be inspected for damage.
Valve handles must be present and not damaged.
Gaskets must be inspected for damage or deterioration.
Hose valves must be inspected for leaks.
Hose valves must be inspected to ensure no obstructions are present.
Hose valves must be inspected to ensure that restricting devices are present.
4.8 Testing
Class I and Class III standpipe system hose valves must be tested annually
by opening and closing the valves.
Hose valves that are difficult to operate or leak must be repaired or replaced.
Hose valves on hose stations attached to sprinkler systems and Class II

standpipe systems must be tested every 3 years by opening and closing the
valves.
Hose valves that are difficult to operate or leak must be repaired or replaced.
Maintenance. Hose valves that do not operate smoothly or open fully must be
lubricated, repaired, or replaced.
4.9 Fire Pump Pressure Relief Valves
All circulation relief valves must be inspected weekly.
The inspection must verify that water flows through the valve when the fire
pump is operating at shut-off pressure (i.e., churn) to prevent the pump from
overheating.
During the annual fire pump test, the closure o f the circulation relief valve
must be verified to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
All pressure relief valves must be inspected weekly.
The inspection must verify that the pressure downstream of the relief valve
fittings in the fire pump discharge piping does not exceed the pressure for
which the system components are rated.
During the annual fire pump flow test, the pressure relief valve must be
verified to be correctly adjusted and set to relieve at the correct pressure and
to close below that pressure setting.

Page 293 of 344
Maintenance. All damaged or missing components noted during the

inspections must be repaired or replaced in accordance with the
5. Backflow prevention assemblies
The double check assembly (DCA) valves and double check detector
assembly (DCDA) valve must be inspected weekly to ensure that the OS&Y
isolation valves are in the normal open position.
Valves secured with locks or electrically supervised in accordance with

applicable NFPA standards must be inspected monthly.
Reduced pressure assemblies (RPA) and reduced pressure detector

assemblies (RPDA) must be inspected weekly to ensure that the differential-
sensing valve relief port is not continuously discharging and the OS&Y
isolation valves are in the normal open position.
Valves secured with locks or electrically supervised in accordance with

applicable NFPA standards must be inspected monthly.
After any testing or repair, an inspection by the owner must be made to

ensure that the system is in service and all isolation valves are in the normal
open position and properly locked or electrically supervised.
5.1 Testing
All backflow preventers installed in fire protection system piping must be

tested annually in accordance with the following:
(1) A forward flow test must be conducted at the system demand,

including hose stream demand, where hydrants or inside hose stations
are located downstream of the backflow preventer.
(2) A backflow performance test, as required by the authority having

jurisdiction, must be conducted at the completion of the forward flow
test.
For backflow preventers sized 50.8 mm (2 in.) and under, the forward flow test
must be acceptable to conduct without measuring flow, where the test outlet is
of a size to flow the system demand.
Where water rationing must be enforced during shortages lasting more than 1
year, an internal inspection of the backflow preventer to ensure the check
valves will fully open must be acceptable in lieu of conducting the annual
forward flow test.
Where connections do not permit a full flow test, tests must be completed at
the maximum flow rate possible.
The forward flow test must not be required where annual fire pump testing
causes the system demand to flow through the backflow preventer device.

Page 294 of 344
All backflow devices installed in fire protection water supply must be tested
annually at the designed flow rate of the fire protection system, including
required hose stream demands.
Where connections do not permit a full flow test, tests must be conducted at
the maximum flow rate possible.
5.2 Maintenance
Maintenance of all backflow prevention assemblies must be conducted by a

trained individual following the manufacturer’s instructions in accordance with
the procedure and policies of the authority having jurisdiction.
Rubber parts must be replaced in accordance with the frequency required by

the authority having jurisdiction and the manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Fire Department connections
Fire department connections must be inspected quarterly. The inspection

must verify the following:
(1) The fire department connections are visible and accessible.

(2) Couplings or swivels are not damaged and rotate smoothly.
(3) Plugs or caps are in place and undamaged.
(4) Gaskets are in place and in good condition.
(5) Identification signs are in place.
(6) The check valve is not leaking.
(7) The automatic drain valve is in place and operating properly.
(8) The fire department connection clapper(s) is in place and operating
properly.
If fire department connection plugs or caps are not in place, the interior of the
connection must be inspected for obstructions, and it must be verified that the
fire department connection clapper is operational over its full range.
Components must be repaired or replaced as necessary in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions. Any obstructions that are present must be
removed.
Protection Systems

Page 295 of 344
STD IM14 - EMERGENCY ESCAPES
1. ASSESSING MEANS OF ESCAPE
The aim of the following paragraphs is to provide enough information to make a

reasonable assessment of the escape routes from the workplace and to decide
whether they are adequate and can be safely used in the event of fire.
Because of the wide variation in the type of workplaces, it is only possible to give a
general guide to the level of precautions needed in most workplaces. So this
Standard does not seek to give specific advice about each individual type of
workplace.
If the workplace is a large, complex premises or involved with specialised activities or

risks, it may be necessary to provide additional means of escape or to improve the
fire protection of existing escape routes.
This Standard uses an established method for assessing means of escape which has
been found to be generally acceptable in all but the most particular circumstances.
This method is based upon limiting travel distances according to the category of
potential fire risk the workplace falls into. These distances ensure that people will be
able to escape within the appropriate period of time.
2. FIRE RISK CATEGORIES FOR ASSESSING THE MEANS OF ESCAPE
In general, most workplaces can be categorised as high, normal or low risk.

Examples of the type of workplace or areas within workplaces likely to fall within
these categories are:
2.1 High
Where highly flammable or explosive materials are stored or used (other than in small
quantities). Where unsatisfactory structural features are present such as:
lack of fire-resisting
separation; vertical or horizontal openings through which fire, heat and smoke
can spread in long and complex escape routes created by extensive
subdivision of large floor areas by partitions, or the distribution of display units
in shops or machinery in plants;
large areas of flammable or smoke-producing surfaces on either walls or
ceilings.
Where permanent or temporary work activities are carried out which have the
potential for fires to start and spread such as:
workshops in which highly flammable materials are used, e.g. paint spraying;
areas where the processes involve the use of naked flame, or produce
excessive heat;
refuse chambers and waste disposal areas; and
areas where foamed plastics or upholstered furniture are stored.

Page 296 of 344
Where there is a significant risk to life in case of fire, such as where:
treatment or care is provided where the occupants have to rely upon the
actions of limited numbers of staff for their safe evacuation;
groups of people are working in isolated parts of the premises such as
basements, roof spaces, cable ducts and service tunnels etc; and
2.2 Normal
Where any outbreak of fire is likely to remain confined or only spread slowly, allowing
people to escape to a place of safety.
Where the number of people present is small and the layout of the workplace means
they are likely to be able to escape to a place of safety without assistance.
Where the workplace has an effective automatic warning system, or an effective

automatic fire-extinguishing, suppression or containment system, which may reduce
the risk classification from high risk.
2.3 Low
Where there is minimal risk to people's lives and where the risk of fire occurring is
low, or the potential for fire, heat and smoke spreading is negligible.
The work done on assessing the risks and reducing the risk of fire occurring, together
with the knowledge gained about the location of people at risk, should generally
provide the information needed to establish the risk category or categories of the
workplace.
3. GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR ESCAPE ROUTES
3.1 Other than in small workplaces, or from some rooms of low or normal fire risk, there
should normally be alternative means of escape from all parts of the workplace.
3.2 Routes which provide means of escape in one direction only (from a dead-end)
should be avoided wherever possible as this could mean that people have to move
towards a fire in order to escape.
3.3 Each escape route should be independent of any other and arranged so that people
can move away from a fire in order to escape.
3.4 Escape routes should always lead to a place of safety. They should also be wide
enough for the number of occupants and should not normally reduce in width.
3.5 Escape routes and exits should be available for use and kept clear of obstruction at
all times.
4. EVACUATION TIMES AND LENGTH OF ESCAPE ROUTES

Page 297 of 344
The aim is, from the time the fire alarm is raised, for everyone to be able to reach a
place of relative safety.
The time for people to reach a place of relative safety should include the time it takes
them to react to a fire warning. This will depend on a number of factors including:
what they are likely to be doing when the alarm is raised.
what they may have had to do before starting to escape, eg turn off
machinery, help other people etc; and
their knowledge of the building and the training they have received about the
routine to be followed in the event of fire.
Where necessary, these can be checked by carrying out a practice drill. To ensure
that the time available for escape is reasonable, the length of the escape route from
any occupied part of the workplace to the storey exit should not exceed 45 metres.
4.1 Number and width of exits
There should be enough available exits, of adequate width, from every room, storey
or building. The adequacy of the escape routes and doors can be assessed by
reference to TT20 and TT21 of the NBR (B4 – National Building Regulations)
4.2 Corridors
Corridors should generally be about 1 metre wide. To avoid having to travel long
distances in corridors affected by smoke, those corridors which are more than 45
metres should be subdivided into approximately equal parts by providing, close-fitting,
self-closing fire doors.
Where a corridor only leads in one direction, it should be constructed of fire-resisting

partitions and self-closing fire doors.
4.3 Stairways
A stairway should be of sufficient width for the number of people who are likely to use
it in an emergency and it should not normally be less than 1 metre wide. However, a
narrower one may be adequate if one is sure that only a few people, who are familiar
with the stairway, will use it.
Where more than one stairway is provided, it should be assumed that the widest one
may be unusable as a result of the fire. This means that the remaining stairway(s) will
need to provide a satisfactory escape route for everyone present. There may be no
need to discount the widest stairway where each stairway is reached through a
protected lobby. Certain other compensatory features, such as sprinklers or smoke
control systems, may also be considered.
Stairways should normally be protected by fire-resisting partitions and fire-resisting,

self-closing doors and lead directly to a way out of the building. An unprotected
stairway may, however, be suitable in workplaces of low or normal fire risk, provided
that:

Page 298 of 344
the stairway links no more than two floors and those floors are not linked to
another floor by an unprotected stairway; and
it is additional to that required for escape purposes; and
no escape route from a dead-end situation on an upper floor passes the
access to such a stairway.
People should not have to pass through a protected stairway to reach an alternative
stairway. Where this cannot be achieved, a stairway may be by-passed, for instance
by using doors connecting adjacent rooms. In such situations the doors should be
kept free from obstruction and available for use at all times.
A single stairway may be suitable for means of escape in workplaces of low or normal
fire risk, provided that people on each floor can reach it within the appropriate travel
time. It also needs to:
be constructed as a protected stairway and serve no more than three floors

above, or one floor below, ground level;
be accessed, other than at the top floor, by means of a protected lobby or
protected corridor;
be of sufficient width to accommodate the number of people who may need to
use it in an emergency; and
lead direct to open air.
There is no need to provide protected lobbies where the workplace is of low fire risk.
This also applies to workplaces of normal fire risk, provided that either an automatic
fire detection system or sprinklers linked directly into the fire alarm system are
installed in the rooms or areas leading directly onto the protected stairway.
In small workplaces of low or normal fire risk, unprotected stairways (including a

single stairway) may be satisfactory as a means of escape, provided that:
the stairway provides access between the ground and first floor and/or ground
floor and basement only, and an exit can be reached from any part of those
floors within the escape times given for single escape routes earlier in this
section; and
access to the stairway is clearly visible from any part of the floor it serves and
it exits not more than 6 metres from a storey exit leading direct to open air at
ground level.
Where an external stairway is provided, any door or window (other than toilet
windows) opening onto the stairway, or within 3 metres of it, should be fire-resisting.
Windows should be unopenable and doors should be self-closing.
In exceptional circumstances, a small number of unprotected, openable windows may

be allowed, provided that the rooms containing them are separated from the rest of
the building by fire-resisting construction and the external stairway is not the only one
from the upper storeys.
5. EMERGENCY ESCAPE AND FIRE EXIT SIGNS
Emergency escape routes and exit doors that are not in common use should be
clearly indicated, as appropriate, by suitable signs.

Page 299 of 344
All signs should be in positions where they can be seen clearly. These signs must
take the form of a pictogram which may incorporate a directional arrow. The sign can
also be supplemented by words such as 'Fire Exit'. Fire safety signs must comply with
the relevant requirements of the Regulations
5.1 Escape doors
Doors people have to pass through in order to escape from the workplace should
open in the direction of travel where:
more than 25 people may have to use the door;

the door is at or near the foot of a stairway;
the door serves a high-fire-risk area; or
the door is on an exit route from a building used for public assembly, such as
a place of public entertainment, a conference centre or exhibition hall.
5.2 Emergency escape and fire exit signs
People escaping should be able to open any door on an escape route easily and
immediately, preferably without the use of a key. All outward opening doors used for
means of escape, which have to be kept fastened while people are in the building,
should be fitted with a single form of release device such as a panic latch, a panic
bolt, or a push pad.
Where a door needs to be fastened by a security device, it should be the only

fastening on the door and it will have to made sure that all staff know how it works.
Display a notice explaining the method of operation and, if necessary, provide a
suitable tool so that the device can be operated safely.
6. ITEMS PROHIBITED ON AN ESCAPE ROUTE
Items which pose a potential fire hazard or those which could cause an obstruction
should not be located in corridors or stairways intended for use as a means of
escape. In particular, the following items should not be located in protected routes, or
in a corridor and stairwell which serves as the sole means of escape from the
workplace, or part of it:
portable heaters of any type;

heaters which have unprotected naked flames or radiant bars;
fixed heaters using a gas supply cylinder, where the cylinder is within the
escape route;
oil-fuelled heaters or boilers;
cooking appliances;
upholstered furniture;
coat racks;
temporarily stored items including items in transit, eg furniture, waste bins etc;
lighting using naked flames;
gas boilers, pipes, meters or other fittings (except those permitted in the
standards supporting the building regulations and installed in accordance with
the 'Gas Safety Regulations');
electrical equipment (other than normal lighting, emergency escape lighting,
fire alarm systems, or equipment associated with a security system), eg
photocopiers.

Page 300 of 344
7. EXTERIOR AND ENVIRONMENT
All exits, emergency exits, and fire escapes afford unobstructed passage to a
safe area.
Grounds surrounding the facility are clear of accumulations of combustible
material and brush.
8. EVACUATION SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be used to assess Emergency preparedness for escape
purposes in surface areas:-
Table 1 – Evacuation Preparedness Self Evaluation Checklist
EVACUATION PREPAREDNESS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

Y = YES NA = NOT APPLICABLE NA N U COMMENTS
N = NO U = UNDETERMINED
For all NO and U answers, identify the specific areas
needing correction, and include the persons
responsible etc, in the comments column.
I. Floor Diagrams
1) Are floor diagrams prominently posted on each
floor or section?
2) Is each floor plan legible?
3) Does the floor plan indicate every emergency
exit on the floor or section?
4) Is a person looking at the plan, properly
orientated by an X (that is, you are here now)?
5) Are area identifications for the floor or section
as well as compass directions given?
6) Are directions to stairwells clearly indicated?
7) Are familiar terms used on the diagram to
define directions to emergency exits? For
example, are particular areas identified such as
office X, lavatories etc?
II. Exit paths
1) If colour coding of pillars and doors, or stripes
and markings on floors and walls are used, are
they properly explained?
2) Are paths to exits relatively straight and clear of
all obstructions?
3) Are proper instructions posted at changes in
direction enroute to an emergency exit or place
of safety?
4) Are pressure systems and ventilation systems
operative?
III. Elevators
1) Are signs prominently posted at elevators
warning of the possible dangers in use of
elevators during evacuation situations?
2) Do these signs indicate the direction of

Page 301 of 344
emergency exits which are available for use?

IV. Emergency Exit Doors
1) Are all emergency exits identified?
2) Are exit door location signs adequately and
reliably illuminated?
3) Do exit doors open easily and open in proper
direction (open out)?
4) Are exit doors free of obstructions (not blocked,
chained, locked, obstructed by cabinets,
packages etc.)?
5) Are all exit doors self closing with positively
latching locks?
6) Are all exit doors kept closed, and not
occasionally propped open for convenience or
to allow for ventilation?
V. Emergency Stairwells
1) Are stair treads and risers in good condition?
2) Are stairwells free of mops, pails, brooms,
rags, packages or other obstruction materials?
3) Are all stairwells and stairs equipped with
proper handrails?
4) Does each emergency stairwell go directly to
the grade floor exit level without interruption?
5) If the stairwell terminates at some interim point
in the building, are there clear directions at that
point that show the way to completion of exit?
6) Is there provision for directing occupants to
refuge areas out of and away from the building
when they reach the ground floor?
7) Are directions provided where evacuees can
congregate for a ‘head count’ during and after
the evacuation has been complete?
8) Is there adequate lighting in the stairwell?
9) Is lighting provided for day, night, and power
loss situations?
10) Are exits properly identified?
VI. Emergency Lighting
1) In the event of an electrical power failure or
interruption of service in the building, is
automatic or manually operated emergency
lighting available? If not, what will be used?
2) If standby lights are used, where are they kept
and who controls them? How would they be
made available during an emergency?
3) Is there an operable emergency generator in
the building?
4) Is the generator secured against sabotage?
5) Is the emergency lighting tested on a regular
monthly basis with results recorded? Who
maintains such records?
VII. Communications
1) Is there a system to notify occupants of the
building when an emergency evacuation is
necessary?
2) Are one or more forms of communication
systems available to each tenant floor? (P.A.
system, standpipe phones, battery operated

Page 302 of 344
pagers etc.)
3) If messengers must be used, have they been
properly instructed?
4) Is the communication system in good working
condition?
5) Under what emergency conditions is it used
and who operates it?
6) Is the communications system protected from
sabotage?
7) Do all occupants know how to contact building
control to report a dangerous situation?
8) Is the building’ emergency communications
system tested monthly? By whom and to what
extent?
VIII. Additional Comments
Location: Inspection Date:

Inspected By: Title:
9. LIGHTING OF ESCAPE ROUTES
All escape routes, including external ones, must have sufficient lighting for people to
see their way out safely. Emergency escape lighting may be needed if areas of the
workplace are without natural daylight or are used at night.
Before providing emergency escape lighting, check the relevant parts of the
workplace with the lights off to see whether there is sufficient borrowed light from
other sources to illuminate the escape route, e.g. street lights or unaffected lighting
circuits.
Where it is decided that there is insufficient light, it will be necessary to provide some
form of emergency lighting.
Emergency lighting needs to function not only on the complete failure of the normal
lighting, but also on a localised failure if that would present a hazard.
9.1 Emergency escape lighting should:
indicate the escape routes clearly;

provide illumination along escape routes to allow safe movement towards the
final exits; and
ensure that fire alarm call points and fire-fighting equipment can be readily
located.
In addition to emergency escape lighting, it may be necessary to provide other forms

of emergency lighting for safety reasons, for example to ensure that manufacturing
processes can be shut down safely.

Page 303 of 344
In smaller workplaces and outdoor locations with few people, the emergency escape
lighting could take the form of battery-operated torches placed in suitable positions
where employees can quickly get access to them in an emergency, e.g. on an escape
route. In other cases, you should provide an adequate number of electrically operated
emergency lighting units, installed to automatically come on if the power to the normal
lighting supply circuit, which they are connected to, fails.
Figure 1
9.2 Emergency lighting units should be sited to cover specific areas, for example:
intersections of corridors;
at each exit door;
near each staircase so that each flight of stairs receives direct light;
close to a change in floor level;
outside each final exit; by exit and safety signs that are required elsewhere
following the risk assessment;
within lift cars;
near fire-fighting equipment; and
near each fire alarm call point.
The lighting units should be placed as low as possible but at least 2 metres above
floor level (measured to the underside of the lighting unit). There may be need to
consider alternative mounting arrangements in areas where smoke could accumulate
and make the lighting ineffective. Where it is considered that an electrical emergency
lighting system is required, the system should be installed in accordance with British
Standard 5266: Part 1. The advice of a competent person who specialises in the
installation of these systems should be sought.
10. EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Automatic emergency escape lighting equipment should be inspected by a competent

person monthly, six-monthly and three-yearly, in accordance with the schedules set
out in the relevant NFPA Standards and the manufacturer's recommendations.
11.1 Maintenance of emergency generator and emergency lighting
Emergency generators should have weekly and annual maintenance tags attached
for recording the inspector’s initials, date, and confirmation of

Page 304 of 344
maintenance/inspections performed on the system. Checklists detailing maintenance

should be kept by the office responsible for maintenance:
Operate emergency generators weekly.

Correct potential operational problems.
Operate emergency generator under a simulated load biannually.
Lubricate motors and engines annually in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
Perform an emergency lighting test biannually using the emergency
generator. Fire pump(s), fire alarm systems, and electronic exit locking
systems should be tested on emergency power concurrently.
SABS 0400 – National Building Regulations

BS 5266 Part 1 – Emergency Lighting: Code of practice for the emergency lighting of
premises other than cinemas and certain other specified premises used for entertainment.
Standard G23 - Emergency and standby generator installations on surface

Page 305 of 344
STD IM15 - FIRE SEPARATION FIRE WALLS
This standard prescribes minimum requirements for fire walls and fire barrier walls for use in
providing safety to life and protection of property from fire. These requirements apply to walls
that are required to separate buildings or subdivide a building to prevent the spread of fire.
1.1 Types of firewalls
Fire walls must be one of the following:
1) Cantilevered/freestanding fire walls

2) Tied fire walls
3) Double fire walls
1.2 Structural stability and strength
Fire walls must be designed and constructed to remain stable after the
collapse of the structure due to fire on either side of the wall.
1.3 Design loads
All fire walls and their supports must be designed to withstand a minimum
uniform load of 0.24 kPa from either direction applied perpendicular to the
face of the wall. All fire walls must be non-load-bearing. Structural framing
within the plane of the wall must be permitted to be load-bearing.
Where the fire wall or fire protective covering of a structural member is subject
to impact damage from moving vehicles or the handling of merchandise or
other activity, protection against impact damage must be provided for an
appropriate height but not less than 1.5 mm from the finished floor.
2. CANTILEVERED OR FREESTANDING FIRE WALLS
Cantilevered or freestanding fire walls must be entirely self-supported and

non-load bearing. There must be no connections to the building(s) or contents
on either side other than to the flashing. Such walls must be erected where
there is a complete break in the structural framework. The wall must be
secured to the foundation to resist overturning due to design loads.
3. TIED FIRE WALLS
Tied fire walls must be centred on a single column line or constructed

between a double column line. Structural framing on either side of the wall
must line up horizontally and vertically and must support the roof. The
framework on each side of the fire wall must be continuous or tied together
through the wall.

Page 306 of 344
The framework on each side must be designed so that it resists the maximum
lateral pull that can be developed due to framework collapse in a fire on the
opposite side. Tied fire walls must be supported laterally by the building
framework with flexible anchors. Where centred on a single column line,
structural framing (i.e., columns and beams or trusses) at the column line
must have a fire resistance rating of not less than the required fire resistance
rating of the fire wall.
Where the wall is installed between double column lines, framing along the
first column line immediately on each side of the fire wall must have a fire
resistance rating of not less than the required fire resistance rating of the fire
wall.
4. DOUBLE FIRE WALLS
A double fire wall must consist of two back-to-back walls. There must be no
connections, other than to the flashing, between the walls.
Each fire wall must be supported laterally by the building frame on its
respective side and must be independent of the fire wall and framing on the
opposite side.
5. FIRE WALLS AT ELEVATION DIFFERENCES
Where the roofs on opposite sides of a fire wall are not of the same elevation, the fire
wall assembly must be arranged as described in either (a) or (b).
a) The two buildings must be separated by a double fire wall.

b) A cantilevered fire wall must be constructed from the foundation to the top of
the parapet for the lower roof. The upper wall section must be permitted to
have an exterior fire resistance rating of one hour less than the required fire
resistance rating of the lower cantilevered portion but not less than a 2-hour
rating. The upper wall must be connected to the framework of the higher
building and must be structurally independent of the cantilevered wall.
6. CLEARANCE
Clearance to allow for expansion of unprotected structural framework must be

provided. This space must be provided between cantilevered walls and
structural framework on each side and between double walls.
In areas of moderate and high seismic risk, sufficient separation must be

provided between cantilevered walls and adjacent framing on each side and
between double walls to allow independent movements of the elements
without contact.
7. EXPANSION, SEISMIC, AND CONTROL JOINTS
Joints must be provided to prevent cracking due to drying, shrinkage, or normal

building temperature change. The integrity of the fire resistance rating of the wall

Page 307 of 344
must be maintained by the protection of these joints. Protection for expansion and
seismic joints must be installed in accordance with tested design specifications.
The fire resistance of expansion, seismic, and control joints in fire walls must be
determined in accordance with ANSI/UL 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building
Joint Systems, or ASTM E 1966, Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint
Systems.
8. TERMINATION POINTS
A fire barrier wall must extend from the foundation or floor below to the underside of
the roof or floor deck above. Any voids or gaps created by the meeting of the wall and
floor below and the underside of the roof or floor deck above must be filled with an
approved material with a fire resistance rating at least equal to that of the fire wall.
Exception: The fire barrier wall must be permitted to terminate at the underside of an
individually protected structural member in the same plane. The structural member
must have a fire resistance rating of not less than that required for the fire barrier wall
and must prevent the passage of flame and hot gases.
9. FIRE RESISTANCE
9.1 Wall materials
The fire resistance rating of the wall assembly must be as required by the
applicable code or standard. Assemblies must be tested and rated in
accordance with NFPA 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of
Building Construction and Materials.
Exception: Assemblies calculated to have equivalent fire resistance must be

permitted, provided that the calculations are based on the conditions of
acceptance and the fire exposure specified in NFPA 251.
9.2 Penetration seals
All through-penetration protection systems must be tested and rated in accordance

with ASTM E 814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests o f Through-Penetration Fire
Stops, or ANSI/UL 1479, Fire Test of Through Penetration Fire Stops. The positive
pressure difference between the exposed and unexposed surfaces of the test
assembly must not be less than 2.5 Pa water gauge. A through-penetration protection
system must have an F rating not less than the required fire resistance rating of the
fire wall or fire barrier wall.
Exception: Concrete, mortar, or grout must be permitted with maximum 153 mm

nominal diameter steel or copper pipe or steel conduit. Concrete, mortar, or grout
must be the thickness required to maintain the required fire resistance rating of the
wall being penetrated. The maximum opening size must be 0.094 m2.
9.3 Double wall assemblies
Double wall assemblies must be considered to have a combined assembly fire rating
as specified in Table 1.

Page 308 of 344
Table 1 – Fire Resistance Ratings for Double Wall Assemblies
Fire Resistance Rating of Each Equivalent to Single Wall

Wall
3 hours 4 hours
2 hours 3 hours
1 hours 2 hours
10. EXTERIOR PROTECTION
10.1 Parapets
Fire walls must be provided with parapets at least 0.76 m high. The parapet height
must be measured from the top surface of the roof being protected. Roofs sloped
greater than 6 mm per 305 mm downward toward the wall must be provided with a
minimum 0.9 m parapet.
10.2 Roof surface protection
Built-up roofs must be surfaced with gravel or slag for at least 7.6 m on both
sides of the fire wall. The application rate must be at least 19 kg / m2.
All single-ply membrane roof coverings must be protected by non-combustible
paver blocks, or No. 3 [nominal 2.54 cm to 5.08 cm diameter] gravel ballast in
accordance with ASTM D 448, Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate
for Road and Bridge Construction. Complete membrane coverage must be
provided at a rate not less than 48.8 kg / m2 for at least 7.6 m on both sides of
the fire wall.
10.3 Roof mounted structures
Combustible structures or equipment such as monitors, penthouses, or

cooling towers not more than 6.1 m in height above roofs must be located at
least 15.2 m from fire walls required to have a fire resistance rating exceeding
2 hours. Roof-mounted structures over 6.1 m high must be provided with a
greater separation distance acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
10.4 Roof penetrations
Heat and smoke vents, skylights, and unprotected roof penetrations for air-
handling equipment or smoke control systems must be located at least 7.6 m
from fire walls requiring a fire resistance rating of more than 2 hours and at
least 1.3 m from fire walls requiring a fire resistance rating of 2 hours or less.
10.5 End walls
The length and arrangement of end walls must be in accordance with Table 2.
The fire resistance rating of the end walls must be from the outside and must

Page 309 of 344
be a minimum of 1 hour but must be not more than two hours less than that of
the fire wall.
Table 2 – Length of End Wall Protection
Height of Exposed Area Length of End Wall Protection

ft m ft m
Up to 40 12.2 6 1.8
41 to 70 21.3 10 3.1
71 and over 21.6 and over 14 4.3
The following alternative to 10.5 must be permitted for light hazard and
ordinary hazard (Group 1 or 2) occupancies as defined in NFPA 13, Standard
for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. The fire wall must extend to a
distance of at least 0.76 m beyond the exterior face of the exterior walls.
Figure 1

ANSI / UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building Construction and
Maintenance
ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire
Stops
ANSI / UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
ASTM D 448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge
Construction

Page 310 of 344
STD IM16 - FIRE AND EMERGENCY SIGNS (FES)
1. INTRODUCTION
Signs are used in buildings for imparting information to the occupants which is not
obvious or apparent in any other way. Safety signs are a particular type of such signs
which are displayed for the purpose of maintaining the well-being of the occupants of
the building. It is important therefore that occupants are aware of the meaning and
purpose of the signs and interpret them consistently.
In the past safety signs have been designed and produced for each building or
building type and have differed widely. Often signs have contained words which some
occupants are unable to understand either through illiteracy or unfamiliarity with
official languages.
The need to co-ordinate their design in the interest of safety is apparent and
nationally recognisable standard symbols desirable.
2. REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
The requirements of local authorities vary depending on the town or city and must be
complied with. However, most accept SABS 1186 as the standard specification for
symbolic signs and these are illustrated in FPA bulletin No 19. These signs also
comply with NOSA and OHSAct requirements. SABS 1186 does not specify the sizes
of signs.
The signs are divided into five categories. Each type is recognisable by colour and
with one exception also by shape. The colours shown in this document are only
representative. The actual colours of the signs are to conform to SABS 1091 as
shown in the table below.
Table 1 – SABS 1091 Sign Colour Coding
CATEGORY COLOUR
Border / Oblique Background Symbol
Diagonal
P Prohibitory Signal Red (All) White Black
M Mandatory - Ultramarine (F09) White
I Informatory - Emerald Green (F14) White
F Fire - White Signal Red (All)
W Warning Black Golden Yellow (B49) Black
3. POSITIONING OF SIGNS
All safety signs must be placed where they can be easily seen and provide the best
warning of the presence of a hazard. Generally they are best placed at high levels.
Obviously the sign should not be so placed as to create a hazard. To ensure that the
sign is easily seen it may be necessary to place it at 90 degrees to the passage or
walkway. (See Figure 1).

Page 311 of 344
Figure 1
In an atmosphere that contains corrosive chemicals, thermoplastic signs should be

used.
4. FIXING OF SIGNS
All signs that are not self supporting should be attached to flat surfaced or backing
plates. The edges of the backing plate should not protrude beyond the edges of the
sign. The sign may be framed but the frame should not dominate the sign and the
visible area of the sign should conform to the sizes given above. For attaching the
sign, galvanised nuts, bolts and washers should be used. In an atmosphere that
contains corrosive chemicals, these nuts, bolts and washers should be coated. The
colour of the heads of the rivets or bolts and nuts, should be the same as that part of
the sign in which they are placed.
Suitable precautions should be taken to prevent the penetration of moisture into the
joint between a metal sign and its support.

Page 312 of 344
5. LIGHTING OF SIGNS
If a sign is not illuminated adequately by means of natural lighting or the building is

occupied during the hours of darkness, artificial lighting should be provided. (Figure
2).
Figure 2
6. DEMARCATION
6.1 In respect of fire fighting equipment, additional indication should be provided by way
of broad red and white diagonal stripes painted on the wall or column as illustrated on
the attached sketch.
6.2 To prevent obstruction of equipment a similar square painted on the floor may also be
necessary.
7. POSITIONING OF SIGNS
7.1 When any building is occupied, signs indicating the direction to be travelled in the
case of any emergency must be provided.
7.2 In certain cases the regulations require these signs to be capable of being illuminated
for not less than 60 minutes in the event of a mains supply failure.
Figure 3

Page 313 of 344
8. MAINTENANCE
Signs must be inspected regularly and kept clean and legible. Signs which are
damaged should be replaced.
SABS 1186 - Symbolic safety signs Part 1: Standard signs and general requirements
FPA Bulletin 19
SABS 1091 - National Colour Standard

Page 314 of 344
STD IM17 - FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS BULK STORAGE/ DAY USAGE
1. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF TANKS
This section must apply to the following:
1) The storage of flammable and combustible liquids, in fixed aboveground and

underground tanks
2) The storage of flammable and combustible liquids in portable tanks and bulk
containers whose capacity exceeds 3000 L.
3) The design, installation, testing, operation, and maintenance of such tanks,
portable tanks, and bulk containers
1.1 Prevention of overfilling of tanks
Aboveground tanks that receive and transfer Class I liquids from mainline pipelines
must follow formal written procedures to prevent overfilling of tanks utilizing one of the
following methods of protection:
a) Tanks gauged at frequent intervals by personnel continuously on the premise

during product receipt with frequent acknowledged communication maintained
with the supplier so flow can be promptly shut down or diverted.
b) Tanks equipped with a high-level detection device that is independent of any

gauging equipment. Alarm must be located where personnel who are on duty
throughout product transfer can promptly arrange for flow stoppage or
diversion.
c) Tanks equipped with an independent high-level detection system that will

automatically shut down or divert flow.
1.2 Instrumentation systems must be electrically supervised or equivalent
1.3 Formal written procedures must include the following:
a) Instructions covering methods to check for proper line-up and receipt of initial
delivery to tank designated to receive shipment.
b) Provision for training and monitoring the performance of operating personnel.
c) Schedules and procedures for inspection and testing of gauging equipment
and high-level instrumentation and related systems. Inspection and testing
intervals must not exceed 1 year.
1.4 An underground tank must be equipped with overfill prevention equipment that will
operate as follows:
1) Automatically shut off the flow of liquid into the tank when the tank is no more
than 95 percent full

Page 315 of 344
2) Alert the transfer operator when the tank is no more than 90 percent full by
restricting the flow of liquid into the tank or triggering the high-level alarm.
3) Other methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction
1.5 Identification and security
1.5.1 Emergency Response Identification
The application of NFPA 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of
Materials for Emergency Response, to storage tanks containing liquids must not be
required except where the contents have a health or reactivity degree of hazard of 2
or more or a flammability rating of 4. The marking must not need to be applied directly
to the tank but must be located where it can readily be seen, such as on the shoulder
of an accessway or walkway to the tank or tanks or on the piping outside of the bund
area. If more than one tank is involved, the markings must be so located that each
tank can readily be identified.
1.5.2 Unsupervised, isolated aboveground storage tanks must be secured and marked in
such a manner as to identify the fire hazards of the tank and the tank’s contents to
the general public. The area in which the tank is located must be protected from
tampering or trespassing, where necessary.
1.5.3 Tanks in Areas Subject to Flooding
Operating Instructions
Operating instructions or procedures to be followed in a flood emergency must
be readily available.
Personnel Training
Personnel relied upon to carry out flood emergency procedures must be
informed of the location and operation of valves and other equipment
necessary to effect the intent of these requirements.
1.5.4 Temporary or Permanent Removal from Service of Aboveground Tanks
Closure of Storage Tanks
Aboveground tanks taken out of service or abandoned must be emptied of

liquid, rendered vapour-free, and safeguarded against trespassing.
1.5.5 Temporary or Permanent Removal from Service of Underground Tanks
General
The procedures outlined in this subsection must be followed when taking
underground tanks temporarily out of service, closing them in place
permanently, or removing them. All applicable safety procedures associated
with working in proximity to flammable and combustible materials must be
strictly adhered to.
Temporary Closure
Tanks must be rendered temporarily out of service only when it is planned that
they will be returned to active service, closed in place permanently, or

Page 316 of 344
removed within a reasonable period not exceeding 1 year. The following

requirements must be met:
1) Corrosion protection and release detection systems must be

maintained in operation.
2) The vent line must be left open and functioning.
3) The tank must be secured against tampering.
4) All other lines must be capped or plugged.
Tanks remaining temporarily out of service for more than 1 year must be
permanently closed in place or removed.
Permanent Closure in Place
Tanks must be permitted to be permanently closed in place. All of the

following requirements must be met:
1) All applicable authorities having jurisdiction must be notified.

2) A safe workplace must be maintained throughout the prescribed
activities.
3) All flammable and combustible liquids and residues must be removed
from the tank, appurtenances, and piping and must be properly
disposed of.
4) The tank must be made safe by either purging it of flammable vapours
or inerting the potential explosive atmosphere in the tank. Confirmation
that the atmosphere in the tank is safe must be by periodic testing of
the atmosphere using a combustible gas indicator, if purging, or an
oxygen meter, if inerting.
5) Access to the tank must be made by careful excavation to the top of
the tank.
6) All exposed piping, gauging and tank fixtures, and other
appurtenances, except the vent, must be disconnected and removed.
7) The tank must be completely filled with an inert solid material.
8) The tank vent and remaining underground piping must be capped or
removed.
9) The tank excavation must be backfilled.
Removal and Disposal
Underground tanks must be removed in accordance with the following requirements:
1) The steps described in “Permanent Closure in Place” (1-5) must be followed.

2) All exposed piping, gauging and tank fixtures, and other appurtenances,
including the vent, must be disconnected and removed.
3) All openings must be plugged, leaving 8mm) opening to avoid build-up of
pressure in the tank.
4) The tank must be removed from the excavated site and must be secured
against movement.
5) Any corrosion holes must be plugged.
6) The tank must be labelled with its former contents, present vapour state,
vapour-freeing method, and a warning against re-use.
7) The tank must be removed from the site promptly, preferably the same day.

Page 317 of 344
Temporary Storage of Removed Tanks
If it is necessary to temporarily store a tank that has been removed, it must be

placed in a secure area where public access is restricted. An 8-mm opening
must be maintained to avoid build-up of pressure in the tank.
Disposal of Tanks
Disposal of tanks must meet the following requirements:
1) Before a tank is cut up for scrap or landfill, the atmosphere in the tank
must be tested to ensure that it is safe.
2) The tank must be made unfit for further use by cutting holes in the tank
heads and shell.
Documentation
All necessary documentation must be prepared and maintained in accordance

with all federal, state, and local rules and regulations.
Re-use of Underground Tanks
Only those used tanks that comply with the applicable sections of this
standard and are approved by the authority having jurisdiction must be
installed for flammable or combustible liquids service.
1.5.6 Leak Detection and Inventory Records for Underground Tanks
Accurate inventory records or a leak detection program must be maintained on all

Class I liquid storage tanks for indication of possible leakage from the tanks or
associated piping.
1.5.7 Tank Maintenance
Each tank must be maintained liquid tight. Each tank that is leaking must be emptied
of liquid or repaired in a manner acceptable to the supervisor having jurisdiction.
Tanks that have been structurally damaged, have been repaired or reconstructed, or
are suspected of leaking must be tested or in a manner acceptable to the supervisor
having jurisdiction.
Tanks and all tank appurtenances, including normal vents and emergency vents and
related devices, must be properly maintained to ensure that they function as
intended.
Openings for gauging on tanks storing Class I liquids must be provided with a vapour-
tight cap or cover. Such covers must be closed when not gauging.
2. PIPING SYSTEMS

Page 318 of 344
This chapter must apply to piping systems consisting of pipe, tubing, flanges, bolting,
gaskets, valves, fittings, flexible connectors, the pressure-containing parts of other
components such as expansion joints and strainers, and devices that serve such
purposes as mixing, separating, snubbing, distributing, metering, controlling flow, or
secondary containment of liquids and associated vapours.
2.1 Testing
2.1.1 Initial Testing
Unless tested in accordance with the applicable sections of ASME B31, Code for
Pressure Piping, all piping must be tested before being covered, enclosed, or placed
in use. Testing must be done hydrostatically to 150 percent of the maximum
anticipated pressure of the system or pneumatically to 110 percent of the maximum
anticipated pressure of the system, and the test pressure must be maintained for a
sufficient time to conduct a complete visual inspection of all joints and connections. In
no case must the test pressure be less than gauge pressure of 34.5 kPa measured at
the highest point of the system, and in no case must the test pressure be maintained
for less than 10 minutes.
2.1.2 Initial Testing of Secondary Containment Piping
The interstitial (annular) space of secondary containment-type piping must be tested

hydrostatically or with air pressure at gauge pressure of 34.5 kPa or must be tested in
accordance with its listing or with the manufacturer’s instructions. The pressure
source must be disconnected from the interstitial space to ensure that the test is
being conducted on a closed system. The pressure must be maintained for a
minimum of 1 hour.
2.1.3 Testing During Maintenance
Existing piping must be tested in accordance with this subsection if there is indication
that the piping is leaking. Piping that could contain a Class I, Class II, or Class IIIA
liquid or vapour must not be tested using air.
Standard G37 - Bulk flammable liquid storage facilities on surface

NFPA 704 - Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency
Response
ASME B31 - Code for Pressure Piping

Page 319 of 344
FIRE PROTECTION STANDARDS – SELF EVALUATION CHECKLISTS
SEC 1 – 65 mm HYDRANTS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
This checklist is based upon Standard G29. For more information please consult this
Standard.
65 mm HYDRANTS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

Y = YES NA = NOT APPLICABLE Y NA N U COMMENTS
For all ‘NO’ and ‘U’ answers, identify the specific areas
needing correction, and include the persons responsible
etc, in the comments column.
I. Area Hydrants
1) Are hydrants spaced on a 90 m x 90 m grid?
2) Are hydrants and all their above ground mains
colour coded red?
3) Are hydrants located at least 3 metres away from
any structure or installed equipment, so that they
can be accessed even if the fire has already taken
hold on that structure or equipment?
4) Is the relevant symbolic signage indicating the
position of each structural hydrant posted up?
5) Where the structural hydrant is obscured, is
directional signage provided to indicate its
position?
II. Structure Hydrants
1) If the building is taller than 12 m, are 65 mm
hydrants installed at a rate of one per level?
2
2) If the building has a floor area exceeding 1000 m ,
are hydrants installed at a rate of one per 1000 m2
or part thereof?
3) Are hydrants and all their exposed mains colour
coded red?
position of each structural hydrant posted up?
5) Where the structural hydrant is obscured, is
directional signage provided to indicate its
position?
III. Related Equipment
1) In close proximity to each ‘structural’ hydrant, is
there a fire hose box or cupboard provided,
containing a minimum of 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire
hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle?
2) With respect to area hydrants, is either a fire hose
box containing at least 3 x 65 mm flat lay fire
hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle provided in a fire
equipment box at each hydrant point, OR is there
ready access in a central position on site to a
cache of at least 9 x 65 mm flat lay fire hoses, and
3 x 65 mm nozzles?
3) Is the receptacle in which fire equipment is kept
colour coded red and suitably demarcated with
appropriate symbolic signage?
4) Do fire hose nozzles have 65 mm male fittings,
and an internal diameter of 16mm?
IV. General

Page 320 of 344
1) Are 65 mm hydrant points, and fire hose boxes,

cabinets, cupboards and other receptacles,
inspected monthly by persons appointed in writing
to perform this task? (There should be an up to
date inspection sticker affixed)
2) Are 65 mm hydrant points, and fire hose boxes,
cabinets, cupboards and other receptacles,
inspected annually by an accredited external
service provider? (There should be an up to date
inspection sticker affixed)
V. Additional Comments


Page 321 of 344
SEC 2 – HAND HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Standard.
HAND HELD FIRE EXTINGUISHER SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

needing correction, and include the persons responsible etc,
in the comments column.
I. General
1) Is there at least one hand held fire extinguisher per
200 m2 of floor area?
2) Where female staff or disabled persons are normally
present, are 4.5 kg extinguishers (two for every one
9 kg) provided? *Note that this concession is never
appropriate in an industrial area such as a workshop
or plant building, where 9 kg units are an absolute
requirement.
3) In areas where sensitive electronic equipment,
foodstuffs, and medicines are present, are 5 kg
hand-held CO2 fire extinguishers substituted in place
of the 9kg hand-held DCP fire extinguishers? (E.g.
server rooms, kitchens and pharmacies)
4) Are fire extinguishers mounted 1.2 metres above
ground or floor level, against a wall or other suitable
support?
position of each fire extinguisher posted up?
6) Where a fire extinguisher is in an obscured position
e.g. around a corner, is directional signage
provided?
7) Is the 1.2 metres x 1.2 metres demarcation on the
floor where fire extinguishers are mounted, kept
clear of obstructions at all times?
8) Are fire extinguishers inspected monthly by persons
appointed in writing to perform this task? (There
should be an up to date inspection sticker affixed)
9) Are extinguishers serviced by an accredited external
agency once per year? (There should be an up to
date inspection sticker affixed)
II. Additional Comments


Page 322 of 344

Page 323 of 344
SEC 3 – 25 mm FIRE HOSEREELS
Standard.
25 mm FIRE HOREREEL SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) In all buildings, are 25 mm hosereels installed at a
rate of 1 per 500 m2 of building floor area?
2) Are all fire hosereels in service inspected monthly by
a member of staff appointed in writing for that
purpose? (There should be an up to date inspection
sticker affixed)
3) Are all hosereels inspected annually by an
accredited external service provider, who, on
completion of their inspections, provides a detailed
report per hosereel, indicating any faults which may
have been found?
4) Is the prohibition of hosereels being used for any
purpose other than fire fighting enforced?
5) Are hosereels and their above ground supply lines
colour-coded red?
6) Is the 1.2 metres x 1.2 metres area demarcated on
the floor at all positions in which 25 mm fire
hosereels are mounted, kept free of obstructions at
all times, to ensure easy access to the fire hosereels
in an emergency?
position of each 25 mm fire hosereel posted up?
8) Where a hosereel is obscured (e.g. around a corner),
is directional signage provided?
9) Are all hosereels a minimum of 30 m long?


Page 324 of 344
SEC 4 – SUBSTATIONS
This checklist is based upon Standards G18, G19, G20, G21 and G33. For more information
please consult these Standards.
SUBSTATION SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Are all penetration apertures in outer walls or an
interleading wall of a substation room, irrespective of
the voltage in question, fire stopped with an inert
material?
2) Where cables are intumescent coated, has the paint
been applied for minimum distance of 1 metre on
either side of the fire stopping?
3) Where cables are intumescent coated, is such
intumescent coating applied to the entire
circumference of each cable to such thickness as is
stipulated by the manufacturer of the particular
intumescent product chosen, as being adequate to
provide an SABS rated fire resistance of at least 2
hours?
4) Are all windows closed at all times?
5) Is there at least 1 x 9 kg DCP fire extinguisher
provided per substation room?
6) Are 5 kg hand-held CO2 extinguishers deployed in
PLC rooms and control rooms, in deference to the
sensitive electronic equipment installed there which
would be damaged by chemical powder?
7) Are substations kept clear of additional equipment or
materials, particularly if flammable or combustible?
8) Is the prohibition of the substation being used as an
office upheld?
9) Are all cable trenches passing beneath substations
fire stopped wherever cables pass from one
substation room to another?
10) Where a passive detection system has been
installed, is the fire control panel on and free from
faults?
11) Is the area immediately surrounding the substation
free from combustible or flammable materials
including undergrowth?
II. Transformers
1) Are all penetration apertures in the walls fire stopped
and the cables intumescent coated for at least 1
metre on either side of the penetration?
2) Has intumescent coating been applied to the entire

Page 325 of 344
hours?
3) Is there at least one 9 kg DCP fire extinguisher per
transformer? (Maximum of four where four or more
transformers are grouped together)
4) Are fire extinguishers located between 5 and 15
metres from the transformer bank, to make them
easily accessible even after the outbreak of fire?
5) Is some means such as lockable gates provided
across the front of transformer bays to ensure that
access is not readily possible for unauthorised
persons?
6) Is the transformer bay free from additional articles of
material or equipment, particularly combustible or
flammable materials?
7) Where a transformer is installed in a building, check
that the fire control panel is on and free from any
faults?
III. Bunding
1) Where drainage is provided for bunding, is the
draincock locked in the closed position under normal
operating conditions?
2) Where a bund has been filled with aggregate, is this
aggregate free from a dust layer which would
otherwise reduce its capacity?
IV. Additional Comments


Page 326 of 344
SEC 5 – PLANT STRUCTURES
Standard.
PLANT STRUCTURES SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Is there at each hydrant point, a fire equipment box
or cupboard provided, containing no less than 3 x 65
mm flat lay fire hoses and a single 65 mm nozzle?
2) Are such cupboards coloured red and suitably
demarcated as such by means of the relevant
symbolic and informational signage?
3) Is there a minimum of one hand-held fire
extinguisher deployed per 2000 m² of floor area?
4) Is there access to a fire hydrant on all levels at a rate
of one per 1000 m² or part thereof ?
5) Are all fire extinguishers mounted at a height of 1.2
metres above the floor in easily accessible positions
and clearly demarcated with the relevant symbolic
signage?
6) Do all escape routes adhere to the ’45 minute rule’?
7) Are all escape clearly demarcated as such by means
of the relevant symbolic and directional signage,
both at the escape doors, and internally, at every
change in direction of an escape route?
8) Is the storage of combustible and flammable
materials kept to a bare minimum in all structures?
9) Are 25 mm fixed fire hosereels installed at the rate of
one per 500 m² of floor area or part thereof, on each
level?
10) Is there a means on every level for the raising of an
audible alarm in the case of fire or other emergency?
11) Is means of raising an alarm (e.g. manual call point)
distributed at a rate of one per 1000 m² of floor area
per level?
12) Where cables pass vertically from one level to
another, through a fire rated floor (e.g. reinforced
concrete), are such cable penetration aperture fire
stopped using a suitable inert material?
13) Are such cables intumescent coated for a distance of
at least 1 metre on either side of such fire stopping,
over their entire circumference?
14) Where cables pass vertically between levels through
a non-fire rated floor (e.g. Mentis-type grating), or
where cables are routed in a service shaft, is there a
2 metre high firebreak constituted on the cables as a
nd
group on every 2 level?
15) Are such cables painted with intumescent paint over
their entire circumference as is stipulated by the

Page 327 of 344
manufacturer of the particular intumescent product

chosen, as being adequate to provide an SABS
rated fire resistance of at least 2 hours?
16) Is all rubber-lined equipment in the structure
demarcated as such, to warn persons intending to
conduct hot work of the increased fire risk, so that
they may know to take additional precautions?


Page 328 of 344
SEC 6 – SURFACE VEHICLES
Standard.
SURFACE VEHICLES SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. LDVs and Trucks
1) Are all portable fire extinguishers up to date? i.e.
have they been inspected within the month.
2) Is linear wire or rupture tubing in good condition? i.e.
not damaged or disconnected.
3) Are all protective blow off caps in place?
4) Is the fixed on board suppression system up to date?
i.e. have they been inspected within the month.
II. Dozers, Wheel Loaders, Road Scrapers etc.
have they been inspected within the month.
2) Is linear wire or rupture tubing in good condition? i.e.
not damaged or disconnected.
3) Are all protective blow off caps in place?
4) Is the fixed on board suppression system up to date?
i.e. have they been inspected within the month.
III. Shovels and Drills
1) Is there a minimum of three hand-held DCP fire
extinguishers provided on each shovel or drill?
have they been inspected within the month.?
3) Where more than one plunger is provided for the
manual activation of the suppression system in
different risk areas, are the plungers clearly
demarcated so that the appropriate system may be
selectively discharged?
4) Are all suppression system fire control panels on and
free from faults?
IV. Draglines
1) Is the main electronic fire system repeater panel on
and free of any faults?
2) By visual inspection, are the passive detectors in the
left propel room in place and properly secured?
right propel room in place and properly secured?
4) By visual inspection, are the linear wire and passive
heat detectors in the lubrication room in place and
properly secured?
left MV room in place and properly secured?
right MV room in place and properly secured?
upper control room in place and properly secured?

Page 329 of 344

lower control room in place and properly secured?
9) By visual inspection, are the passive optical
detectors in the slip ring box in place and properly
secured?
10) By visual inspection, are the infrared / ultraviolet
passive detectors in the machine room in place and
properly secured?
11) By visual inspection, are the passive heat and
passive optical detectors in the compressor room in
place and properly secured?
12) By visual inspection, are the passive in – cabinet
heat probe detectors or internal linear wire in the
compressors in place and properly secured?
13) By visual inspection, are the passive heat detectors
in the diesel or petrol driven generators in place
and properly secured?
14) By visual inspection, are the linear wire detectors in
the cable void between the upper and lower
control rooms in place and properly secured?
15) By visual inspection, are the heat probe detectors in
the area between the tub and revolving frame
(centre pintle) in place and properly secured?
16) By visual inspection, are the heat probe detectors in
the shaft compartments in place and properly
secured?
17) Is there at least 2 x 30 m 38 mm flat lay fire hose and
nozzle properly connected and stowed on the left
hand side of the dragline?
18) Is there at least 2 x 30 m 38 mm flat lay fire hose and
nozzle properly connected and stowed on the right
hand side of the dragline?
19) Where a dedicated automatic foam system protects
the left propel room, are all connections in place
and the fire control panel free of any faults?
20) Where a dedicated automatic foam system protects
the right propel room, are all connections in place
and the fire control panel free of any faults?
21) Are the fixed automatic DCP and foam suppression
systems protecting the lubrication room up to date
and their fire control panels free from faults?
22) Is the fixed automatic DCP fire suppression system
protecting the compressor and / or generator
rooms up to date and its fire control panel free from
faults?
23) Are the hoses, pipes and connections at the
cylinders for the fixed automatic gaseous fire
suppression system protecting the left MV room in
place and secured?
suppression system protecting the right MV room in
place and secured?
suppression system protecting the upper and lower
rooms in place and secured?
26) Is the fixed automatic DCP fire suppression system

Page 330 of 344
protecting the centre pintle (MV rings) up to date

and its fire control panel free from faults?
27) Are all connections for the dedicated automatic foam
system which protects the swing shaft
compartments, in place and the fire control panel
free of any faults?
28) Is the nitrogen (or other inert gas) cylinder serving
the foam concentrate tank on the left secured and all
connections properly connected?
29) Is the nitrogen (or other inert gas) cylinder serving
the foam concentrate tank on the right secured and
all connections properly connected?
30) Are all doors and windows in rooms protected by
gaseous total flooding systems kept closed?
31) Are all suppression system manual activation
buttons clearly demarcated to indicate which zone
they serve?
32) Are all portable fire extinguishers mounted at a
bracket height of 1.2 metres above floor elevation?
33) Are all portable fire extinguishers provided with the
relevant symbolic signage?
V. Additional Comments


Page 331 of 344
SEC 7 – HYDRAULIC LUBRICATION AND POWER PACKS
This checklist is based upon Standards G32 and G33. For more information please consult
these Standards.
HYDRAULIC LUBRICATION AND POWER PACKS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Where an automatically activated high velocity water
deluge fire suppression system is installed, is there
proof that the system has been flushed in a period
not exceeding 1 month?
2) Where the hydraulic packs are not contained in a fire
rated compartment, is the minimum requirement that
they should be positioned at least 5 metres
horizontally from any other equipment or stored
material, so as not to affect these if a fire should
break out on the packs observed?
II. Bunding
1) Are the hydraulic power or lubrication packs
adequately bunded? (Bunding or drip trays are not
required on heavy machinery e.g. stackers.)
2) Where drainage is provided for bunding, is the
draincock locked in the closed position under normal
operating conditions?
3) Where a bund has been filled with aggregate, is this
aggregate free from a dust layer which would
otherwise reduce its capacity?
4) Is the bund’s capacity uncompromised by the
existence of unnecessary rubbish and equipment?
5) Is the bund kept clean so as to remove all
combustible material?
III. Additional Comments


Page 332 of 344
SEC 8 – UNDERGROUND CONVEYORS
This checklist is based upon Standard U5. For more information please consult this
Standard.
UNDERGROUND CONVEYORS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Are hydrants spaced at intervals not exceeding 90 m
in all new workings?
2) Are hose boxes provided at intervals not exceeding
200 m?
3) Are all hose boxes fully stocked?
4) Can the contents of all hose boxes be accessed by
any person discovering a fire underground? i.e. are
they secured but not locked.
5) Are 9 kg hand held DCP fire extinguishers provided
at every conveyor drive?
6) Where environmental monitoring systems have been
installed, are they properly secured and free from
obstruction?


Page 333 of 344
SEC 9 – UNDERGROUND SUBSTATIONS
This checklist is based upon Standards U8, U9 and U10. For more information please
consult these Standards.
UNDERGROUND SUBSTATIONS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Where installed, are environmental monitoring
system beacons properly secured and free from
obstruction?
2) Are all electrical cables suspended at least 300 mm
from any combustible materials or equipment?
3) Is the substation room kept free of additional material
or equipment, especially flammable or combustible
materials?
4) Are all penetration apertures in outer walls or an
interleading wall of a substation room, irrespective of
the voltage in question, fire stopped with an inert
material?
5) Where cables are intumescent coated, has the paint
been applied for a minimum distance of 1 metre on
either side of such fire stopping?
hours?
7) Is there at least 1 x 9 kg DCP fire extinguisher
provided per substation room?
8) Are 5 kg hand-held CO2 extinguishers deployed in
PLC rooms and control rooms, in deference to the
sensitive electronic equipment installed there which
would be damaged by chemical powder?
9) Are all MV substations kept locked to prevent
unauthorised access?
10) Are all cable trenches passing beneath substations
fire stopped wherever cables pass from one
substation room to another?
11) Where a passive detection system has been
installed, is the fire control panel on and free from
faults?
II. Sectional Electrical Equipment
1) Are all temporary suspension cables adequate to
ensure that the risk of cables being damaged by
mining vehicles and resulting in an unwanted ignition
source, is minimised?
2) Is there ready access to two caches of 6 x 9 kg
hand-held DCP fire extinguishers in the section?

Page 334 of 344
3) Are the fire extinguishers mounted 1.2 metres above

ground or floor level, against a wall or other suitable
support?
position of each fire extinguisher posted up?
5) Where the fire extinguishers are in an obscured
position e.g. around a corner, is directional signage
provided?
6) Is lock out provision provided on all electrical
switches and sockets on the mobile switch bank?
7) Is electrical equipment effectively earthed before
being put into service?
8) Are chains or similar barriers erected around the
position in which the transformers and switchgear
are located?
III. Mobile Underground Electrical Installations
1) Are mobile electrical installations underground
located in roadways where the risk of vehicular
impact is minimised?
2) Is the electrical equipment effectively earthed?
3) Are at least 2 x 9 kg hand-held DCP fire
extinguishers provided at every mobile electrical
installation underground? (Where there is access
from two sides to such installation, a fire extinguisher
should be placed on each side)
4) Are MV and LT panels kept locked at all times, or
otherwise secured?
IV. Additional Comments


Page 335 of 344
SEC 10 – OVERLAND CONVEYORS
Standard.
OVERLAND CONVEYORS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Is combustible material kept clear of 4 metres of
either side of the overland conveyor? (This includes
undergrowth)
2) Are 9 kg DCP fire extinguishers provided in easily
accessible positions at every drive and at every head
or tail pulley?
3) On at least one side of the overland conveyor path,
is a road provided and maintained in an acceptable
state of repair, to allow access by heavy vehicles so
that fire fighting on the conveyor path using mobile
fire appliances and / or water bowsers is possible?
4) Is particular care taken to avoid any accumulation of
spillage under the belt?
5) Where red stripe (flame retardant) electrical cables
are not in use, are electrical cables intumescent
coated for 4 m every 50 m?
hours?


Page 336 of 344
SEC 11 – ELEVATED & PLANT CONVEYORS
This checklist is based upon Standards G42 and G44. For more information please consult
these Standards.
ELEVATED & PLANT CONVEYORS SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Where the conveyor is protected by 65 mm hydrants
at 90 m intervals, is the provided hose box at each
hydrant stocked with 3 x 65 m flat lay hoses and 1 x
65 mm fire fighting nozzle?
2) Are 9 kg DCP fire extinguishers provided in easily
accessible positions at every electric motor, head
and tail pulley associated with the elevated or plant
conveyor structure?
3) Where the conveyor tips into a silo irrespective of
whether the conveyor is protected by sprinklers, 65
mm hydrants or 25 mm hosereels, is there within 10
to 15 m of the silo, a 65 mm hydrant along with a
hose box stocked with at least 2 x 65 mm flat lay
hoses and 1 x 65 mm fire fighting nozzle?
4) Are all idlers non rubber lined?
5) Are all drives and return pulleys lagged with ceramic
or other non rubber material?
6) Is all electrical cables running along conveyor belt
paths secured a minimum of 500 mm from the actual
belt?
7) Are all electrical cables used of the red stripe flame
retardant type?


Page 337 of 344
SEC 12 – BATTERY CHARGING BAYS LOCATED UNDERGROUND
This checklist is based upon Standard U12. For more information please consult this
Standard.
BATTERY CHARGING BAYS LOCATED UNDERGROUND SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST

I. General
1) Are all battery charging bays located in through
ventilation in the underground workings?
2) Are all battery charging bays located outside the 180
metre flameproof zone maintained around all
working sections?
3) Is there a clearly worded procedure posted up,
detailing the steps to be taken during battery
charging?
4) Are all relevant Material Safety Data Sheets posted
up in a conspicuous position?
5) Are there detector heads, reporting to a constantly
monitored control room on surface, provided in
positions indicated by the VOHE Department, to
monitor for air velocity and smoke on the intake
side?
6) Are battery chargers positioned out of the roadway,
to limit the potential for vehicle impact which could
result in fire?
7) Is the battery charging bay ventilated so that the
intake air entering the battery bay is vented to the
return airway and is not permitted to continue as
intake air to a working place?
8) Are there no flammable or combustible materials not
directly associated with the battery charging process
stored within the battery charging bay?


Anglo American Fire Protection Manual-2010 Issue 0

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Anglo American Fire Protection Manual-2010 Issue 0

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Anglo American Fire Protection Manual †

Standards for Surface and Underground Mines, Plants and

GENERAL STANDARDS APPLICABLE TO ALL OPERATIONS